Author: Rob Parker

Recording of teaching

Routine recording

The routine recording of teaching is something which the university allows if a department or programme wishes to do this, but with the recognition that whether teaching “can be routinely recorded depends on a number of factors, including the type of session it is.” In the case of the Lancaster DClinPsy there is a range of sensitive teaching content and small group discussion for which no online synchronous or asynchronous alternative is available, meaning that in most cases viewing of a recording of teaching provides much diminished (if any) learning compared to attending the session.

However, we also know that some trainees value access to recordings of teaching when these can be made available. Based on programme staff’s academic and clinical judgement, teaching sessions where it is appropriate are routinely video recorded by the programme using the MS Teams system.

Trainees with learning support needs

We recognise that some trainees may have an ILSP statement suggesting that the recording of teaching they are attending will be of benefit for them. Trainees in this position are permitted to individually audio record the didactic portion only of any teaching which the programme is not due to routinely record (i.e. not any group discussions or other exercises due to the aforementioned sensitive nature of these). Audio recording devices are available to loan from the programme for this purpose. It is the individual trainee’s responsibility to make their recording and to ensure that only the didactic sections of teaching are recorded (they should not ask teachers to do this). These recordings are for the trainee’s personal use only, and there may still be sessions where due to the sensitive nature of personal information or for copyright reasons recording will not be permitted. In such cases trainees will be informed of this.

Submission deadlines

2023 cohort

Full time route

17th November 2023 SAE 1 report
4th-15th December 2023 SAE 1 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
19th January 2024 SAE 2/PWC
1st-16th February 2024 SAE 2 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
19th April 2024 TPA (TBC)
21st June 2024 PALS 1
19th July 2024 Thesis Proposal
20th September 2024 PALS 2
17th January 2025 Project Block Portfolio/SIPP
15th August 2025 PASE
17th October 2025 PALS 3
20thth March 2026 Thesis

Part time route

19th January 2024 SAE 1 report
1st – 16th February 2024 SAE 1 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
19th April 2024 SAE 2/PWC
1st-17th May 2024 SAE 2 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
20th Sept 2024 PALS 1
17th January 2025 PALS 2
18th July 2025 Project Block Portfolio/SIPP
15th August 2025 TPA
19th September 2025 Thesis Proposal
19th June 2026 PASE
16th October 2026 PALS 3
15th July 2027 Thesis
2022 cohort

Full time route

18th November 2022 SAE 1 report
1st-9th December 2022 SAE 1 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
20th January 2023 SAE 2/PWC
1st-15th February 2023 SAE 2 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
21st April 2023 TPA
16th June 2023 PALS 1
14th July 2023 Thesis Proposal
15th September 2023 PALS 2
19th January 2024 Project Block Portfolio/SIPP
16th August 2024 PASE
18th October 2024 PALS 3
21stMarch 2025 Thesis

Part time route

18th November 2022 SAE 1 report
1st – 9th December 2022 SAE 1 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
20th January 2023 SAE 2/PWC
1st-15th February 2023 SAE 2 Viva – Vivas are arranged on an individual basis during this time and trainees are notified directly
15th Sept 2023 PALS 1
19th January 2024 PALS 2
19th July 2024 Project Block Portfolio/SIPP
16th August 2024 TPA
20th September 2024 Thesis Proposal
20th June 2025 PASE
17th October 2025 PALS 3
17th July 2026 Thesis
2021 cohort

Part time route

21st June 2024 PASE
18th October 2024 PALS 3
18th July 2025 Thesis
Generic deadlines tables

Deadlines normally fall on the third Friday of the month

Month SAE TPA PALS PASE SIPP Out of sync subs
Sept Thesis Proposal PT PALS 2 – FT

PALS 1 – PT

x
Oct PALS 3 – FT

PALS 3 – PT

x
Nov SAE 1 report – FT
Dec SAE 1 Viva – individually set up – FT
Jan SAE 2 FT /PWC

SAE 1 report – PT

PALS 2 – PT Project block portfolio FT x
Feb SAE 2 Viva – individually set up

SAE 1 Viva – PT

Mar Thesis – FT (2nd Fri)
Apr SAE 2/PWC PT TPA – FT (tbc) x
May SAE 2 Viva PT
June PALS 1 – FT PASE – PT x
July Thesis (2nd Fri) -PT

 

Thesis proposal FT

Project block portfolio PT
Aug TPA – PT PASE – FT

 

x

Out of sync submission = any assignment but only on submission points with an ‘x’

Submission points -chronological

Month & Year Full time Part time
Year 1
Nov SAE 1 report
Dec SAE 1 Viva
Jan SAE 2/PWC SAE 1 report
Feb SAE 2 Viva SAE 1 Viva
Mar
April TPA (tbc) SAE 2/PWC
May SAE 2 Viva
June PALS 1
July Thesis Proposal
Aug
Year 2    
Sept PALS 2 PALS 1
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan Project Block Portfolio/SIPP PALS 2
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
June
Jul Project Block Portfolio/SIPP
Aug PASE TPA
Year 3    
Sept Thesis Proposal
Oct PALS 3
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar Thesis (2nd Fri)
Apr
May
June PASE
Jul
Aug
Year 4    
Sept
Oct PALS 3
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
June
Jul Thesis (2nd Fri)
Aug
Year 5 Complete in Dec – no more deadlines

Prayer facilities and the Chaplaincy Centre

The Chaplaincy Centre is a space on main campus for people of all faiths and none. Prayer rooms are also available across campus. There is a keypad for access to the prayer rooms on main campus. Please ask a member of staff on the Clinical Psychology programme for the code to access both the men’s and the women’s side. The prayer rooms in HI one are A40 and A41.

Recording competencies in the ePortfolio (OneFile)

As part of the programme’s accreditation, the BPS require us to have a clear system of recording competencies within their Standards for the accreditation of Doctoral programmes in clinical psychology. We provide this in electronic form via the OneFile system.

We expect that trainees make use of the ePortfolio throughout training, and this is why it has been incorporated into the Individual Training Plan (ITP) document.  We provide a teaching session on use of the ePortfolio early in training, the slides and recording of which are subsequently available on Moodle for those in need of a refresher.  A guide for both trainees and supervisors on the use of the system are also available in the documents section of each trainees OneFile account. The SAT and PALOG will remain as independent assessment tools, whilst the ePortfolio is a recording tool (i.e. we do not comment on the quality of achievement of competencies within the ePortfolio, but this is done within the SAT and PALOG, which is underpinned by other requirements of the BPS and the HCPC).

Where the ePortfolio is not being completed by a trainee, this will be noted in the ITP, and will be regarded as an issue of professional behaviour. The task has been set out as a responsibility of  trainees, and as with any other task, if not completed we will clarify the barriers to this, and support trainees in finding ways to ensure they can do so.

Supervisor’s guide to the ePortfolio
ePortfolio competencies

Trainee disclosure of mental health and psychological difficulties

Programme ethos

The Lancaster DClinPsy programme recognises that all trainee clinical psychologists are human beings, who have potential to experience mental health difficulties or psychological distress during training. People also may have experienced such difficulties prior to training, and may be accessing mental health services or have accessed services in the past. Experiences of mental health difficulty and psychological distress may include low mood and ‘depression’, ‘anxiety’, voice hearing, extreme stress, and others.

It is recognised that training to be a clinical psychologist can be challenging and trainees may experience adverse life events in their personal lives that impact their well-being during the course of training. On placement, the supervisory role involves exploration of how a trainee feels in relation to their work and support with managing this. Trainees’ ability to identify when their well-being is negatively impacted is an important skill, and trainees are encouraged to talk with their tutor pair and placement supervisor, and access support as needed (see section on Support in the programme handbook). When necessary, trainees can be referred to access support from Occupational Health within their employing Trust, Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust (LSCFT). Trainees might also need to take leave for reasons relating to stress or mental health difficulty (see section on Absence from work in the programme handbook).

Although experiences of mental health difficulties can be difficult and distressing, the insights they provide can be valuable to clinical psychology trainees. Such experiences may help equip trainees to work with individuals experiencing mental health difficulties, to understand what it is like for others to access mental health services, and to understand how mental health difficulties are seen within a cultural context.

The programme welcomes trainees sharing current or previous experiences of mental health difficulty at relevant times during training, such as during Selections interviews, teaching, placement supervision, or in discussion with the tutor pair. It is recognised that disclosing such experiences can be difficult, particularly for those who have had experiences of being stigmatised or ‘othered’ because of their experiences. The programme aims to promote a culture whereby these disclosures and contributions are valued and normalised. Trainees’ disclosure of mental health difficulties or use of services will not be assessed negatively, and should not be conceptualised negatively by others who contribute to the programme, including other trainees, staff, external teachers, and placement supervisors. In the event that a trainee feels their experiences of mental health difficulty are being seen negatively, it is encouraged this is fed back to the programme through the appropriate channels. For example, if this takes place during teaching the trainee could feed this back through the teaching feedback form, a member of programme staff with responsibilities associated with the teaching day, or to their clinical tutor.

Confidentiality

When a trainee discloses current or previous personal experience of mental health difficulty or access to mental health services during training, this would usually be kept confidential between the trainee and the person or people with whom they have shared this information. When the person who is being informed thinks there is a need for this to be shared, they should discuss with the trainee in the first instance. The trainee’s preference for what they do and do not give permission to be shared should be respected, and followed wherever possible. There are occasions when it might be necessary for the person who has been informed to encourage the trainee to share this information with an appropriate person, particularly if they are concerned about the trainee’s current well-being. For example, if a trainee’s ‘buddy’ is told that the trainee is struggling with difficulties such as stress and anxiety, the buddy might encourage the trainee to speak to their clinical tutor about this. If the trainee does not want to share the difficulties with anyone else, the person who has been informed should be sensitive to the possibility that their own perspective on the issues might be impacted by societal biases e.g. internalised racial biases. They should consider that the person themselves is often the best judge of what they need. However, there may be occasions in which the person informed has a professional responsibility to share some of this information. For example, a placement supervisor who is concerned about a trainee’s well-being and the impact of this on their placement work might need to share their concerns with the trainee’s clinical tutor. In such an event, the psychological contract set up between the trainee and supervisor should be referred to for how best to go about this in a collaborative and sensitive way. The trainee should be offered support from the clinical tutor and placement supervisor, and next steps should be considered collaboratively. The trainee’s clinical tutor may also share information with the clinical director as needed. This is because the clinical director is line manager to all trainees and clinical tutors.

Trainees should be aware that due to nature of the profession they are training in, it is possible that they will meet someone through their training who they have seen before in a personal capacity. For example, a clinical psychologist who has offered them psychological therapy might teach on the programme. In such an event, the clinical psychologist is bound to follow HCPC guidelines with regard to the confidentiality of service-users, and any contract/agreement surrounding confidentiality between the trainee and the other individual should apply.

North West Reflection Project

NOTE: This project was previously know as Community Engagement Project for 2021 and 2022 cohorts

Overview

At the start of their first year of training, each trainee will be allocated an area of the North West to engage with. Although the location of the trainee’s living base will be considered, the decision of which community to assign will be based on other factors too. These factors include but are not limited to, ensuring rural and urban areas are visited and ensuring not all the work is done in the main living bases of Manchester, Liverpool, and Lancaster. Trainees will be able to give 1st, 2nd, and 3rd order preferences of which areas they might want to go to.

During the induction period (October- December) trainees, in groups of 6 or 7, will be asked to spend time getting to know their assigned area. This will entail researching the area for example using the internet, local libraries, local historians and/or local members of the communities. It will also mean just spending time in the community:  sit in cafes, walk around the town/city. Who do you see? What do you notice?

It may also entail visiting third sector organisations, including faith groups, schools, foodbanks, charities, across the community. Trainees will not engage in any psychological therapy, or any work that could be defined as within a Clinical Psychologists therapeutic job role.

Trainee may choose, to focus on a particular group in an area. For example, they may think about the local history and culture and how these influences different genders in the community, or how it influences a certain religious group, race, or age group. Others may choose to think about how history and culture influences more generally.

Trainees may choose to work outside their usual working hours (9am- 5pm) but will not be expected to, nor will they expected to work more than 7.5 hours on a day.

Aims

  • For trainees to research, witness, observe, experience an area of the Northwest.
  • For trainees to reflect on how the local history and culture(s) influence modern day lives.
  • For trainees to experience reaching out to local community members, and the importance of connections with people and services beyond NHS
  • For trainees to spend time with members of their cohort in a more informal and less structured way to better relationships between members of the cohort.

Reflective Group

The group of trainees will meet with their clinical tutor for 90 minutes fortnightly. This will be a chance to check in about how the work is going, reflect on experiences and ask any questions. Due to working patterns of staff, this may be on the designated community engagement day, or it may be on a study day (for both FT and PT trainees) the week of the community engagement.

Some ideas that the group may wish to think about:

  • How do they want to split up to visit different places/organisations?
  • What happens if they cannot visit in person (Teams/ phone calls/ online research)
  • What communities are we all from? How does project relate to us, and the communities we come from? Use the wheel of oppression to facilitate this conversation. Tutors to get involved with the conversation too.
  • Explicit about light tough, not evaluated, just have conversations!

Output

Trainees will be asked to keep an individual reflective diary that documents their experiences with the organisations. They may be asked to refer to this in supervision sessions.

Trainee will also display what they have found at a Community Reflection Day. Trainees will be encouraged to be creative in how they display their findings. This will not be presentation via PowerPoint or delivering a presentation of any kind. Each group will just be given an area to display ideas, and the cohort will spend time circulating around the different groups.

Trainees will also be asked to develop a directory of the services they have visited which they will be expected to share with local NHS and applicable non-NHS services they have identified as benefiting from the directory.

Community Reflection Day

There will be a community reflection day where the trainees will present their ‘findings’ to the rest of the cohort. This will be in the format of a poster, or other creative way that the group thinks captures their experience. The day will also include reflective exercises, facilitated by course staff.

Parental leave trainee checklist

This checklist will be relevant to trainees who are expecting to become a parent. It includes those planning to take maternity, paternity, shared parental, and adoption leave. Please note that not all bullet points are relevant to every situation. The term ‘parental leave’ is used in places to include all types of leave for this purpose.

When you find out you are expecting a child

  • Read the LSCFT Maternity, Paternity and Adoption Policy and Procedure document. This provides additional essential information. The document can be found in the Handbook here
  • Fill in LSCFT pregnancy risk assessment form with your clinical tutor as soon as you inform your tutor you are pregnant. This needs to be completed monthly.
  • Check all Trust specific policies and Covid policies for how pregnancy impacts work e.g. whether it impacts going into placement in person.
  • Ensure you are familiar with the policy for taking sick leave, and agree with your clinical tutor and placement supervisor who you should inform of pregnancy related medical appointments, or official meetings concerning adoption.
  • If taking adoption leave, you need to complete an application form and provide written confirmation to your employer within 7 days of finding out about the match for adoption from the agency. See Section 8 of the policy.

Early on after finding out you are expecting a child

  • Consider the policies around maternity, paternity, shared parental, and adoption leave (as relevant) and begin to think about what type of leave you might want to take, how much, and when you want this to start.
  • Paternity leave needs to be applied for at least 28 days prior to commencement of leave, by completing the application form, and submitting it, along with a completed SC3 form (available on gov.uk).
  • Shared parental leave needs to be applied for at least 8 weeks prior to the start date. See section 6 of the policy for details of information that need to be provided to the Trust.

No later than the end of the 15th week before the expected week of childbirth

  • Obtain a completed Mat B1 form from a midwife or doctor before this date.
  • Complete the Application for Maternity Leave with your clinical tutor and/or the clinical director. This application form is available on E-HR Infopoint via the Trust Intranet. The information filled in is not binding at this stage. Scan the completed Mat B1 form and send these two documents to your clinical tutor and Ruby Mitchell.
  • Decide which date you are intercalating from and apply to intercalate from being a student for the period of mat leave (but not annual leave) via Jen Whitfield.
  • Discuss Keeping in Touch (KIT days) or Shared Parental Leave in Touch (SPLIT days) with your clinical tutor. Trainees can take up to 10 KIT days while on maternity or adoption leave, and up to 20 SPLIT days while on Shared Parental Leave. These days can be taken back in annual leave. Inform Kate Swift if you intend to take any KIT or SPLIT days.
  • Think with your clinical tutor about how you would like to use the annual leave you accrue. There is some flexibility and it can be carried over to the following year.

Shortly before commencing parental leave

  • Consider whether you might like to be connected with the ‘part time/bespoke’ cohort and discuss this with your clinical tutor or ask the part-time cohort tutor, Emma Munks.
  • Let Christina Pedder know whether you would like to stay on your cohort’s email distribution list while you are on leave or whether you would like to be removed from it.
  • Consider with your clinical tutor whether you would like to return to the programme on a full-time or part-time (usually 0.7) contract.
  • If you are awaiting assignment results, let your clinical tutor know whether you would like to receive these while on parental leave or when you return.

While on parental leave

  • If arrangements need to be put in place for your placement when you return to training, arrange a meeting with your clinical tutor or the placement co-ordinator to discuss this several months before the placement is due to start.
  • Meet with your clinical tutor a few weeks before you return to training to discuss arrangements for coming back. If you are breastfeeding, this might include thinking about facilities for expressing e.g. a room and a fridge at the university and placement and agreeing a plan for sorting this out.
  • Arrange an ITP for when you return to training to review training plan and re-set deadlines.
  • Let Christina know your return date and which email distribution list (if any) you want to be added to.
  • Think through any other issues that need to be considered prior to your return e.g. which teaching days you will be attending, if any, and discuss with your clinical tutor.
  • Prior to returning, or just after returning to work, discuss with your tutors any key changes that have occurred on the programme that you need to be aware of to ease your transition back to work.

Parental leave planning for Clinical Tutors

  • Read LSCFT ‘Maternity, Paternity & Adoption Policy and Procedure’ Trainees can locate the current version on LSCFT intranet and share with tutor. It is also in the handbook.
  • Fill in LSCFT pregnancy risk assessment form with trainee as soon as they disclose (located on intranet, and appended to this document). Can have 2 forms.  One for placement, one for everything else.  Or different sections of the same form.   For first risk assessment it is good to meet trainee with supervisor to complete factors related to placement.  Then just meet trainee alone monthly to review risk after that, unless placement issues are salient.
  • Send all LSCFT pregnancy risk assessment forms to Katherine to then forward to LSCFT.
  • At 20 weeks the trainee gets a MatB1 form from midwife to prove they are pregnant. They scan this and send a copy to Ruby who sends it to LSCFT. Ask to be copied in.
  • Time off for any pregnancy related medical appointments is given.
  • Time off is also given for adoption leave and meetings, training & approval panels prior to being matched for adoption. Flexibility is needed due to the nature of the process. See Section 8 of the policy.
  • Trainee applies to intercalate from being a student for the period of mat leave via Jen Whitfield. Jen sends the clinical tutor the form to sign and we send it back to her.
  • Keeping In Touch (KIT) and Shared Parental Leave in Touch (SPLIT) days:
    • KIT days (up to 10 if taking maternity or adoption leave) are expressed in hours so days can be divided up.
    • Trainees can take up to 20 SPLIT days if they or their partner are taking Shared Parental Leave.
    • KIT and SPLIT days are taken when trainee wishes but course needs to know in advance (trainee tells Kate/Annual Leave admin).
    • Trainees get extra annual leave if they work a KIT or SPLIT day, to take whenever they want in the year they return.
    • They can take as few KIT or SPLIT days as they want.
    • As trainees are employees, and not students, on KIT or SPLIT days they can’t do university type work as they wouldn’t be insured e.g. thesis data collection or thesis supervision.
    • Trainees keep their access to university emails and library facilities whilst intercalated.
    • KIT/SPLIT time is used for catch up meetings with tutors (and/or Anna Daiches) whilst off. Also, speak to Emma and Jo A re placements, for meeting with the new cohort or attending cross-cohort days, or catching up with programme developments.
  • Trainee completes an Application for Maternity Leave with you and/or the clinical director before 25 weeks of pregnancy. This application form is available on E-HR Infopoint via the Trust Intranet. It states any intentions re length of maternity leave. Nothing, however, is binding at this stage.
  • AL is accrued during maternity & adoption leave. AL can be carried over to next year if not taken, but not the following year.  Usually added to maternity leave, so the maternity leave ends earlier than a year but time is extended by AL so the paid period of leave is longer. Tutor to email ‘NHS annual leave’ about annual leave plans, and also date of return to work and wte.
  • On Appendix 1 form it asks if trainee would like their pay to be evened out across all days of maternity leave so that the time when statutory maternity pay kicks in is factored into all pay packets. Then the trainee gets the same pay throughout their absence.
  • Trainee may only get statutory maternity pay if pregnant within first 26 weeks of training and with no prior NHS experience. Length of service determines maternity pay – Section 5 of the policy explains this in detail.  Prior NHS employment counts as continuous employment for this purpose.
  • Ask trainee if they plan to divide maternity leave entitlement with partner so it’s ‘parental leave’. Can be taken in blocks with gaps, for example. See Section 6.2 of the policy for more information.
  • Shared parental leave requires consultation with partner’s employer. Partner does that part.  Might be a financially good idea if partner is entitled to occupational parental leave pay where the trainee is recently appointed and would only get statutory maternity leave pay, which is much lower.  Partners can take the leave at the same time as each other.
  • Should trainees wish to return part time this will be considered in relation to the flexible working policy, and agreed via line manager. Currently the typical part time working pattern is 0.7 wte, unless there are extenuating circumstances.
  • If trainee is coming back 0.7wte, it might be a good idea to connect trainees with ‘part time’ cohort before maternity leave as lots of people in that cohort have tackled similar decision-making processes already. Emma is that cohort’s tutor so email her.
  • Trainee can choose to stay on their cohort’s email distribution list to see what they are up to during maternity leave. They can also choose not to be.  Christina manages the lists, trainee to contact her.
  • If trainee taking a year off, meet up with them after 6 months in case arrangements for return need to start behind the scenes e.g. placements. Put a date in the diary before mat leave commences. Check which communication method trainees prefer e.g. personal email.
  • Meet trainee a few weeks before they resume work to firm up arrangements and welcome back.
  • ITP on return to work to re-set deadlines. Update trainee on any developments on the programme whilst away.
  • Let all relevant staff know the trainee’s plans so e.g. small group sessions can include them and assessment co-coordinators are aware. Also let Christina know so trainee can be included in invites to teaching.
  • If assignments have been submitted prior to taking maternity leave ask if they would like to receive outcome while on maternity leave. Email Emma and Claire A to notify them.

LSCFT risk management form for expectant mothers

Clinical Psychology Engagement Team Development and Implementation Group (CPET DIG)

There are a number of limitations in the way the clinical psychology profession has traditionally operated:

  • Services often have a focus on individuals’ mental health needs
  • Community engagement work is often short-term and not sustained
  • There are effective ways to reduce inequality and improve wellbeing that clinical psychology does not often use
  • Certain parts of the population are not well served by clinical psychology and find services hard to access
  • Clinical psychologists are rarely visible in the communities in which they work
  • Clinical psychology is not as visible or accessible to society as other professions, e.g. in terms of engaging with the media and politics

Clinical psychology training courses have traditionally also reflected these limitations, e.g.

  • placements are mostly focused on ‘downstream’ interventions and lack a preventative focus
  • placements do not always have a direct link into the communities they serve
  • placements often do not provide opportunities for trainees to work with groups or individuals whose needs aren’t met by typical NHS services, e.g. marginalised or ‘hard-to-reach’ populations.

The NHS Long Term Plan commits to both improving and widening access to mental health care for our population. This is accompanied by a significant planned increase in the number of DClinPsy training places nationally. This presents an opportunity to consider how the above limitations could be reduced as part of a review of the organisation of placements on the Lancaster DClinPsy programme, and how the additional trainee capacity can be best used.

The Clinical Psychology Engagement Team Development and Implementation Group (CPET DIG) has been established to discuss these issues and challenges, with the aims of increasing community engagement activities within the programme and monitoring progress of current engagement workstreams that are taking place.

The intended outcomes of the group include increasing the number of placements for trainees, and widening placement opportunities to involve more preventative and community-focused work, as well as bringing a clearer preventative and community psychology ethos to the programme in general.

We hope that having opportunities to engage in community/preventative placement work becomes the norm for all trainees.  Ultimately, we hope that this will result in both shaping the experience and skill sets of future clinical psychologists, and psychological thinking brought into services and communities that do not have it at present.

Membership

The CPET DIG is comprised of the following:

  • Members of the DClinPsy programme staff
  • LUPIN members
  • Trainee representatives

The terms of reference for the group, as well as membership and meeting frequency are currently under review, with the aim of re-establishing the group in the autumn of 2023.

CPET Terms of Reference (past)
DClinPsy structures

Anti-Racism Accountability Group (ARAG)

The Anti- Racism Accountability Group (ARAG) was set up in 2020 in  response to the ongoing systemic racism within our course, the profession, and wider society. We wanted to ensure that on the DClinPsy there is a group that is embedded in the course’s process and structure that can hold the course to account on its anti-racist practice.

The ARAG sits above the Development and Implementation Groups (DIGs) and guides and holds them accountable to anti- racist practice.  The Terms of Reference for the group can be found below.  The ARAG currently consists of (white) staff, and service users and trainees who identify as experiencing racism. The membership of the ARAG is something that we have ongoing, careful conversations about with current members, and we are currently developing a proposal for white trainees to join ARAG.  Whilst it is not the responsibility of the trainees and service users who experience racism on the course to hold the course to account, there is also a current safety in the group that may be lost with the addition of white members. The staff team members are all white, and take the responsibility of actioning any items that are raised.

The ARAG meets once a month and its overall aims are:

  • To explore, assess, collate and report systemic racist practice on the Lancaster DClinPsy programme
  • To guide the Development & Implementation Groups (DIGs) regarding anti-racist practice
  • To hold the DIGs to account for their actions regarding anti-racist practice
  • Where appropriate, to address incidences and offer case by case solutions
  • Where appropriate, to develop policies on anti-racist practice
  • To provide an annual report on ARAG activity.

In conjunction with the ARAG, there is a peer-led reflective practice space for trainees from the global majority who experience racism. This group meets once every month for about an hour.

ARAG Terms of Reference

Placement seeking procedure for fifth/specialist placement (2020 cohort and earlier only)

Below is an outline of the procedure for arranging fifth/specialist placements adopted by the Lancaster DClinPsy, which is closely coordinated with the procedure undertaken by the Liverpool and Manchester programmes.

Time Plan:

October of Second Year (FT trainees)

October of third year (PT trainees)

Trainees are introduced to the procedure for planning final year placements, some of the options available, and relevant points to consider. This is done via a meeting, teaching session or final year placement ‘Roadshow’.
October of Second year (FT trainees)

October of third year (PT trainees)

Trainees are sent a fifth/specialist Placement questionnaire, to prompt them to think about relevant issues in choosing a final year placement. They are asked to make an appointment with their clinical tutor to discuss their personal learning needs, any outstanding competencies to be addressed, their preferences, and possible people to contact to explore placement opportunities further. They will be pointed towards the Register for final year placements held by the course.
October – December of Second Year (FT trainees)

Oct-Dec of third year (PT trainees)

Trainees meet with clinical tutors, and a process of information gathering takes place – led by the trainee, supported where necessary by the clinical tutor.
December of Second Year (FT trainees)

Dec of third year (PT trainees)

Trainees submit an Action Plan to the tutor coordinating final year placements, which has been developed in collaboration with their clinical tutor. The ‘Action Plan’ consists of a list of supervisors/services that they may wish to contact to gather information about placements.
December of Second Year (FT trainees) Dec of third year (PT trainees) The Tutor coordinating final year placements reviews all submitted ‘Action Plans’, to coordinate overlaps between trainees (and avoid supervisors being contacted several times). The tutor will give approval to each trainee individually, to pursue their Action Plan. Where several trainees are interested in speaking to a certain supervisor, the tutor may arrange or suggest a joint meeting between the trainees involved and the supervisor, to avoid repetition for the supervisor.
December – February of second year (FT trainees) of third year (PT trainees) Trainees contact supervisors and services, to discuss opportunities for final year placements. All these enquiries are tentative. They are asked to regularly update the -final year placement tutor of their conversations (e.g. weekly by email), in order that any necessary changes to the action plan can be made, or new directions added, and to monitor how the system is working. In February, they submit a preference form, detailing the options which they wish to pursue, that is – which placements they would like to take up (where possible), and how they would like to use their study days. It is important to give as much information as possible at this point about preferences, as it is not possible to match all trainees with their named preferred supervisor – any information about desired experience, model, or any other factor should be made clear to the final year placement tutor.
February – May of second year (FT trainees) of third year (PT trainees) Tutors meet with counterparts from Liverpool and Manchester programmes, to review the preferences/learning needs of all trainees across the region. Supervisors are contacted to obtain firmer offers of placements. Overlap and limitations in capacity are managed and collaboratively solved/alternatives suggested. Tutors contact trainees where necessary during this process, to discuss alternative options or preferences, and further information gathering and discussion may be necessary.
May – June of second year (FT trainees) of third year (PT trainees) Supervisors and trainees are contacted, to confirm allocation of placements. After this, trainees make contact with supervisors, to arrange a meeting in the next few weeks around placement planning. Some undertake mandatory training/DBS checks ahead of placements.
Mid July of second year (FT trainees) of third year (PT trainees) Supervisors are contacted more officially, with information about placement dates and procedures.
October of Third Year (FT trainees) and Jan of fourth year (PT trainees) Trainees start placements.

Points to remember:

  • A trainee’s learning needs (e.g. any competencies which still require development or monitoring) should be the first priority in selecting a supervisor or service.
  • Our policy across all three Programmes in the North West is to give priority to first and second years’ core placements, so trainees are less likely to be allocated to a placement/supervisor who is used for a core placement.
  • Trainees are encouraged to talk to individual supervisors about their potential availability, and to get more information about the service/nature of the work/learning opportunities that might be on offer. However, they should make it clear to supervisors that their enquiries are exploratory at this stage, and any formal approach for placements will need to come from the programme.
  • Trainees can feel free to express preferences for placements across the North West.
  • All three regional courses have signed up to this timescale and outline planning process. Placements are agreed together in the spring of second year, by tutors from all three courses. Occasionally, we do hear of supervisors who are not aware of the process, and give a message that “they are already taken” (as if a first come, first served system was operating). If this occurs, the trainee should please let the Final Year Placement Co-ordinator know about this.

Trainees should not:

  • Make ‘definite’ arrangements with individual supervisors. It should be made clear that confirming a placement can only be done by the course

Approach placements or supervisors from outside of the North West (e.g. covered by other programmes such as Leeds, Staffordshire and Shropshire or Birmingham).

Use of bookable extra study (BES)

Full time trainees

Trainees from the 2018 intake onwards are entitled to a total of 30 days of bookable extra study (BES) to use for work on the thesis in addition to regular study days. These are normally taken from third year placement time. However, up to six in total may be taken from core placements in the (placement three or four). All BES days must be taken before the thesis submission date. Please note that there will be a minimum number of days that trainees will need to spend on their third year community placement and so BES cannot be used in a way that would take a trainee below this minimum.

There is flexibility in how a trainee uses their BES, depending on factors including the timing and nature of their thesis work, the nature of the placement, and preferred study routine. However, BES should be consistent in pattern and easy to understand, for example, once a week for x number of weeks, or 3 short study blocks. It should not consist of days taken inconsistently from one week to the next across an extended period.

All BES days must be scheduled in advance of the placement starting wherever possible, and only with the agreement of the individual clinical tutor, research tutor and placement supervisor(s). The spreadsheet at the bottom of this page must be used to document plans for BES days, as well as regular study days, placement, and teaching throughout the third year, and can be adapted for use during core placements year if BES days are taken then. The spreadsheet should be shared and agreed with the clinical tutor, research tutor, and placement supervisor(s).

3rd year placement days

Part time trainees

Trainees from the 2018 intake onwards on a part time route are entitled to a total of 30 days of BES to use for work on the thesis in addition to regular study days; this is the same amount as full time trainees. For part time trainees, most will normally be taken from final placement time, which begins in Nov of the 4th year of the part time route, however, up to six in total may be taken from core placements (placements three or four – April of yr 2 to Oct of yr 4).

All of the above rules for full-time taking BES days also apply to part time trainees.

A getting started guide: assessment

This page is designed to guide you through the key sections of the online handbook which relate to assessment. You can use it as an index to read key assessment related sections of the handbook in a logical sequence. More detail on most areas will be contained within the full sections of the online handbook.

Overview

Rules and Regulations

Details of Assignments

A getting started guide: trainees

This page is designed to guide you through the key sections of the online handbook which relate to trainee resources and issues. You can use it as an index to read key trainee related sections of the handbook in a logical sequence. More detail on most areas will be contained within the full sections of the online handbook.

Introductions

Resources & Expenses

Support

Trainee involvement in the programme

Teaching and assignment submission

Programme-level learning outcomes & objectives

In order to meet the HCPC Standards of Proficiency for the relevant part of the register, at the programme level the Lancaster University DClinPsy programme has adopted the learning outcomes required by the British Psychological Society (BPS), which are designed to meet these standards. The following extract outlines the learning outcomes.

Extract from the Standards for Doctoral programmes in Clinical Psychology:

2. Required learning outcomes for accredited doctorates in Clinical Psychology

2.1. Clinical psychology programmes will vary in the emphases they place on work with particular clinical groups, therapeutic modalities, curriculum content, non-therapy skills, training methods etc. This is healthy and promotes diversity and richness within the profession. It ensures programmes can be responsive to regional and national priorities, opens up opportunities for some programmes to coordinate and complement their efforts and offers prospective applicants choice of programmes which best suit their own preferences, learning style and goals. Similarly, trainee clinical psychologists within programmes may follow a range of training pathways depending on practice placement experiences, research undertaken, optional modules chosen etc. Thus whilst all graduates will demonstrate core standards of proficiency, with transferability demonstrated across the range of clients and services as specified below, some variation in individual strengths and competencies will be both inevitable and desirable.

This context means that whilst the BPS will accredit programmes as meeting the standards required for their graduates to be eligible for Chartered status, it will be incumbent on programmes to validate the specific portfolio of skills and competencies of graduates in a way which is transparent to employers and commissioners of services. Whilst programmes are free to develop their own portfolio format, examples of how this might look are contained in Appendix 1. These examples should be seen as indicative, rather than prescriptive.

2.2. Overarching goals, outcomes, ethos and values for all programmes include the following:

By the end of their programme, trainees will have:

  1. A value driven commitment to reducing psychological distress and enhancing and promoting psychological well-being through the systematic application of knowledge derived from psychological theory and evidence. Work should be based on the fundamental acknowledgement that all people have the same human value and the right to be treated as unique individuals.
  2. The skills, knowledge and values to develop working alliances with clients, including individuals, carers and/or services, in order to carry out psychological assessment, develop a formulation based on psychological theories and knowledge, carry out psychological interventions, evaluate their work and communicate effectively with clients, referrers and others, orally, electronically and in writing.
  3. Knowledge and understanding of psychological (and other relevant) theory and evidence, related to specific client groups, presentations, psychological therapies, psychological testing, assessment, intervention and secondary prevention required to underpin clinical practice.
  4. The skills, knowledge and values to work effectively with clients from a diverse range of backgrounds, understanding and respecting the impact of difference and diversity upon their lives. Awareness of the clinical, professional and social contexts within which work is undertaken and impact therein.
  5. Clinical and research skills that demonstrate work with clients and systems based on a reflective scientist-practitioner model that incorporates a cycle of assessment, formulation, intervention and evaluation and that draws from across theory and therapy evidence bases as appropriate.
  6. The skills, knowledge and values to work effectively with systems relevant to clients, including for example statutory and voluntary services, self-help and advocacy groups, userled systems and other elements of the wider community.
  7. The skills, knowledge and values to work in a range of indirect ways to improve psychological aspects of health and healthcare. This includes leadership skills and competencies in consultancy, supervision, teaching and training, working collaboratively and influencing psychological mindedness and practices of teams.
  8. The skills, knowledge and values to conduct research and reflect upon outcomes in a way that enables the profession to develop its knowledge base and to monitor and improve the effectiveness of its work.
  9. A professional and ethical value base, including that set out in the BPS Code of Ethics and Conduct, the DCP statement of the Core Purpose and Philosophy of the profession and the DCP Professional Practice Guidelines.
  10. High level skills in managing a personal learning agenda and self-care, in critical reflection and self-awareness that enable transfer of knowledge and skills to new settings and problems and professional standards of behaviour as might be expected by the public, employers and colleagues.

NINE core competencies are defined as follows:

2.2.1. Generalisable meta-competencies

  1. Drawing on psychological knowledge of developmental, social and neuropsychological processes across the lifespan to facilitate adaptability and change in individuals, groups, families, organisations and communities.
  2. Deciding, using a broad evidence and knowledge base, how to assess, formulate and intervene psychologically, from a range of possible models and modes of intervention with clients, carers and service systems. Ability to work effectively whilst holding in mind alternative, competing explanations.
  3. Generalising and synthesising prior knowledge and experience in order to apply them critically and creatively in different settings and novel situations.
  4. Being familiar with theoretical frameworks, the evidence base and practice guidance frameworks such as NICE and SIGN, and having the capacity to critically utilise these in complex clinical decision making without being formulaic in application.
  5. Complementing evidence based practice with an ethos of practice based evidence where processes, outcomes, progress and needs are critically and reflectively evaluated.
  6. Ability to collaborate with service users and carers, and other relevant stakeholders, in advancing psychological initiatives such as interventions and research.
  7. Making informed judgments on complex issues in specialist fields, often in the absence of complete information.
  8. Ability to communicate psychologically-informed ideas and conclusions to, and to work effectively with, other stakeholders, (specialist and non-specialist), in order to influence practice, facilitate problem solving and decision making.
  9. Exercising personal responsibility and largely autonomous initiative in complex and unpredictable situations in professional practice. Demonstrating self-awareness and sensitivity, and working as a reflective practitioner within ethical and professional practice frameworks.

2.2.2. Psychological assessment

  1. Developing and maintaining effective working alliances with service users, carers, colleagues and other relevant stakeholders.
  2. Ability to choose, use and interpret a broad range of assessment methods appropriate:
    • to the client and service delivery system in which the assessment takes place; and
    • to the type of intervention which is likely to be required.
  3. Assessment procedures in which competence is demonstrated will include:
    • performance based psychometric measures (e.g. of cognition and development);
    • self and other informant reported psychometrics (e.g. of symptoms, thoughts, feelings, beliefs, behaviours);
    • systematic interviewing procedures;
    • other structured methods of assessment (e.g. observation, or gathering information from others); and
    • assessment of social context and organisations.
  4. Understanding of key elements of psychometric theory which have relevance to psychological assessment (e.g. effect sizes, reliable change scores, sources of error and bias, base rates, limitations etc.) and utilising this knowledge to aid assessment practices and interpretations thereof.
  5. Conducting appropriate risk assessment and using this to guide practice.

2.2.3. Psychological formulation

  1. Using assessment to develop formulations which are informed by theory and evidence about relevant individual, systemic, cultural and biological factors.
  2. Constructing formulations of presentations which may be informed by, but which are not premised on, formal diagnostic classification systems; developing formulation in an emergent transdiagnostic context.
  3. Constructing formulations utilising theoretical frameworks with an integrative, multi-model, perspective as appropriate and adapted to circumstance and context.
  4. Developing a formulation through a shared understanding of its personal meaning with the client(s) and / or team in a way which helps the client better understand their experience.
  5. Capacity to develop a formulation collaboratively with service users, carers, teams and services and being respectful of the client or team’s feedback about what is accurate and helpful.
  6. Making justifiable choices about the format and complexity of the formulation that is presented or utilised as appropriate to a given situation.
  7. Ensuring that formulations are expressed in accessible language, culturally sensitive, and non-discriminatory in terms of, for example, age, gender, disability and sexuality.
  8. Using formulations to guide appropriate interventions if appropriate.
  9. Reflecting on and revising formulations in the light of on-going feedback and intervention.
  10. Leading on the implementation of formulation in services and utilizing formulation to enhance teamwork, multi-professional communication and psychological mindedness in services.

2.2.4. Psychological intervention

  1. On the basis of a formulation, implementing psychological therapy or other interventions appropriate to the presenting problem and to the psychological and social circumstances of the client(s), and to do this in a collaborative manner with:
    • individuals
    • couples, families or groups
    • services / organisations
  2. Understanding therapeutic techniques and processes as applied when working with a range of different individuals in distress, such as those who experience difficulties related to: anxiety, mood, adjustment to adverse circumstances or life events, eating difficulties, psychosis, misuse of substances, physical health presentations and those with somatoform, psychosexual, developmental, personality, cognitive and neurological presentations.
  3. Ability to implement therapeutic interventions based on knowledge and practice in at least two evidence-based models of formal psychological interventions, of which one must be cognitive-behaviour therapy. Model specific therapeutic skills must be evidenced against a competence framework as described below, though these may be adapted to account for specific ages and presentations etc.
  4. In addition, however, the ability to utilise multi-model interventions, as appropriate to the complexity and / or co-morbidity of the presentation, the clinical and social context and service user opinions, values and goals.
  5. Knowledge of, and capacity to conduct interventions related to, secondary prevention and the promotion of health and well-being.
  6. Conducting interventions in a way which promotes recovery of personal and social functioning as informed by service user values and goals.
  7. Having an awareness of the impact and relevance of psychopharmacological and other multidisciplinary interventions.
  8. Understanding social approaches to intervention; for example, those informed by community, critical, and social constructionist perspectives.
  9. Implementing interventions and care plans through, and with, other professions and/or with individuals who are formal (professional) carers for a client, or who care for a client by virtue of family or partnership arrangements.
  10. Recognising when (further) intervention is inappropriate, or unlikely to be helpful, and communicating this sensitively to clients and carers.

2.2.5. Evaluation

  1. Evaluating practice through the monitoring of processes and outcomes, across multiple dimensions of functioning, in relation to recovery, values and goals and as informed by service user experiences as well as clinical indicators (such as behaviour change and change on standardised psychometric instruments).
  2. Devising innovate evaluative procedures where appropriate.
  3. Capacity to utilise supervision effectively to reflect upon personal effectiveness, shape and change personal and organisational practice including that information offered by outcomes monitoring.
  4. Appreciating outcomes frameworks in wider use within national healthcare systems, the evidence base and theories of outcomes monitoring (e.g. as related to dimensions of accessibility, acceptability, clinical effectiveness and efficacy) and creating synergy with personal evaluative strategies.
  5. Critical appreciation of the strengths and limitations of different evaluative strategies, including psychometric theory and knowledge related to indices of change.
  6. Capacity to evaluate processes and outcomes at the organisational and systemic levels as well as the individual level.

2.2.6. Research

  1. Being a critical and effective consumer, interpreter and disseminator of the research evidence base relevant to clinical psychology practice and that of psychological services and interventions more widely. Utilising such research to influence and inform the practice of self and others.
  2. Conceptualising, designing and conducting independent, original and translational research of a quality to satisfy peer review, contribute to the knowledge base of the discipline, and merit publication including: identifying research questions, demonstrating an understanding of ethical issues, choosing appropriate research methods and analysis (both quantitative and qualitative), reporting outcomes and identifying appropriate pathways for dissemination.
  3. Understanding the need and value of undertaking translational (applied and applicable) clinical research post-qualification, contributing substantially to the development of theory and practice in clinical psychology.
  4. The capacity to conduct service evaluation, small N, pilot and feasibility studies and other research which is consistent with the values of both evidence based practice and practice based evidence.
  5. Conducting research in respectful collaboration with others (e.g. service users, supervisors, other disciplines and collaborators, funders, community groups etc.) and within the ethical and governance frameworks of the Society, the Division, HCPC, universities and other statutory regulators as appropriate.

2.2.7. Personal and professional skills and values

  1. Understanding of ethical issues and applying these in complex clinical contexts, ensuring that informed consent underpins all contact with clients and research participants.
  2. Appreciating the inherent power imbalance between practitioners and clients and how abuse of this can be minimised.
  3. Understanding the impact of differences, diversity and social inequalities on people’s lives, and their implications for working practices.
  4. Understanding the impact of one’s own value base upon clinical practice.
  5. Working effectively at an appropriate level of autonomy, with awareness of the limits of own competence and accepting accountability to relevant professional and service managers.
  6. Capacity to adapt to, and comply with, the policies and practices of a host organisation with respect to time-keeping, record keeping, meeting deadlines, managing leave, health and safety and good working relations.
  7. Managing own personal learning needs and developing strategies for meeting these. Using supervision to reflect on practice, and making appropriate use of feedback received.
  8. Developing strategies to handle the emotional and physical impact of practice and seeking appropriate support when necessary, with good awareness of boundary issues.
  9. Developing resilience but also the capacity to recognize when own fitness to practise is compromised and take steps to manage this risk as appropriate.
  10. Working collaboratively and constructively with fellow psychologists and other colleagues and users of services, respecting diverse viewpoints.

2.2.8. Communication and teaching

  1. Communicating effectively clinical and non-clinical information from a psychological perspective in a style appropriate to a variety of different audiences (for example, to professional colleagues, and to users and their carers).
  2. Adapting style of communication to people with a wide range of levels of cognitive ability, sensory acuity and modes of communication.
  3. Preparing and delivering teaching and training which takes into account the needs and goals of the participants (for example, by appropriate adaptations to methods and content).
  4. Understanding of the supervision process for both supervisee and supervisor roles.
  5. Understanding the process of providing expert psychological opinion and advice, including the preparation and presentation of evidence in formal settings.
  6. Understanding the process of communicating effectively through interpreters and having an awareness of the limitations thereof.
  7. Supporting others’ learning in the application of psychological skills, knowledge, practices and procedures.

2.2.9. Organisational and systemic influence and leadership

  1. Awareness of the legislative and national planning contexts for service delivery and clinical practice.
  2. Capacity to adapt practice to different organisational contexts for service delivery. This should include a variety of settings such as in-patient and community, primary, secondary and tertiary care and may include work with providers outside of the NHS.
  3. Providing supervision at an appropriate level within own sphere of competence.
  4. Indirect influence of service delivery including through consultancy, training and working effectively in multidisciplinary and cross-professional teams. Bringing psychological influence to bear in the service delivery of others.
  5. Understanding of leadership theories and models, and their application to service development and delivery. Demonstrating leadership qualities such as being aware of and working with interpersonal processes, proactivity, influencing the psychological mindedness of teams and organisations, contributing to and fostering collaborative working practices within teams.
  6. Working with users and carers to facilitate their involvement in service planning and delivery.
  7. Understanding of change processes in service delivery systems.
  8. Understanding and working with quality assurance principles and processes including informatics systems which may determine the relevance of clinical psychology work within healthcare systems.
  9. Being able to recognise malpractice or unethical practice in systems and organisations and knowing how to respond to this, and being familiar with ‘whistleblowing’ policies and issues.

[End of extract]

BPS DClinPsy Standards Document

A getting started guide: curriculum

This page is designed to guide you through the key sections of the online handbook which relate to the curriculum. You can use it as an index to read key curriculum related sections of the handbook in a logical sequence. These are core pages – more information is available in the Teaching and Assessment and failure sections of the handbook.

Programme structure

Learning, teaching and assessment strategy

Learning outcomes and assessment methods

Learning and teaching on the DClinPsy programme

Other learning structures

A getting started guide: placements

This page is designed to guide you through the key sections of the online handbook which relate to placements. You can use it as an index to read key placement related sections of the handbook in a logical sequence. These are core pages – more information is available in the placements section of the handbook.

Introduction

Placement provision

Placement processes

Programme structure

There are four main programme committees; the Programme Board, the Examination Board, the Operational Management Group and the Directors’ Committee. There are also eight Development and Implementation Groups (DIGs) which inform the programme committees, and the Anti-Racism Accountability Group (ARAG). Trainees are represented at the ARAG, on most DIGs and the Programme Board. How the programme committees fit together and how decisions are made on the programme is outlined in the programme decision making diagram available below.

DClinPsy decision making diagram
Programme Board
Development and Implementation Groups
Operational Management Group
Examination Board
Directors Committee

Development and Implementation Groups (DIGs)

The programme is divided into nine areas each of whom have a DIG which oversees their domain’s strategical development and procedural implementation. Essentially, the DIGs are designed to create a space for strategic thinking and advice on course procedures, policies and directions. Trainees, LUPIN members and other stakeholders are represented across the DIGs.

An overview of the DIGs for trainees considering membership is available: –

Trainee Committee Membership document

The DIGs report to the Operational Management Group on a fortnightly basis. The DIGs are: –

Learning and teaching development and implementation group
Placement development and implementation group
Assessment development and implementation group
Selections and admissions development and implementation group
Inclusivity development and implementation group
Pastoral development and implementation group
Lancaster University Public Involvement Network
Clinical Psychology Education Team development and implementation group
Part-time training team
Anti-Racism Accountability Group

Referencing software

The university provides and supports EndNote referencing software for use by all trainees. Although other referencing programs are available, these are not supported by the university and the programme is not able to recommend any alternatives.EndNote is compatible with both Windows and Mac computers and is available via Apps Anywhere. If you need help using this, articles explaining how to use it are available here on Lancaster Answers. EndNote links directly into Microsoft Office which is also available to all trainees while on the programme. Instructions on how to install the Office suite are available on Lancaster Answers.The library has an extensive help area for EndNote including frequently asked questions.

Post contract fees

Please note that this policy only applies to trainees whose contracts ended between 08/01/2018 and 20/06/23

Full-time trainees on the programme are employed on a three year NHS contract. For part-time trainees this is adjusted according to the trainee’s full time equivalent. If a trainee intercalates from study, for maternity leave for example, then the contract date is extended to cover the period of intercalation. It is anticipated that trainees will meet all the conditions for the award of DClinPsy by the end of their contract. However, for some, there remain elements of the award to complete following the conclusion of the NHS contract. Typically, this completion can occur within three months of the end date of the NHS contract. However, if a trainee has yet to meet all conditions for award after three months from the end of contract, they will be liable to pay additional fees to cover any continued training. There are two different contexts where additional fees may be applied:

  1. Incomplete academic submissions

    Full-time trainees, who have not completed the required academic submissions, will be charged £230 for the first year from Dec 1st of the scheduled year of graduation. Any trainees who have yet to complete at the end of this first year are charged a further £465 from the following December. Trainees who enter a third year of study after the end of their NHS contract are charged a further £930 in post contract fees.

    Bespoke pathway trainees will be charged from three months after their contract ends (in accordance with the time they have spent intercalated). That is during intercalation “the clock stops”. The fee will be as above for these students once they have completed their contracts.

    The DClinPsy post contract fees should not be confused with “writing up fees” as per University documentation. DClinPsy trainees are not liable for “writing up fees”.

  2. Incomplete clinical experience

    Trainees require a minimum of five Supervisors Assessment of Trainee (SAT) forms, rated as satisfactory, in order to meet clinical conditions for the award of DClinPsy. In the situation where this is not the case trainees will be given the option to sign an honorary contract with Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust in order to complete their placement experience. If an honorary contract is required for three months or less following the end date of their training contract there will be no additional fee to pay. Following this, a fee of £265 per every three additional months will be charged.

    It may be the case that an individual is required to both complete academic submissions and gain additional clinical experience in order to fulfil the conditions for the award of DClinPsy. In this situation they will be liable to pay both sets of fees as outlined above.

    Trainees cannot qualify for the award of the DClinPsy if any fees have yet to be paid.

Online Books and Journals

As a Lancaster University student you will have access to all of the library’s e-books and e-Journals. More information about these resources can be accessed here: http://www.lancaster.ac.uk/library/

There is also a Library guide specific to Clinical Psychology: –
http://lancaster.libguides.com/clinpsy

Useful information on literature searching can be found here: –
http://lancaster.libguides.com/Litsearch

If you have any questions about making the best use of the library resources available, you can contact the Academic Services Team in the Library, at academicliaison@lancaster.ac.uk

For general enquiries about borrowing or accessing material from the Library, please contact library@lancaster.ac.uk or call +44 (0)1524 592516

Interlibrary loans & document supply

If you can’t find the document, e.g. book or article, that you need in the Library or online, you can request it through the Library’s Interlending and Document Supply (IDS) service.

Most researchers can find the information they need through the Library’s extensive collections in print and online, and through freely available resources on the internet or in other libraries. For instances where you cannot find the item you require for your research, please use the IDS service and we will try to obtain the items you need by requesting a copy or purchasing items on your behalf.

Please be aware that the Library may not be able to provide access to every document you require due to resource constraints and collection management considerations.

Data storage, information governance and ethics

Last updated 20/04/23

When collecting data from human participants you need to ensure that the data you collect are handled and stored securely and in accordance with legislative frameworks governing data protection, organisational information governance requirements, and research ethics and governance. The procedure outlined below has been developed with these frameworks in mind, and is designed to provide a clear, consistent approach that can be used for all trainee data (unless there are particular reasons why your data require a different approach).

What constitutes data?

The data you need to think about storing includes:

  • Clinical recordings made on placement
  • Research data e.g. interview recordings, questionnaires, transcripts, coded/analysed data
  • Personal information collected during a study i.e. consent forms, expression of interest forms, email addresses

These data may be in paper form, or electronic (or both), so you need to think about storage of both formats. You also need to distinguish between how you will store data whilst the study is taking place and how it will be stored after the study has finished.

Clinical recordings

As the information governance of trusts can differ, methods of data collection, transfer, and storage may vary from placement to placement. Trainees should check with their supervisor regarding local policy when they first arrive on placement and contact the relevant assignment co-ordinator in the event of any issues. Clinical recordings should be stored on secured university file stores. Portable storage media (such as SD card, encrypted USB) should be used for data transportation ONLY and considered insecure with appropriate care taken to ensure data security. Details on the management of recordings can also be found in the guidance for specific assignments.

Storing data during a research study

Whilst the study is taking place you (the trainee) will be responsible for the data. You need to explain how you will store all data in a way that keeps it secure e.g.  electronic data in password protected file space on the University server, and/or on encrypted electronic devices (see below).

As chief investigator for the study, the thesis supervisor is the named data custodian on the ethics application and must therefore be able to access the data throughout your study. This process needs to be described in your participant facing documents so that participants know how data will be managed. We advise that you store all of your data electronically. This can be achieved for all participant facing documents by using university approved digital platforms, such as Qualtrics, to share your information sheet(s) and collect completed assent and consent forms, and demographic questionnaires. If you do use paper documents, e.g. consent forms, these need to be scanned to create a digital copy and the hard copy should then be destroyed. At the outset of the study, you will need to create a OneDrive folder for the storage of the data and share this with your thesis supervisor. You should encrypt all your data to ensure that it is stored securely. You will need to share the password for the documents with your thesis supervisor so that they are able to access these.

We recommend that data containing personal details that would lead to the identification of participants (e.g. participants’ email addresses, expression of interest forms BUT NOT consent forms) should be deleted/destroyed as soon as possible. If people provide you with their contact details in order to be contacted about taking part in your study, these should be retained only until they have participated in the study, or until they have informed you that they do not wish to take part. However, if a participant says they would like to receive a summary of the research at the end of the study, it would be appropriate to retain their contact details until this summary has been sent out. Once the study is completed, contact details should be deleted and you should confirm in writing (by email) that this action has been completed with your supervisor.

We advise that, as far as possible, data are stored electronically in your personal file space on the University server, rather than on laptops, PCs or other devices. If you do store data on any devices other than the server, it must be encrypted. The server is secure, so any files stored there do not need to be encrypted. However, where you are storing data containing sensitive material or identifiable personal information, individual files should also be password-protected as an additional security measure.

Encryption

If identifiable data are stored on a portable device, e.g. a laptop or USB drive, the University advises that encryption should be used. More information on how to do this is available from the ISS page on encryption. If it is not possible to encrypt the data at a particular stage (such as while on a video camera’s storage), there needs to be confirmation that any identifiable data will be transferred and then deleted from the device as soon as possible. If you are using digital recording devices for research, the encryption capabilities of the devices or a process to mitigate a lack of such should be mentioned in any ethics application.

Long-term storage of research data

You also need to explain what will happen after the study has been completed i.e. what data will be stored, where they will be stored and who will be responsible for them. Long-term data will be stored by the DClinPsy admin team and can be shared with your thesis supervisor on request. If your supervisor also wishes to store the data after the study ends, you will need to discuss this with them before and indicate this on your ethics application, participant information sheet and consent forms. In the past, most data have been stored in paper form. For practical and safety reasons, we advise trainees to keep data for storage after the end of the study in electronic form, unless there is a particular reason for keeping paper documents. The data that should be retained for storage includes the consent forms, all raw data (e.g. interview transcripts and completed questionnaires) and any coded data produced during analysis.

Once the final version of your thesis has been submitted, you will need to share your research data with the Research Coordinator for long-term storage. We would recommend that you do so by sharing the OneDrive folder you use to store the data in during the study. The data will then be saved on a password protected file space on the server. You will also need to confirm the password that has been used to encrypt the documents and the period of time that the data needs to be stored for. On your ethics form, you will need to state that your data will be transferred electronically using a secure method that is supported by the University.

Applying for ethical approval

To gain ethical approval for your project, you will need to develop an application on REAMS. REAMS is the Research Ethics Application Management System for Lancaster University. Once completed by you and signed off by your supervisor, your REAMS application will be reviewed by the Faculty Research Ethics Committee. The system can be accessed remotely via the web. You do not have to be on site or connected to the Lancaster University VPN. We recommend using a desktop PC, laptop or tablet for the best user experience. The REAMS form will adapt as you progress so that you are provided with questions relevant to your study. You can share your REAMS application with your supervisor through the platform. You should expect a REAMS review to take between 4 and 10 weeks, depending upon the level of approval you need and REC availability. Make sure the detail you provide is as clear and accurate as possible to help the committee fully consider your plans, and proof read all participant facing documents extremely carefully prior to submission. For questions regarding sponsorship please discuss these with your supervisor in the first instance. If you need to contact the sponsorship office directly their email address is sponsorship@lancaster.ac.uk.

If you think you may need ethical approval from the Health Research Authority for a study conducted within the NHS and/or social care, complete the decision tool checklist and discuss your plans with your supervisor. HRA applications are submitted through IRAS. Your approved application will then need to be processed through REAMS. You should expect a HRA ethics review to take between 8 and 16 weeks, depending upon the level of approval you need and REC meeting availability. We recommend you attend the REC review meeting to address the panel’s queries or questions, either in person or via a digital platform.


Faculty Ethics Committee
REAMS
How to submit an application in REAMS
IRAS website
Health Research Authority
NHS tutorial video
NHS decision tool
Qualtrics
ISS page on encryption

Passing and failing the DClinPsy programme

Full details of the Assessment schemes and criteria can be found in the programme specification. An overview of this process is provided in the programme completion and failure processes document.

Scheme of assessment

From 2018 cohort onwards, to obtain the award students are required to complete all three elements of the programme. These comprise: –

  1. All five (for trainees in 2018-2020 cohorts) or three (for trainees in 2021 cohort onwards) clinical placements
  2. Passing all seven coursework assignments
  3. A doctoral thesis

Coursework and evaluation of clinical placements are considered at regular programme exam board meetings. The thesis is examined towards the end of the trainee’s registration on the programme.

Requirements for pass

Clinical placements:  Students up to the 2020 cohort undertake five clinical placements, and students in the 2021 cohort onwards undertake three (usually longer) placements. In the event of a placement failure, the student may be required to re-take the placement (and completion of the programme may be extended accordingly – which may be on an unfunded basis). Details on the fail criteria for an individual placement are available on the placement failure pages. Students who fail more than one placement are deemed to have failed the programme and are not allowed to proceed.

Coursework: The student is required to pass all seven distinct pieces of assessed coursework. These comprise three ‘Broad Skills’ assignments and four ‘Live skills’ assignments. The broad skills assignments are the Self-Assessment Exercise, the Placement Assignment -Service Evaluation, and the Thesis Preparation Assignment. Students are permitted three attempts to pass each of these assignments. The live skills assignments comprise the Service Improvement Poster Presentation the three Placement Assignments – Live Skills (#1, #2 & #3). Students are permitted two attempts to pass each of these assignments.  If a student fails all allowed submission attempts of a given assignment, then they are deemed to have failed the programme and is not allowed to proceed. Details of the marking process and outcomes are available in the online handbook. Please note that the details of coursework requirements above only apply to trainees beginning training in 2018 onwards; in earlier cohorts a different assessment scheme was in place for this.

Thesis: This is examined in accordance with the University regulations for doctoral theses.

Appeals

There is no right of appeal for trainees prior to the failure of the whole doctorate. Details of the Appeals process under such circumstances can be found on the Appeals programme handbook page.

Useful documents and links

Programme completion and failure processes
Criteria for placement failure
Marking process, passing and failing assignments – 2018 intake onwards
Examination of the thesis
Fitness to practise
Appeals

Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Standardised Role Play Simulation (SRPS)

What is it?

It is an opportunity for the programme to directly assess the practical application of psychological knowledge and clinical skills through the use of a standardised role play approach. The implementation of this assessment ensures that the programme is adhering to guidance laid out in the British Psychological Society (BPS) Accreditation Criteria (2014).

How does it work?

Trainees are asked to take part in a standardised role play scenario (SRPS) with a simulated client (played by an actor). The SRPS is in two parts.

The first part is a simulated initial assessment session which lasts for 12 minutes. During this time trainees are expected to do the following:

  • Appropriately open the session with the client (e.g. introduce self, introduce role, inform client of confidentiality, gain consent to proceed)
  • Ask appropriate questions to explore the reason for the client is attending
  • Develop a rapport with the client
  • Be prepared to address/manage any issues/challenges which may arise (e.g. risk)
  • Close the session appropriately (e.g. not ending abruptly)

The second part is a simulated formulation session which lasts for 17 minutes with a 3 minute reflection on performance following on. During this time trainees are expected to do the following:

  • Appropriately open the session as if it is several sessions into the series of appointments
  • Share/collaboratively develop a formulation which is based on or significantly draws from one (or more) recognised evidence based psychological approach
  • Maintain the rapport with the client
  • Be prepared to address/manage any issues/challenges which may arise
  • Close the session appropriately (e.g. not ending abruptly)
  • Comment and reflect on own performance and clinical competence

Trainees will be given an initial referral letter to read before entering the first simulated session. Trainees will be given background information for the simulated client after the Initial Assessment session and will be given a minimum of an hour to prepare for the simulated Formulation session. Trainees can either pre-prepare a formulation or can develop one with the client in the session.

The simulated role plays are video recorded for assessment purposes.

A schedule for the assessment day will sent out to trainees in advance of the assessment day.

What happens if I am ill on the day?

If you are ill you will need to submit a sick note signed by your GP as it is classed as an examination day by the University. Please alert us to your sickness absence in the usual way (i.e. call the absence phone).

What happens if I am late on the day?

If you are going to be late, please let us know as soon as possible by contacting the programme office. Depending on scheduling we will try and reschedule your slot on the same day. If this cannot happen we will reschedule the assessment as soon as is practically possible.

What will happen if I ‘freeze’ on the day?

If you come so anxious you ‘freeze’ or are unable to enter into the simulation process, time will be allowed for you to regain your composure before making a second attempt. If you are unable to enter the simulation process at the second attempt, advice will be sought from the Chair of the Exam Board or their deputy as to how to proceed.

Fitness to practise/professional behaviour concerns arising during the assessment process.

If a trainee engages in behaviour which would raise questions about their fitness to practise OR behaves in a way which could be considered to be gross professional misconduct, this will be brought immediately to the attention of the Clinical Director or their deputy as to how to proceed.

What are the competencies being assessed?

  • Skills of engagement and rapport
  • Communication skills
  • Professional behaviour
  • Session management
  • Psychological knowledge and application
  • Being respectful of difference
  • Resilience

Further description and details of the competencies being assessed can be found in the indicator booklet for examiners.

How is it assessed?

Recordings of the Initial Assessment simulated session and the Formulation simulated session for each trainee will be put together in a video ‘bundle’ for examiners. Each video ‘bundle’ will be viewed by two internal examiners who will independently collect evidence of behavioural indicators and give a rating per competence before comparing evidence and ratings with the second examiner and agreeing final ratings and feedback.

This assessment is subject to the usual external examiner ratification processes and Exam Board processes of the DClinPsy.

What do I need to prepare?

The content of the assessment process is designed to be a simulation of clinical work undertaken with a client. The trainees will have had experience of the facets of the assessment through the Communication Skills training sessions and theory to practice sessions within the teaching programme and should be familiar with the features of the simulated role plays through practice on placement (e.g. how to open and close a session, how to explain the role of a trainee clinical psychologist, how to gain informed consent, how to ask exploratory questions, how to work with a client on a formulation/apply psychological knowledge/understanding). Trainees therefore should not need to undertake any specific preparation, however trainees may wish to consider the following:

  • Re-famliarise self with the 5P’s approach to formulation as a starting point
  • Refresh yourself in terms of your ‘patter’ about introducing psychology, confidentiality and trainee role
  • Think about some good opening assessment questions
  • Consider how you might address/manage any issues/challenges if they come up e.g. risks
  • Think about how you are developing your style in relation to working with a client on formulation e.g. do you want to pre-prepare a formulation to take into the simulated formulation session, or would you prefer to develop/co-create the formulation live in the simulated session

You may bring reference materials with you to support your development of a psychological understanding of the client’s presentation during the 60 minute preparation time. You may also use the COW lap tops in the base room to access reference materials. However, please be aware that you cannot take reference materials into the simulated formulation session with you, unless it is something which you have developed specifically (e.g. formulation diagram). You can take pens/paper/appropriate creative supports into the simulated session with you. If you are unsure please ask the tutor facilitator in the base room on the day.

DACS-SRPS instructions to markers
DACS-SRPS marker booklet
DACS-SRPS trainee feedback form

Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Placement Portfolio (DACS-PP)

The Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Placement Portfolio (DACS- PP) is a summative assessment to be undertaken by the 2015 and future cohorts. It has been developed in response to the most recent British Psychological Society (BPS) Accreditation Criteria which was published in May 2014.

The model proposed by Miller has been widely adopted in the literature as a framework to guide consideration of how to assess the complexities of competence in professional practitioners (Muse and McManus, 2013). It has been adopted here to inform the development and structure of the Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills.

The Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Placement Portfolio has several elements which are allied to placements 1 & 2 and placements 3 & 4 which address all four levels suggested by Miller (1990). The elements of the assessment are outlined in the table below.

Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Placement Portfolio 1 Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Placement Portfolio 2
1x Assessment and Action Plan 1 – Core placement 1 1x Assessment and Action Plan 3 – Core placement 3
1x Assessment and Action Plan 2 – Core placement 2 1x Assessment and Action Plan 4 – Core placement 4
1x Clinical Recording (from placement 1 or 2) 1x Clinical Recording (from placement 3 or 4)
1x Clinical Recording Report (based on the submitted recording) 1x Clinical Recording Report (based on the submitted recording)

1. Assessment and Action Plan

For each core (or relevant) placement, trainees will be required to submit an Assessment and Action Plan (AAP). This will be a short report (AAP 1 & AAP 2 are up to 2000 words, AAP 3 & 4 are 2750 words with an additional allowance of 300 words for a context paragraph which means the total word count cannot exceed 3050 words) relating to a specific piece of clinical work that will provide details of an assessment strategy based on presenting/referral information, and, drawing on live client information provide a provisional psychological formulation/synthesis of understanding and, based on this, provide an evidence-based action plan. This could relate to an individual client, a group of clients, or a piece of indirect clinical work with staff.

The purpose of the report will be to demonstrate that the trainee has the ability to competently assess the need for psychological intervention, can synthesise this information into a meaningful understanding of the information (psychological formulation/synthesis of understanding) drawing on appropriate psychological models/approaches, and generate a robust, evidence-based action plan based on that understanding. The report will detail what the trainee plans to do, and how these fit within the current evidence-base, psychological theory, and specific therapeutic models/approaches. The implementation of the clinical intervention itself does not need to be reported.

The reports will be submitted prior to the end of placement in accordance with the fixed deadline schedule.

Competencies assessed by the Assessment and Action Plan Report will be: Written Communication Skills, Knowledge and Skills, Analysis and Critical Thinking, Professional Behaviour and Contextual Awareness.

Level assessed in relation to Miller’s (1990) Model: Levels 1 & 2 – Knows and Knows How.

2. Clinical Recording

After core placements 1 & 2 and again after core placements 3 & 4, (or relevant placements) trainees will be required to submit a video or an audio recording (of at least 30 minutes) of a piece of direct or indirect clinical work to the programme in order for clinical skills to be assessed in a real-life setting. Video recordings are preferred for submission, but one audio recording can be submitted for either CR 1 or CR 2 if video recording is not an option, but not both (unless there are circumstances considered to be exceptional). Thirty minutes of recording will be assessed with the trainee being asked to nominate at the point of submission which section of 30 minutes (of continuous recording) they would like to be assessed from within the recording. This can be from either of the core placements undertaken in that time period (e.g. either Child or Adult, and either Older Adult/Health/Neuro or Learning Disabilities) or any other relevant placement(s).

The recording will be submitted as a password-protected encrypted digital video/audio file, and will be stored and transported securely, in accordance with guidance regarding information governance requirements from the NHS Trust in which the clinical work takes place (e.g. Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust – Procedure and Guidance for Health Professionals Video or Audio Recording Clinical Sessions, 2013). It is the responsibility of each trainee to seek out local policy guidance once on placement and to inform the assignment coordinators if there are any issues. Trainees will be required to seek informed consent for the recording from the client/professionals and record this within the appropriate record (e.g. clinical record). The trainee’s placement supervisor will be required to submit a declaration to the programme that appropriately informed consent was sought and given, and that the work submitted, to the best of their knowledge, is an account of the work undertaken on placement. The process of the supervisor declaration is in line with current practice on the D.Clin.Psy in relation to ensuring appropriate consent has been gained to use confidential material.

The recording could be of work with an individual client, a group of clients or could be a piece of indirect clinical work with staff. The purpose of the recording is for the trainee to clearly demonstrate their skill in conducting evidence-based therapeutic or psychologically informed work on placement. The specific content of the recorded work can vary, but the recording must demonstrate the application of therapeutic techniques/principles/concepts, and must allow for the observation and rating of the specific competencies being assessed. Example content could include carrying out an assessment, sharing a formulation with a client or staff group, summarising an intervention action plan, or applying an intervention with an individual client.

Some placement settings may be less easy for trainees to record sessions or secure informed consent to do so (e.g. secure in-patient settings or clients’ homes). After discussion with both placement supervisors and their clinical tutor, trainees may be encouraged to consider all possible settings for clinical recordings if recording of direct clinical sessions is not possible, e.g. consultations or discussions with staff team members, or appropriate discussions during clinical supervision (e.g. describing a complex formulation to a supervisor). Clinical tutors will be in regular contact with trainees to discuss potential clinical recording opportunities and will liaise with supervisors when necessary to ensure that sufficient opportunities for recordings are provided on each placement.

The Clinical Recording and Report will typically be submitted in the month following the completion of placements 2 and 4 in accordance with the fixed submission deadline.

Competencies assessed by the recording will be: Communication Skills, Engagement and Rapport, Professional Behaviour, Respectful Acknowledgement of Difference and Session Management (these are the same competencies considered in the D.Clin.Psy Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Standardised Role Play Simulation)

Level assessed in relation to Miller’s (1990) Model: Levels 3 and 4 – Shows How and Does

3. Clinical Recording Report

Trainees will also submit a report based on the recording submitted for assessment. The report will begin with an introductory section (up to 500 words) outlining relevant contextual background information to accompany the work within the recording, i.e. to provide examiners with information about why the work took place, the setting in which it is being conducted and the stage of the work from which the recording is taken.

Trainees will be asked to pick two five minute sections from the recording (which can be concurrent) which demonstrate their competence in applying a particular therapeutic technique/ principle/ concept and produce a written transcript of each five minute section selected. The transcript is not included in the final word count.

This is to be accompanied by a ‘line-by-line’ commentary (of up to 2000 words) during which the trainee highlights areas such as the application of specific therapeutic techniques, decision making points in terms of why they used a particular technique over another, comments on responses of the other person(s) in the session and how they responded.

The report will end with a reflection on and critique of the session (up to 1500 words), highlighting the evidence base for the work and possible ways in which the work could have been improved or carried out differently and what the trainee has learnt from the session.

The Clinical Recording and Report will typically be submitted in the month following the completion of placements 2 and 4 in accordance with the fixed submission deadline.

Competencies assessed by the Clinical Recording Report will be: Written Communication Skills, Knowledge and Skills, Analysis and Critical Thinking, Reflection and Integration, Professional Behaviour.

Level assessed in relation to Miller’s (1990) Model: Levels 2 and 3 – Knows How and Shows How

Marking and Trainee Feedback

Each element of the DACS-PP will be single or double marked by clinical tutors or other markers (local clinicians) all of whom will have undergone the necessary assessment-specific training. Markers will independently view written material / listen to recordings, collect evidence and rate each competency. If there are two markers each marker with do this separatelybefore sharing their ratings with their co-marker and jointly agreeing a final mark. The Clinical Recording and associated Clinical Recording Report elements will both be marked by the same marker or marker pair for each trainee unless there is a reason why an original marker is not available in which case another marker will be nominated.

The marks for all elements will be provisionally released to trainees once they have been returned to the programme and checked. External Examiner moderation will take place following this.. The marks will then be formally ratified at the relevant Exam Board. Occasionally there may be a circumstance in which provisional marks cannot be released prior to the Exam Board. Trainees affected by this will be informed.

Submission of the Placement Portfolio

Each element of the DACS-PP has formative and summative submission points. Work submitted at the formative point by the agreed deadline is marked in exactly the same way as at the summative point, and feedback and a mark is then provided to the trainee. If a mark of 50 or above is achieved for the formative submission, then this is automatically carried forward to become the summative mark and no further submission of that element is required by the trainee. If the formative mark is 49 or below, then the trainee will be asked to make a summative submission.

If all elements achieve a passing mark (of 50 or above) by the summative stage, the final overall mark for the assignment will be the average of all summative marks. If a trainee fails one or more of the elements at the summative stage then the final overall mark for the assignment (i.e. the DACS PP- 1 or 2) will be the average of the summative marks given for the failed elements only. This means that failing any single element of the placement portfolio at the summative stage will always result in the failure of the assignment as a whole.

Resubmission

When the assignment as a whole is failed, trainees are only required to revise and resubmit the failed elements for re-marking. There is no formative submission stage in the resubmission process. If the elements resubmitted receive a passing mark (i.e. of 50 or above), then the final overall mark for the Placement Portfolio resubmission will be calculated as above (i.e. an average of all the marks for the individual elements). If however any element fails at resubmission, then the Placement Portfolio resubmission as a whole will be failed for the second time. This will be recorded as two fails (i.e. at first attempt and the resubmitted attempt). As with other assignments on the programme, there is no third attempt required following a second fail of the whole assignment.

DACS Information for Trainees
DACS Consent Form
DACS-PP supervisor declaration form (to be used from Oct 2017)

CR supervisor declaration form (for use until Sept 2017 only)
CR Submission Form
CR instructions to markers
CR marker booklet
CR trainee feedback form

AAP supervisor declaration form (for use until Sept 2017 only)
AAP Structure and Style Guide
AAP information for clients
AAP instructions to markers
AAP marker booklet
AAP trainee feedback form

CRR Transcription Style and Structure Guide
CRR instructions to markers
CRR marker booklet
CRR trainee feedback form

Marking process, passing and failing assignments

2018 cohort and onwards

The programme uses its assignments as tools to assess trainee progress on the ten assessed domains of competence, which are a codification of the programme learning outcomes. In order to pass the programme, trainees are required to pass each individual assignment. Each assignment has been designated a fixed set of assessment domains upon which it is actively graded (positive and negative evidence is collected). In order to pass an assignment, trainees are required to reach an acceptable standard in each of the actively graded domains for that assignment. However, an assignment may also be failed if substantial negative evidence for any of the ten domains is identified in the course of marking. Assignments are not marked numerically, but rated pass, fail, or (for some assignments) pass with conditions. More detailed information on the criteria used to mark each specific assignment are contained in the marksheets for each academic assignment, which can be found in the programme handbook page for that assignment.

Submissions are marked blind by one or two markers. Markers can be either members of the programme team or clinicians/stakeholders who have been specifically trained to mark the assignment(s). Where two markers are involved, they will discuss their marking to reach a consensus outcome. Occasionally there may be a need for a third marker to be involved, which is typically a member of the programme team. All marking processes are subject to review processes (involving internal and external processes) in accordance with the University Manual of Academic Regulations and Procedures (MARP) before being ratified by the Exam Board.

The process by which an individual assignment is passed or failed can be found in the ‘2018 onward assignment process’ document below.

2018 onward assignment process
Assessment submission points
Assignment processes and responsibilities following failed assignments

2017 cohort and earlier
The programme uses its assignments as tools to assess trainee progress on a series of competencies, which are a codification of the programme learning outcomes. In order to pass the programme, trainees must complete all assignments and any required resubmissions without registering more than two summative fails. Each assignment has been designated a fixed set of competencies upon which it is actively graded (positive and negative evidence is collected). These are numerically rated in order to produce a final mark in the range 0-100. In order to pass an assignment, trainees are required to attain a mark of 50 or higher. More information about the competencies and how they relate to each assignment can be found in the online handbook. More detailed information on the criteria used to mark each specific assignment are contained in the marksheets for each academic assignment.

All submissions and resubmissions are either single or double marked. Marking is conducted by a combination of programme staff and other suitably trained clinical psychologists and other stakeholders who are employed by the programme for this purpose. A sample of all submitted work is moderated by the programme’s external examiners. Information about the external examiners can be found in the online handbook.

The process by which an individual assignment is passed or failed can be found in the ‘2017 and earlier assignment process’ document below.

Under certain circumstances when a trainee fails an assignment the exam board may recommend that they resubmit using a different topic. Flowcharts illustrating how this process operates can also be found below.

2017 and earlier assignment process
Flowchart for assignment failure topic change pre 2018 (General)
Flowchart for assignment failure topic change (PPR)

Support for trainees with disabilities

Often, even before entry to the programme, potential trainees may contact the office in regard to any special requirements they may have. Where any trainee has a registered disability, and a need for particular equipment or special procedures to be followed to facilitate training, office staff (usually the Programme Administrator) liaise with staff and the Disability Service within the university to ensure requirements are assessed and then met as efficiently as possible.

Disability assessment

Trainees with a diagnosed disability are eligible to apply for  Disabled Students’ Allowance (DSA) and should do this directly through the DSA. If eligible, a needs assessment will be arranged by Student Finance England and paid for through DSA entitlement. Equipment and support will then be recommended and funded.

All trainees with a diagnosed disability should contact the Disability Service at the university. If a trainee has not had a previous diagnostic assessment (e.g. dyslexia/SpLD), but would like a review to investigate learning needs there is a cost to the trainee of approx. £140. Trainees should contact the disability service who will liaise with the programme following an assessment.

The Disability Service student registration form is for any student who wishes to register a disability with the service. The form guides the student through various questions so that we have more information when getting in touch with them.

The Disability service query form is an alternative way for students to get in touch with the service for general enquires. The form guides the student through various questions so that the service has more information when getting in touch with them.

Access to Work

Access to Work support is also available through a trainee’s employing Trust, i.e., Lancashire & South Cumbria Foundation Trust. Trainees should liaise with Emma Munks for further information in the first instance.

Training support

The DClinPsy programme is committed to ensuring that training sessions are equally accessible to all trainees. In order to ensure this, trainees are asked to inform the programme of any specific learning needs they may have, so that the course team can offer them the support that they need. The majority of training takes place in person, with only occasional sessions held remotely on MS Teams. For in person training, some examples of the support/aids that are available to trainees include:

  • Hearing loop facilities are available in all teaching rooms
  • Trainees with specific learning needs, i.e. dyslexia, are able to record teaching sessions on digital recorders, after seeking permission from the teacher, in order to aid their learning
  • All teaching rooms are wheelchair accessible for students
  • An accessible toilet is located next to the main DClinPsy training room

Where in programme staff’s academic and clinical judgement it is  deemed  suitable, teaching is video recorded using  MS Teams. MS Teams video is captioned by default and will become available on Moodle, the online learning space. Trainees who have a ILSP statement that suggests the recording of teaching they are attending will be of benefit for them are permitted to individually audio record the didactic portion of any teaching which the programme is not due to record (i.e. not any group discussions or other exercises due to the sensitive nature of these).

Another way in which the programme supports inclusive learning is by asking all teachers to adhere to the DClinPsy guidance on document and slide preparation available below.

Guidance on document and slide preparation
HCPC guidance: A disabled person’s guide to becoming a health professional

Peer support

A reflective peer support space is in place for trainees with a disability and/or lived experience of a mental health difficulty. The group meet monthly online to share resources, experiences of navigating training and to offer peer support. Aspects of training discussed in this space that require change or additional focus can then be forwarded to the relevant development & implementation group for discussion and action.

Trainee travel and expenses

Trainees are expected to commute from home to their practice placements which may include for some distance across the North West region. This may also include staying away from home. If travelling from home to the university would be a shorter distance, the extra mileage is funded. Travel during work time is also often required, to attend meetings and home visits for example, and this is funded by the programme. Personal circumstances are always taken into account if this is a possibility, e.g., trainees with caring responsibilities would not be asked to stay away from home.

Claiming travel expenses

Travel expenses should be claimed using the NHS expenses form. These are submitted electronically to George Silverwood via g.silverwood@lancaster.ac.uk

Mileage to academic teaching No payment (regardless of teaching location)
Mileage to and from placement At official rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage to clinical research At official rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage within placement At official rate

In all cases the trainee’s base is the University teaching site. It is appreciated that a number of trainees who live some distance from their base may feel disadvantaged but the above arrangements are consistent with current employment arrangements. When trainees visit participants for their research work or go to a site to conduct research for their thesis or SRP research, claims can only be made when the distance is greater than home to base, and then only at official rate. For example, if a trainee lives 50 miles from Lancaster but is collecting data for research at a hospital base (or participant’s house) that is 48 miles from home, then no claim could be made. If the hospital base (or participant’s house) is 52 miles from home, then a claim can be made for 52-50 = 2 miles at official rate.

With regards to clinical research travel that takes place outside of the North-West region is costed to the £300 budget that trainees can use for research expenses. For these purposes the northwest region is defined as Cumbria, Cheshire/Wirral, Merseyside, Greater Manchester and Lancashire. Trainees therefore need to indicate on the NHS expenses form the county that the travel will take place within. For any travel that takes place outside of the North-West region trainees have to complete and return the research travel form to the Research Coordinator in addition to the NHS expense form. The NHS expense form must be completed for trainees to be reimbursed for any mileage incurred. More details on research expenses is available on the research expenses page of the online handbook.

Please note that conference travel is processed differently.

NHS expenses form
Research budget travel form

Trainee resources

Places to study

The location of the DClinPsy programme is in HI One on the Health Innovation Campus.  There are open access breakout areas within the building and a study area on B floor available to students.

Trainees also have access to bookable study spaces through the library, spaces with PC access are available. More information is available on the Learning Spaces webpage.

Trainees will also be able to use the Study Hub, based in The Storey in Lancaster. This town centre facility is available to all Lancaster University postgraduate students (you will need your University card to gain access) – there is a quiet study group space with a large monitor and a small group workroom. It has capacity for up to 46 people, access to the university’s Eduroam Wi-Fi and is open six days a week (closed Sundays).

Refreshment Facilities

Tea and coffee making facilities are available in the HI One building adjacent to the teaching room on B floor. A cafe is also available within the building on B floor.

Equipment

The programme office provides equipment that trainees are able to loan out for research purposes. Some examples of this equipment include digital recorders, USB foot pedals for transcription, mobile phones and telephone pick up devices to record telephone interviews. If you would like to loan out any equipment, we advise that you email the office in advance to ensure that what you need is in stock. If the equipment is not available we will chase this for you.

Psychometric Tests

The programme office has a selection of psychological tests that can be loaned out to trainees. A list of the tests available can be found in the resources section on Moodle.

The Classroom on Wheels

The course owns a Classroom on Wheels unit storing laptops. The laptops are mainly used within research teaching to allow for interactive sessions where the trainees can follow the instructions given by the teachers using software such as SPSS. Trainees can use the laptops providing they are not removed.

It is the responsibility of the trainee who has borrowed an item to ensure that it is returned to the programme. In the event that resources are not returned, the trainee who last borrowed the item will be financially liable to replace the item borrowed. Resources should not therefore be passed on to others for use and short-loan books need to be returned on the same day they are loaned out.

 

Trainee representatives

One of the trainees’ first tasks upon starting the programme is to decide on their cohort’s representatives for the Development and Implementation Groups and the Programme Board. The nomination process is a matter for the trainees themselves. It is worth looking at the terms of reference of the groups so that representatives will know what is required in terms of number of meetings attended and responsibilities.

Each cohort should decide on the election process, monitor the time the representative serves (usually between one and three years), and decide on appropriate procedures to communicate concerns to the representatives to bring to meetings, and to receive feedback following discussion.

Trainee involvement in selection

Trainees are vital to our inclusive selection process and take on a range a roles as colleagues on the DClinPsy programme. It is expected that trainees serve as selectors alongside programme staff and community stakeholders each year with dedicated teaching and training sessions provided to support trainees in their roles.

Although not all trainees can sit on a panel each year, the programme requires all trainees to make themselves available during selections when requested, and this is a requirement of their employment as a Trainee Clinical Psychologist.

Trainee email

It is now a programme requirement that you have and use a Lancaster University email address (this is automatically set up for you once you have completed all the registration details required by the University).

Once you have your Lancaster email address, you must email the address to Christina Pedder, Programme Assistant (Teaching) in the programme office. Christina’s email address is c.pedder@lancaster.ac.uk. Your email details will be shared with other trainees and programme staff. Programme staff email trainees frequently and it is essential that you check your university email account regularly.

Lancaster University have policies on the appropriate use of email which trainees should be aware of.

For any further questions regarding email access / queries

Search the Portal or access the Services menu on the Portal to get IT information. You can contact Information Systems Services (ISS) via the ISS help and support page

Email help from ISS

Programme staff

The programme has a dedicated staff team. Staff are also stakeholders of the programme, along with local clinicians, experts by experience, trainees, representatives from the employing body (Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust), commissioning body (NHS England), university and faculty representatives, and regional special interest groups. The programme works with all stakeholders in an effort to respond to local need and current training and practice issues.

A full list of programme staff is available on the Staff structure and line management document.

Programme office staff

The summary below shows the varied and numerous responsibilities of the administrative staff, and provides guidance on who should be approached regarding the main needs of trainees.

Katherine Thackeray

Programme Administrator
Email k.thackeray@lancaster.ac.uk

Katherine works part time Monday to Friday  and manages the running of the programme office and administrative team. You will mostly consult with Katherine regarding the following: –

  • Director business
  • Programme policies and procedures (advice and guidance, updates, access to etc)
  • Committee / Programme Board business
  • Trust HR liaison and paperwork
  • Queries and advice including pastoral care, disability issues, maternity leave and intercalation
  • Applications to attend a conference/access CPD funds and checking budget and entitlement (please note CPD expenditure is currently suspended in most cases)
  • University expense claims
  • Accommodation on placement
  • Selection and Admissions
  • Development and Implementation Group involvement
  • Fitness to Practise

Ruby Mitchell

Programme Assistant – Placements
Email ruby.mitchell@lancaster.ac.uk

Ruby works Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. You will mostly consult with Ruby regarding the following: –

  • Placement documentation and associated issues
  • Sick leave and other absences
  • LSCFT travel expenses
  • Changes to your personal details (address, phone number, email etc)
  • Printer computer photocopier guidance

Sarah Heard

Research Co-ordinator
Email s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk

Sarah works full time. You will mostly consult with Sarah regarding the following

  • Research documentation
  • Purchasing of resources required to carry out research, where approved by the Research Director
  • The loan of mobile phones from the course for research purposes
  • Advice regarding postal arrangements for sending out recruitment packs
  • Reimbursement of expenses incurred by participants
  • Letters in relation to ethics and R&D applications
  • Viva examinations and associated procedures

Rob Parker

Programme Assistant – Selections and Systems Development
Tel 92691
Email r.j.parker@lancaster.ac.uk

Rob works for the programme full time. You will mostly consult Rob regarding the following

  • Selection and Admissions
  • Annual Plan entries
  • Programme Website
  • Programme Handbook
  • Teaching matters on Wednesday afternoons
  • Access issues on MOODLE
  • DClinPsy social media accounts
  • Operational Management Group matters
  • Technical, equipment, and ICT support

Christina Pedder

Programme Assistant – Teaching
Email c.pedder@lancaster.ac.uk

Christina works Tuesdays, Wednesdays, Thursdays and Fridays and specialises in teaching matters. You will mostly consult with Christina regarding the following: –

  • Any issues relating to teaching including teaching programmes, arrangements and registers
  • Teaching feedback (Qualtrics)
  • Accessing personal therapies
  • Learning and Teaching Policy Group matters
  • Anti-Racism Accountability Group matters
  • Use and hire of departmental equipment and resources

Jen Whitfield

Programme Assistant – Academic
Email j.whitfield@lancaster.ac.uk

Jen works Monday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. You will mostly consult with Jen regarding the following: –

  • Submission of work, process and format, receipt of marks and feedback
  • Exam Board matters
  • Exceptional Circumstances Committee
  • Assessment Development and Implementation Group matters

Kate Swift

Programme Assistant – DClinPsy
Email k.swift2@lancaster.ac.uk

Kate works part time on Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. You will mostly consult with Kate regarding the following: –

Zarah Eve

LUPIN Administrator (Lancaster University Public Involvement Network)

Email z.eve@lancaster.ac.uk

Zarah works part time, on Mondays and Thursdays. You will mostly consult with Zarah regarding the following: –

  • LUPIN Development Implementation Group matters
  • Engagement of LUPIN members in research activities
  • EDI support

 Erin Skillicorn

Programme Assistant – DClinPsy

Email: e.skillicorn@lancaster.ac.uk

Erin works part time on Mondays and Thursdays. You will mostly consult with Erin regarding the following : –

  • Independent Learning Support Plans
  • Eportfolios
  • Clinical Psychology Service (for Lancaster Medical School)
  • Teaching support cover

Staff structure and line management

Programme Board

The principal role of the Programme Board is to provide strategic advice, drawn from a range of perspectives, on the continuing development of the Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology programme in accordance with the DClinPsy vision statement.

Responsibility

In order to deliver on its strategic remit the Programme Board will: –

  • Provide a forum for the exchange of information relevant to the delivery of the Programme between key stakeholders
  • Review and advise on the ongoing accreditation of the DClinPsy Programme with respect to the HCPC and the British Psychological Society
  • Review and advise on the Quality Monitoring Visit reports from the quarterly visits carried out by Health Education England and the responses made by the University
  • Highlight, consider and advise on the potential impact of emerging trends in the sector including national, regional or local NHS and higher education policy
  • Consider and advise on stakeholder feedback on the Programme and the resulting responses from the University

Membership

External perspectives: –

  • Consultant clinical psychologist as further representation of clinical psychology from the North West Region (external to LSCFT)
  • Service user representative (via Lancaster University Public Involvement Network (LUPIN))
  • Trainee representative from each cohort (including the bespoke pathways cohort)
  • Representative of Health Education England

On behalf of the Programme team: –

  • Programme Director (or his/her nominated deputy)
  • Clinical Director (or his/her nominated deputy)
  • Research Directors (or his/her nominated deputy)
  • Programme Administrator (or his/her nominated deputy)

University perspective: –

  • The Dean of FHM (or his/her nominated deputy)

Trust perspective: –

  • Associate Director for Psychological Professions from LSCFT (or his/her nominated deputy)

Policy on the use of continuing professional development (CPD) funds

Staff actively encourage trainees to develop professional interests and expertise via various means including attendance at external conferences, online training and accessing personal therapy. Therapy for continuing professional development differs from therapy that would be indicated by an occupational health referral. The latter concerns therapy accessed to address issues around capacity to practice whilst the former pertains to enhancing practice. To discuss further the first point of contact is Claire Anderson, Clinical Tutor, c.l.anderson@lancaster.ac.uk

There is a formal procedure for determining use of your funds, to maintain equity in the distribution of funding and to ensure financial accountability.

Applications should be submitted to Katherine Thackeray, Programme Administrator.

  • Trainees joining from 2022 onwards are entitled to a £500 budget over three years, this budget is called a ‘Training Budget’. This budget can be used for activities of the trainee’s choice, such as attendance at external conferences, online training, accessing personal therapy and must also cover research related expenses. Please see the research expenses section of the handbook for more detail on example expenses. £100 of this budget is ring fenced for the payment of experts by experience; this will pay for up to 5 hours of involvement in research in an advisory capacity (further information on the payment structure for this element). Plans for involving experts by experience should be discussed with your supervisor and cost implications agreed in advance.
  • Trainees in the 2019, 2020 and 2021 intakes are entitled to £400 over the three years. This budget can be used for activities of the trainee’s choice, such as attendance at external conferences, online training, accessing personal therapy and must also cover research related expensesPlease see the research expenses page of the handbook for more information on example expenses.
  • Money unspent at the end of training remains within the programme budget. It is not possible for money to be spent after the completion of the three years training, or for it to be used for books as these can be requested or accessed through the library. If the activity exceeds the budget the trainee is required to cover the excess.
  • Only in exceptional circumstances will programme staff allow attendance at a conference or non-programme activity if this involves missing part of the DClinPsy teaching programme (such as one-off conferences that are of specific relevance to the trainee’s individual learning needs, or events where the trainee will be presenting). If trainees wish to attend an event which clashes with DClinPsy teaching, they must agree to this with their individual tutor pair. In addition, the trainee should send apologies, in advance to the lecturer scheduled to deliver the teaching, assuming it has been agreed that they can miss that session. Ongoing commitments, such as personal therapy sessions should be scheduled within study time.
  • All trainees must submit the details of the CPD activity, and costs of attendance to the Programme Administrator. An application form (see appended) should be completed for each activity. Research related expenses, including expert by experience involvement, should be approved through the Research Coordinator instead.
    • Details should include promotional literature if applicable, dates of the event, and whether the trainee has gained the relevant approval (e.g. from a placement supervisor) to attend the event.
    • All rough costings must include, where relevant, fees and for conferences only travel accommodation and subsistence.
  • The Programme Administrator will organise the approval system and consult with tutor pairs as required.

2017 and 2018 intake:

The CPD entitlement depends on programme finances at the time of your entry to the programme: trainees joining in 2017 or 2018 are entitled to £300 over the three years.

Vitae

Lancaster University is a member of Vitae, so all staff and students have access, they just need to sign up using their university email. For some of the events this means a discount rather than free access, but the resources on the website are open access.

Vitae login page
About vitae
Application to access programme CPD funds

LSCFT travel expenses

The Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust expense claim form is available at the link below. You should complete a form at the end of each month and submit the form to George Silverwood, Programme Assistant. Travel expenses are accepted electronically. Trainees should email the claim form and photos/scans of any receipts.

The form will be checked and approved and then sent to Payroll at the Trust; in order for the form to be processed in time for your salary the following month, Payroll need to receive it by the 5th of each month (so please submit to the office in time to ensure this, otherwise, the travel claim will be held over for another month). You are only eligible to claim for travel within the past three months, so it is advisable to submit on a monthly basis.

Trainees must register their vehicle before submitting any claims to the Trust. This can be done by completing the car insurance form below and submitting it to the programme office together with a current insurance document which states that there is cover in place for business use.

LSCFT expense claim form
LSCFT car insurance form

LSCFT contacts and addresses

Website

www.lscft.nhs.uk

Head Office

Lancashire & South Cumbria Foundation Trust
Sceptre Point
Sceptre Way
Walton Summit
Preston
PR5 6AW

Payroll

Lancashire & South Cumbria Foundation Trust
PO Box 269
Chorley
PR7 1GZ

Tel: 01772 520629
payroll@lthtr.nhs.uk

Pensions

Tel: 01772 520628

Human Resources

HR Department
Sceptre Point
Sceptre Way
Walton Summit
Preston
PR5 6AW

Tel: 01772 773567

HR.Queries@lscft.nhs.uk

Programme staff only contact
Claire Keating
Employment Services Administrator
Employment Services Team, HR

Email: claire.keating@lscft.nhs.uk
Tel: 01772 773703

Health and Wellbeing / Occupational Health

All contact should be made via email
Email: wellservice4lscft@elht.nhs.uk

IM & T

General IT enquiries
Tel: 01772 695316
Email: it.helpdesk@lscft.nhs.uk

Smartcards Team
Tel:  01772 645756
E-mail: id.smartcards@lscft.nhs.uk

ESR & Health roster
Tel: 01772 520438
E-mail: workforce.systems@lscft.nhs.uk

If contacting them by email you will need to provide: –

  • Address (the university is your base)
  • Contact number
  • Directorate (state “hosted service”)
  • Computer name (only applicable if using a trust device)
  • Availability
  • Description of request

Conference and CPD expenses

Each trainee has a budget for the duration of training, which is to be used to cover CPD, such as attendance at conferences, research costs and also CAT formulation sessions (personal therapy). The budget depends on the year of entry to the programme.

Once your application to attend a conference, online training or personal therapy has been approved by Katherine Thackeray, Programme Administrator, she will provide a budget code for you to quote when submitting a request through the procurement portal to book your event and travel and accommodation if required. Please note that the procurement and travel teams need advance notice to process the booking, so allow plenty of time ahead of the event. The University finance team will no longer approve claiming back for events you paid for yourself, they have to go through the portal in advance.

Conference and course fees should be requested through the purchase order request (if you experience issues with this in specific circumstances the programme may be able to make payment on credit card).

For conference/cpd booking queries email: strategic.purchasing@lancaster.ac.uk

For any travel booking queries email: travel@lancaster.ac.uk

Any costs associated with during the event, such as meals and sundries, you can pay  yourself and claim it back electronically through the online student expenses system. Claims must be submitted within three months of the expenditure. Please see the Lancaster University student expenses web page for links to the expense policy and full details for making a claim in Agresso Web.

Please note that the Agresso icon will not appear on your desktop, but you can access the system via the web address (which is included in the help pages).

Receipts should be scanned or photographed and attached to the online claim. Please notify Katherine Thackeray of the expenses being claimed as these need to be deducted from your budget (you need to ensure you have sufficient unspent budget to cover the full cost of the claim). Please note alcohol will not be reimbursed.

Please contact Sarah Heard, Research Coordinator, for any research related costs (including expert by experience involvement).

Fees claimed are reimbursed direct into your bank account, so you need to register your bank account via the Lancaster University bank account nomination website.

Guide to claiming expenses through Agresso
Lancaster University bank account nomination

Peer support

The buddy system

One of the greatest forms of support reported by trainees is that provided by other trainees. Prior to starting the course each member of the new cohort is given the opportunity to be put in touch with a current first or second year who will act as a ‘buddy’ throughout the three years of training. The Chair of the Pastoral Development and Implementation Group coordinates the allocation of ‘buddies’.

On starting the programme there is an induction period, where trainees spend time face-to-face at the university  for teaching. This offers opportunity for peer support. There is normally a minimum of one day’s teaching each week throughout training where the trainee year group meets, either face-to-face or online. There are also extended teaching blocks at various points that tend to accompany placement changes. This again is an opportunity for peer support during periods of transition. In addition, it is often the case that several trainees will be on placement simultaneously with an individual supervisor or within a particular service. There are also opportunities for group supervision sessions with trainees from different cohorts, and these provide a good opportunity to share information about aspects of placement experience.

The peer supporter system

As well as the opportunity to be paired with a buddy when starting the programme, trainees can also access peer support at any point during their training when they think such support would be useful in relation to a specific issue. The idea of this peer supporter system is for trainees to be paired with another trainee who has experienced a similar issue themselves. Issues may be related to work/training e.g. when a trainee is being assessed for a disability and wants to speak to another trainee who has been through the disability assessment process or when a trainee has failed an assignment and wants to speak to a trainee who has previously failed the same assignment. Alternatively, issues may be more personal in nature, for example trainees who are experiencing mental health problems or physical health problems and would like support from someone else who has had similar difficulties, or trainees who are parents and want to speak to another trainee who is managing parenthood alongside training. Support can come from trainees in any year of training or from trainees who qualified from the programme in the previous year.

Becoming a peer supporter

A database is held of trainees who have volunteered to be peer supporters. To be added to the database trainees should contact the peer support co-ordinator, specifying any particular areas they may be able to offer support with where possible.

Accessing support from a peer supporter

When a trainee would like to access the peer supporter system, the process is as follows: –

  1. Trainee emails the peer support co-ordinator Claire Anderson (c.l.anderson@lancaster.ac.uk) seeking support for a particular issue.
  2. The peer support co-ordinator tries to match the trainee with a suitable peer supporter from the database.
  3. The peer support co-ordinator emails the peer supporter to check they would be happy to be contacted about that issue.
  4. If yes, the peer support co-ordinator will give the name and contact details of the peer supporter to the trainee seeing support so that they can decide to contact them directly.
  5. If it is not possible to identity a suitable peer supporter from the database, the peer support co-ordinator will ask whether the trainee would like a summary of the issue to be sent to all on the database with the hope of a peer supporter volunteering themselves to offer support. The co-ordinator would then pass on the name and contact details of the peer supporter to the trainee.

The peer support co-ordinator stores information about trainees on their computer and ensured it is password protected.

Pastoral Development and Implementation Group (PADIG)

The PADIG has a core membership consisting of:

  • Four members of the programme team (including at least one of each of the clinical team, the research team and the administrative team)
  • Two LUPIN members
  • One trainee from each cohort

The membership of the core group will be reviewed each year. The group may also co-opt additional members.

The group will meet at least three times per year. These meetings are booked in at the start of the academic year, with additional meetings arranged as needed. Meetings will only go ahead if at least three members are present, including the chair (or co-chair or deputy chair) and will usually last 1.5-2 hours.

Pastoral Development and Implementation Group Terms of Reference

External examiners

The programme has a number of standing external examiners who are appointed for a four year period. All standing external examiners are experienced clinical psychologists involved in training on other Doctorate in Clinical Psychology programmes and all are from the relevant part of the HCPC Register. The appointment process for external examiners is approved by the university. There are usually at least three external examiners involved in the programme.

The role of the external examiners can be summarised as follows:

  • Reviewing academic assignments and marking. External examiners are normally sent examples covering a range of performances and all assignments marked as a fail (at least five examples in total) for the first submission attempt for live skills assignments and the second submission attempt for broad skills assignments. Individual assignments are then commented on briefly and any general issues can be reported on by the external examiner at the relevant Exam Board. For pieces of work which markers have passed, the external examiner only comments on the marks and would not, except in exceptional circumstances, recommend a mark change. Where the internal markers cannot agree a mark or where there is a recommended fail grade, then the external examiner can change the mark recommended.
  • Reviewing placement assessments. External examiners are sent examples of the supervisor assessment of trainee (SAT) forms. Placement assessment is then commented on and any general issues can be reported at the relevant Exam Board.
  • Attendance at Exam Boards. At least one external examiner must attend each Exam Board to make it quorate. The role of the external examiner in this setting is to report on work they have reviewed, provide more general comments on progression/performance, make comments on Exam Board procedures and provide a view on issues of debate or contention.
  • Providing an annual report. Each external examiner is required to provide an annual report on their experience and where issues have been raised, these are replied to by the Head of DHR. Providing expert opinion. Where an exceptional Exam Board is called, an external examiner would be asked to attend to provide expert opinion on the assessments/processes carried out to that point.

Thesis External Examiners

External examiners are also specifically appointed for the examination of theses. These are usually separate from the standing external examiners, with examiners either being engaged for a period of up to four years to examine up to four theses per year,  or  otherwise engaged using one-off contracts with examiners being chosen for their expertise in an area relevant to the trainee’s thesis topic. Either the internal or external examiner must have a doctorate in clinical psychology. Appointments for thesis examining are approved at a university level and criteria need to be met regarding the appropriate level of research expertise of the examiners, the need to have an equivalent level of qualification (e.g., other doctorate level qualification) and their lack of significant prior contact with the trainee.

Additional information can be found in the notes of guidance on the appointment of external examiners below.

DClinPsy external examiner details
Guidance notes on the appointment of external examiners

Marking for the programme

2018 onwards assignments

This page refers to the marking of the new and current suite of assignments which were phased in with the 2018 cohort. The programme now operates a ‘Marker Pool’ to manage the marking of the assignments, more details can be found below.

Who can be a marker?

Markers are qualified clinical psychologists who have a current registration with the HCPC and who have been accepted as members of the Marker Pool. Prior to marking they undergo training in both the general processes of marking and of the specific assessment being marked. In order to maintain breadth of knowledge and expertise in the marker pool we look to have a broad balance of markers from different specialities and with experience in different therapeutic approaches. Enquiries/expressions of interest to apply to join the marker pool can be made via the marking inbox dclinpsymarking@lancaster.ac.uk. More information about how the Marker Pool works can be found in the document below together with information about the assignments marked and fee schedules.

Marker pool terms and conditions

pre-2018 assignments
This content refers to assignments which are being phased out. The last cohort to undertake these assignments are the 2017 cohort.

Who can be a marker?

Markers should be qualified clinical psychologists, hold a current registration with who have undergone training in the specific assessment being marked. We give preference to those who have specialist expertise in the subject or methods in the work being marked.

What do you have to do?

As there are only a small number of trainees on this schedule of assignments remaining, markers of the assignments listed below are now being invited to mark by invitation only based on their previous experiences of marking the assignment they are being invited to mark. If you would like to become a new marker for the programme – please contact dclinpsymarking@lancaster.ac.uk for more information and/or see the handbook webpage for marking assignments post 2018.

Service Related Project (SRP)

The trainees complete a small scale research project which they submit in the February of their second year of study.

Word count limit – 6,000
Rate of pay – £60 per script

Markers are required to:

  • Attend 1/2 day training
  • Mark scripts allowing 4 hours per script
  • Have discussion with fellow examiner regarding mark awarded (allowing approximately 30 minutes)

Systematic Literature Review

This is submitted in the July of the trainees’ first year of study.

Word count limit – 6,000 words
Rate of pay – £50 per script

Markers are required to:

  • Attend 1/2 day training
  • Mark scripts allowing 3-4 hours per script
  • Have discussion with fellow examiner regarding mark awarded (allowing approximately 30 minutes)

Professional Issues Assignment

The trainees submit this in the February of their first year of study.

For the PIA assignment: Word count limit – 2,500 words
Rate of pay – £40 per script

Markers are required to:

  • Attend 1/2 training day
  • Mark scripts allowing 2-3 hours per script
  • Have discussion with fellow examiner regarding mark awarded (allowing approximately 30 minutes)

Thesis

The trainees submit a thesis in the May of their final year of study. The viva examinations for the thesis take place in June and July.

Word count limit – 56,000 words.
Rate of pay – £165 per script

The requirements for the examination of the thesis differ from the above assignments. For this reason individuals are approached by the programme to mark them.

Mentoring scheme

Our hope is that trainees will establish mentoring relationships that will support their work related development needs and help to make training a valuable and manageable experience. Please note that mentoring is optional (but strongly encouraged) for trainees.

We recognised that what makes a mentoring relationship work for one mentee/mentor pair may be very different from another. Your mentoring relationship can be one that is shaped by you and focuses on what is important for you.

You can find guidelines for getting started with mentoring, information on how to develop a mentoring contract and an example template for the contract in the Getting started with Mentoring document.

Being a mentor

My initiation into being a mentor seemed to evolve quite naturally. Having been a trainee on the Lancaster programme, I have remained working in the north-west and have built up a number of links over the years through working in different departments. I was initially approached to be a mentor by a trainee I was supervising at the end of her placement with me…

Being aware of how precious time is as a trainee I have feel that it is important that mentoring sessions are useful and beneficial for the mentee. What’s useful can change throughout the process of training so flexibility is important…

Prospective mentors should complete the Mentor Pro-forma document.

Being a mentee

I’m a second year trainee, and I’ve had a mentor since my first month on the course. When the idea of a mentor, or personal tutor as it was then, was mentioned it sounded like something that would be really useful. I didn’t know any clinicians in the area though, and I was hesitant about just choosing someone off the list without knowing anything about them…

It was difficult to know where to start with approaching people at first. To narrow it down I decided to focus initially on people working in the same geographical area, thinking that might make it easier to meet around busy times such as deadlines…

In the early days I generally would reflect upon my experience of the course so far and enjoyed having a source separate from my peers with whom I could check out my experience. I often use my mentor as a sounding board for how I am finding things…

Further information and queries

For further information or for any mentoring related queries please contact Claire Anderson (Personal Development Clinical Tutor)

Getting started with Mentoring
Mentor Pro-forma

DClinPsy policy on use of mobile devices whilst driving

Using mobile phones in any capacity whilst driving leads to dramatically increased number of driver errors, andresults in a four-fold increase in the likelihood of being involved in a road traffic accident (e.g. Violanti & Marshall, 1996). The Royal Society for the Prevention of Accidents (ROSPA – 2004)  assessed the risk of using  mobile phones whilst driving and concluded that using hands free technology impaired  driving performance and that “the risk of being involved in a collision was four times higher when using a…hands-free phone than when not using one”. A more recent review of the research also suggests that a driver’s performance whilst using a mobile phone with hands-free technology is rarely any better than when holding the device (Lipovac, Ðeric, Tešic, Andric & Maric, 2017). The evidence indicates that use of a mobile phone whilst driving is more dangerous than holding a conversation with someone who is present in the car (e.g. Ishigami & Klein, 2009).

Lancaster University policy states that staff must not use hand-held mobile phones and similar devices whilst driving, including whilst in a stationary vehicle with the engine running. In line with the research evidence this DClinPsy policy goes further, and directs all staff and trainees during their working day not to either initiating or respond to calls on hand-held devices whilst driving even if a hands-free function is available, except in exceptional circumstances.

Furthermore, staff and trainees should not participate in phone conversations with another party who is driving, even if hands-free technology is in use. If when making or receiving a mobile phone call a trainee or staff member is informed or suspects the other party may be driving, then they should clarify this and immediately suspend any call which would breach this policy until the other party is no longer driving.

Ishigami, Y., Klein, R. (2009). Is a hands-free phone safer than a handheld phone?, Journal of safety research 40 (2), 157-164, ISSN 0022-4375.

Krsto Lipovac, Miroslav Đerić, Milan Tešić, Zoran Andrić, Bojan Marić (2017). Mobile phone use while driving-literary review. Transportation Research Part F: Traffic Psychology and Behaviour (47), 132-142.

Royal Society for the Prevention of Accidents (2004). The Risk of Using a Mobile Phone While Driving. Birmingham: ROSPA Retrieved from www.rospa.com/rospaweb/docs/advice-services/road-safety/drivers/mobile-phone-report.pdf

Violanti, J., Marshall, J. (1996). Cellular phones and traffic accidents: an epidemiological approach. Accident, analysis & prevention 28 (2), 265-70.

Other useful references  from the charity ‘Brake

Asbridge M1, Brubacher JR, Chan H., Cell phone use and traffic crash risk: a culpability analysis, Department of Community Health and Epidemiology, Dalhousie University, Halifax, Nova Scotia, Canada

Briggs et al. (2016) ‘Imagery-inducing distraction leads to cognitive tunnelling and deteriorated driving performance’, Transportation Research Part F, 38: 106-117.

Gaspar, J. et al (2014), Providing views of the driving scene to driver conversation partners mitigates cell-phone-related distraction

McEvoy, P. et al (2005), Role of mobile phones in motor vehicle crashes resulting in hospital attendance: a case-crossover study, University of Western Australia

Strayer, D. et al (2015), Measuring cognitive distraction in the automobile III, University of Utah, for AAA Foundation for traffic safety, 2015

TRL (2008) The effect of text messaging on driver behaviour: a simulator study

Teaching, learning and assessment strategy

Curriculum Guidance

The curriculum is informed by a wide range of guidance, which includes the following:

  • HCPC Standards of Education & Training
  • HCPC Standards of Proficiency
  • Standards for the accreditation of Doctoral programmes in clinical psychology (BPS document)
  • BPS accreditation through partnership handbook
  • BPS accreditation through partnership additional guidance for clinical psychology training programmes: The Ten Essential Shared Capabilities
  • BPS Generic Professional Practice Guidelines
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Professional Practice Guidelines
  • Clinical Psychology – a quick guide to the profession and its training
  • Clinical Psychology: The core purpose and philosophy of the profession (BPS Division of Clinical Psychology)
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guide :Service User and Carer Involvement within Clinical Psychology Training
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines: Training in Forensic Clinical Psychology
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology Training Providers for the Training and Consolidation of Clinical Practice in Relation to People with Learning Disabilities
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology for Training Providers – Training and consolidation of clinical practice in relation to children and young people
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology Training Providers for the Training and Consolidation of Clinical Practice in Relation to Older People
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology Training Providers. Training and Consolidation of Clinical Practice in Clinical Health Psychology.
  • BPS Division of Neuropsychology Competency Framework for the UK Clinical Neuropsychology Profession.
  • NHS National Service Frameworks
  • NHS Knowledge & Skills Framework
  • QAA Benchmark statement Healthcare programmes – Clinical Psychology.
  • Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, ‘Code of practice for the assurance of academic quality and standards in higher education’
  • Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, ‘A framework for higher education qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland’
  • National Qualifications Framework in England, Wales and Northern Ireland
  • Disability Discrimination Act 1995
  • Human Rights Act 1998
  • Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974, and associated regulations
  • The Children Act 2004
  • Selection of Clinical Psychologist Trainees Job Analysis Final Report
  • Lancaster University DClinPsy programme vision statement
  • Input from stakeholders (including local employers, trainees, service users and carers, Health Education England) through the programme’s stakeholder events, and stakeholder representation on programme policy groups.
  • Current NICE guidance. In relation to Risk, teachers are required to explicitly teach the NICE Guideline on Self harm: assessment, management and preventing recurrence.

Curriculum Strategy & Aspirations

Overview

The programme strives to provide a holistic experience of training that enables trainees to develop an integrated set of skills that meet the programme learning outcomes. It aims to provide a balanced and developmental set of clinical, academic and research experiences throughout the three years of training.

Placements

The clinical component aims to produce clinicians with a breadth of experience and a range of transferable as well as some specialist skills. To this end clinical experience is gained in service delivery systems that offer a coherent clinical context, oriented towards a population defined by age (e.g. child, adult, older people), by special needs (e.g. learning disabilities, serious mental health problems, health-related problems, substance abuse) or by a service delivery focus (e.g. psychological therapy). In addition, clinical experience is gained in a range of service contexts (primary, secondary and tertiary care, in-patient, out-patient, community), with service delivery models ranging from independently organised work through to integrated inter-professional working. Placement experiences within third sector and other contexts where there is a focus on community mapping and engagement are also increasingly being developed and undertaken by trainees.

The programme aims to promote a diverse range of clinical psychology practice and give trainees exposure to a wide variety of therapeutic models. The programme encourages flexibility in approach, adapting working to meet the needs of individual clients and in integrating theory into practice. The programme aims to produce clinicians who have a keen awareness of context, diversity and power issues, who are able to collaborate and work effectively with colleagues but who are able to work as drivers rather than simply followers of NHS policy. The programme aims to produce clinicians who understand the relationship between clinical psychology and the wider health and social policy agenda whilst also having an awareness of the current needs and realities within the health service.

Academic

The academic component provides an integrated curriculum supporting the training. The research training has sufficient time devoted to it to enable trainees to conduct research at a doctoral level and to be in a position to contribute to the knowledge base of the profession.

The programme seeks to provide an environment that encourages the pursuit of knowledge that informs clinical practice. The body of knowledge and contexts within which clinical psychologists work is broad, and so the programme’s assessments aim to provide trainees with some degree of choice in terms of the subject matter they present whilst still ensuring that trainees who complete the assessed components of the programme will have shown competencies that indicate that they meet the HCPC Standards of Proficiency.

Service Users

Service user involvement is considered a vital aspect of the curriculum. Service users not only provide regular contributions to the teaching delivered, but are also involved in a number of other roles including acting as consultants as trainees develop their research project ideas, and, shortly, involvement in the planning and strategic development of learning and teaching as member of teaching strand teams.

Delivery of learning and teaching experiences

Teaching and learning on most of the programme is designed specifically for clinical psychology trainees. To ensure that teaching is as relevant as possible to current practice and is based on the most up-to-date evidence, much of the teaching is delivered by practising clinical psychologists. Teaching is also delivered by other health and social services professionals, as well as users of services and other experts by experience. The majority of teaching on communication skills, research skills and personal development and reflection is delivered by members of the programme staff.

Programme staff work in small teams to plan and co-ordinate teaching within the nine thematic ‘strands’ that run throughout the three years of training, and these staff liaise closely with external teachers to ensure the learning experience for trainees is coherent and consistent. Learning and Teaching activities are designed to work towards the programme’s Learning and Teaching Vision. The programme also runs occasional ‘good practice in teaching’ workshops for all those who teach for the programme.

The DClinPsy is approved by university as a programme using the ‘standard’ (face to face) mode of delivery, and for this reason and for reasons of best pedagogic practice given the content, the vast majority of teaching is delivered by face-to-face means only. Within this the format of teaching is varied, adopting a broad range of approaches, often within a single teaching session. Teaching is mostly delivered in ‘whole day’ (5 hours) or ‘half day’ (2.5 hours) sessions which will usually include a combination of delivery modes including such elements as didactic presentations, small and large group discussion, workshop exercises, role-play and use the use of audio-visual materials as appropriate. The programme issues guidance to teachers on the production of teaching materials to maximise their accessibility to any trainees with visual impairment or dyslexia.

Guidance on document and slide preparation

Learning and Teaching Development and Implementation Group (LATDIG)

The Learning & Teaching Development and Implementation Group (LATDIG) is a forum for planning, reviewing and developing all learning and teaching on the programme both on a block-to-block basis and at a broader strategic level. The DIG meets four times per year for two hours per meeting. The DIG comprises the lead member of each teaching strand, the Senior Clinical Tutor for Curriculum and their deputy, relevant administrative staff, and public and trainee stakeholder representatives.

Learning and Teaching Development and Implementation Group Terms of Reference

Guidance on Assignment Submission

This guidance relates to the preparation of all documents except the thesis

In this guide

General Guidance on submissions

All written coursework for the programme needs to be submitted online via the University’s Moodle virtual learning environment. This page provides a guide to let you know how to prepare and make your submissions, and tells you what happens after they are submitted.

If you have a specific learning difficulty

You have the opportunity to highlight this to markers. More information on marking in relation to a specific learning disability is available in the online handbook.

Submitting on time

The standard deadlines for the submission of each assignment in the current academic year can be found in the programme’s annual plan and on the assignment suite overview. These deadlines will apply to you unless your deadline has been changed as the result of an approved extension or an individual training plan review. The deadline will always be at 9.30am on the day identified.

It is very important to submit work before your deadline for each assignment. The deadline policy is strict and there are severe penalties for submitting work late. After a deadline has passed you can still submit work on Moodle for another 72 hours, but anything submitted will have ten marks deducted (for trainees in 2017 cohort and earlier) or will result in a concern being raised (for trainees in the 2018 cohort onwards). It is not possible to submit work more than 72 hours after a deadline, and if work is not submitted then a fail mark will be given. More details on the consequences of late submission and the criteria for and process of applying for extensions can be found in the programme’s deadline policy pages.

Things you must NOT do

  1. Include identifiers in your written work. See the page on identifiers in assessed work for details.
  2. Plagiarise any part of your assignment. See the programme plagiarism policy for details.

Making a complete submission

For your submission to be accepted, all the required elements need to be included. It is your responsibility to make sure your submission is complete. Until a complete submission is made it isn’t counted, and programme staff only check whether submissions are complete after the deadline for submission has passed. This means that if you don’t make a complete submission first time around, you are likely to be penalised for lateness.

Here are details of what a submission for each assignment must include to be considered complete:

Assignments for 2018 cohort onwards

Self- Assessment Exercise written report (SAE)

  • A title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count (please state this for part 1 and part 2 of the SAE form separately) and trainee number
  • SAE form with appendices attached as set out within the SAE form

Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA)

  • TPA assignment document
    • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count (max 4,500), trainee number, title of the TPA
    • The main body of the literature review
    • A completed thesis proposal (1,500 words)
    • The TPA Review Topic form (as approved by assignment co-ordinator)
  • Thesis proposal (same version as in the assignment document)

Placement Assignment – Live Skills 1, 2 & 3 (PALS)

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count (for each section), trainee number and assignment title
  • The report
  • Completed clinical recording submission form
  • 30 minute (minimum) video or audio clip securely uploaded to the trainee’s BOX folder
  • Confirmation of appropriate consent being obtained must be separately submitted by the relevant placement supervisor

Placement Assignment – Service Evaluation (PASE)

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count, trainee number, title of the PASE
  • The report
  • The PASE proposal form
  • Documentary confirmation from the relevant NHS R&D department that the work included in the report will be classified as a service evaluation
  • Any relevant protocols, participant information sheets or other materials either used during the conduct of the project or submitted to the R&D department to gain approval
Assignments for 2017 cohort and earlier

Professional Issues Assignment (PIA)

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count, trainee number and PIA title
  • The assignment
  • Completed Professional Issues suitability form

Placement Presentation and Report Initial Reports (PPR1IRa, PPR1IRb, PPR2IRa, PPR2IRb) – for trainees who commenced training prior to 2015

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including title, word count, PPR number and assignment title
  • The Report

Please note that your supervisor must also email the programme with a form providing confirmation that you have obtained appropriate consent for the initial report with the title you have submitted before you will be allowed to give your PPR presentation.

Placement Presentation & Report main report (PPR1 & PPR2) – for trainees who commenced training prior to 2015

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count, unique PPR trainee number and PPR title
  • PPR main report

Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Standardised Role Play Simulation (DACS-SRPS)

  • No submission requirements – trainee has to be present for the assessment process
  • If trainee is absent on the day of the role play evidence such as a fit note must be presented as to the reason for the absence in line with university examination processes

Direct Assessment of Clinical Skills – Placement Portfolio (DACS-PP)

Assessment & Action Plan (AAP1-4)

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below)
  • including word count, trainee number and AAP title
  • The AAP report

Please note that your supervisor must also email the programme with a form providing confirmation that you have obtained appropriate consent for the AAP. Without this form trainee work will not be sent out for marking.

Clinical Recording (CR)

  • Submission of 30 minute recording and Clinical Recording submission form to the designated folder within the Box encrypted online storage system
  • Optionally, a written factual context statement of up to 300 words to accompany the recording

Clinical Recording Report (CRR)

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count, trainee number and CRR title
  • The report

Please note that your supervisor must also email the programme with a form providing confirmation that you have obtained appropriate consent for the CR and CRR. Without this form trainee work will not be sent out for marking.

Systematic Literature Review (SLR)

  • Title page (set out in accordance with the guidance provided below) including word count, trainee number, title of the SLR and name of intended journal
  • The main body of the review
  • The SLR proposal form
  • Dissemination strategy
  • Guidance on submission to the specific journal

Service-related research project (SRP)

The SRP should be submitted as two files. The first file must be in MS Word format and be double line spaced. The file should contain:

  • Title page including word count, trainee number, title of SRP
  • Main body of the SRP (including the dissemination strategy and ethical reflections)

The second file should contain:

  • Ethics materials, including protocol, ethics form(s), participant sheets etc.
  • Approval letters or emails from ethics committees and/or R&D committees

Further queries

If you have any further queries about the content of submissions, then please ask the relevant assignment coordinator. These are:

  • SLR: Ian Smith
  • SRP: Fiona Eccles/Ian Smith
  • PIA: Richard Slinger
  • PPR & DACS: Emma Munks

Getting the right layout

General Presentation

Apart from specific exceptions (e.g. the SAE), trainees are required to submit their written work in APA (American Psychological Association) style. This includes all citation and referencing. Copies of the latest APA manual are available from the DClinPsy library resources. The APA style website also gives lots of advice.

The 2021 cohort and later cohorts should use APA 7th edition. The 2020 cohort and earlier cohorts may use APA 6th or 7th edition, but the style chosen should be stated on the assignment cover sheet.

APA 6th recommends 12-point Times New Roman. APA 7th allows a variety of fonts including sans serif fonts 11-point Calibri, 11-point Arial, or 10-point Lucida Sans Unicode and serif fonts such as 12-point Times New Roman, 11-point Georgia, or normal (10-point) Computer Modern. The programme’s choice in its documents is 12-point Trebuchet. The text should be black on a white background. Use at least 1.5 line spacing for the main body of text. Tables can be 1.5 spaced or single spaced

The guides in the appendices below give general guidance on the use of APA referencing.

The Title Page

The title page should include the following aspects:

  • Title – all submissions should have a title descriptive of the specific content (e.g. NOT just ‘PALS1 initial report’, but ‘PALS1 Initial report regarding work with a staff team around a client with anxiety difficulties’)
  • Trainee number – your trainee number is provided by the programme, it is not your university ID number
  • Word count – this must be accurate and work will be returned to you if it is over the word limit (or if it claims to be over the limit), even by one word. Like completeness, we only check this after the deadline, so this is another way of being penalised for lateness. For assignments that have separate word limits for specific sections you must list the word count for each section here.
  • You might also wish to have a running head and some further detail (name of assignment, place of study) but this is not essential.

Making sure your file isn’t too large

All assignments should be submitted as a single file. It is important that you make sure all files that you submit are no larger than 10MB in size. You will not be able to submit a file over 20MB via Moodle as this is the maximum file size for the system. It is your responsibility to ensure your assignment is small enough to be submitted on time.

Below are some ways for reducing the size of your files and for merging multiple PDF and Word documents into one.

Scanning documents

Wherever possible we recommend that you use electronic documents to avoid the need to scan. If necessary, the multifunction printers in the Furness building can scan documents and email them to you. You can change resolution settings when scanning to obtain the smallest possible file size. However, smaller text may not be easily legible. If you have this problem, you should increase the darkness of scan while keeping the other settings.

Ensuring images in Microsoft Word are optimised

Images will significantly increase the file size of your document if they are not appropriately optimised. This is particularly the case where scanned documents are inserted as images. If you are using images, the following process will reduce their impact as much as possible.

  1. Click on a picture in your document
  2. On the Picture toolbar, click the Compress Pictures button (it’s the one with arrows at all four corner)
  3. In the Compress Pictures dialog box, you are presented with options for the way Word handles your images. The target output for email (96ppi) will give the smallest file size
  4. To apply your changes to all the pictures in your document, click the button beside All pictures in document in the Apply to section

Saving as a PDF from Microsoft Word at minimum size

If you are outputting your Word document as a PDF so that you can merge it with other PDF documents for a submission, the following steps will tell Word to ensure the size is kept to a minimum.

  1. Click on the File tab and choose “Save As”
  2. Choose “PDF” from the “Save as type” dropdown menu
  3. Under the “Optimise for” option choose “Minimum Size (publishing online)”

Further reducing the size of PDF files

Once you have a PDF, you can further reduce its size by using Adobe Acrobat DC which is provided via the Cloudpaging player.

  1. Open Adobe Acrobat DC
  2. Open the PDF file you want to reduce in size
  3. Click on the File menu and choose Save As -> Reduced Size PDF
  4. Choose to make the PDF compatible with Version 9 and save the file
  5. More advanced settings to reduce the file size further can be accessed in Acrobat Pro by choosing to save your file as an “Optimised PDF” from the “Save As” menu.

Combining multiple PDF files

If you have a number of PDF files which you need to combine into a single document, this can be done easily with Adobe Acrobat DC.

  1. Open Adobe Acrobat DC
  2. Click on the File menu and choose “Create”
  3. Choose “Combine Files into a Single PDF”
  4. Drag and drop the files you want to merge into the window (or use the add files button)
  5. Move them into the order you want them when merged and click on “Combine Files”

Combining multiple Microsoft Word files

If you have a number of Word documents which you wish to combine into a single document, this can be done easily within Word.

  1. Open the document you want to merge another into
  2. Place your cursor at the place to add the document
  3. Click on the Insert tab on the ribbon
  4. Click on the Object button in the “Text” group
  5. Choose “Text from File…” and select your Word document which contains the content to add

Uploading your submission to Moodle

Please name your file in the following format before uploading it:

[Trainee Number]+[Assignment name]+[Month & Year] (e.g. 2201PALS1February2018.docx)

To make your electronic submission, you should log in to Moodle and click on the link for the Doctorate in Clinical Psychology VLE section and then the assignment submission area.

You will see the name of the assignment, which has a TurnItIn icon next to it. After clicking on the assignment you are presented with the Summary page outlining the name of the assignment. To submit your assignment, you should now click on the tab labelled “Add Submission”.

Drag and drop the file to submit. You must tick to accept the declaration in the form before clicking the Add Submission button.

If you have queries about the technical elements of the submission then please email Jen Whitfield (Programme Assistant – Academic).

Potential problems using software not controlled by Lancaster University / NHS

The Programme are aware that a variety of software bugs exist in common office programs, some of which have the potential to cause problems with assignments submitted via Moodle.

These problems can include the omission of spacing and other formatting requirements which can then adversely affect marks on specific competencies relating to written communication etc.

It is your responsibility to ensure that any software used, which is not controlled by Lancaster University or the NHS, is fully patched to minimise these difficulties. This would typically involve ensuring that all service packs and security updates available from the relevant software vendors are applied. Both Lancaster University and the NHS have an automated procedure in place to ensure that the latest update for centrally distributed software, such as Microsoft Office, is applied to all onsite machines.

All submissions to the programme should be checked by you prior to uploading to Moodle to ensure that the document is as expected. The responsibility for the quality of a submission lies with you and it is not possible to re-submit an assignment after the given deadline if it later appears that formatting changes have occurred.

After submission

Once submitted, the assignment will appear on the current page, showing it has been added to the system successfully. You can download the current assignment you have submitted by clicking on the download icon on the “My Submissions” page.

After we receive the submission, we will process it using Turnitin. This is an on-line software plagiarism detection programme which analyses each piece of work and checks to see whether parts of it can be found anywhere on the internet, in academic articles or other texts, or in any previously submitted coursework by other students from around the world . It produces a report for each piece of work, highlighting any parts that match anything found on the internet, and indicating where the original text can be found. More information is available in the programme’s plagiarism policy.

Once assignments have been checked, they are sent out to be marked. Following marking some are also sent out for moderation by the programme’s external examiners. From 2018 cohort onwards assignment outcomes and feedback will be sent to trainees prior to the moderation by the external examiners. The marks for all assignments are ratified via the programme’s examination board, and trainees notified of their ratified mark.

Assignment submission dates
Change to submission terminology, assignment support and responsibilities
APA style: a general guide
APA 7 quick reference guide
Clinical Recording submission form
Specimen title page

Structure of Teaching and Placements

2021 intake onwards

Full time route

This table gives a typical outline of the full-time programme as it develops over the three years for each student. The full-time programme structure normally follows this format, although more individualised training plans may become necessary for some trainees.

All Teaching belongs to both a ‘block’ which reflects the current placement and assessment activities the trainee is conducting at that point in the programme, and a thematic ‘strand’ that develops learning over the three years of training.

Clinical Activity Self-directed study time Teaching ‘blocks’:
YEAR ONE
Sept – Oct none 1 day per week Induction teaching programme
Oct – Dec Community Engagement block – trainee engage with local communities in groups 1 day per week Mostly aimed at direct working

– 2 days per week

Jan – Sept Direct working focused placement 1 day per week Mostly aimed at direct working – 1 day per week
YEAR TWO
Oct – Dec Project block – trainees engage in group service development activity 1 day per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
Jan – Sep Indirect working focused placement 1 day per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
YEAR THREE
Oct – Dec Community Psychology activity block 1 day per week. From October until thesis hand in (March) there are 30 additional bookable study days which trainees may take in a flexible manner as best suits their research needs. This needs to be discussed and agreed in advance with research and clinical tutors as well as third year placement supervisors. Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership.  1 day per week
Jan- Aug Influencing and leadership-focussed placement 1 day per week until the end of May, then one day per fortnight from the start of June through to the end of the training contract Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership. 1 day per week until the end of May, then one day per fortnight from the start of June through to the end of the training contract.
Teaching thematic ‘strands’: Teaching that forms part of each strand listed take place across the three years of training.
  • Assignment Preparation
  • Therapy – Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
  • Therapy – Systemic Practice
  • Therapy – Cognitive Analytic Therapy
  • Professional Influencing
  • Leadership
  • Physical Health & Cognitive Development
  • Quality Assurance
  • Research
  • Themes of Clinical Practice

Through the three-year training, trainees acquire core competencies that span the roles expected of a clinical psychologist. These not only relate to the ability to work individually and with other key professionals and carers, with clients across the life span, across client ability and in a range of clinical settings, but also include skills in leadership, consultancy and service development.

This competency acquisition is achieved through organising teaching so that it reflects the focus of trainee placements and assessed work activity at any given point of the programme. However, learning and teaching is also co-ordinated thematically in ‘strands’ to ensure a coherent developmental approach. More detail on the strands can be found in the document below.

The programme specifically enables students to develop academic and research competencies at a level commensurate with a doctoral level degree and related to those skills and abilities necessary to have the Standards of Proficiency (SoP) for a clinical psychologist as set out by the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC). Within work during placements, as well as academic activity outside of placements, the programme fosters students’ ability to appraise evidence critically and modify practice appropriately.

Part time route

This table gives a typical outline of the part time programme as it develops over the 4 years and 4 months for each student. The part time programme structure normally follows this format, although more individualised training plans may become necessary for some trainees.

All Teaching belongs to both a ‘block’ which reflects the current placement and assessment activities the trainee is conducting at that point in the programme, and a thematic ‘strand’ that develops learning over the 4 years 4 months of training.

Clinical Activity Self-directed study time Teaching ‘blocks’:
YEAR ONE
Sept – Oct none 0.5 days per week Induction teaching programme
Oct – Dec Community Engagement block – trainee engage with local communities in groups 0.5 days per week Mostly aimed at direct working

– 2 days per week

Jan – Sept Direct working focused placement 0.5 days per week Mostly aimed at direct working – 1 day per week
YEAR TWO
Oct – Jan Direct working focused placement 0.5 days per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
Feb – May Project block – trainees engage in group service development activity 1 day per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
June None Thesis study 2.5 days per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
July – Sep Indirect working focused placement Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
YEAR THREE
Oct – August Indirect working focused placement 1-1.5 days per week Occasional Professional Development and cross-cohort teaching
YEAR FOUR
Sep None Thesis study 2.5 days per week None
Oct – Dec Community Psychology activity block 0.5 days per week Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership. One day per week through to May, then one day per fortnight
Jan – Aug Influencing and leadership-focussed placement 0.5 days per week Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership. One day per week through to May, then one day per fortnight
YEAR FOUR
Sep -Dec Influencing and leadership-focussed placement 1 day per week None
Teaching thematic ‘strands’: Teaching that forms part of each strand listed take place across the three years of training.
  • Assignment Preparation
  • Therapy – Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
  • Therapy – Systemic Practice
  • Therapy – Cognitive Analytic Therapy
  • Professional Influencing
  • Leadership
  • Physical Health & Cognitive Development
  • Quality Assurance
  • Research
  • Themes of Clinical Practice

Through the four-year 4-month training, trainees acquire core competencies that span the roles expected of a clinical psychologist. These not only relate to the ability to work individually and with other key professionals and carers, with clients across the life span, across client ability and in a range of clinical settings, but also include skills in leadership, consultancy and service development.

This competency acquisition is achieved through organising teaching so that it reflects the focus of trainee placements and assessed work activity at any given point of the programme. However, learning and teaching is also co-ordinated thematically in ‘strands’ to ensure a coherent developmental approach. More detail on the strands can be found in the document below.

The programme specifically enables students to develop academic and research competencies at a level commensurate with a doctoral level degree and related to those skills and abilities necessary to have the Standards of Proficiency (SoP) for a clinical psychologist as set out by the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC). Within work during placements, as well as academic activity outside of placements, the programme fosters students’ ability to appraise evidence critically and modify practice appropriately.

2020 intake and earlier

Full time route

This table gives a typical outline of the full-time programme as it develops over the three years for each student. The full-time programme structure normally follows this format, although more individualised training plans may become necessary for some trainees.

All Teaching belongs to both a ‘block’ which reflects the current placement and assessment activities the trainee is conducting at that point in the programme, and a thematic ‘strand’ that develops learning over the three years of training.

Clinical Placement: Self-directed study time Teaching ‘blocks’: From April of year one teaching takes place one day each week at University base.
YEAR ONE
Sept – Oct Induction teaching programme
Oct – Mar Children and families
(3 days per week)
1 day per week Mostly aimed at working with children and families.
Apr – Sept Adult mental health
(3 days per week)
1 day per week Mostly aimed at working with adults with mental health problems
YEAR TWO
Oct – Mar Older adults, health psychology or neuropsychology
(3 days per week)
1 day per week Mostly aimed at working with older adults and within health psychology
Apr – Sep Learning disabilities
(3 days per week)
1 day per week Mostly aimed at working with adults with learning disabilities
YEAR THREE
Oct – Aug One long third year placement (3 days per week until May, 4 days per week thereafter) 1 day per week until the end of May, then one day per fortnight from the start of June through to the end of the training contractFrom October until thesis hand in there are 30 additional study days which trainees may take in a flexible manner as best suits their research needs. This needs to be discussed and agreed in advance with research and clinical tutors as well as third year placement supervisors. Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice – 1 day per week until the end of May, then one day per fortnight from the start of June through to the end of the training contract
Teaching thematic ‘strands’: Teaching that forms part of each strand listed take place across the three years of training.
  • Assignment Preparation
  • Therapy – Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
  • Therapy – Systemic Practice
  • Therapy – Cognitive Analytic Therapy
  • Professional Influencing
  • Leadership
  • Physical Health & Cognitive Development
  • Quality Assurance
  • Research
  • Themes of Clinical Practice

Through the three-year training, trainees acquire core competencies that span the roles expected of a clinical psychologist. These not only relate to the ability to work individually and with other key professionals and carers, with clients across the life span, across client ability and in a range of clinical settings, but also include skills in leadership, consultancy and service development.

This competency acquisition is achieved through organising teaching so that it reflects the focus of trainee placements and assessed work activity at any given point of the programme. However, learning and teaching is also co-ordinated thematically in ‘strands’ to ensure a coherent developmental approach. More detail on the strands can be found in the document below.

The programme specifically enables students to develop academic and research competencies at a level commensurate with a doctoral level degree and related to those skills and abilities necessary to have the Standards of Proficiency (SoP) for a clinical psychologist as set out by the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC). Within work during placements, as well as academic activity outside of placements, the programme fosters students’ ability to appraise evidence critically and modify practice appropriately.

Part time route

This table gives a typical outline of the part time programme as it develops over the 4 years and 4 months for each student. The part time programme structure normally follows this format, although more individualised training plans may become necessary for some trainees.

All Teaching belongs to both a ‘block’ which reflects the current placement and assessment activities the trainee is conducting at that point in the programme, and a thematic ‘strand’ that develops learning over the 4 years 4 months of training.

Clinical Placement: Self-directed study time Teaching ‘blocks’: From Oct of year one teaching takes place one day each week at University base.
Sept Yr 1– Oct Yr 1 Induction teaching programme
Oct Yr 1 – June Yr 1 Children and families
(2 days per week)
0.5 day per week Mostly aimed at working with children and families.
July Yr 1 – March Yr 2 Adult mental health
(2 days per week)
0.5 – 1.5 day per week Mostly aimed at working with adults with mental health problems
April Yr 2– Nov Yr 3 Learning Disabilities
(3 days per week)
0.5 day per week Mostly aimed at working with adults with learning disabilities
Dec Yr 3 – Oct Yr 4 Older adults, health or neuropsychology
(3 days per week)
0.5 – 1.5 day per week Mostly aimed at working with older adults and within health psychology.

No teaching March – Aug to allow for thesis study.

Nov Yr 4 – Dec Yr 5 One long third year placement 0.5 day per week until Aug, then 0.5 day per fortnight. There are 30 additional study days which trainees may take in a flexible manner as best suits their research needs; this includes the additional study time between March and Aug during the previous placement – see above. This needs to be discussed and agreed in advance with research and clinical tutors as well as third year placement supervisors. Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice – one day per week Aug until end of Aug the following year
Teaching thematic ‘strands’: Teaching that forms part of each strand listed take place across the three years of training. ·        Assignment Preparation

  • Therapy – Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
  • Therapy – Systemic Practice
  • Therapy – Cognitive Analytic Therapy
  • Professional Influencing
  • Leadership
  • Physical Health & Cognitive Development
  • Quality Assurance
  • Research

·        Themes of Clinical Practice

Through the four year 4 month training, trainees acquire core competencies that span the roles expected of a clinical psychologist. These not only relate to the ability to work individually and with other key professionals and carers, with clients across the life span, across client ability and in a range of clinical settings, but also include skills in leadership, consultancy and service development.

This competency acquisition is achieved through organising teaching so that it reflects the focus of trainee placements and assessed work activity at any given point of the programme. However, learning and teaching is also co-ordinated thematically in ‘strands’ to ensure a coherent developmental approach. More detail on the strands can be found in the document below.

The programme specifically enables students to develop academic and research competencies at a level commensurate with a doctoral level degree and related to those skills and abilities necessary to have the Standards of Proficiency (SoP) for a clinical psychologist as set out by the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC). Within work during placements, as well as academic activity outside of placements, the programme fosters students’ ability to appraise evidence critically and modify practice appropriately.

Brief description and key to strands of teaching

Quality assurance of teaching

Overview

The quality and appropriateness of teaching is monitored in several ways. When planning the teaching programme, strand teams and teachers agree a plan for each teaching session which takes account of the content and methods to be used, and indicates which learning outcomes each of these aim to focus on addressing.

Peer Observation

The programme uses a system of peer and stakeholder observation of teaching.

There are minimum requirements for permanent staff members to be peer-observed regularly, and staff are encouraged to discuss feedback they have received during their annual appraisal. A sample of teaching delivered by external teachers is also peer observed each year. Feedback from the peer review process is collated and disseminated by the curriculum tutor for the programme.

More information is available in the Peer observation guidelines.

Trainee feedback

Following teaching sessions, feedback is obtained in several ways, and is reviewed and acted upon by strand co-ordinators. Please note that the processes for trainee feedback are currently under review  and that new processes  will be  put in place during the Michaelmas 2023 term.

Learning structures outside formal teaching

Supervision & learning on practice placements

Trainees must spend a minimum of 50 per cent of their time on clinical placement(usually between 50-60%), and are actively guided in their clinical learning and practice by their practice placement supervisors. The focus of the learning to take place is specified in the placement contract agreed between trainee and supervisor(s) at the beginning of the placement and submitted to the programme. Contracts are written using a proforma that is structured using the programme’s learning objectives; see the bottom of this page for the form.

Oversight of academic work (assignments and thesis)

DClinPsy assessed coursework assignments are not routinely draft read by staff prior to first submission. There are two exceptions to this:

  • A trainee’s individual research tutor will draft read and give feedback on the TPA assignment prior to submission.
  • A trainee’s individual clinical tutor will draft read and give feedback on a draft of the written component only of their PALS#1 assignment prior to submission.

For the thesis each trainee is allocated an academic supervisor early in the programme who also acts as their research tutor and usually remains with them throughout training.  The programme’s research consistency framework outlines the typical level of support a trainee can expect from the academic supervisor with regard to thesis work, including details of the draft reading available.

Peer support and discussion groups

As part of the teaching curriculum, the programme organises self-facilitated thesis discussion group sessions where trainees are able to share thesis progress, challenges and best practice with their peers in small groups. These sessions are scheduled to take place every few weeks during periods of the programme when study days are most likely to be focused on thesis work.

In addition to these, the programme encourages trainees to meet in self-directed groups (which can be facilitated or un-facilitated) around specific issues. These groups should not impinge on placement or teaching time, and whilst trainees should arrange such meetings themselves, the programme is often able to book spaces, provide necessary resources and may be able offer occasional facilitation for such meetings on request.

General learning & pastoral support

In addition to the structures directly designed to support learning, the programme makes available to trainees a number of other more general support process to assist in their progress on the programme. These include a system of independent mentors, a ‘buddy’ system and facilitating access to the faculty’s student learning advisor who offers clinics and one-to-one session to help students develop generic academic skills. These processes are overseen by the programme’s Pastoral Policy Implementation Group.

Placement contract

Learning and teaching vision

Our vision

We aspire to have a teaching and learning programme where…

  • There is constructive alignment between the assessments undertaken by trainees and the teaching and learning programme. Teaching on the programme should focus on the competencies assessed as part of the training programme, and be aligned to the assessment exercises on the programme.
  • The teaching programme is coherent as a whole, well-co-ordinated and without unintended repetition.
  • The teaching and learning experience is flexible and personalisable, in a way that ensures the core elements required for competency development are present, whilst wherever possible allowing flexibility to allow different pathways and choices as to how the required competencies are developed.
  • The format of learning and teaching is primarily determined by best pedagogic practice relating to the topics being taught.
  • Taking account of the above, there is where possible a reduced amount of traditional formal contact teaching. This will allow more time for other forms of learning including problem-based learning, structured self-directed learning, and specific placement and other practice experiences.
  • The architecture of the programme fosters and requires a self-directed ‘adult learner’ approach from trainees
  • Learning sessions deal with content in general, and theory in particular, in a way that makes it clear how it is transferable across setting, research and clinical areas, and into placement and other practice contexts.
  • There are increased opportunities for cross-cohort contact and learning.
  • The learning programme is paced to create a varied learning experience which includes times when there is less contact teaching.
  • There are clear links and where possible a fusion between the teaching and learning of clinical and research skills.

We aspire to have trainees who…

  • Are adult learners, taking primary responsibility for their own learning throughout the programme.
  • Have time and space within the programme to plan and execute their own learning, self-direct, and also plan their self-care as part of training.

We aspire to have teachers who are…

  • From a more diverse range of backgrounds and expertise, including not only practising clinical psychologists but also a wider variety of other professionals and non-professionals, including service users and other stakeholders, including trainees themselves.
  • Are conversant with the programme’s values and vision for teaching
  • Produce teaching plans in collaboration with the strand teams relating to their session(s).
  • Skilled and knowledgeable in terms of available methods of teaching and learning and can make use of and / or access technological tools such as Moodle
  • Are familiar with current best practice in pedagogy.

We aspire to have learning sessions where…

  • There is a conscious awareness of the process as well as the content of learning experiences, and there are learning outcomes targeting both of these elements.
  • In contact teaching there is a focus on skills in the process of practice rather than primarily on developing declarative knowledge.
  • In contact teaching and other group activities there is a focus on action and ‘learning in motion’.
  • The ethos of learning sessions is grounded in the values held by the programme.
  • It is clear how the skills and competencies learned can be transferred to a range of contexts.
  • It is clear how the learning experiences relate to the broader competencies the programme aims to develop in trainees.
  • The experiences trainees have had in practice to date are made best use of within the learning session.
  • There is the potential in as many cases as possible for the learning experience to be used as part of a formative or summative assessment process.
  • There are regular reviews and development of the learning experiences by a range of stakeholders including service users.

Some example features of teaching that we consider may help with meeting this vision.

  • The intended learning outcomes the programme identifies and trains towards needs to be consistent with what is required in the current and future job role and match with the vision held by trainers.
  • A mechanism needs to be in place that facilitates clear and explicit linking of the programmes’ overall learning outcomes and competencies to the aims of individual learning experiences.
  • Building into the system information about teaching sessions and other learning experiences where the learning outcomes for both the content and process of session is identified, and it is made clear how the learning will be transferable.
  • Considering the use of a portfolio approach to assessment
  • Include teaching on ‘life skills’ and on working as an adult learner early in the programme, and having systems in place to monitor and direct self-directed learning throughout the programme.
  • Embed an expectation of adult learning into the architecture of the programme. For example, if learners have been asked to study a specific text prior to a contact teaching session, design the session such that they will not be able to make good use of or engage in the session if this task has not been completed first.
  • Increase the amount of structured reading / and learning outside of formal teaching, creating protected times for this, directing trainees to specific sources, and making more resources available online (including audio and video sources). Identifying content or knowledge-heavy areas of the current teaching and changing this so that it can be delivered by such non-contact methods.

Identifiers: words or phrases which identify individuals

It is important that ‘identifiers’- words or phrases which identify individuals, institutions etc. without their explicit consent – are not present in assignments submitted for examination. Trainees should check their work carefully before submission to ensure that this does not happen and that, for example, ethics applications have such identifiers redacted.

Where it is felt by markers of an assignment that the presence or number of identifiers is unacceptable then this could result in the trainee failing that particular assignment.

Any trainee who has submitted work that includes identifiers will be asked to remove these and submit corrected work.

How to write a research protocol

Introduction

Your research protocol provides a coherent summary of your project. Essentially the protocol serves as an introduction to the project content area and as an explicit guide on all aspects of your proposed methodology. A good protocol will help you in the production of your final report – partly because you may be able to use and expand on some sections (changing all the tenses, naturally) but mainly because so much of the thinking and planning of the project will have already been well thought through. A good protocol is evidence that you have clarified your research project to the point that when it comes to data collection and analysis, you are confident about the analysis you are going to do and the implications of this analysis on your research questions. Protocols are also required for some kinds of ethics applications.

Structure

A reasonable structure for a protocol would be as follows:

  • Title
  • Name of applicant/supervisors/affiliations/version number
  • Introduction
  • Method
    • Participants
    • Design
    • Materials (if relevant)
    • Procedure
  • Proposed analysis
  • Practical issues (e.g., costs/logistics)
  • Ethical concerns
  • Timescale
  • Appendices
  • References

However, this is reasonably flexible and can be adapted to the specifics of your project.

You can use the template in the appendix to help you write your research protocol.

Introduction

Note here that I am leaping straight to Introduction but a nice, concise but inclusive title is always necessary. The title should sum up the project.

Think of the introduction to the protocol as similar to the introduction to a research article but instead of outlining what you have done, you are detailing what you are going to do. Firstly, you need to outline the content area, with relevant references. In essence you are providing a short literature review. The structure of this first section of the introduction needs to flow well. Different aspects of the project need to be coherently linked and not appear as separate paragraphs with no obvious relation. At the end of the first part of the introduction, your readers need to be convinced that your research project: 1) is necessary – and that it is timely; 2) that it should be done in the way that you propose to do it.

You should aim to finish this section with a statement which is a logical summary of the state of play research-wise at the moment and which makes a solid case for your research project to be carried out. For example, ‘As has been argued, although concepts of control and attributional style have been measured in people with Parkinson’s disease, the impact of these on psychological outcome is still unclear. The small number of studies relating control to psychological outcome all report different conclusions and are all hampered by methodological problems such as underpowering, diverse inclusion criteria and the use of unvalidated outcome measures. Clearly the need to investigate comprehensively control and attributional style remains an important research objective.’ Or something similar. The next part of the introduction should set out how you aim to rectify these methodological anomalies. For example, ‘Consequently, this study will aim to look at the issues of control and attributional style in people with PD but will address previous methodological inadequacies. For example, it is proposed that a sample of 150 is used to address adequately issues of statistical power. In addition, all assessments will use well-validated outcome measures, the inclusion criteria are explicit and diagnoses of idiopathic Parkinson’s disease will be confirmed by a neurology consultant.’ Next to come will be your aims and hypotheses/research questions. You need a formal specification of your hypothesis/es.

Hypotheses should be backed up by the preceding literature review. There is no point hypothesising gender differences on x, when no justification or lead-up to this has been included earlier. And don’t specify the null hypothesis – that’s not appropriate at this level. Don’t go overboard on the number of hypotheses you are making – more than four would be generally some cause for concern. For the thesis, then think one global hypothesis rather than several smaller ones. If your work is qualitative then again, one research question will probably be enough.

Method: Participants

You will need to be explicit about your inclusion and exclusion criteria. Are you going to include a specific age range? Then be explicit. Remember that ethics committees don’t like arbitrary older cut-offs – i.e. ‘people from the age of 18-65 will be included in the study’. How is your sample going to be selected? Especially for quantitative research, it needs to be as representative as possible with as little possibility for a biased selection procedure. What demographic details are going to be taken? How has the number of the participants been decided? If it is a quantitative study, you need to include a power calculation or, if it is a qualitative study, you need to justify numbers on a more theoretical basis. If you include a power analysis, make sure that your hypothesis, power analysis and proposed analysis section all tie up. For example, it is pointless hypothesising a between group difference and then including a power analysis done on regression and talking about within subjects t test in the results.

Method: Design

For a quantitative study, the design section is straightforward – is it a within or between participants design? Or a mixed design, which has elements of both? What is/are the outcome measures? What special ‘design’ features have you included to ensure the validity of your study?

Issues about validity are also relevant in qualitative research. However, make sure that you write these in a way which is consistent with the ethos and methodology of qualitative research. For example, be wary of trying to convince the reader that you are going to eliminate ‘bias’. Instead, be more mindful of the need to create audit trails evidencing from where your themes, for example, have emerged, to provide a thoughtful analysis and reflexive analysis and to show how you will attempt to engage your participants in the analysis.

Method: Materials

For most quantitative research your materials will be the questionnaires you administer, and, in qualitative research, the interview schedule. If you are using standardised questionnaires, you should include information on the questionnaire’s reliability and validity. This information is usually included in the original paper (or pack) including the questionnaire. You should also justify the questionnaire’s use with your sample if your sample is in some way different from the original sample on which the questionnaire was validated. For example, how useful is the BDI in people who have experienced stroke? As well as giving these details, you would also need to append the actual questionnaires at the end of your protocol. If you are appending an interview schedule (e.g., for qualitative research) then please remember that a list of topic areas is fine and you do not have to specific every single question you will ask. Also, please note that a study’s ‘research question’ is different from the questions you indicate in the interview schedule.

Method: Procedure

You need to provide a very detailed account of exactly how participants are going to be referred into your study, what happens to them during the study (i.e. the ordering of the administration of the questionnaires, for example) and for how long, and afterwards, at any follow-up. Consent procedures should also be explicit. In qualitative research, there could well be some checking of the conclusions with participants so you will also need to include this. Particularly in qualitative research you need to be explicit about how you are going to record/transcribe the interview and how you will store the data.

Proposed analysis

Here you include your proposed analysis in sufficient detail. In quantitative studies it is not enough for you to say that ANOVA, for example, will be used to analyse the data. Unless you are using a very simple between group ANOVA then you are likely to have several main effects or interactions. Which one/s are you predicting will be significant? A further problem is that although there might be three hypotheses, only one analysis technique is mentioned. If you have multiple hypotheses then you need to be explicit about how you are going to analyse each one. Remember that it is also important to indicate that you will be looking in very close detail at your data before you plod on with your analyses. How are you going to deal with missing data points? Are you going to test for normality of distribution if you planning on using parametric tests (YES!)?

In qualitative research, it is important to specify the data analytic techniques which will be used. How are you going to bring out, themes, for example? You need to back your strategy up with references from key theorists from the particular paradigm you wish to employ. In grounded theory research, for example, the data analytic strategy includes open coding, axial coding and the production of a conditional matrix. Ensure that there is sufficient detail in your proposed strategy section for readers to be convinced that you know what you are talking about.

Practical issues

Will you need training before you can administer any of the tests? Do you know where you are going to be seeing your participants if meeting them in person? Might you meet participants alone and  if so what lone working policy will you follow? Who is going to cover  any costs incurred?. Where are the data going to be stored and does this comply with legislation and good practice policy? Think logistically about the practicalities of your research and indicate that you have thought things through.

Ethical concerns

Provide a realistic assessment of the ethical considerations of your project. How will you ensure anonymity of participants  as far as is practicable? If you are asking for any indication of mood, this could have implications – how would you deal with someone getting very upset after the completing the BDI? Is it ethical to offer an intervention to one group and not another? If you are including any type of deception (false feedback etc), could this be avoided? What could be the after-effects of your project? Are you asking for details (e.g., socio-economic data) which some participants might find intrusive? If you find evidence of abuse in a project involving children how will you deal with this? What will you do if you uncover worrying aspects of someone’s practice? Should your supervisor see transcripts from participants if the Ps are evaluating some aspect of your supervisor’s practice? (probably not).

Timescale

When will your project start and when will it end? Is there any eventuality in which data collection period might be extended? When will the results be fed back to participants?

Appendices

You need to list the appendices you have included with your protocol. These should include all the tests you are using. If you are using computerised versions of tests, provide a pdf, link or verbal description of the questions used. You should also append participant information sheets (and there could be several depending on the type of study you are doing), patient consent forms (ditto), consent to contact forms (if relevant) and any advertising materials (i.e. posters to put around campus/in GP surgeries). You might also wish to append supporting statements – e.g., from clinicians who would be referring your study’s participants.

For example:

Appendix 1: Beck Depression Inventory (BDI: Beck et al., 1967)
Appendix 2: Love of Chocolate Questionnaire (LCQ: Lindt et al, 1921)
Etc

References

You need to include full references for all your cited works. You should do these in APA style.

Conclusions

The aim of your protocol is to provide a comprehensive guide to your project so interested parties understand all the relevant details. You need to have the following objectives in your mind when you write it:

  1. will the reader be convinced there is a real need to do this research?
  2. will the reader think my suggested methodology is appropriate?
  3. will the reader be able to understand what I propose to do?
  4. will the reader be convinced that I have thought about all the practical aspects of the project
  5. will the reader think this is an ethical project and that if there are slight risks (which, let’s face it, are inherent in most research) that these are outweighed by the potential longer-term benefits?

Excluding appendices, around 6 pages would be about appropriate although this should be spread across the various sections. Two pages of introduction (double-spaced) are likely to be the maximum you should include. Readers want concise introductions – not long rambling tracts which include whole sections from texts. Robson (2002) suggests regarding the reader of your protocol as a cross between an intelligent layperson and a generalist in the discipline and this seems about right in terms of the tone of your protocol. Use a readability checker  to  ensure your language use is not overly-complex.

References

Brooks, N. (1996). Writing a grant application. In G.Parry & F.N.Watts (Eds.), Behavioural and Mental Health Research: A Handbook of Skills and Methods (second edition). Hove: Erlbaum.

Robson, C. (2002). Real world research (second edition). Oxford: Blackwell. See Appendix A: Writing a research proposal (pp. 526-533).

Useful documents

Research Protocol with guidance notes

Programme Specification

Contents

  1. Awarding Institution
  2. Teaching Institution
  3. Programme Approved & Accredited by
  4. Final Award
  5. Programme Title
  6. UCAS Code
  7. Subject Benchmark
  8. Date of Production
  9. Educational Aims of the Programme
  10. Required Programme Outcomes
  11. Teaching/Learning Methods and Strategies
  12. Assessment Strategy and Methods
  13. Reference Points Used to Inform
  14. Scheme of Study Structure and Features
  15. Support for Learning
  16. Criteria for Admissions
  17. Evaluation and Improvement of Quality and Standards
  18. Regulation of Assessment
  19. Indicators of Quality

1. Awarding Institution

Lancaster University

2. Teaching Institution

Lancaster University

3. Programme Approved & Accredited by

Health and Care Professions Council, British Psychological Society

4. Final Award

DClinPsy

5. Programme Title

Clinical Psychology

6. UCAS Code

None

7. Subject Benchmark

Clinical Psychology

8. Date of Production

July 2019

9. Educational Aims of the Programme

The programme aims to enable trainees to work as clinical psychologists with the range of clients and services specified below in a range of settings, especially those seen as having high priority within the National Health Service. Newly qualified clinical psychologists should understand and embrace the core purpose and philosophy of the profession as described in the document prepared by the Division of Clinical Psychology (DCP). They should be committed to reducing psychological distress and enhancing and promoting psychological well-being through the systematic application of knowledge derived from psychological theory and evidence. Their work will be based on the fundamental acknowledgement that all people have the same human value and the right to be treated as unique individuals. The programme-level learning outcomes are those outlined by the DCP, which are specifically designed to ensure that those who meet them will meet the HCPC Standards of Proficiency for Practitioner (Clinical) Psychologists.

10. Required Programme Outcomes

The follow section from the BPS Standards for Doctoral programmes in Clinical Psychology provides context to the delivery of learning on the programme: –

2. Required learning outcomes for accredited doctorates in Clinical Psychology

2.1

Clinical psychology programmes will vary in the emphases they place on work with particular clinical groups, therapeutic modalities, curriculum content, non-therapy skills, training methods etc. This is healthy and promotes diversity and richness within the profession. It ensures programmes can be responsive to regional and national priorities, opens up opportunities for some programmes to coordinate and complement their efforts and offers prospective applicants choice of programmes which best suit their own preferences, learning style and goals. Similarly, trainee clinical psychologists within programmes may follow a range of training pathways depending on practice placement experiences, research undertaken, optional modules chosen etc. Thus whilst all graduates will demonstrate core standards of proficiency, with transferability demonstrated across the range of clients and services as specified below, some variation in individual strengths and competencies will be both inevitable and desirable.

This context means that whilst the BPS will accredit programmes as meeting the standards required for their graduates to be eligible for Chartered status, it will be incumbent on programmes to validate the specific portfolio of skills and competencies of graduates in a way which is transparent to employers and commissioners of services. Whilst programmes are free to develop their own portfolio format, examples of how this might look are contained in Appendix 1. These examples should be seen as indicative, rather than prescriptive.

2.2 Overarching goals, outcomes, ethos and values for all programmes include the following:

By the end of their programme, trainees will have:

  1. A value driven commitment to reducing psychological distress and enhancing and promoting psychological well-being through the systematic application of knowledge derived from psychological theory and evidence. Work should be based on the fundamental acknowledgement that all people have the same human value and the right to be treated as unique individuals.
  2. The skills, knowledge and values to develop working alliances with clients, including individuals, carers and/or services, in order to carry out psychological assessment, develop a formulation based on psychological theories and knowledge, carry out psychological interventions, evaluate their work and communicate effectively with clients, referrers and others, orally, electronically and in writing.
  3. Knowledge and understanding of psychological (and other relevant) theory and evidence, related to specific client groups, presentations, psychological therapies, psychological testing, assessment, intervention and secondary prevention required to underpin clinical practice.
  4. The skills, knowledge and values to work effectively with clients from a diverse range of backgrounds, understanding and respecting the impact of difference and diversity upon their lives. Awareness of the clinical, professional and social contexts within which work is undertaken and impact therein.
  5. Clinical and research skills that demonstrate work with clients and systems based on a reflective scientist-practitioner model that incorporates a cycle of assessment, formulation, intervention and evaluation and that draws from across theory and therapy evidence bases as appropriate.
  6. The skills, knowledge and values to work effectively with systems relevant to clients, including for example statutory and voluntary services, self-help and advocacy groups, user led systems and other elements of the wider community.
  7. The skills, knowledge and values to work in a range of indirect ways to improve psychological aspects of health and healthcare. This includes leadership skills and competencies in consultancy, supervision, teaching and training, working collaboratively and influencing psychological mindedness and practices of teams.
  8. The skills, knowledge and values to conduct research and reflect upon outcomes in a way that enables the profession to develop its knowledge base and to monitor and improve the effectiveness of its work.
  9. A professional and ethical value base, including that set out in the BPS Code of Ethics and Conduct, the DCP statement of the Core Purpose and Philosophy of the profession and the DCP Professional Practice Guidelines.
  10. High level skills in managing a personal learning agenda and self-care, in critical reflection and self-awareness that enable transfer of knowledge and skills to new settings and problems and professional standards of behaviour as might be expected by the public, employers and colleagues.

2.2.1. Generalisable meta-competencies

  1. Drawing on psychological knowledge of developmental, social and neuropsychological processes across the lifespan to facilitate adaptability and change in individuals, groups, families, organisations and communities.
  2. Deciding, using a broad evidence and knowledge base, how to assess, formulate and intervene psychologically, from a range of possible models and modes of intervention with clients, carers and service systems. Ability to work effectively whilst holding in mind alternative, competing explanations.
  3. Generalising and synthesising prior knowledge and experience in order to apply them critically and creatively in different settings and novel situations.
  4. Being familiar with theoretical frameworks, the evidence base and practice guidance frameworks such as NICE and SIGN, and having the capacity to critically utilise these in complex clinical decision making without being formulaic in application.
  5. Complementing evidence based practice with an ethos of practice based evidence where processes, outcomes, progress and needs are critically and reflectively evaluated.
  6. Ability to collaborate with service users and carers, and other relevant stakeholders, in advancing psychological initiatives such as interventions and research.
  7. Making informed judgments on complex issues in specialist fields, often in the absence of complete information.
  8. Ability to communicate psychologically-informed ideas and conclusions to, and to work effectively with, other stakeholders, (specialist and non-specialist), in order to influence practice, facilitate problem solving and decision making.
  9. Exercising personal responsibility and largely autonomous initiative in complex and unpredictable situations in professional practice. Demonstrating self-awareness and sensitivity, and working as a reflective practitioner within ethical and professional practice frameworks.

2.2.2. Psychological assessment

  1. Developing and maintaining effective working alliances with service users, carers, colleagues and other relevant stakeholders.
  2. Ability to choose, use and interpret a broad range of assessment methods appropriate:
    • to the client and service delivery system in which the assessment takes place; and
    • to the type of intervention which is likely to be required.
  3. Assessment procedures in which competence is demonstrated will include:
    • performance based psychometric measures (e.g. of cognition and development);
    • self and other informant reported psychometrics (e.g. of symptoms, thoughts, feelings, beliefs, behaviours);
    • systematic interviewing procedures;
    • other structured methods of assessment (e.g. observation, or gathering information from others); and
    • assessment of social context and organisations.
  4. Understanding of key elements of psychometric theory which have relevance to psychological assessment (e.g. effect sizes, reliable change scores, sources of error and bias, base rates, limitations etc.) and utilising this knowledge to aid assessment practices and interpretations thereof.
  5. Conducting appropriate risk assessment and using this to guide practice.

2.2.3. Psychological formulation

  1. Using assessment to develop formulations which are informed by theory and evidence about relevant individual, systemic, cultural and biological factors.
  2. Constructing formulations of presentations which may be informed by, but which are not premised on, formal diagnostic classification systems; developing formulation in an emergent transdiagnostic context.
  3. Constructing formulations utilising theoretical frameworks with an integrative, multi-model, perspective as appropriate and adapted to circumstance and context.
  4. Developing a formulation through a shared understanding of its personal meaning with the client(s) and / or team in a way which helps the client better understand their experience.
  5. Capacity to develop a formulation collaboratively with service users, carers, teams and services and being respectful of the client or team’s feedback about what is accurate and helpful.
  6. Making justifiable choices about the format and complexity of the formulation that is presented or utilised as appropriate to a given situation.
  7. Ensuring that formulations are expressed in accessible language, culturally sensitive, and non-discriminatory in terms of, for example, age, gender, disability and sexuality.
  8. Using formulations to guide appropriate interventions if appropriate.
  9. Reflecting on and revising formulations in the light of on-going feedback and intervention.
  10. Leading on the implementation of formulation in services and utilizing formulation to enhance teamwork, multi-professional communication and psychological mindedness in services.

2.2.4. Psychological intervention

  1. On the basis of a formulation, implementing psychological therapy or other interventions appropriate to the presenting problem and to the psychological and social circumstances of the client(s), and to do this in a collaborative manner with:
    • individuals
    • couples, families or groups
    • services / organisations
  2. Understanding therapeutic techniques and processes as applied when working with a range of different individuals in distress, such as those who experience difficulties related to: anxiety, mood, adjustment to adverse circumstances or life events, eating difficulties, psychosis, misuse of substances, physical health presentations and those with somatoform, psychosexual, developmental, personality, cognitive and neurological presentations.
  3. Ability to implement therapeutic interventions based on knowledge and practice in at least two evidence-based models of formal psychological interventions, of which one must be cognitive-behaviour therapy. Model specific therapeutic skills must be evidenced against a competence framework as described below, though these may be adapted to account for specific ages and presentations etc.
  4. In addition, however, the ability to utilise multi-model interventions, as appropriate to the complexity and / or co-morbidity of the presentation, the clinical and social context and service user opinions, values and goals.
  5. Knowledge of, and capacity to conduct interventions related to, secondary prevention and the promotion of health and well-being.
  6. Conducting interventions in a way which promotes recovery of personal and social functioning as informed by service user values and goals.
  7. Having an awareness of the impact and relevance of psychopharmacological and other multidisciplinary interventions.
  8. Understanding social approaches to intervention; for example, those informed by community, critical, and social constructionist perspectives.
  9. Implementing interventions and care plans through, and with, other professions and/or with individuals who are formal (professional) carers for a client, or who care for a client by virtue of family or partnership arrangements.
  10. Recognising when (further) intervention is inappropriate, or unlikely to be helpful, and communicating this sensitively to clients and carers.

2.2.5. Evaluation

  1. Evaluating practice through the monitoring of processes and outcomes, across multiple dimensions of functioning, in relation to recovery, values and goals and as informed by service user experiences as well as clinical indicators (such as behaviour change and change on standardised psychometric instruments).
  2. Devising innovate evaluative procedures where appropriate.
  3. Capacity to utilise supervision effectively to reflect upon personal effectiveness, shape and change personal and organisational practice including that information offered by outcomes monitoring.
  4. Appreciating outcomes frameworks in wider use within national healthcare systems, the evidence base and theories of outcomes monitoring (e.g. as related to dimensions of accessibility, acceptability, clinical effectiveness and efficacy) and creating synergy with personal evaluative strategies.
  5. Critical appreciation of the strengths and limitations of different evaluative strategies, including psychometric theory and knowledge related to indices of change.
  6. Capacity to evaluate processes and outcomes at the organisational and systemic levels as well as the individual level.

2.2.6. Research

  1. Being a critical and effective consumer, interpreter and disseminator of the research evidence base relevant to clinical psychology practice and that of psychological services and interventions more widely. Utilising such research to influence and inform the practice of self and others.
  2. Conceptualising, designing and conducting independent, original and translational research of a quality to satisfy peer review, contribute to the knowledge base of the discipline, and merit publication including: identifying research questions, demonstrating an understanding of ethical issues, choosing appropriate research methods and analysis (both quantitative and qualitative), reporting outcomes and identifying appropriate pathways for dissemination.
  3. Understanding the need and value of undertaking translational (applied and applicable) clinical research post-qualification, contributing substantially to the development of theory and practice in clinical psychology.
  4. The capacity to conduct service evaluation, small N, pilot and feasibility studies and other research which is consistent with the values of both evidence based practice and practice based evidence.
  5. Conducting research in respectful collaboration with others (e.g. service users, supervisors, other disciplines and collaborators, funders, community groups etc.) and within the ethical and governance frameworks of the Society, the Division, HCPC, universities and other statutory regulators as appropriate.

2.2.7. Personal and professional skills and values

  1. Understanding of ethical issues and applying these in complex clinical contexts, ensuring that informed consent underpins all contact with clients and research participants.
  2. Appreciating the inherent power imbalance between practitioners and clients and how abuse of this can be minimised.
  3. Understanding the impact of differences, diversity and social inequalities on people’s lives, and their implications for working practices.
  4. Understanding the impact of one’s own value base upon clinical practice.
  5. Working effectively at an appropriate level of autonomy, with awareness of the limits of own competence and accepting accountability to relevant professional and service managers.
  6. Capacity to adapt to, and comply with, the policies and practices of a host organisation with respect to time-keeping, record keeping, meeting deadlines, managing leave, health and safety and good working relations.
  7. Managing own personal learning needs and developing strategies for meeting these. Using supervision to reflect on practice, and making appropriate use of feedback received.
  8. Developing strategies to handle the emotional and physical impact of practice and seeking appropriate support when necessary, with good awareness of boundary issues.
  9. Developing resilience but also the capacity to recognize when own fitness to practise is compromised and take steps to manage this risk as appropriate.
  10. Working collaboratively and constructively with fellow psychologists and other colleagues and users of services, respecting diverse viewpoints.

2.2.8. Communication and teaching

  1. Communicating effectively clinical and non-clinical information from a psychological perspective in a style appropriate to a variety of different audiences (for example, to professional colleagues, and to users and their carers).
  2. Adapting style of communication to people with a wide range of levels of cognitive ability, sensory acuity and modes of communication.
  3. Preparing and delivering teaching and training which takes into account the needs and goals of the participants (for example, by appropriate adaptations to methods and content).
  4. Understanding of the supervision process for both supervisee and supervisor roles.
  5. Understanding the process of providing expert psychological opinion and advice, including the preparation and presentation of evidence in formal settings.
  6. Understanding the process of communicating effectively through interpreters and having an awareness of the limitations thereof.
  7. Supporting others’ learning in the application of psychological skills, knowledge, practices and procedures.

2.2.9. Organisational and systemic influence and leadership

  1. Awareness of the legislative and national planning contexts for service delivery and clinical practice.
  2. Capacity to adapt practice to different organisational contexts for service delivery. This should include a variety of settings such as in-patient and community, primary, secondary and tertiary care and may include work with providers outside of the NHS.
  3. Providing supervision at an appropriate level within own sphere of competence.
  4. Indirect influence of service delivery including through consultancy, training and working effectively in multidisciplinary and cross-professional teams. Bringing psychological influence to bear in the service delivery of others.
  5. Understanding of leadership theories and models, and their application to service development and delivery. Demonstrating leadership qualities such as being aware of and working with interpersonal processes, proactivity, influencing the psychological mindedness of teams and organisations, contributing to and fostering collaborative working practices within teams.

11. Teaching/Learning Methods and Strategies

The following describes the learning and teaching methods, as these relate to the academic programme, research programme, and to the integration of theory and clinical practice:

Formal teaching

Structure of teaching

Teaching relates to the full range of clinical activity. A team of staff and stakeholders is responsible for co-ordinating each of the ‘teaching strands’ that are used to organise the teaching across the three years of training. In the first weeks of the programme trainees attend the induction block of teaching for four days per week. They have one day for non-contact learning and other training-related activity. In addition, prior to each of the subsequent three placements, there is one to two week(s) of introductory teaching that is designed to prepare trainees for the upcoming placement and for working with the relevant client group(s). Teaching in the third year focuses on advanced skills, influencing, and addresses topics that tend to be of particular relevance to third year placements.

Teaching sessions which are mandatory are indicated on the appropriate teaching schedules. Arrangements are made on an individual basis where mandatory teaching has been missed.

Delivery of learning and teaching experiences

Teaching and learning on the programme (with the exception of mandatory NHS trust training sessions) is designed specifically for clinical psychology trainees. To ensure that teaching is as relevant as possible to current practice and is based on the most up-to-date evidence, much of the teaching is delivered by practising clinical psychologists. Teaching is also delivered by other health and social services professionals, as well as users of services and other experts by experience. The majority of teaching on communication skills, research skills and personal development and reflection is delivered by members of the programme staff.

Programme staff work in small teams to plan and co-ordinate teaching within the nine thematic ‘strands’ that run throughout the programme of training, and these staff liaise closely with external teachers to ensure the learning experience for trainees is coherent and consistent. Learning and Teaching activities are designed to work towards the programme’s Learning and Teaching Vision The programme also runs occasional ‘good practice in teaching’ workshops for all those who teach for the programme.

The format of teaching is varied, adopting a broad range of approaches, often within a single teaching session. Teaching is mostly delivered in ‘whole day’ (5 hours) or ‘half day’ (2.5 hours) sessions which will usually involve a combination of delivery modes including such elements as didactic presentations, small and large group discussion, workshop exercises, role-play and use the use of audio-visual materials as appropriate. The programme issues guidance to teachers on the production of teaching materials to maximise their accessibility to any trainees with specific individual needs.

Content of teaching

The content of teaching is organised around conceptual strands, each of which runs throughout the course of the programme.

A brief description of each of the conceptual strands and its function, as part of the overall learning and teaching programme, can be found below.

The teaching timetables for the year are available to trainees via the Moodle virtual learning environment.

Strands

Assignment Preparation

The assignment suite is designed to assess every aspect of clinical psychology practice and as such is a central aspect of the assessment of competence leading to the award of DClinPsy. This strand has two central elements: –

  1. Developing competence in analysis and critical thinking. Analysis and critical thinking is a core competence in clinical practice and as such is assessed in all assignments. Trainees undertake a developmental programme in epistemology alongside practical sessions such as ‘making good arguments’.
  2. Learning the specific requirements for each of the different assignments which have to be submitted as part of the DClinPsy. In these sessions trainees are introduced to the processes and preparation required for each assignment and how they will be assessed. Each assignment will have its own associated teaching and development/support/feedback sessions which are scheduled and delivered in a timely manner where knowledge and support is required to prepare for submission.
Therapy

The integration of theory and practice is considered central to the curriculum. This strand will introduce trainees to a selected number of major therapeutic models and emerging therapeutic approaches. It aims to develop trainee understanding of theoretical aspects of therapeutic models and how they can be applied in clinical practice across a range of specialities.

The overarching models/approaches which the programme will be delivering are: –

  • Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (CBT)
  • Systemic Practice
  • Cognitive Analytic Therapy (CAT)
  • Narrative Therapy

All CBT teaching is delivered by accredited CBT practitioners and as such meet all the requirements set out in the British Association for Behavioural and Cognitive Psychologists Core Curriculum Reference Document.

The systemic practice curriculum has been designed to meet the requirements of the Foundation level training in systemic practice as accredited by the Association for Family Therapy.

The narrative therapy curriculum meets the requirements for Level One training as accredited by the Institute for Narrative Therapy

In addition, each trainee will have the option of completing the equivalent of the first year of CAT Foundation Training as accredited by the Association of Cognitive Analytic Therapists (ACAT). This involves attendance at optional Advanced CAT teaching in the final year of training as well as undertaking the necessary clinical practice under the supervision of an ACAT accredited supervisor.

The strand takes a developmental approach by initially considering the theoretical underpinnings of each model before moving on to consider the clinical application of each therapeutic model in a relevant and timely way (i.e. fitting with the placements trainees are on). Over the course of training the strand will develop the trainee’s learning of each model and relevant aspects of its application such as assessment, formulation and intervention.

Professional Influencing

The Professional Influencing strand focuses on how psychological thinking and theory can be communicated in an effective, professional and ethical way to the world. It includes communication and influencing at a number of levels including at a societal level (e.g. through media channels and activism), a community level, at the level of health and social care and education contexts, as well as at a group and individual level.

This strand also examines the assumptions which inform scientific activity in relation to clinical psychology, the problems in applying philosophies and methods from the natural sciences to human behaviour and the relationship between the philosophy of science and research activity. The strand provides trainees with conceptual frameworks to enable them to develop a scholarly and constructively critical approach to clinical psychology theory, research evidence and practice, and an awareness of issues of power and diversity as they apply to the role and profession of the clinical psychologist.

The strand aims to increase trainees’ awareness of the influencing role of clinical psychologists within this wide range of contexts, and help them learn skills in developing and shaping thinking, strategy and policy in relation to mental health and wellbeing. This includes broad awareness of mental health and wellbeing, the determinants of wellbeing, and the potential positive influence of psychological thinking in these contexts.

Within this strand, teaching aims to increase trainees’ understanding of the social, community, professional and organisational contexts within which clinical psychologists practice, and how clinical psychologists can influence thinking and practice though increasing awareness and understanding of mental health, improving services and setting the direction for the future.

Trainees will become more aware of NHS and other health and social care contexts, and the influence of clinical psychology on those contexts, and vice-versa. Trainees will become more aware of healthcare history, policy and strategy, and will learn a range of methods for how to influence the contexts in which clinical psychologists work.

Key competencies that the strand will cover include: –

  • Influencing and guiding policy, strategy and service delivery via: service planning, management of resources and people, and management of performance.
  • Improving service delivery via: critical reflection and evaluation of current delivery, encouraging improvement and innovations, and facilitating change.
  • Setting direction for policy, strategy and service delivery via: identifying contexts and drivers for change, applying knowledge and evidence, deciding on and planning service improvements and transformations, and evaluating the impact of change.

This strand links to the Leadership curriculum strand in the sense that Professional Influencing involves operationalising trainees’ personal leadership competencies within the contexts that clinical psychologists are able to influence.

Leadership

The BPS’s Clinical Psychology Leadership Development Framework states that “Effective leadership for clinical psychologists at all career stages can be strengthened by an awareness of personal qualities and values, and by the application of our professional skills and knowledge.” The Leadership strand focuses on the awareness and development of the personal qualities and values which are necessary to make and take opportunities for influencing within professional contexts. Key elements of these personal qualities, as outlined in the Clinical Leadership Competency Framework from the NHS Leadership Academy are managing yourself; developing self-awareness and acting with integrity.

The majority of Leadership sessions over the first two years will take place in the same small (up to eight trainees) practice development groups which will retain the same facilitator, wherever this is feasible. The purpose of this is to set up intimate, safe training spaces where core skills in communication, personal development and reflection can be practised; anxiety, tension and even failure experienced and tolerated and there is opportunity for each member of the group to take turns in embodying both individual and shared leadership roles.

Key competencies that this strand aims to develop: –

  • Being aware of their own values, principles and assumptions, and being able to learn from experiences
  • Organising and managing themselves while taking account of the needs and priorities of others
  • Behaving in an open, honest and ethical manner
  • Listening, supporting others, gaining trust and showing understanding
  • Creating an environment where others have the opportunity to contribute

The Professional Influencing and Leadership strands have both been mapped against the Clinical Psychology Leadership Development Framework of the Division of Clinical Psychology.

Physical Health & Cognitive Development

This strand covers health and medical related issues that may occur during a person’s life. The strand takes a developmental lifespan approach in relation to both process and content. Teaching in this area begins with an exploration of some of the essential aspects of clinical psychology in health and neuropsychological settings, such as assessment, functional neuroanatomy, and the range of psychological models applicable to these areas. As the teaching develops to the more advanced stages, it considers specific physical health and neurological conditions such as stroke, cancer, and brain injury. There are also sessions on some of the associated broader themes that can influence a person’s psychological wellbeing such as pain, fatigue, body image, and subsequent emotional distress.

Whilst this strand inevitably has a focus on what may be termed ‘organic’ conditions such as neurological conditions and physical disabilities, there is an emphasis on considering those issues in context. This includes the context of the person / people accessing psychological support, as well as the context in which clinical psychology may be situated (e.g. medical settings / diagnostic-based services). Teaching encourages trainees to critique traditional and contemporary models of working in these areas, and take a developmental approach to positioning themselves and the profession, in relation to associated professions in physical health and medical settings.

Although there is no current accreditation of prior learning for Qualification in Clinical neuropsychology the physical health and cognitive development curriculum has been designed to meet the ‘underpinning knowledge and skills’ element of the Competency framework for the UK Clinical Neuropsychology profession.

Quality Assurance

The Quality Assurance curriculum strand covers matters to do with clinical governance, quality, continuous improvement and the standards required by our regulatory body, the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC), and professional guidance and good practice identified by the British Psychological Society (BPS). The aim is to ensure that trainees are equipped to meet all mandatory requirements that apply to them on the programme: the mandatory training requirements of their employing NHS Trust and the requirements of the HCPC, BPS and NHS clinical governance legislation. It covers a range of learning activities as well as some formally delivered teaching sessions.

Research

The programme adopts the position that research is integral to the role of clinical psychologists. The ability to draw upon research evidence is essential for good clinical practice, as is an understanding of how to conduct original research. Research and clinical practice also share several common aims and methods. With this in mind, the programme aims to produce research-minded practitioners who should be applying a critical, analytic stance to both clinical and research practice. In pursuit of this aim, the objectives of the research teaching are therefore to enable trainees to:

  • Conduct research to a high standard which advances both psychological theory and service practice;
  • Apply ethical principles to their research work;
  • Understand the basic principles of a range of research strategies, methods and approaches to data analysis, and how they can be applied in NHS settings;
  • Critically evaluate their own and others’ research;
  • Develop the skills and knowledge to disseminate their research work appropriately and to understand the importance of doing so.

The research strand consists of a series of separate but interlinked teaching sessions delivered over the course of the training programme, with the majority of teaching delivered in the first two years. These teaching sessions are designed to provide trainees with grounding in all aspects of the research process, from design to dissemination, and in the major research designs used in clinical psychology research. These include quantitative approaches to data collection and analysis, such as survey design and statistical analysis techniques; and qualitative approaches such as Interpretative Phenomenological Analysis, Grounded Theory and Narrative Analysis. The delivery of the sessions is planned in order to support trainees in the development, implementation and completion of their research assignments, in which trainees have the opportunity to consolidate the skills and knowledge developed through the teaching sessions.

Themes of Clinical Practice

This strand supports the development of the key skills required of a clinical psychologist. Teaching sessions across the three years cover core abilities within the professional role, such as formulation; attachment; engaging with difference; managing risk; and working with families, staff and carers. The curriculum is planned to follow a developmental path, and aims to build upon trainees’ existing interpersonal skills and life experiences to inform and develop their clinical practice.

12. Assessment Strategy and Methods

Assessment – general principles

Assessment on the Doctorate in Clinical Psychology is guided by a number of frameworks including the Health and Care Professions Council’s (HCPC’s) standards of education and training and standards of proficiency, the British Psychological Society’s (BPS’s) accreditation through partnership framework and Lancaster University’s own guidance for postgraduate students . Links to all relevant documentation are included at the end of this section.

The programme’s assessment strategy is developed and monitored by the Assessment Development and Implementation Group. The aims of the Development and Implementation Group are to monitor and review each academic assignment, and to develop the framework of academic assessment to best fit trainee competencies. Each assignment is reviewed annually by the Assessment Development and Implementation Group. Once results have been ratified by the Exam Board, the coordinator for each assignment submits a report for discussion by the Development and Implementation Group on the process of the assignment, including feedback from external examiners and other stakeholders. Any proposed changes to assignments are initially discussed at the Assessment Development and Implementation Group, and then brought to the Operational Management Group for approval.

The programme’s assessment strategy is informed by the HCPC’s standards of proficiency for practitioner psychologists and the BPS’s learning outcomes and objectives. These are often used as indicators in the assessment of evidence. Evidence for specific competencies is collected and rated for each assessment. The programme’s competency-based approach to assessment means that a number of domains will be assessed throughout training but the demonstration of these will be different according to the specific assignments or placements.

It should be noted that only by successfully completing the Doctorate in Clinical Psychology can trainees become eligible to apply to the HCPC to be registered as a clinical psychologist. Furthermore, only HCPC approved programmes can confer eligibility to apply for HCPC registration. The programme does not offer any other route except to the full award of the doctorate in clinical psychology: no aegrogat award is offered.

Please see the HCPC Standards of Proficiency, Standards of education and training and BPS accreditation criteria in the appendix.

Assessment through practice placement experience

The Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee (SAT) is used to indicate whether or not the trainee has met the required learning outcomes for the practice placement and subsequently to recommend to the exam board whether the placement should be considered satisfactorily or unsatisfactorily completed. Trainees are also required to complete a log-book for each practice placement, which includes a self-assessment component where they are asked to rate themselves against a range of objectives that stem directly from the programme-level learning outcomes.

Assessment through research thesis

The doctoral thesis is a substantial piece of work (up to 56,000 words including tables, figures and appendices) trainees usually complete during their second and third year of training. The thesis provides evidence of a number of research competencies which need to be demonstrated at a doctoral level for the piece of work to be passed. As well as providing additional evidence of many of the HCPC’s Standards of Proficiency, the thesis indicates that the trainee is able to undertake work to a standard which is consistent with Lancaster University’s guidance on doctoral level research, and complete primary, investigative research which is relevant to the theory and practice of clinical psychology. In terms of quality, the thesis needs to demonstrate a substantial contribution to knowledge and should afford originality by the discovery of new findings and by the exercise of independent critical power.

Assessment through academic coursework submission

Assessment of Learning Outcomes

The assessed academic coursework is assessed using a series of ‘domains’ which are based on the HCPC requirements (i.e. Standards of Education and Training), the British Psychological Society Accreditation Criteria and a job, task and role analysis for clinical psychology arising from a research project commissioned by the Clearing House for Postgraduate Course in Clinical Psychology (Baron & O’Reilly, 2012). The domains are designed to be transferable across the multiple activities in which clinical psychologists are expected to engage. A brief definition of each is outlined below: –

  1. Collating information and knowledge – descriptive name: ‘Gathering’
    The ability to locate appropriate and relevant information and draw on own existing knowledge to address a specific issue or situation. Trainees must be able to demonstrate that they can construct and execute an effective information gathering strategy AND draw on different types of information as appropriate e.g. Research studies; Clinical assessments; Ethical principles; Professional practice guidance; NHS policies etc.; Contextual and diversity information.
  2. Critical analysis & synthesis – descriptive name: ‘Analysing’
    The ability to identify the relevant issue, weigh up, critically analyse and synthesize information collated from the first domain – collating information and knowledge. To demonstrate skills in critiquing – including understanding arguments and concepts of logic, ability to identify assumptions. Together with skills in synthesising & organising and the generation of new knowledge as a result of the above. Being able to transfer knowledge between contexts, adapting and applying it appropriately and demonstrating skills in drawing conclusions. Ability to be selective, specific and succinct.
  3. Strategy for application – descriptive name: ‘Deciding’
    The ability to develop a strategy to practically apply the outcome of the synthesis to a specific situation and show how this strategy follows on from the synthesis. This domain relates specifically to making the plan, not its implementation. Examples include: Making recommendations for future practice or research; Deciding on a course of clinical intervention or research design; Influencing the development of organisational policies and procedures.
  4. Performance skills – descriptive name: ‘Doing’
    The ability to implement a strategy in a real environment. This domain concerns the concrete application / performance of specific techniques and (micro) skills. Examples include: conducting psychometric tests; specific therapeutic techniques; structured assessments; leading team discussions.
  5. Responsive to impact & learning from experiences – descriptive name: ‘Responding’
    The ability to seek out and be responsive and sensitive to the effect of own actions & to new information. Being able to demonstrate learning from this through adapting future behaviour. For example: An awareness of self and its impact on the work; Ability to critically reflect in the moment and take action as a result of the reflection; Ability to generalise learning from specific situations and apply this in other situations or more broadly; Seeking out & taking responsibility for personal development and learning opportunities.
  6. Communicating information effectively – descriptive name: ‘Communicating’
    The ability to communicate information effectively to the intended audience, adapting style, delivery and content as appropriate (but NOT the choice of strategy). This includes verbal delivery of information to individuals and/or groups; visual delivery of information to individuals and/or groups and written information to a wide range of audiences e.g. professionals, lay people, people with disabilities/impairments.
  7. Interpersonal skills & collaboration- descriptive name: ‘Interacting’
    These are the transferable skills that underpin interactions with others. Examples include the ability to be warm and engaging, to always listen, be respectful and take account of views and goals of others and show an awareness and use of power when doing this, and the ability to assert self and use skills of negotiation to influence others, manage conflict and work with dynamics and organising / leadership in terms of finding the most efficient ways of working together.
  8. Organisational skills – descriptive name: ‘Organising’
    This is the ability to use organisational skills in a proactive way to process and prioritising disparate demands and tasks to achieve objectives in a timely fashion.
  9. Demonstrating Essential Knowledge – descriptive name: ‘Knowing’
    The ability to show the required essential knowledge of clinical psychology theory, evidence and best practice that can be applied to their own learning and practice. For example: An awareness of how to access policy and practice guidance when needed; Consistent familiarity and critical appreciation of NHS guidance in specific areas (such as NICE) where working clinically; Understanding quality assurance principles and processes including informatics systems; Familiarity with the DCP code of conduct and the HCPC Standard of conduct, performance and ethics for students; safeguarding processes and understanding of key elements of psychometric theory which have relevance to psychological assessment and evaluation
  10. Professional behaviour – descriptive name: ‘Behaving’
    The ability to behave professionally and appropriately in all contexts. For example: Awareness of and adherence to principle of informed consent; Awareness of and working within limits of own competence and employing self-care appropriately; being aware of when may not be fit to practice and acting on this to effectively manage any risks this might pose; Showing motivation and using initiative where necessary to complete tasks to a ‘good enough’ standard and understanding and raising awareness about any ethical issues.

For trainees who began the DClinPsy in 2017 or before, the assessed academic coursework completed as part of the programme is largely evaluated using a series of ‘core competencies’ that are required to perform these skill sets proficiently. These competencies are derived from the a job, task and role analysis for clinical psychology arising from a research project commissioned by the Clearing House for Postgraduate Course in Clinical Psychology (Baron & O’Reilly, 2012). The competencies are designed to be transferable across the multiple activities in which clinical psychologists are expected to engage. A brief definition of each of them follows: –

  1. Knowledge and skills – this is evidence that the trainee has a broad knowledge and clear understanding of the knowledge and evidence base being referred to in the assignment. This will include, for example, knowledge and understanding of theory and clinical technique in relation to a clinical situation, of research methodology and application, and of the evidence and literature base more generally in a relevant subject area.
  2. Analysis and critical thinking – this relates to evidence of the ability to evaluate literature critically and to adapt and apply knowledge and skills to specific situations. It can include, for example, adapting theory for use with a particular client, critical evaluation of the work of others and analysis of data collected through research.
  3. Reflection and integration – this relates to evidence of the trainee being able to adopt a reflective stance to facilitate learning, and the application of learning to practice.
  4. Professional behaviour – this relates to evidence of the trainee conducting themselves in a manner consistent with the professional role of clinical psychologist. This will include an awareness and use of relevant guidelines and standards regarding ethics, boundaries etc., and interacting with other professionals in an appropriate manner.
  5. Written communication – This refers to the adequate written expression of a range of ideas, concepts and arguments, in a coherent, flowing and appropriately structured way. The style adopted should be appropriate for the intended audience.
  6. Resilience – this reflects evidence of the trainee’s ability to face challenges confidently and learn from setbacks.
  7. Presentation skills – evidence of the ability to effectively communicate information in a live presentation environment is assessed under this competency. It includes verbal communication skills plus associated planning and performance skills in presenting.
  8. Literature search skills – this relates to evidence of the trainee showing the technical skills required in locating and using relevant literature and other sources of knowledge and evidence.
  9. Contextual Awareness – competency refers to an awareness of the contexts that clinical psychologists work in, and the professional role of a clinical psychologist within them.

13. Reference Points Used to Inform

  • HCPC Standards of Education & Training
  • HCPC Standards of Proficiency
  • Standards for Doctoral Programmes in Clinical Psychology (BPS document)
  • BPS accreditation through partnership handbook
  • BPS accreditation through partnership additional guidance for clinical psychology training programmes: The Ten Essential Shared Capabilities
  • BPS Generic Professional Practice Guidelines
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Professional Practice Guidelines
  • Clinical Psychology – a quick guide to the profession and its training
  • Clinical Psychology: The core purpose and philosophy of the profession (BPS Division of Clinical Psychology)
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guide :Service User and Carer Involvement within Clinical Psychology Training
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines: Training in Forensic Clinical Psychology
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology Training Providers for the Training and Consolidation of Clinical Practice in Relation to People with Learning Disabilities
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology for Training Providers – Training and consolidation of clinical practice in relation to children and young people
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology Training Providers for the Training and Consolidation of Clinical Practice in Relation to Older People
  • BPS Division of Clinical Psychology Good Practice Guidelines for UK Clinical Psychology Training Providers. Training and Consolidation of Clinical Practice in Clinical Health Psychology.
  • BPS Division of Neuropsychology Competency Framework for the UK Clinical Neuropsychology Profession.
  • NHS National Service Frameworks
  • NHS Knowledge & Skills Framework
  • QAA Benchmark statement Healthcare programmes – Clinical Psychology.
  • Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, ‘Code of practice for the assurance of academic quality and standards in higher education’
  • Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, ‘A framework for higher education qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland’
  • National Qualifications Framework in England, Wales and Northern Ireland
  • Disability Discrimination Act 1995
  • Human Rights Act 1998
  • Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974, and associated regulations
  • The Children Act 2004
  • Selection of Clinical Psychologist Trainees Job Analysis Final Report
  • Lancaster University DClinPsy programme vision statement
  • Input from stakeholders (including local employers, trainees, service users and carers, NHS England) through the programme’s stakeholder events, and stakeholder representation on programme development and implementation groups.

14. Scheme of Study Structure and Features

Period of registration

The maximum period of registration for the DClinPsy Programme is normally seven years. This allows for qualification whilst the graduating trainees are all up to date with current practice. It is held that prolonging registration beyond this period means that there is a risk that professional practice on qualifying will be outdated. The reasons underlying this concerns the practice that can be overseen by the DClinPsy programme and are separate from guidelines concerning “return to practice” under the aegis of the Health and Clinical Professions Council (HCPC).

This period is also normally independent of amount of time spent intercalated, maternity leave, long-term illness and part/full time status. It is also independent of working in the NHS under supervision whilst waiting to qualify. This latter example might include students who have completed the clinical practice elements of the programme and be completing academic assignments and/or their thesis. This is because the Programme cannot oversee the ongoing practice and clinical supervision beyond their contracted period of study.

The tables below give a typical outline of the programme as it develops for each student on either a full time or part time pathway. The programme structure normally follows this format, although more individualised training plans may become necessary for some trainees – see Structure of Teaching and Placements for full details. This can also be referred to in relation to students registered prior to 2021.

Full time pathway

All Teaching belongs to both a ‘block’ which reflects the current placement and assessment activities the trainee is conducting at that point in the programme, and a thematic ‘strand’ that develops learning over the three years of training.

Clinical Activity Self-directed study time Teaching ‘blocks’:
YEAR ONE
Sept – Oct none 1 day per week Induction teaching programme
Oct – Dec Community Engagement block – trainee engage with local communities in groups 1 day per week Mostly aimed at direct working

– 2 days per week

Jan – Sept Direct working focused placement 1 day per week Mostly aimed at direct working – 1 day per week
YEAR TWO
Oct – Dec Project block – trainees engage in group service development activity 1 day per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
Jan – Sep Indirect working focused placement 1 day per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
YEAR THREE
Oct – Dec Community Psychology activity block 1 day per week. From October until thesis hand in (March) there are 30 additional bookable study days which trainees may take in a flexible manner as best suits their research needs. This needs to be discussed and agreed in advance with research and clinical tutors as well as third year placement supervisors. Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership.  1 day per week
Jan- Aug Influencing and leadership-focussed placement 1 day per week until the end of May, then one day per fortnight from the start of June through to the end of the training contract Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership. 1 day per week until the end of May, then one day per fortnight from the start of June through to the end of the training contract.
Teaching thematic ‘strands’: Teaching that forms part of each strand listed take place across the three years of training. ·         Assignment Preparation

·         Therapy – Cognitive Behavioural Therapy

·         Therapy – Systemic Practice

·         Therapy – Cognitive Analytic Therapy

·         Professional Influencing

·         Leadership

·         Physical Health & Cognitive Development

·         Quality Assurance

·         Research

·         Themes of Clinical Practice

Through the three-year training, trainees acquire core competencies that span the roles expected of a clinical psychologist. These not only relate to the ability to work individually and with other key professionals and carers, with clients across the life span, across client ability and in a range of clinical settings, but also include skills in leadership, consultancy and service development.

This competency acquisition is achieved through organising teaching so that it reflects the focus of trainee placements and assessed work activity at any given point of the programme. However, learning and teaching is also co-ordinated thematically in ‘strands’ to ensure a coherent developmental approach. More detail on the strands can be found in the document below.

The programme specifically enables students to develop academic and research competencies at a level commensurate with a doctoral level degree and related to those skills and abilities necessary to have the Standards of Proficiency (SoP) for a clinical psychologist as set out by the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC). Within work during placements, as well as academic activity outside of placements, the programme fosters students’ ability to appraise evidence critically and modify practice appropriately.

This table gives a typical outline of the part time programme as it develops over the 4 years and 4 months for each student. The part time programme structure normally follows this format, although more individualised training plans may become necessary for some trainees.

All Teaching belongs to both a ‘block’ which reflects the current placement and assessment activities the trainee is conducting at that point in the programme, and a thematic ‘strand’ that develops learning over the 4 years 4 months of training.

Clinical Activity Self-directed study time Teaching ‘blocks’:
YEAR ONE
Sept – Oct none 0.5 days per week Induction teaching programme
Oct – Dec Community Engagement block – trainee engage with local communities in groups 0.5 days per week Mostly aimed at direct working

– 2 days per week

Jan – Sept Direct working focused placement 0.5 days per week Mostly aimed at direct working – 1 day per week
YEAR TWO
Oct – Jan Direct working focused placement 0.5 days per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
Feb – May Project block – trainees engage in group service development activity 1 day per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
June None Thesis study 2.5 days per week Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
July – Sep Indirect working focused placement Mostly aimed at indirect ways of working, consultation and supervision
YEAR THREE
Oct – August Indirect working focused placement 1-1.5 days per week Occasional Professional Development and cross-cohort teaching
YEAR FOUR
Sep None Thesis study 2.5 days per week None
Oct – Dec Community Psychology activity block 0.5 days per week Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership. One day per week through to May, then one day per fortnight
Jan – Aug Influencing and leadership-focussed placement 0.5 days per week Mostly focused on advanced clinical skills and practice, influencing and leadership. One day per week through to May, then one day per fortnight
YEAR FOUR
Sep -Dec Influencing and leadership-focussed placement 1 day per week None
Teaching thematic ‘strands’: Teaching that forms part of each strand listed take place across the three years of training. ·         Assignment Preparation

·         Therapy – Cognitive Behavioural Therapy

·         Therapy – Systemic Practice

·         Therapy – Cognitive Analytic Therapy

·         Professional Influencing

·         Leadership

·         Physical Health & Cognitive Development

·         Quality Assurance

·         Research

·         Themes of Clinical Practice

Through the four-year 4-month training, trainees acquire core competencies that span the roles expected of a clinical psychologist. These not only relate to the ability to work individually and with other key professionals and carers, with clients across the life span, across client ability and in a range of clinical settings, but also include skills in leadership, consultancy and service development.

This competency acquisition is achieved through organising teaching so that it reflects the focus of trainee placements and assessed work activity at any given point of the programme. However, learning and teaching is also co-ordinated thematically in ‘strands’ to ensure a coherent developmental approach. More detail on the strands can be found in the document below.

During training, trainees acquire core competencies that span the roles expected of a clinical psychologist. These not only relate to the ability to work individually and with other key professionals and carers, with clients across the life span, across client ability and in a range of clinical settings, but also include skills in leadership, consultancy and service development.

This competency acquisition is achieved through organising teaching so that it reflects the focus of trainee placements and assessed work activity at any given point of the programme. However, learning and teaching is also co-ordinated thematically in ‘strands’ to ensure a coherent developmental approach. These are: –

  • Assignment Preparation
  • Leadership
  • Physical Health and Cognitive Development
  • Professional Influencing
  • Quality Assurance
  • Research
  • Themes of Clinical Practice
  • Therapy

The programme specifically enables students to develop academic and research competencies at a level commensurate with a doctoral level degree and related to those skills and abilities necessary to have the Standards of Proficiency (SoP) for a clinical psychologist as set out by the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC). Within work during placements, as well as academic activity outside of placements, the programme fosters students’ ability to appraise evidence critically and modify practice appropriately.

15. Support for Learning

Supervision & learning on practice placements

Trainees should spend between 50-60 per cent of their time on clinical placement, and are actively guided in their clinical learning and practice by their practice placement supervisors. The focus of the learning to take place is specified in the placement contract agreed between trainee and supervisor(s) at the beginning of the placement and submitted to the programme. Contracts are written using a proforma that is structured using the programme’s learning objectives.

Group supervision

Trainees in their final year of training facilitate group supervision sessions for trainees in other cohorts.

Peer support and discussion groups

The programme encourages trainees to meet in self directed groups (which can be facilitated or un-facilitated) around specific issues such as analysis methods in research. Whilst trainees arrange such meetings, the programme is able to book rooms, provide any necessary resources and offer facilitation for such meetings on request.

General learning & pastoral support

In addition to the structures directly designed to support learning, the programme makes available to trainees a number of other more general support process to assist trainee in their progress on the programme. These include a system of independent mentors, a ‘buddy’ system and facilitating access to the faculty’s student learning advisor who offers clinics and one-to-one session to help students develop generic academic skills. These processes are overseen by the programme’s Pastoral Development and Implementation Group

Personal and professional development

TYPE OF TRAINEE SUPPORT PSYCHOLOGISTS AND OTHERS INVOLVED FREQUENCY OF MEETINGS WITH TRAINEES
Tutor pair and individual training plan (ITP) Programme staff: one member of the clinical team oversees the programme in partnership with each trainee’s current academic supervisor from the research team Individual training plan meetings at least twice per year, plus other meetings as necessary. End of training interview in last year of training.
Mentoring Scheme Clinical psychologists and other appropriately registered professionals external to the course that are working in the region. The system is coordinated by the Mentoring Scheme Associate Tutor There is no specific frequency; varies in accordance with trainee (mentee) needs and wishes and mentor availability.
Mini Cognitive Analytic Therapy (CAT) Cognitive Analytic Therapist external to the programme. Trainees have £400 available to use for CPD purposes over the course of their training. These may be used to undertake CAT reformulation sessions. There is no specific frequency or number; varies in accordance with trainee choice.
Personal Therapy Individual tutors and/or the Mentoring Scheme Associate Tutor will support trainees in finding appropriate therapeutic input. As necessary
Placement-Programme links Trainees’ individual clinical tutors visit placements At least one meeting per placement
Clinical Placement For each of the five placements, one-two main supervisors, plus other supervisors which may also form part of a supervisory team A minimum of three hours contact weekly including 60-90 minutes of formal supervision. Please note that where the majority, or all, of placement activity is being undertaken remotely then it may not be possible to ensure three hours of weekly contact with the trainee’s supervisor. Trainees can still expect to receive at least 60 minutes formal supervision weekly.
Peer support; buddy system Trainees. Jo Armitage coordinates the buddy system Peer support: during teaching days (generally weekly) and as arranged by trainees. Buddy system: as necessary.
Student Learning Advisor Service No programme staff involved. A student learning advisor is based in the faculty who can provide study and learning support for trainees on an individual needs-led basis Frequency of meetings agreed as necessary

The programme’s support systems are designed to be complementary and to optimise each trainee’s personal and professional development through the course of training. Often, even before entry to the programme, potential trainees may contact the office with regard to any special requirements they may have. Where any trainee has a registered disability, and a need for particular equipment or special procedures to be followed to facilitate training, office staff (usually the Programme Administrator) liaise with staff, the funding authority, and the student support unit within the University to ensure requirements are assessed and then met as efficiently as possible.

16. Criteria for Admissions

Summary of a Successful Admissions Process

  1. The candidate applies via the Clearing House in Clinical Psychology.
  2. Lancaster programme staff check that all applicants to the Lancaster DClinPsy meet the entry requirements. If the candidate discloses a disability they are contacted by programme staff to check what modifications to the admissions process might be needed.
  3. The candidate takes an online general mental ability screening test. Applicants with the top 70 scores on this test, plus those declaring a disability who score above the most recently published threshold (see the DClinPsy admissions webpages near the time of application) are invited to attend the selection event.
  4. The candidate typically attends a day long selection event at Lancaster University, although that may occur virtually in certain contexts, such as a pandemic.
  5. A provisional verbal offer of a place is made subject to:
    • Validation of general mental ability test in examination conditions.
    • References from the previous 3 years of employment or study.
    • The completion of Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust’s ‘Self Declaration Form A’.
    • An occupational health check.
    • A Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) check.

Selection criteria

Selection from application form

At the time of application candidates must be eligible for Graduate Basis for Chartered Membership (GBC) with the British Psychological Society. Only those candidates who have GBC will be considered. The application forms are considered and all candidates with at least one satisfactory reference and Graduate Basis for Chartered Membership will be invited to take part in a general mental ability test. Candidates whose first language is not English must also meet the programme’s English Language Proficiency Requirements which comprise one of the following: –

    • an IELTS minimum score of 7.0 in each element
    • a TOEFL minimum score of 20 in each element
    • a qualification taught and assessed in English in an English speaking country at degree level or above (not including PG Certs)

In the remaining stages of selection, the programme utilises a competency based selection system. Activities during the selection event offer candidates the opportunity to demonstrate: competence in oral communication skills, self-awareness and openness to learning, personal maturity, warmth and empathy, resilience, professional skills, motivation and application, contextual awareness, problem solving and decision making and their commitment to fairness and inclusivity. Ratings of all the competencies above contribute equally to the candidate’s score.

After the selection event

Successful candidates are notified verbally, by telephone, whether they are to be offered a provisional place. This occurs on the last selection event day or the day after. The University Postgraduate Office will then send an email to each successful applicant asking them to decline or accept an offer of a place. This offer is conditional on the candidate supplying satisfactory references as described above, re-sitting the general mental ability test under examination conditions, satisfactory completion of Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust’s ‘Self Declaration Form A’, satisfactory outcome of the DBS check, the outcome of an occupational health assessment and evidence for graduate basis for chartered membership of the BPS. Candidates must answer via this route and decline or accept the offer via the Clearing House in Clinical Psychology.

17. Evaluation and Improvement of Quality and Standards

Quality assurance of teaching

The quality and appropriateness of teaching is monitored in several ways. When planning the teaching programme, strand teams and teachers agree a plan for each teaching session which describes the content and methods to be used, and indicates which of the programme learning outcomes each of these aim to focus on addressing.

Peer Observation

The programme uses a system of peer observation of teaching that is in line with the university’s policy on this matter, and which includes the peer observation of teaching by visiting lecturers. The guidelines for peer observation used by the programme include a process for feeding back to the observed teacher.

There are minimum requirements for permanent staff members to be peer-observed regularly, and staff are encouraged to discuss feedback they have received during their annual appraisal. Feedback from the peer review process is collated and a report produced for the Learning and Teaching Development and Implementation Group annually, and a summary of the findings are sent by this group to the programme’s Operational Management Group.

Trainee feedback

Following teaching sessions, feedback is obtained in several ways, and is reviewed and acted upon by block and strand co-ordinators. For each teaching session each trainee is prompted to complete an online questionnaire, outlining their views on to what extent the learning outcomes for the session were made clear and were attained. The online questionnaire maps on to the teaching outline proforma that is prepared by teachers prior to the teaching session. The questionnaire also gives the opportunity to provide open-ended anonymous written feedback. Trainees are also invited to provide individual feedback direct to the co-ordinator, and are also asked for feedback individually during their training progress reviews which occur every six months during training.

At the end of each teaching block, the chair and deputy chair of the Learning and Teaching Development and Implementation Group meets with the relevant cohort as a group to request more general feedback about the delivery of the block as a whole. They also conduct an email review of the teaching block, inviting all those involved in the teaching to contribute their reflections and suggestions. All feedback received is discussed within the Learning and Teaching Development and Implementation Group and an action plan in response to it is formulated. A report summarising the feedback and the response to it is produced and is fed back to staff and trainees though the programme’s management committee and is also made available to stakeholders.

Teacher feedback

Teachers are asked to complete an online questionnaire following the session giving their feedback on the teaching experience and identifying any areas where changes might be beneficial in future.

Quality assurance of practice placements

Suitability of placements and quality are checked according to the following criteria (the relevant HCPC standards of education and training will be referenced by number after each of the below):

          1. Does the placement have the potential to meet the learning needs of the trainees at the specific point in their training (e.g. are there enough appropriately qualified staff available in a small service to supervise and support the trainee, or does a third year placement have access to work suitable to address any gaps remaining in the trainee’s learning) (SET 5.2; 5.6; 5.7)?
          2. Will the placement provide a safe and supportive environment for the trainees (SET 5.3)?
          3. Is the placement situated in a service which has all the necessary governance and assurance frameworks in place to ensure the safety and promote the wellbeing of clients and trainees (SET 5.5)?
          4. Are the prospective supervisors appropriately registered (SET 5.9)?
          5. Have they undertaken appropriate training as supervisors (SET 5.8)?

      In addition, placement providers must be capable of providing supervised practice consistent with the standards set out in BPS Accreditation through Partnership Handbook; Guidance for Clinical Psychology Programmes, enabling the trainees to achieve the learning outcomes set out in that same document (Sections 1 and 2).

Checks for compliance of offered placements with the above standards are carried out first by checking the registration of potential supervisors with the HCPC, and also checking their successful completion of appropriate supervisor training against records held by all three northwest clinical psychology training programmes. The programme team will review any of the records the programme holds about previous placements provided by that potential supervisor and the service in question (see placement audit form below) and whether there has been a serious concern raised about the quality of this placement or supervisor before (see placement support below). In addition, regular liaison takes place between the three northwest training programmes who share the majority of the practice placements in the northwest, so that any previous difficulties can be identified and addressed. Should any problems have been identified that have put into question the appropriateness of a specific placement, the placement providers are consulted and assurance sought that (i) any issues identified have been addressed and (ii) there is a process in place to assure the ongoing quality of the placement. If such assurances are not received, the offer of a placement will not be taken up by the programme.

For those supervisors who and/ or placements that have not been used by the programme before (even if they have provided placements for other northwest programmes), there will also be direct contact made by a member of the programme team with the placement supervisor to check that all suitability criteria are able to be met by the placement and by the supervisor. When a practice placement opportunity is being offered in a particular service for the first time then an enhanced quality assurance process takes place. Following an initial request for expressions of interest in supervising, the Placement Development and Implementation group will identify all first time practice placement opportunities which have been offered. A blank Placement Description Form will be sent to the potential supervisor and a pre-placement visit (virtually if necessary) to the practice placement will be arranged by a Clinical Tutor. This pre-placement visit must be completed prior to the allocation of any trainee to the practice placement. The pre-placement visit must take place at the site where the trainee will be spending the majority of their practice placement. If the placement is split between two or more sites, visits must be made to all locations and separate Placement Quality Assurance Forms completed for each location. Similarly, if there is more than one supervisor jointly offering a practice placement opportunity, all of those identified as first time supervisors will require a separately completed Placement Quality Assurance Form and Placement Description Form. The Placement Quality Assurance Form must be completed by the clinical tutor visiting the placement site during the pre-placement visit. The form asks for evidence of appropriate facilities, accessibility, safety, governance and assurance, as well as confirmation of supervisor qualification and professional registration. Only when the placement quality assurance form records that all assurance benchmarks have been met will the practice placement and supervisor be considered suitable for allocation of a trainee.

From a more general perspective, the programme takes a number of measures to ensure that enough placements of suitable quality are available. This includes the agreed schedule of core placements across the three northwest courses described above, which is designed to prevent all three courses from requiring placements in the same core field at the same time, as well as to limit the impact of two NW programmes requiring placements from the same field at the same time. Part of the clinical tutors’ role is also to develop and maintain links between the programme and practice placement providers, services and special interest groups within the profession, so that the impact of local and national workforce issues can be noted and, if necessary, acted upon to keep the availability of good quality placements high on the agenda of local services and practitioners in the northwest.

Quality assurance of assessments

Marking for all assignments except the thesis

This process ensures that they are appropriately qualified and have sufficient experience. Markers, who tend to be local clinical psychologists, are also required to attend training for specific assignments and are not asked to mark unless they have attended this training. All assignments are double-marked at the summative stage and a proportion of all submissions are also double marked at the formative stage. Where feasible and appropriate markers will mark the work independently before reaching an agreed final mark with their co-marker. Where possible assignments are marked blind. All assignments are marked against a competency-based framework and a single, agreed mark is communicated to the trainees. Markers are invited to attend the Exam board meeting where the work they have marked is being considered.

External examiners

The programme has a number of standing external examiners who are appointed for a four year period. All external examiners are experienced clinical psychologists involved in training on other Doctorate in Clinical Psychology programmes and all are from the relevant part of the HCPC Register. The appointment process for external examiners is approved by the university. There are usually at least three external examiners involved in the programme.

The role of the external examiners can be summarised as follows:

        • Moderating academic assignments. External examiners are sent at least one example of a low pass, mid-range pass and a high pass for each academic piece of work submitted. Individual assignments are then commented on briefly and any general issues can be reported at the relevant Exam Board. For pieces of work which markers have passed, the external examiner only comments on the marks and would not, unless in exceptional circumstances, recommend a mark change. Where the internal markers cannot agree a mark or where there is a recommended fail grade, then the external examiner can change the mark recommended by the internal markers.
        • Moderating placement assessments. External examiners are sent examples of the supervisor’s assessment of trainee forms. Placement assessment is then commented on and any general issues can be reported at the relevant Exam Board.
        • Attendance at Exam Boards. At least one external examiner attends each Exam Board to make the Exam Board quorate. The role of the external examiner in this setting is to report on moderated work, provide more general comments on progression/performance, make comments on Exam Board procedures and provide an experienced opinion on issues of debate or contention.
        • Providing an annual report. Each external examiner is required to provide an annual report on their experience and where issues have been raised, these are replied to from the Chair of the Exam Board or the Head of DHR depending on their topic.
        • Providing expert opinion. Where a special Exam Board is called, an external examiner would be asked to attend to provide expert opinion on the assessments/processes carried out to that point.

Thesis External Examiners

External examiners are also specifically appointed for the examination of a thesis. These are one-off contracts and examiners are chosen for their expertise in an area relevant to the trainee’s thesis topic. Where the external examiner is not a clinical psychologist the internal examiner would be a clinical psychologist so that there is always someone from the HCPC register of clinical psychologists on the examiner panel. Appointments for thesis external examining are approved at a university level and criteria need to be met regarding the appropriate level of research expertise of the examiner (evidence by publications and grant income), the need to have an equivalent level of qualification (e.g., other doctorate level qualification) and their lack of significant prior contact with the trainee.

Over-arching quality assurance mechanisms

The following programme-level structures monitor quality on the programme:

  • Programme Board

    The principal role of the Programme Board is to provide strategic advice, drawn from a range of perspectives, on the continuing development of the Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology programme in accordance with the DClinPsy vision statement. In order to deliver on its strategic remit the Programme Board will: –

    • Provide a forum for the exchange of information relevant to the delivery of the Programme between key stakeholders.
    • Review and advise on the ongoing accreditation of the DClinPsy Programme with respect to the HCPC and the British Psychological Society.
    • Review and advise on the Quality Monitoring Visit reports from the quarterly visits carried out by NHS England and the responses made by the University.
    • Highlight, consider and advise on the potential impact of emerging trends in the sector including national, regional or local NHS and higher education policy.
    • Consider and advise on stakeholder feedback on the Programme and the resulting responses from the University.

    Membership

    External perspectives: –

    • Consultant clinical psychologist as further representation of clinical psychology from the North West Region (external to LSCFT).
    • Service user representative (via Lancaster University Public Involvement Network (LUPIN)).
    • Trainee representative from each cohort (including the bespoke pathways cohort).
    • Representative of NHS England.

    On behalf of the Programme team:

    • Programme Director (or his/her nominated deputy)
    • Research Director (or his/her nominated deputy)
    • Clinical Director (or his/her nominated deputy)
    • Programme Administrator (or his/her nominated deputy)

    University perspective

    • The Dean of FHM (or his/her nominated deputy).

    Trust perspective

    • Associate Director for Psychological Professions from LSCFT (or his/her nominated deputy).
  • Staff team meeting

    The staff team meet on a monthly basis and considers issues related to the day to day delivery of the programme.

  • Development and Implementation Groups (DIGs)

    Nine DIGs (learning and teaching; placement; selections and admissions; assessment; pastoral; inclusivity; part-time training; Lancaster University public involvement network, Clinical Psychology Education Team) meet on a regular basis and provide operational oversight of a specific domain of training. Staff team members, trainees, experts by experience and local clinical psychologists are members of the majority of DIGs.

  • Anti-Racism Accountability Group (ARAG)

    The aims of the ARAG are:

  • To explore, assess, collate and report systemic racist practice on the Lancaster DClinPsy programme
  • To guide the Development & Implementation Groups (DIGs) in regards to anti-racist practice
  • To hold the DIGs to account for their actions in regards to anti-racist practice
  • To coordinate the action of the HEE report “Action Plan to Improve Equity of Access and Inclusion for Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic Entrants to Clinical Psychology Training”.
  • Operational Management Group

    The operational management group (all chairs of the development and implementation groups, the programme and clinical directors and the programme administrator) meet monthly and makes recommendations to the directors regarding operational and strategic programme issues.

  • Directors Meeting

    The Directors’ Committee meets weekly to address pertinent operational issues and consider strategic options. Each quarter the Directors’ Committee invites attendees from colleagues in DHR, including representatives from finance and H.R. to discuss pertinent issues.

  • Programme Examination Board

    The Examination Board has the authority delegated to it by the University to reach decisions regarding the academic status of students’ assignments and the completion status of students’ practice placements. The membership of the examination board is the programme staff, appointed external examiners, with the Vice Chancellor, the Assistant Dean for Teaching and the Head of the Division of Health Research as ex-officio members.

  • Contract Meeting

    There are regular contractual review meetings with the purchasing authority – NHS England – which are attended by the Clinical Director and the Programme Director.

  • 3 Course Meeting

    There is close liaison with the programmes based at the University of Liverpool and the University of Manchester, and NHS partners in training.

  • Other structures

    • There is an annual review of all aspects of the programme which is collated at faculty level. The Learning and Teaching Development and Implementation Group maintain responsibility for the quality of teaching and review of the processes. New clinical psychologists and members of staff may be approached to contribute. Feedback from trainees is taken into consideration, and draft programmes for the future year discussed with them as well as the teachers. Action on feedback is communicated to all involved.
    • There are workshops for all those who contribute to the scheme: assessors, teachers, supervisors.
    • Markers and External Examiners provide comments and feedback to the programme. These are reviewed and feedback provided.
    • Supervisors provide feedback to staff on any element in which they are involved (clinical, research or academic support)
    • The programme operates a system of peer observation consistent with the University’s procedures.

18. Regulation of Assessment

Examination and assessment regulations are contained in full within the University Examinations Regulations. However, given that the Doctorate in Clinical Psychology has an unusual structure, particular details of the assessment regulations are reproduced below:

Scheme of assessment – trainees beginning training in 2017 or before

For those trainees beginning training in 2017 or before, to obtain the award students are required to complete all three elements of the programme. These comprise:

          1. All five clinical placements
          2. Submission (and if failed, resubmission) of all six coursework assignments (of which they must pass five)
          3. A doctoral thesis

      Course work and evaluation of clinical placements are considered at regular programme examination board meetings. The thesis is examined towards the end of the programme.

Requirements for pass

Clinical placements: The student undertakes five clinical placements. In the event of a placement failure, the student may be required to re-take the placement (and completion of the programme may be extended accordingly). Students who fail more than one placement are deemed to have failed the programme and are not allowed to proceed.

Coursework: The student is required to submit a total of six distinct pieces of assessed coursework (seven in the case of the 2014 intake): For all students this includes one systematic literature review, one service-related project, and a professional issues assignment. For intakes up until 2014 this also includes, two placement presentation and report exercises and a second professional issues assignment. For the 2015 intake onwards the PPR is replaced by the direct assessment of clinical skills placement portfolio 1& 2 assignments. Intakes from 2014 are also required to complete a roleplay assignment (DACS-SRPS).

If a student has more than two summative failures of coursework assignments recorded in total, then he or she is deemed to have failed the programme and is not allowed to proceed. In the event of a summative submission of a coursework assignment receiving a fail mark, this is counted as one failure and the student is required to resubmit the assignment. If the resubmission also fails, two failures are recorded for the student but a further resubmission of that particular piece of coursework is not undertaken. Please note that the placement portfolio assignments also include a formative submission opportunity which is not included in this total.

Thesis: This is examined in accordance with the University regulations for doctoral theses.

Scheme of assessment – 2018 cohort onwards

From 2018 cohort onwards, to obtain the award students are required to complete all three elements of the programme. These comprise: –

        1. All clinical placements
        2. Submission (and if failed, resubmission) of all seven coursework assignments (of which they must pass all seven)
        3. A doctoral thesis

Course work and evaluation of clinical placements are considered at regular programme examination board meetings. The thesis is examined towards the end of the programme.

Requirements for pass

Clinical placements: In the event of a placement failure, the student may be required to re-take the placement (and completion of the programme may be extended accordingly). Students who fail more than one placement are deemed to have failed the programme and are not allowed to proceed.

Coursework: The student is required to pass a total of seven distinct pieces of assessed coursework: one self-assessment exercise, one Placement Assignment (Service Evaluation), project, one Service Improvement Poster Presentation, one Thesis Preparation Assignment and three Placement Assignments (Live Skills).

If a student fails a summative submission and a subsequent resubmission, then he or she is deemed to have failed the programme and is not allowed to proceed.

Thesis: This is examined in accordance with the University regulations for doctoral theses.

For all cohorts

        • There is no distinction grade associated with the award.
        • Should it be necessary for a student to resubmit a piece of coursework, a proposed resubmission date is agreed at an individual training plan meeting for the student, and this is subsequently agreed by the senior management team and ratified by the programme examination board. Arrangements for re-taking a placement are dependent on the individual case and the advice of the external examiner. Arrangements for re-submission of the thesis are in accordance with Lancaster Ph.D. regulations.
        • To be eligible to apply to be registered with the HCPC as practitioner psychologists, it is essential that students pass with a doctoral qualification.
        • Students are full-time employees of the NHS. In the event of the student being dismissed from employment, he or she will also be deemed to have failed the programme.
        • Students have access to University appeal and review procedures, including the right to appeal to the Vice Chancellor under Statute 21 of the University Regulations.

19. Indicators of Quality

        1. Indicator: maintenance or expansion in number of training commissions.
          Recent performance: the number of training commissions per year has more than doubled since 2019.
        2. Indicator: number of applications made to the programme.
          Recent performance: typically there are at least 450 applications for places each year, and in 2020 there were over 600 applications). The number of places on the programme per year is currently 29 (2020 intake) 41 (2021 intake), 51 2022 intake and 52 (2023) intake.
          Recent performance: Most students work in the NHS on qualifying, the vast majority within the northwest. Across the comprehensive records have been kept, all eligible graduates from the programme have found employment within 2 months of completing the programme.

General reading list
The HCPC Standards of Proficiency for practitioner psychologists
HCPC Standards of education and training
BPS Accreditation through partnership handbook
Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee (SAT) form
Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee (SAT) form – final placement version
Trainee log book
Learning outcome assessment map
Placement contract
Clearing House in Clinical Psychology
Placement description form
Placement quality assurance form

Examination of the thesis

For the thesis, programme staff (or other members of the university such as colleagues in psychology, DHR or social sciences) who are not directly involved in helping trainees with the preparation of their thesis research and are not one of their individual tutors act as internal examiners. Each thesis is examined by a specifically appointed external examiner whose appropriateness to examine the thesis is assessed by the university. University requirements regarding the examination of doctoral level theses require that the viva be chaired by an eligible member of academic staff or audio-recorded.

Trainees can find more information in the Guidance on the thesis process for trainees section of the online handbook.

Advice to thesis examiners

Examination board

The Examination Board has the authority delegated to it by the University to reach decisions regarding the academic status (pass / fail) of students’ assignments and practice placements. The examination board comprises the programme staff and appointed external examiners, with the Vice Chancellor, the Assistant Dean for Teaching and the Head of the Division of Health Research also being ex-officio members.

The external examiners sit for a fixed term (usually four years) and have an overview of the programme assignments and other assessment processes. They also provide the final adjudication on assignments indicated as fails by markers. Markers of assignments external to the programme may also be invited to attend Boards. The current Chair of the Exam Board is Dr Ian Smith. The chair and deputy are appointed and reviewed annually at the directors’ committee.

The Exam Board usually meets three times per year and its minutes, taken by the Programme Assistant (Academic), are available to all programme staff, external examiners and relevant University post holders.

 

Deadlines, extensions and exceptional circumstances

Deadlines and extensions

Trainees can find the fixed deadlines for all assignments with the programmes’ Assignment Submission Plan. All assignments need to be submitted by the agreed deadline to avoid negative consequences. The consequences of late submission and the process for obtaining an extension is detailed on the following page:

Changes via Individual Training Plan meeting

Deadlines for individual trainees may also be moved to a subsequent fixed deadline for that assignment during an individual training plan meeting if both of the trainee’s individual tutors are in agreement and this is approved by the directors. If trainees are aware of any extended circumstances out of their control which might result in them being able complete assessed work to their normal standard of academic performance then they should discuss this with their individual tutors at the earliest opportunity so that any necessary reasonable adjustments can be made.

Exceptional Circumstances

If subsequent to a submission being made or a deadline being missed a trainee identifies such circumstances then they may request that exceptional circumstances are taken account of.

Assessment submission points

Tutor system and Individual Training Plans (ITP)

Introduction to the Tutor Pair

To ensure that trainees receive coordinated support and advice on their progression throughout their training, from staff who have a chance to get to know them and their learning needs, each trainee is allocated a pair of tutors. Around the first day of induction trainees will be made aware of their allocated individual clinical tutor. All new trainees meet with their clinical tutors during the induction period, and clinical tutors and trainees are encouraged to agree a psychological contract describing the way that they will work together.

Each trainee and their individual clinical tutor will be part of a Vertical Tutor Group (VTGs). There are three VTGs consisting of 4-6 clinical tutors and their allocated trainees. The VTGs were established in order for the tutors and tutees within them to get to know each other so that other tutors within the group can work with particular trainees if the need arises for any reason. The VTGs also help to foster relationships between trainees in different cohorts. In order to operate effectively information that trainees have shared with their individual tutor will be shared within VTGs on a need to know basis, as the other tutor members of the VTGs have delegated line management responsibilities for all the trainees within the VTG.

In addition to an individual clinical tutor and the VTG the trainees also have an individual research tutor. The research tutor is allocated to trainees within the first 55 days of training (expressed as such as some trainees are on part-time training routes) and, for full time trainees, will also usually be their thesis supervisor. The respective roles and responsibilities of the research tutor and the trainee are captured in the thesis contract and the research consistency framework. The individual tutor team will work with the trainee to the end of the training programme.

Individual tutors are intended to be the main point of general contact for the trainee with the programme. They are available to provide pastoral support as well as having the delegated authority to deal with some day-to-day line management issues, such as approving annual leave requests (clinical tutors). They will also work with the trainee to develop and maintain an Individual Training Plan (ITP) (see below) throughout training. It would generally be expected that both tutors would copy the other into communication with and/or about the trainee when this concerns issues beyond routine clinical/academic/research tasks. Examples of such communication would be concerns regarding personal issues impacting on training; discussions about planned absence from the programme or revisions to an ITP. The principle here is that both tutors and the trainee are involved in decision-making wherever that is appropriate and possible. Where trainees approach other members of staff to discuss specific issues that have implications for their wider training experience, these staff members will also link back to the trainee’s individual tutors so that a coordinated response and plan can be agreed.

Individual tutors (or a nominated tutor from the VTG) also carry out some specific tasks in relation to the trainee. These include the following: –

  • Support the self-assessment exercise (SAE) assignment (both tutors)
  • Undertake the self-assessment exercise (SAE) viva (both tutors)
  • Pastoral support (both tutors)
  • Conducting (in person or remotely) visits to the trainees at their placement to review progress (clinical tutor)
  • Supervise the thesis proposal assignment (research tutor)
  • Support for placement assignments, including draft read of first placement assignment (clinical tutor)
  • Conducting ITP meetings with the trainee (both tutors if possible)
  • Raising issues of concern with the trainee or feeding back on discussion about the trainee which have taken place in other for a (both tutors if possible)
  • Conducting end of training interviews with the trainee (both tutors if possible)

Tutor Contract

The role of the Clinical Tutor

The primary role of the clinical tutor is to help trainees to acquire the competencies to help vulnerable and distressed members of the public when they graduate from the course.  Overall, the clinical tutor role involves monitoring the tutee’s progression in terms of acquiring skills, identifying any barriers to that, offering pastoral support and signposting support where necessary, plus working with placement supervisors to provide clarity on what opportunities are necessary for skills acquisition.

Although the Clinical Director has ultimate line management responsibilities for trainees, each clinical tutor has ‘delegated line management responsibilities’ for each trainee they are assigned to.

Line management responsibility has two main areas of activity: University and NHS.

  • The NHS role involves an interface with Lancashire and South Cumbria Foundation Trust, our employing Trust, and includes tasks like managing absence, both long and short term, managing maternity leave, performance reviews and monitoring professional behaviour.  Within this context the tutee is conceptualised as an employee and the tutor as a manager.
  • The university role involves the management of deadlines, assessment, involvement in teaching and university committees and the acquisition of skills, where not on placement. Here, the trainee is seen primarily as a postgraduate student within an adult learning model (responsible for their own development with tutorial support)

Principles for Tutor/Tutee contract

Regularity of contact

  • The clinical tutor will offer the trainee monthly check in meetings of between 30 minutes and an hour. It is an expectation that the trainee will attend those meetings at a mutually convenient time. These can be face to face or online to maximise opportunities to meet, although face to face is preferable, particularly at the start of training. In months when there is an ITP or placement review already planned there is no expectation for there to be a separate check in meeting. Trainees will also have monthly contact with their thesis supervisor.
  • Where issues (e.g. personal circumstances requiring pastoral support, identification of the need for study support, a persistent health issue, a failed assignment) have arisen there may be a need for more frequent meetings and they will be arranged as necessary. Again, if the clinical tutor identifies a need for more regular meetings it is an expectation that the trainee will attend at a mutually convenient time.
  • Trainees can request meetings outside of the monthly check-ins. The clinical tutor will do their best to accommodate this meeting. Where this is not possible due to work commitments/leave etc, the clinical tutor will ask the clinical director (or deputy) to meet with the trainee.
  • If either the trainee or the clinical tutor cannot make the arranged meeting notice should be given where possible and a new time negotiated.
  • Both the clinical tutor and the trainee should be on time and prepared for meetings.
  • Meetings can be held face-to-face, on-line or by phone dependent on preference and pragmatics.

Responsiveness

  • Most clinical tutors work part-time. They will reply to e-mails, phone messages within a working week, unless on annual leave. If the trainee has an urgent issue they should phone the absence phone and/or e-mail the clinical director.
  • Although trainees are typically on placement 2-3 days per week they are line managed by their clinical tutor throughout the working week. Placement supervisors do not have delegated line management responsibilities. Trainees would be expected to check university e-mails and triage them on every working day, including placement and teaching days. Not all e-mails need to be responded to on the day, but some will be more urgent. If not on leave, trainees will be expected to reply to all e-mails requiring a response within a week.
  • If there are any issues with a lack of responsiveness from either the tutors or the trainee then please see the ‘how to deal with difficulties section below’.

Raising Issues

  • Regular check-ins provide the opportunity for the trainee to raise any issues pertinent to their training. These could be issues on placement, issues with academic assignments and/or any personal issues (including physical and mental health issues) impacting on training and competency development.
  • It is the trainee’s responsibility, as outlined in the HCPC code of conduct and ethics for students to make sure their clinical tutor is aware of any issues that impact on training. Trainees should raise issues as soon as they become aware of them, the hope being that issues shared in a timely manner can be managed together in a way that prevents them becoming more significant challenges.
  • The clinical tutor will treat any issues raised in a respectful and compassionate manner. Issues raised will be treated confidentially but there are limits to that confidentiality. Information may need to be shared with others on a need to know basis, such as VTG tutors, placement supervisors, communication skills facilitators and the clinical director (see below).
  • Any issues raised which have a significant impact on training will be shared with the research tutor. It is expected that both tutors will be involved in any pastoral support offered to the trainee.
  • It may be that issues raised by the trainee suggest that ongoing professional support would be beneficial for the trainee. It is not within the role of the clinical tutor to provide this support but they will, alongside the research tutor, help to identify appropriate sources of support for the trainee.
  • Any issues raised which have a significant impact on training will also be shared with the VTG tutors, and the clinical director as part of clinical tutor’s regular supervision. This is because of the shared delegated line management responsibility, and because the clinical director is ultimately the line manager for all trainees.
  • Clinical tutors will regularly check-in with trainees about their placement experience. It is important for trainees to raise any issues regarding placement as soon as they arise and not to wait until the mid-placement visit. It may be that trainees raise issues about their placement experience which they ask their clinical tutor not to raise with their placement supervisor. At times, this may be appropriate, but at other times the clinical tutor may consider it necessary to raise with placement supervisors. Tutors will be open and transparent with the trainee about any issues they need to raise with the placement supervisor.

Tutoring Relationship

Conditions that will help the relationship to work well (we would encourage you to personalise this element of the contract through discussion with your clinical tutor):

  • Maintaining regular contact and being responsive to communications.
  • Being open and honest re: development, abilities, progress, workload etc.
  • Give regular constructive and, where appropriate, positive feedback.
  • Having time to discuss what will be raised at the mid placement review.

How to deal with any difficulties:

  • Both the individual tutors and the trainee should talk as openly as possible about any difficulties encountered.
  • Disagreements should be dealt with professionally and responsibility should be shared.
  • If the trainee is experiencing consistent difficulties with one or both of their individual tutors they should raise that with the tutors and attempt to resolve this together. If resolution is not possible then the trainee should raise the issue with the Directors and a solution will be sought. Where trainees feel they have difficulties with other members of staff, they can also discuss this initially with their tutor pair. However, they would also be encouraged to discuss any difficulties openly with the specific member of staff with whom they felt they were having difficulties. The programme’s approach to any such interpersonal difficulties is to aim for resolution in an informal way before any recourse to more formal mechanisms. This is captured in the trainee concerns about staff document available in the online handbook.

Individual Training Plans

The purpose of the individual training plan (ITP) is to provide an overview of all aspects of training for each trainee, and to provide appropriate guidance to allow optimum development through the three years of the programme. This system of progress review is a collaborative exercise between the trainee and their individual tutors. It is important to emphasise that the individual training plan is not a formal ‘examined’ evaluative procedure but, instead, allows a considered discussion of progress in all domains that relate to training. The aim is for both the trainee and tutors to communicate openly and to agree on the best way forward to meet each individual trainee’s needs in the forthcoming year. Regular review is not only good practice and helpful to trainees, it also satisfies university and employer expectations for review.

The ITP process requires at least two meetings per year but meetings can be as frequent as is agreed to be useful. To ensure that students are supported effectively, failure in one of the assessments deemed to be summative will also result in a formal review of academic progress being undertaken. This will usually be done by scheduling an additional ITP meeting where these issues can be discussed and the training plan adjusted accordingly. If possible both individual tutors should be present for all ITPs. At times, due to part-time working and scheduling difficulties, it is not possible for both tutors to attend the ITP. In such cases, the tutor who is unable to attend the ITP should still review progress with the trainee. It is expected that both tutors are present for at least one ITP per year.

It is anticipated that issues in training evolve through the three years. For example, trainees’ goals are likely to be more exploratory (‘wider’) during the first year, and focus down to areas of special interest and career planning by the third year. It is the role of the tutors to help focus on appropriate goals, and strategies to meet these goals, in order to facilitate developmental progress.

It is anticipated that the trainee will make notes regarding the different areas of discussion prior to each review meeting and will bring the form to discuss at the meeting. Information in the document is then shared with the trainee’s individual tutors during the meeting, and progress on development goals from any previous meetings is discussed. There is then some reflective discussion culminating in new development goals being agreed for the next training period. Following the meeting, the trainee then updates the remainder of the form based upon these discussions. At the end of training, the form containing notes for all ITP meetings is signed by trainee and tutors and submitted to the office. These are stored in a password protected drive which can be accessed by all staff.

Individual Training Plan form – 2021 cohort onwards
Individual Training Plan form – 2021 cohort onwards – completed example

Policy regarding deadlines for submission of assessed coursework

2018 cohort and onwards

Introduction & aims of the policy

This policy was developed with the following aims in mind:

  • To bring us in line with best practice – most degree programmes at Lancaster University and Clinical Psychology programmes across the country have a clear deadline policy.
  • To clarify what constitutes grounds for an extension and formalising a process for obtaining an extension. This will also enable us to clarify the consequences of late or non-submission without an extension.
  • To provide a consistent policy that would be fairer to trainees and also would be seen to be fairer.
  • To set clear and reasonable boundaries around deadlines that mirrors the expectations that trainees are likely to have placed upon them in the workplace.
  • To ensure that trainees are meeting the competencies of good time management and professional behaviour in their academic as well as placement activities.
  • To reduce the number of extensions requested by trainees, and as a result reduce the workload for the programme team.
  • To help reduce the culture of submission ‘at the last minute’. This has contributed to many of the extension requests that had previously been made by trainees as a result of circumstances that should be avoided by appropriate time management. Reducing this culture will not only help trainees develop more helpful habits for their professional careers, but may also resolve any difficulties which could arise around teaching attendance near deadlines.

Scope of the Policy

The policy applies to the submission of all coursework on the programme excluding the Thesis.

Supporting Trainees and Encouraging Early Submission of Work

The programme wants trainees to feel supported, and if any trainees find themselves struggling with a piece of assessed work for any reason, they are encouraged to approach their individual tutors at the earliest opportunity to discuss this and obtain help and support from the programme. Having to continue to devote time to an assessed piece of coursework beyond the normal deadline can create substantial additional pressure for the trainee and disrupt their path through training. This deadline policy, therefore, has strict boundaries relating to the submission of work, and significant penalties for the late submission of work. In order to avoid trainees failing due to late submission, staff should encourage trainees at every opportunity to plan to submit their work well in advance of the deadline.

Single Extensions

Deadline date is less than a week away. Trainees can ask for an request an extension the week of the deadline date up until, and including, the Wednesday before the Friday deadline. Trainees will not be able to request an extension after the Wednesday before the deadline. If after the Wednesday (i.e. Thursday), the trainee will need to go through the exceptional circumstances process if appropriate.

Trainees  should speak to speak to their individual tutor pair regarding an  extension request. The individual tutor pair will help the trainee to decide if they want to apply for a single extension or require an Individual Training Plan adjustment. A tutor will then  make the request if appropriate via Teams and this  will be considered at the weekly directors’ meeting for approval. If the request is being made at short notice (i.e. after 10am on the Tuesday or on the Wednesday prior to the deadline) the  tutor should also alert the directors to the request  via email to ensure it is considered. In all cases the programme directors will either 1) not grant an extension; 2) grant a single extension- 1 week; 3) grant a single extension- to next deadline.

Individual Training Plan (ITP)

In some instances, a single extension may not be sufficient for a trainee. This is when there is a significant interruption to training, which is likely to affect more than one deadline. At these times, trainees and their individual tutors should discuss a revised overall deadline schedule at an ITP meeting. This is an alternative to obtaining an extension and takes account of the trainee’s overall progress through the programme. The revised deadlines schedule must be approved at the Directors’ meeting prior to it taking effect.

The Process of Submission of Work

Written work must be submitted online via the programme’s Moodle submission mechanism. The exact details of what constitutes a ‘complete’ submission for each assignment can be found in the programme’s “Guidance on Assignment Submission” information. At all times, it is the responsibility of the trainee to ensure that they make a complete submission.

Trainees should note that submissions which exceed the specified word limit will not be accepted. After the deadline has passed, submitted work will be checked, and any work which is over the maximum word count or declares that it is, will be returned to the trainee with no extension to the deadline. The trainee will be required to re-submit a version of the work that is within the word limit. This submission will then be late, and considered in accordance with the ‘Consequences of Late Submission’ section below. Please note that the maximum word count for each piece of assessed coursework is as specified in the assessment handbook of the programme. There is no leeway above this limit. The inclusion/exclusion of tables and figures from the word count varies from assignment to assignment and individual guidance is available in the handbook.

If a trainee is on sick leave on the due date of a piece of work and has not already submitted the work nor has an approved extension, they must submit their work by no later than 9.30am of the day AFTER the end of their period of sick leave (not including weekends). They must also submit a doctor’s note covering the sickness period to the DClinPsy programme office within one week of the submission of the coursework (even if the sickness was for only one day). This reflects the university’s position on assessment.

Consequences of Late Submission

Moodle automatically classifies any submission that is after the deadline as late. Under all other circumstances than those listed above, work that is submitted late without an approved extension shall be dealt with as follows. If a complete submission of the work is up to three calendar days late, then:

A concern will be raised about the trainee’s behaviour. Concerns can lead to fitness to practise or disciplinary procedures being implemented.

If a complete submission of work is not made within three days following the deadline, this will constitute a fail, with a mark of zero or fail being recorded for the first submission.

If a trainee considers there are exceptional circumstances that have led to the late submission, they should submit these by the appropriate deadline to the programme’s exceptional circumstances committee, which will consider any such submissions prior to the mark being ratified by the programme examination board.

Obtaining an Extension

For all pieces of assessed work (except the thesis), a single extension would be granted for immediate and temporary issues which have been appropriately reported to the programme. This includes submitting evidence as to the reason for the extension. Examples for a single extension include:

  • Self-certified sickness
  • Caring responsibility resulting in loss of study day
  • Accident/ injury to self of significant other than resulted in loss of study day
  • Adverse Event, which has temporary impact (e.g. flooding)
  • Any other significant life events of a similar degree of severity which are beyond the trainee’s control and are judged by the Directors to have a deleterious effect on their ability to submit work by the current deadline.

Reasons a single extension would not be granted include:

  1. Technology issues
  2. Poor organisation by trainee

Deadline Policy Flow Chart

2017 cohort and earlier

Introduction & aims of the policy

This policy was developed with the following aims in mind:

  • To bring us in line with best practice – most degree programmes at Lancaster University and Clinical Psychology programmes across the country have a clear deadline policy.
  • To clarify what constitutes grounds for an extension and formalising a process for obtaining an extension. This will also enable us to clarify the consequences of late or non-submission without an extension.
  • To provide a consistent policy that would be fairer to trainees and also would be seen to be fairer.
  • To set clear and reasonable boundaries around deadlines that mirrors the expectations that trainees are likely to have placed upon them in the workplace.
  • To ensure that trainees are meeting the competencies of good time management and professional behaviour in their academic as well as placement activities.
  • To reduce the number of extensions requested by trainees, and as a result reduce the workload for the programme team.
  • To help reduce the culture of submission ‘at the last minute’. This has contributed to many of the extension requests that had previously been made by trainees as a result of circumstances that should be avoided by appropriate time management. Reducing this culture will not only help trainees develop more helpful habits for their professional careers, but may also resolve any difficulties which could arise around teaching attendance near deadlines.

Scope of the policy

The policy applies to the submission of all coursework on the programme. Thesis and placement documentation submissions are excluded.

Supporting trainees and encouraging early submission of work

The programme wants trainees to feel supported, and if any trainees find themselves struggling with a piece of assessed work for any reason, they are encouraged to approach their Individual Tutors at the earliest opportunity to discuss this and obtain help and support from the programme. Having to continue to devote time to an assessed piece of coursework beyond the normal deadline can create substantial additional pressure for the trainee and disrupt their path through training. This deadline policy, therefore, has strict boundaries relating to the submission of work, and significant penalties for the late submission of work. In order to avoid trainees failing due to late submission, staff should encourage trainees at every opportunity to plan to submit their work well in advance of the deadline.

Single Extensions

Deadline date is less than a week away. Trainees can request an extension the week of the deadline date up until, and including, the Wednesday before the Friday deadline. Trainees will not be able to request an extension after the Wednesday before the deadline. If after the Wednesday (i.e. Thursday), the trainee will need to go through the exceptional circumstances process if appropriate. When requesting a single extension, the trainee will need to email both programme directors, copying in the Programme Administrator and their tutor team into the email as well. The trainee may choose to request a weeklong single extension or an extension until the next scheduled assignment deadline date. It is the trainee’s responsibility to follow up a response if necessary. Trainees must submit evidence for the extension. The evidence can be submitted after the request but any granted extension will be subject to the receipt of evidence. The programme directors will either 1) not grant an extension; 2) grant a single extension- 1 week; 3) grant a single extension- to next deadline or 4) single extension awarded and a recommendation that an Individual Training Plan meeting is considered by the tutor pair.

Deadline date is more than a week away. If the deadline date is more than a week away, trainees are encouraged to speak to their individual tutor pair. The individual tutor pair will help the trainee to decide if they want to apply for a single extension or require and Individual Training Plan (ITP [see below]). Either option would need to be submitted to the weekly directors’ meeting for approval. The programme directors will either 1) not grant an extension; 2) grant a single extension- 1 week; 3) grant a single extension- to next deadline

Individual Training Plan (ITP)

In some instances, a single extension may not be sufficient for a trainee. This is when there is a significant interruption to training, which is likely to affect more than one deadline. At these times, trainees and their individual tutors should discuss a revised overall deadline schedule at an ITP meeting. This is an alternative to obtaining an extension and takes account of the trainee’s overall progress through the programme. The revised deadlines schedule would need to be approved at the Directors’ meeting.

The process of submission of work

Work must be submitted online via the programme’s Moodle submission mechanism. The exact details of what constitutes a ‘complete’ submission for each assignment can be found in the programme’s “Guidance on Assignment Submission” information. At all times, it is the responsibility of the trainee to ensure that they make a complete submission.

Trainees should note that submissions which exceed the specified word limit will not be accepted. After the deadline has passed, submitted work will be checked, and any work which is over the maximum word count or declares that it is, will be returned to the trainee with no extension to the deadline. The trainee will be required to re-submit a version of the work that is within the word limit. This submission will then be late, and considered in accordance with the ‘Consequences of Late Submission’ section below. Please note that the maximum word count for each piece of assessed coursework is as specified in the assessment handbook of the programme. There is no leeway above this limit. The inclusion/exclusion of tables and figures from the word count varies from assignment to assignment and individual guidance is available in the handbook.

If a trainee is on sick leave on the due date of a piece of work and has not already submitted the work nor has an approved extension, they must submit their work by no later than 9.30am of the day AFTER the end of their period of sick leave (not including weekends). They must also submit a doctor’s note covering the sickness period to the DClinPsy programme office within one week of the submission of the coursework (even if the sickness was for only one day). This reflects the university’s position on assessment.

Consequences of late submission

Moodle automatically classifies any submission that is after the deadline as late. Under all other circumstances from those listed above, work that is submitted late without an approved extension shall be dealt with as follows:

  1. If a complete submission of the work is up to three calendar days late, it shall be penalised by having ten marks deducted from that awarded by the examiners of the piece of work. Examiners shall not be informed as to whether the work they have been asked to mark will be subject to such a penalty.
  2. If a complete submission of work is not made within three days following the deadline, this will constitute a fail, with a mark of zero being recorded for the first submission and any subsequently submitted work being marked as if it were a re-submission. This means that if such late-submitted work is also marked as a fail, then the trainee will have two fails marked against their record and will not be permitted to submit the piece of work again.

If a trainee considers there are exceptional circumstances that have led to the late submission, they should submit these by the appropriate deadline to the programme’s exceptional circumstances committee, which will consider any such submissions prior to the mark being ratified by the programme examination board.

Obtaining an extension

For all pieces of assessed work (except the thesis), a single extension would be granted for immediate and temporary issues which have been appropriately reported to the programme. This includes submitting evidence as to the reason for the extension. Examples for a single extension include:

  • Self-certified sickness
  • Caring responsibility resulting in loss of study day
  • Accident/ injury to self of significant other than resulted in loss of study day
  • Adverse Event, which has temporary impact (e.g. flooding)
  • Any other significant life events of a similar degree of severity which are beyond the trainee’s control and are judged by the Directors to have a deleterious effect on their ability to submit work by the current deadline.

In addition, the following are also considered acceptable grounds for application for an extension for THE SRP ONLY:

  • Issues of delay in data collection which are beyond the trainee’s control. During any such delay, the trainee must be able to evidence having made all possible efforts to continue with aspects of the assignment,

Reasons a single extension would not be granted include:

  • Technology issues
  • Poor organisation by trainee

Service Improvement Poster Presentation (SIPP)

Introduction

The SIPP assignment involves groups of trainees recording videos of themselves working together on a service development project during their project block, and producing a poster and 500 word summary of the project. This is followed by the group delivering a 30 minute presentation on the project. At the end of the process, each trainee submits a short report summarising their reflections on their contribution to the process.

The SIPP assesses trainees’ individual skills in interacting and working together with others, and in presenting verbal and visual information within group meetings, presentations and documents. It is classed as a live skills assignment, which means that trainees will normally be allowed up to two attempts at passing (first and resubmission).

Domains actively assessed

  1. Collating information and knowledge (gathering)
  2. Performance skills (performing)
  3. Communicating information effectively (communicating)
  4. Interpersonal skills & collaboration (interacting)
  5. Responsive to impact and learning from experiences (responding)

Preparing for the assignment

There are several teaching sessions which help orient trainees to the assessment. The first of these specifically focuses on what to expect in the assessment process of the SIPP itself, and also provides trainees with some teaching on key incidental skills, such as production of the poster and presentation.

Following this, trainees will receive teaching sessions on service development, which include the content of the activities undertaken during the recorded parts of the SIPP assignment.

Structure of the assignment

Trainees are allocated to small groups.  Each group is assigned a service improvement issue which will be the focus of their work together. Issues are usually proposed by one or more people in the field (project stakeholders).

  1. Group work sessions

During the project block, each group is required to submit six, 30 minute videos of the trainees working on a series of service development exercises. The videos need to be submitted in a certain order according to a suggested submission schedule.

  1. Project poster & service development proposal

Prior to the final week of the project block, each group of trainees must produce and submit a digital A0-sized poster which summarises their project work, and a short written executive summary of up to 500 words.

  1. Presentation day

During the final week of the project block, each group of trainees will attend an event where they will display and answer questions on their poster, give a live 30-minute presentation of their project proposal (which each trainee will present a segment of), and answer questions on this from markers and an invited audience, which will include their project stakeholder(s).  This event will last around 90 minutes for each group of trainees.

  1. Reflections

Following the presentation session, each trainee will submit an individual report of up to 500 words which summarises their reflections on the process of completing the SIPP and their performance in the different tasks, and their learning from the experience.

Process of Assessment

All trainees within each group are assessed by two markers. Markers will assess the submitted videos and rate each trainee individually on the relevant competencies (performing, communicating and interacting competencies). During the presentation exercise further evidence on these competencies is collected through live observation of trainee behaviour throughout the process.

Following the presentation, markers will assess the poster and summary document for competency evidence (gathering and communication competencies), as well as each trainee’s reflective summary (responding competency).

The final rating of competencies will be agreed by the marker pair on the basis of evidence collected across all of the above.

The following documents are being reviewed and should not be used at present: –

SIPP – how to guide
SIPP – FAQ
SIPP – trainee feedback form

Placement Assignment – Service Evaluation (PASE)

Introduction

The PASE is a report based on a piece of audit or service evaluation work carried out on placement. For trainees in the 2020 cohort and earlier, the work outlined in the first submission of the assignment can be from any one of the second, third or fourth core placements. Following the other three core placements trainees submit a Placement Assignment – Live Skills (PALS). For trainees in the 2021 cohort and later, the work outlined in the first submission of the assignment is taken from the Indirect Skills placement.

Actively assessed domains

The PASE actively assesses the following domains: –

  1. ‘Gathering’ – Collating information and knowledge for specific purpose
  2. ‘Analysing’ – Critical analysis & synthesis
  3. ‘Deciding’ – Strategy for application
  4. ‘Communicating’ – Communicating information effectively

Preparing for the assignment

Trainees discuss the PASE with their placement supervisor(s) at the start of the placement to establish what opportunities there are to conduct a service evaluation. Trainees will need to adhere to the R+D processes specific to the Trust they are on placement within, including gaining formal approval from the Trust in most cases. Trainees then write a brief proposal for the work (using the proposal form, which can be downloaded from the bottom of this page) and submit this to the programme for approval. The proposal will be reviewed by at least one tutor on the programme and will provide feedback and / or approval that the work can be used as the subject of a PASE report. The trainee may be required to amend and resubmit the proposal before approval is given.

For trainees in the 2020 intake and earlier, the proposal form must be submitted within the first 18 days on placement. For trainees in the 2021 intake and later, the proposal form must be submitted within the first 22 days on placement. The longer time to complete the proposal for trainees in the 2021 intake and later is due to the longer placement length.

As well as the proposal form, supervisors must complete a supervisor declaration form and submit this to the programme before the PASE can be approved. Once approved, the conduct of the evaluation is overseen by the placement supervisor, just as other placement work is. The trainee’s DClinPsy programme tutors are available for the supervisor to consult should any issues arise on which they need specific advice or support.

Structure of the Assignment

The Service Evaluation Project is a 3,000 word (maximum) report which will usually take the following form:

  • Summary
  • Introduction – describing the context for the evaluation or audit
  • Audit standards – if applicable
  • Methods
  • Results
  • Action plan – including a short discussion of the findings in relation to key literature and plans for re-audit if applicable
  • References (in APA format)
  • Appendices

Tables and figures are included in the word count.

Process of Assessment

First submissions are marked blind by one or two markers. Second submissions and resubmissions are marked by two markers. Where two markers are involved, they will discuss their marking to reach a consensus outcome. Occasionally there may be a need for a third marker to be involved, which is typically a member of the programme team. All marking processes are subject to moderation processes before being ratified by the Exam Board.

Assessment guidance and forms

PASE – proposal form
PASE – how to guide
PASE – supervisor declaration form
PASE – trainee feedback form

Placement Assignment – Live Skills (PALS)

Introduction

Over the course of the programme, trainees are required to submit three pieces of work for Placement Assignment: Live Skills (PALS), in addition to one Placement Assignment: Service Evaluation (PASE).

Trainees in the 2021 cohort (and subsequent cohorts) will submit PALS #1 and #2 from work completed on their direct skills placement, and PALS #3 from their indirect skills placement.

Trainees from earlier cohorts will submit PALS #1 based on work from their first placement and PALS #2 and #3 from two different subsequent core practice placements.

The three PALS assignments each comprise a clinical recording from placement and a written component. The PALS assesses both the ‘live skills’ of the trainee and their ability to reflect on and critically appraise their work.

Domains actively assessed

This assignment actively assesses the following domains:

  1. ‘Analysing’ – Critical analysis & synthesis
  2. ‘Deciding’ – Strategy for application
  3. ‘Performing’ – Performance skills
  4. ‘Responding’ – Responsive to impact & learning from experiences
  5. ‘Interacting’ – Interpersonal skills & collaboration

Preparing for the assignment

Trainees are advised to familiarise themselves with the e-learning materials available on the programme handbook webpages.

On starting placement, trainees are advised to speak to their placement supervisor about which piece of work they might submit for a PALS. Trainees are required to obtain informed consent from clients to proceed with recording and using their personal/clinical information. Placement supervisors need to complete a supervisor declaration form at the end of the placement which indicates that informed consent has been obtained. Please refer to the PALS documentation on the programme handbook webpages for further information and to access supervisor declaration forms.

Trainees will received a draft read from a member of the programme team for the PALS #1.

Structure of the Assignment

  • Clinical recording (30 minutes)
  • Written component (4,500 words)
    • Outline of work undertaken (up to 1,500 words)
    • Transcription and commentary (no word count for transcript, up to 1,500 words for commentary)
    • Critical appraisal reflections/evaluation of work undertaken (up to 1,500 words)

Process of Assessment

All submissions are assessed by two markers. Markers will use evidence from both the written submission and the clinical recording to individually determine grades (pass or fail) for each of the assessment domains, then confer and agree a final grade for each domain, which determines the outcome of the assignment submission.

Assessment guidance and forms

PALS – introductory teaching PowerPoint slides
PALS – preparation and recording clinical work guidance
PALS – written component guidance
PALS – client information and consent form
PALS – trainee feedback form
PALS – supervisor declaration form
PALS – transcript template
PALS – submission form
PALS – how to submit on OneDrive
PALS – addendum guidance

Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA)

2023 cohort onwards

Introduction

The Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA) is undertaken in the first year of training and is specifically designed to enable trainees to develop the knowledge and skills needed to undertake the thesis. It consists of two elements: a 4,500 word literature review (4,000 words for the review itself plus a 500 word literature retrieval summary), and a 2,500 word research proposal which is submitted separately, after the literature review. The literature review is assessed and marked as a piece of written work, whilst the thesis proposal is not marked but is peer-reviewed by the programme team. In order to pass the assignment, the thesis proposal must have been submitted.

Domains actively assessed

1. Collating information and knowledge
2. Critical analysis & synthesis
3. Strategy for application (deciding)
4. Performance skills
5. Responsive to impact & learning from experiences
6. Communicating information effectively
7. Interpersonal skills & collaboration
8. Organisational skills
9. Professional behaviour
10. Essential Knowledge

Preparing for the assignment

As the TPA involves preparatory work for the thesis, before starting work on the assignment the trainee must be allocated to a research supervisor who will go on to be the research supervisor for their thesis.

Once the trainee has been allocated to a research supervisor they identify a topic for their TPA literature review in discussion with their supervisor.

Structure of the TPA literature review

The literature review should take the form of a 4,000 word narrative review of research, clinical and theoretical literature which provides a foundation for the body of work the trainee intends to undertake for their thesis plus a 500 word literature retrieval summary. It should be formatted as a single Word document, written in APA style, structured as follows (section word counts are suggested as a guide):

  1. Introduction (800 words), to include: –
    • The background to the topic area and a rationale for the review, which makes reference to its relevance to clinical practice, policy (including relevant guidelines), and psychology theory as appropriate
    • A clear statement of the aims of the review
  2. Method (200 words). This should summarise the approach taken, including sources searched, search strategy used and approach used for synthesising the literature found. Reference can be made to the Literature Retrieval Summary for more detail.
  3. Synthesis/Findings/Results (2,000 words). The heading used for this section will depend on the approach taken. It should be structured in a way that is appropriate to the review topic and approach taken e.g. as themes or topic areas.
  4. Discussion (1,000 words), which should include identification of the research question to be addressed in the research proposal, based on the findings of the review.
  5. References (not included in the word count).
  6. Table of characteristics of included studies.
  7. Appendix A: Literature Retrieval Summary Form (500 words, plus the words on the form). This should be completed to provide an account of how relevant literature was identified and how decisions were made about what to present in the review.

Research Proposal

The research proposal is completed using the Thesis Proposal Form. It should be 2,500 words (excluding the text already on the form and your supervisor’s comments).

The thesis proposal will normally be developed from the literature review, in collaboration with the research supervisor.  Thus, it is expected that whilst the general research topic may be decided upon early in the assignment preparation process, the exact research question(s) to be addressed in the research proposal and details of the research design will not be decided until the trainee has completed the literature review.

It is expected that the rationale for the research proposal should draw upon the issues discussed in more detail in the review.

The research proposal should represent a feasible, ethical research study that meets the requirement of a DClinPsy thesis (see thesis guidelines for more detail).

Supervisory support for the assignment

It is expected that the trainee will meet regularly with their research supervisor during the process of completing the assignment.  As part of the supervisory process, the supervisor will provide the following support: –

  • Guidance on the choice of topic;
  • Guidance on the content, structure and approach to be adopted for the literature review;
  • Advise on literature searches and on literature to include and exclude;
  • Read a complete draft of the review;
  • Provide guidance in the development of the thesis proposal;
  • Read a draft of the research proposal prior to the trainee submitting it for review.

Process of assessment

Trainees have up to three attempts at the TPA literature review. To pass the assignment, the literature review must reach a passing standard in all assessed domains.

Submission 1 – April year 1 (full-time) or July year 2 (part-time)

Resubmission dates to be agreed as needed with the trainee’s tutor pair and in line with the deadlines policy.

A thesis proposal must also be submitted for the assignment pass to be confirmed.  This should normally be submitted 3 months after the literature review is submitted.  It is not necessary for the literature review to have passed before the thesis proposal is submitted – it is expected that work developing the thesis proposal will begin as soon as the TPA has been submitted.  However, the trainee may decide, in discussion with their supervisor, to wait until the literature review has passed before submitting the thesis proposal.

Review of the thesis proposal

The thesis proposal is submitted separately, within a maximum of three months after the literature review.  If the proposal is not submitted by the relevant deadline the TPA assignment will usually be failed. Once the thesis proposal has been submitted it will be reviewed by members of the programme team for its suitability as a DClinPsy thesis.  If the TPA literature review does not pass at the first submission point, but a thesis proposal has been submitted, the thesis proposal does not need to be resubmitted as part of the second submission.  It is intended that the thesis proposal can be developed into the research protocol which the trainee will need to submit with their ethics application.

Assessment guidance and forms

TPA – Trainee Guide
TPA – Trainee Feedback Forms
TPA – Mark Sheet
TPA – Research Choices Form
Thesis Proposal Form
TPA – Literature Retrieval Summary

2022 cohort

Introduction

The Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA) is undertaken in the first year of training and is specifically designed to enable trainees to develop the knowledge and skills needed to undertake the thesis. It consists of two elements: a 4,500 word literature review (4,000 words for the review itself plus a 500 word literature retrieval summary), and a 3,500 word research proposal which is submitted separately, after the literature review. The literature review is assessed and marked as a piece of written work, whilst the thesis proposal is not marked but is peer-reviewed by the programme team. In order to pass the assignment, the thesis proposal must have been submitted.

Domains actively assessed

1. Collating information and knowledge
2. Critical analysis & synthesis
3. Strategy for application (deciding)
4. Performance skills
5. Responsive to impact & learning from experiences
6. Communicating information effectively
7. Interpersonal skills & collaboration
8. Organisational skills
9. Professional behaviour
10. Essential Knowledge

Preparing for the assignment

As the TPA involves preparatory work for the thesis, before starting work on the assignment the trainee must be allocated to a research supervisor who will go on to be the research supervisor for their thesis.

Once the trainee has been allocated to a research supervisor they identify a topic for their TPA literature review in discussion with their supervisor.  The trainee completes a TPA Review Topic Form in which they give a brief outline of the title, aims and structure of the literature review element of the TPA. This is submitted to the TPA co-ordinator for approval to proceed. The trainee may be asked to revise or resubmit the topic form before approval is given.  Once the TPA topic form is approved the trainee completes the assignment.

Structure of the TPA literature review

The literature review should take the form of a 4,000 word review of research, clinical and theoretical literature which provides a foundation for the body of work the trainee intends to undertake for their thesis plus a 500 word literature retrieval summary. It should be formatted as a single Word document, written in APA style, structured as follows (section word counts approximate):

  1. Introduction (800 words), to include:
    • The background to the topic area and a rationale for the review, which makes reference to its relevance to clinical practice, policy (including relevant guidelines), and psychology theory as appropriate;
    • A clear statement of the aims of the review.Main body of the review (not intended as a heading). The heading – or headings – used for this section will depend on the approach taken. It should be structured in a way that is appropriate to the review topic and approach taken.
  2. Main body of the review (not intended as a heading). The heading – or headings – used for this section will depend on the approach taken. It should be structured in a way that is appropriate to the review topic and approach taken.
  3. Discussion (1,200 words), which should include identification of the research question to be addressed in the research proposal, based on the findings of the review.
  4. References (not included in the word count).
  5. Literature Retrieval Summary form (500 words, plus the words on the form).  This should be completed to provide an account of how relevant literature was identified and how decisions were made about what to present in the review.
  6. TPA Review Topic Form (appended, not included in the word count).

Beyond not being a systematic review, there is no prescribed format or approach for the review.  However, the review should lead to the identification of the research question that the trainee intends to address for their thesis.  Thus, the review might be an argument-based extended rationale for the thesis project, covering several topic areas.  Or it might focus in more detail on a specific topic area of direct relevance to the intended thesis topic.  It is expected that the trainee should decide upon a suitable approach to the review with their supervisor and that the structure and content will be appropriate to the review topic.

Research Proposal

The research proposal is completed using the Thesis Proposal Form. It should be 3,500 words (including the text already on the form, but excluding your supervisor’s comments).

The thesis proposal will normally be developed from the literature review, in collaboration with the research supervisor.  Thus, it is expected that whilst the general research topic may be decided upon early in the assignment preparation process, the exact research question(s) to be addressed in the research proposal and details of the research design will not be decided until the trainee has completed the literature review.

It is expected that the rationale for the research proposal should draw upon the issues discussed in more detail in the review.

The research proposal should represent a feasible, ethical research study that meets the requirement of a DClinPsy thesis (see thesis guidelines for more detail).

Supervisory support for the assignment

It is expected that the trainee will meet regularly with their research supervisor during the process of completing the assignment.  As part of the supervisory process, the supervisor will provide the following support:

  • Guidance on the choice of topic;
  • Guidance on the content, structure and approach to be adopted for the literature review;
  • Read a draft of the TPA Review Topic Form;
  • Advise on literature searches and on literature to include and exclude;
  • Read a complete draft of the review;
  • Provide guidance in the development of the thesis proposal;
  • Read a draft of the research proposal prior to the trainee submitting it for review.

Process of assessment

Trainees have up to three attempts at the TPA literature review. To pass the assignment, the literature review must reach a passing standard in all assessed domains.

Submission 1 – March Year 1 (full-time) or year 2 (part-time)

Submission 2 – July Year 1 (full-time) or July Year 2 (part-time)

Resubmission – March Year 2 (full-time) or Year 3 (part-time)

A thesis proposal must also be submitted for the assignment pass to be confirmed.  This should normally be submitted 3 months after the literature review is submitted.  It is not necessary for the literature review to have passed before the thesis proposal is submitted – it is expected that work developing the thesis proposal will begin as soon as the TPA has been submitted.  However, the trainee may decide, in discussion with their supervisor, to wait until the literature review has passed before submitting the thesis proposal.

Review of the thesis proposal

The thesis proposal is submitted separately, within a maximum of three months after the literature review.  If the proposal is not submitted by the relevant deadline the TPA assignment will usually be failed. Once the thesis proposal has been submitted it will be reviewed by members of the programme team for its suitability as a DClinPsy thesis.  If the TPA literature review does not pass at the first submission point, but a thesis proposal has been submitted, the thesis proposal does not need to be resubmitted as part of the second submission.

Assessment guidance and forms

TPA – Trainee Guide
TPA – Review Topic Form
TPA – Trainee Feedback Forms
TPA – Mark Sheet
TPA – Research Choices Form
Thesis Proposal Form
TPA – Literature Retrieval Summary

2021 cohort and earlier

Introduction

The Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA) is undertaken in the first year of training and is specifically designed to enable trainees to develop the knowledge and skills needed to undertake the thesis.  It consists of two elements: a 4,500 word literature review, and a word research proposal which is submitted separately, after the literature review.  The literature review is assessed and marked as a piece of written work, whilst the thesis proposal is not marked but is peer-reviewed by the programme team.  In order to pass the assignment, the thesis proposal must have been submitted.

Domains actively assessed

1. Collating information and knowledge
2. Critical analysis & synthesis
3. Strategy for application (deciding)
4. Performance skills
5. Responsive to impact & learning from experiences
6. Communicating information effectively
7. Interpersonal skills & collaboration
8. Organisational skills
9. Professional behaviour
10. Essential Knowledge

Preparing for the assignment

As the TPA involves preparatory work for the thesis, before starting work on the assignment the trainee must be allocated to a research supervisor who will go on to be the research supervisor for their thesis.

Once the trainee has been allocated to a research supervisor they identify a topic for their TPA literature review in discussion with their supervisor.  The trainee completes a TPA Review Topic Form in which they give a brief outline of the title, type of review, aims and structure of the literature review element of the TPA. This is submitted to the TPA co-ordinator for approval to proceed. The trainee may be asked to revise or resubmit the topic form before approval is given.  Once the TPA topic form is approved the trainee completes the assignment.

Structure of the TPA literature review

The literature review should take the form of a 4,500 word review of research, clinical and theoretical literature which provides a foundation for the body of work the trainee intends to undertake for their thesis. It should be formatted as a single Word document, written in APA style, structured as follows (section word counts approximate):

  1. Introduction (800 words), to include:
    • The rationale for conducting the review, including a statement of its relevance to clinical psychology theory and practice;
    • A clear statement of the research question the review will address, and the aims of the review.
  2. Identifying and deciding what to include in the review (500 words)
  3. The TPA is not a systematic review. As such, there is no method section. However, an account should be provided of how relevant literature was identified and how decisions were made about what to present in the review. This may include details of searches undertaken including search terms used and databases searched.
  4. Findings/results (or other suitable heading depending on approach).  (2,000 words). This may be structured into sub-sections.
  5. Discussion (1,200 words), which should include identification of the research question to be addressed in the research proposal, based on the findings of the review.
  6. References (not included in the word count).
  7. TPA Review Topic Form (appended, not included in the word count).

Beyond not being a systematic review, there is no prescribed format or approach for the review.  It is expected that the trainee should decide upon a suitable approach to the review with their supervisor and that the structure and content will be appropriate to the review topic. The scope of the review should reflect an appropriate balance of depth and breadth of knowledge, depending on the nature of the topic.

As part of the discussion section, it is expected that the trainee will identify the topic to be developed in their research proposal as a line of further research inquiry arising from the review.

Research Proposal

The research proposal is completed using the Thesis Proposal Form. It should be 3,500 words (including the text already on the form, but excluding your supervisor’s comments).

The thesis proposal will normally be developed from the literature review, in collaboration with the research supervisor.  Thus, it is expected that whilst the general research topic may be decided upon early in the assignment preparation process, the exact research question(s) to be addressed in the research proposal and details of the research design will not be decided until the trainee has completed the literature review.

It is expected that the rationale for the research proposal should draw upon the issues discussed in more detail in the review.

The research proposal should represent a feasible, ethical research study that meets the requirement of a DClinPsy thesis (see thesis guidelines for more detail).

Supervisory support for the assignment

It is expected that the trainee will meet regularly with their research supervisor during the process of completing the assignment.  As part of the supervisory process, the supervisor will provide the following support:

  • Guidance on the choice of topic;
  • Guidance on the content, structure and approach to be adopted for the literature review;
  • Read a draft of the TPA Review Topic Form;
  • Advise on literature searches and on literature to include and exclude;
  • Read a draft of a completed section of the review (up to a maximum of 1000 words), usually the introduction;
  • Provide guidance in the development of the thesis proposal;
  • Read a draft of the research proposal prior to the trainee submitting it for review.

Process of assessment

Trainees have up to three attempts at the TPA literature review. To pass the assignment, the literature review must reach a passing standard in all assessed domains.

Submission 1 – March Year 1 (full-time) or year 2 (part-time)

Submission 2 – July Year 1 (full-time) or July Year 2 (part-time)

Resubmission – March Year 2 (full-time) or Year 3 (part-time)

A thesis proposal must also be submitted for the assignment pass to be confirmed.  This should normally be submitted 3 months after the literature review is submitted.  It is not necessary for the literature review to have passed before the thesis proposal is submitted – it is expected that work developing the thesis proposal will begin as soon as the TPA has been submitted.  However, the trainee may decide, in discussion with their supervisor, to wait until the literature review has passed before submitting the thesis proposal.

Review of the thesis proposal

The thesis proposal is submitted separately, within a maximum of three months after the literature review.  If the proposal is not submitted by the relevant deadline the TPA assignment will usually be failed. Once the thesis proposal has been submitted it will be reviewed by members of the programme team for its suitability as a DClinPsy thesis.  If the TPA literature review does not pass at the first submission point, but a thesis proposal has been submitted, the thesis proposal does not need to be resubmitted as part of the second submission.

Assessment guidance and forms

TPA – Trainee Guide
TPA – Review Topic Form
TPA – Trainee Feedback Forms
TPA – Mark Sheet
TPA – Research Choices Form
Thesis Proposal Form

Assessment of learning outcomes

2018 cohort and onwards
The DClinPsy’s programme-level learning outcomes are prescribed by the British Psychological Society’s Standards for Doctoral programmes in Clinical Psychology document (2019). These learning outcomes consist of ten over-arching outcomes and nine core competency domains. Details of these can be found in the DClinPsy’s programme specification.

Assessment through practice placement experience

The Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee (SAT) is a report form which supervisors complete prior to the placement meetings  and at the end of each practice placement. It includes twelve transferable competencies which are drawn from the latest job, task and role analysis for clinical psychology arising from a research project commissioned by the Clearing House for Postgraduate Course in Clinical Psychology (Baron & O’Reilly, 2012) and the eighteen specific competencies which are drawn from the BPS Standards. These  competencies are grouped into six areas for supervisors to consider and comment on. The SAT is used to indicate whether or not the trainee has met the required learning outcomes for the practice placement and subsequently to recommend to the exam board whether the placement should be considered satisfactorily or unsatisfactorily completed.

Assessment through research thesis

The doctoral thesis is a substantial piece of work (up to 56,000 words including tables, figures and appendices) trainees usually complete during their second and third year of training. As well as providing additional evidence of many of the HCPC’s Standards of Proficiency, and providing evidence that trainees have developed the skills described within the BPS’s ‘research’ core competency domain, the thesis must be completed to a to a standard which is consistent with Lancaster University’s guidance on doctoral level research. It comprises conducting and reporting on primary, investigative research which is relevant to the theory and practice of clinical psychology. In terms of quality, the thesis needs to demonstrate a substantial contribution to knowledge and should afford originality by the discovery of new findings and by the exercise of independent critical power.

Assessment through academic coursework submission

Academic coursework completed as part of the programme is evaluated by rating a series of domains that are required to perform these skill sets proficiently. These domains are a codification of the BPS (2019) learning outcomes and relevant parts of the 2012 Baron & O’Reilly job, task and role analysis. The domains are transferable across the multiple activities in which clinical psychologists are expected to engage. A brief definition of each of them follows: –

1. ‘Gathering’ – Collating information and knowledge for specific purpose
Locating appropriate and relevant information and drawing on own existing knowledge to address a specific issue or situation.

2. ‘Analysing’ -Critical analysis and synthesis
In terms of the relevant issue, weighing up & critically analysing & synthesising everything from collated information and knowledge

3. ‘Deciding’ – Strategy for application
Developing a strategy to practically apply the outcome of the synthesis to a specific situation and showing how this strategy follows from the synthesis. This may include a plan for conducting a programme of research, or using an integrative or eclectic approach that would be used in the planned intervention. This domain relates specifically to making the plan, not its implementation.

4. ‘Doing’ – Performance skills
Implementing a strategy in a real environment. This domain concerns the concrete application / performance of specific techniques and (micro) skills.

5. ‘Responding’ – Responsive to impact and learning from experiences
Trainee seeks out and is responsive and sensitive to the effect of his / her own actions & to new information. S/he shows learning from this through adapting her / his own future behaviour.

6. ‘Communicating’ – Communicating information effectively
Communicating information effectively to the intended audience, adapting style, delivery and content as appropriate (but NOT the choice of strategy).

7. ‘Interacting’ – Interpersonal skills & collaboration
These are the transferable skills that underpin interactions with others.

8. ‘Organising’ – Organisational skills
Using organisational skills in a proactive way to process and prioritise disparate demands and tasks to achieve objectives in a timely fashion.

9. ‘Behaving’ – Professional behaviour
Behaving professionally and appropriately in all contexts

10. ‘Knowing’ – Demonstrating Essential Knowledge
The trainee is able to show the required essential knowledge of clinical psychology theory, evidence and best practice that can be applied to their own learning and practice.

Evidence for a broader knowledge of clinical psychology practices is collected throughout to training from the assignments and other sources and is logged within the trainee’s e-portfolio.

A lack of skill, knowledge of competence can be assessed using any of the assignments. However, each assignment focuses on 4-5 ‘active’ domains where the trainee is required to provide positive evidence of skills in the domain in order to pass the assignment. The table below indicates which assignments ‘actively assess’ which domains. Note that domains 8-10 are only ever passively assessed.

Descriptive name Domain name Placement Assignment – Live Skills (x3) Self-Assessment Exercise Thesis Preparation Assignment Placement Assignment – Service Evaluation Service Improvement Poster Presentation
Gathering 1. Collating information and knowledge X X X X
Analysing 2. Critical analysis and synthesis X X X X
Deciding 3. Strategy for application (deciding) X X X X
Doing 4. Performance skills X X
Responding 5. Responsive to impact and learning from experiences X X
Communicating 6. Communicating information effectively X X X X
Interacting 7. Interpersonal skills and collaboration X X

Details of the assessment domains and the new suite of assignments and assessment system can be found in the assignment suite overview and Assessment domain list.

2017 cohort and earlier
The DClinPsy’s programme-level learning outcomes are prescribed by the British Psychological Society’s Standards for Doctoral programmes in Clinical Psychology document (2014). These learning outcomes consist of ten over-arching outcomes and nine core competency domains. Details of these can be found in the DClinPsy’s programme specification.

Assessment through practice placement experience

The Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee (SAT) report form, which supervisors complete prior to the mid-placement visit and at the end of each practice placement, comprises two sections. The first contains twelve transferable competencies which are drawn from the latest job, task and role analysis for clinical psychology arising from a research project commissioned by the Clearing House for Postgraduate Course in Clinical Psychology (Baron & O’Reilly, 2012). The second section of the form contains eighteen specific competencies which are drawn from the BPS Standards. The SAT is used to indicate whether or not the trainee has met the required learning outcomes for the practice placement and subsequently to recommend to the exam board whether the placement should be considered satisfactorily or unsatisfactorily completed. Trainees are also required to complete a log-book for each practice placement, which includes a self-assessment component where they are asked to rate themselves against a range of objectives that stem directly from the programme-level learning outcomes.

Assessment through research thesis

The doctoral thesis is a substantial piece of work (up to 56,000 words including tables, figures and appendices) trainees usually complete during their second and third year of training. As well as providing additional evidence of many of the HCPC’s Standards of Proficiency, and providing evidence that trainees have developed the skills described within the BPS’s ‘research’ core competency domain, the thesis must be completed to a to a standard which is consistent with Lancaster University’s guidance on doctoral level research. It comprises conducting and reporting on primary, investigative research which is relevant to the theory and practice of clinical psychology. In terms of quality, the thesis needs to demonstrate a substantial contribution to knowledge and should afford originality by the discovery of new findings and by the exercise of independent critical power.

Assessment through academic coursework submission

Academic coursework completed as part of the programme is evaluated by rating a series of competencies that are required to perform these skill sets proficiently. The broader competencies are derived from the Baron & O’Reilly job, task and role analysis (2012), whilst the more specific, practically focused ones (such as practical research skills and those featured in the DACS assignments) are designed to address both the job analysis skills and / or the BPS standards. The competencies are designed to be transferable across the multiple activities in which clinical psychologists are expected to engage. A brief definition of each of them follows:

Knowledge and skills – this is evidence that the trainee has a broad knowledge and clear understanding of the knowledge and evidence base being referred to in the assignment. This will include, for example, knowledge and understanding of theory and clinical technique in relation to a clinical situation, of research methodology and application, and of the evidence and literature base more generally in a relevant subject area.

Analysis and critical thinking – this relates to evidence of the ability to evaluate literature critically and to adapt and apply knowledge and skills to specific situations. It can include, for example, adapting theory for use with a particular client, critical evaluation of the work of others and analysis of data collected through research.

Reflection and integration – this relates to evidence of the trainee being able to adopt a reflective stance to facilitate learning, and the application of learning to practice.

Professional behaviour – this relates to evidence of the trainee conducting themselves in a manner consistent with the professional role of clinical psychologist. This will include an awareness and use of relevant guidelines and standards regarding ethics, boundaries etc., and interacting with other professionals in an appropriate manner.

Written communication – This refers to the adequate written expression of a range of ideas, concepts and arguments, in a coherent, flowing and appropriately structured way. The style adopted should be appropriate for the intended audience.

Resilience – this reflects evidence of the trainee’s ability to face challenges confidently and learn from setbacks.

Standard setting – this relates to evidence that the trainee sets high standards of personal behaviour for themselves and strives to achieve these.

Presentation skills – evidence of the ability to effectively communicate information in a live presentation environment is assessed under this competency. It includes verbal communication skills plus associated planning and performance skills in presenting.

Practical research skills – this relates to evidence of the trainee showing the technical skills required in locating and using relevant literature and other sources of knowledge and evidence.

Contextual Awareness – competency refers to an awareness of the contexts that clinical psychologists work in, and the professional role of a clinical psychologist within them.

Engagement & Rapport – evidence of good skills in using non-verbal and para-linguistic skills to adopt a compassionate, validating approach with others which encourages positive engagement

Verbal communication skills – using appropriate approach, language and questioning for the situation and person being interacted with, is able to converse in a way that develops understanding

Session management – ability to create and maintain appropriate focus, structure and boundaries around a meeting or other professional interaction.

Psychological knowledge – an ability to converse in a psychologically informed way, applying knowledge in an appropriate and collaborative manner.

Respecting and exploring difference – in professional interactions the ability to adopt a non-judgemental stance, actively but sensitively approach issues of difference, and recognise and question own assumptions within an interaction.

These competencies were originally designed to map onto specific areas of proficiency within the programme learning outcomes, and the broad relationships between the two are illustrated in the table below.

Key: –

  1. Generalisable meta-competencies
  2. Psychological assessment
  3. Psychological formulation
  4. Psychological intervention
  5. Evaluation
  6. Research
  7. Personal and professional skills and values
  8. Communication and teaching
  9. Organisational and systemic influence and leadership
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Knowledge and skills X X X X X X X
Reflection and Integration X X
Professional behaviour X X X
Analysis and critical thinking X X X X X X X X
Written Communication X X X X X X
Resilience X X
Standard setting X X
Engagement and rapport X X
Verbal communication skills X X X X X X
Session management X X X
Respecting and exploring difference X X X X
Psychological knowledge X X X X X
Practical research skills X

In terms of academic assignments, trainees must submit all of the following:

  • Systematic Literature Review (SLR): a 6,000 word systematic review of either quantitative or qualitative studies.
  • Professional issues assignment (PIA): a 2,500 essay on a topic relating to one or more professional practice issues
  • Direct assessment of clinical skills standardised roleplay (DACS-SRPS)
  • Direct assessment of clinical skills Placement Portfolio (DACS-PP) x 2
  • Service-related project (SRP): a 6,000 word report of research conducted in a service setting

The competencies used in the assessment of each assignment are detailed in the table below.

Key: –

  1. PIA
  2. SLR
  3. DACS-SRPS
  4. DACS-PP
  5. SRP
1 2 3 4 5
Knowledge and skills X X X X
Reflection and Integration X
Professional behaviour X X X X
Analysis and critical thinking X X X X
Written Communication X X X X
Resilience X X
Standard setting X X X X
Practical research skills X
Engagement and rapport X X
Verbal communication skills X X
Session management X X
Respecting and exploring difference X X
Psychological knowledge X X

Assignment suite overview

2018 cohort and onwards

Formal Assessment

Broad skills assignments
Trainees may take THREE attempts at these assignments

Self-Assessment Exercise (SAE)

This assignment comprises four elements:

  1. Initial Self appraisal – written report (maximum of 500 words).
  2. Formative evaluative exercises. Trainees will engage in a series of formative exercises over approximately the first 55 days of training to enable them to self-assess their knowledge and skills effectively.
  3. Report on outcome of self-assessment process (maximum of 1,000 words).
  4. Self-assessment viva. This is a formal, structured meeting of up to 40 minutes duration between the trainee and two markers where the above documents are discussed. The outcome of the assignment is determined by performance in this meeting.

Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA)

The assignment comprises two mains sections.

  1. A literature review (maximum 4,500 words) examining the published research, theoretical literature and clinical and policy guidelines on the topic which the trainee intends to research for their DClinPsy thesis.
  2. A Research Proposal (maximum 1,500 words).

These sections are submitted separately, and both must be submitted for the assignment to be passed. However, only the literature review section is formally assessed.

Placement Assignment – Service Evaluation (PASE)

This assignment is assessed via a report (maximum 3,000 words) of service evaluation activity that the trainee has conducted whilst on practice placement. Trainees from the 2020 cohorts and earlier must complete one of these assignments during core practice placement #2, #3 or #4 (the one for which a PALS assignment is not being submitted). Trainees from the 2021 cohort onward complete and submit the PASE assignments during their second practice placement.

Live skills assignments
Trainees may take TWO attempts at these assignments

Placement Assignment – Live Skills (PALS) (#1, #2, and #3)

These assignments each focus on a piece of clinical work that the trainee has conducted whilst on practice placement. Trainees must complete three PALS assignments during their practice placements. These assignments are independent of each other  and use the same marking criteria but are assessed at progressively higher standards. They must be passed in sequence (trainees must pass a PALS assignment at each level before submitting one at the next level)  Each assignment comprises the following:

  1. A 30 minute excerpt of a recording of the trainee’s clinical activity, and
  2. A report relating to the same piece of clinical work comprising
    1. An outline of the work undertaken,
    2. A transcription (not included in the word count) and commentary on two 5 minute sections of the recording, and
    3. A critical appraisal of the work undertaken.

The maximum word count for each of these three sections is 1,500 words. Overall word count is 4,500.

Service Improvement Poster Presentation (SIPP)

This assignment comprises four elements:

  1. Group work: trainees will work collaboratively in groups during their project block to develop a service improvement proposal. During the group work trainees will record and submit six, 30 minute videos of themselves engaged in service development tasks
  2. Project poster: trainees will produce a poster summary of their project
  3. Presentation and communication skills: trainees will deliver a presentation of their project, and respond to marker questions
  4. Service development summary: Each group of trainees will submit an easy-read’ summary (up to 500 words) of their project work.
  5. Reflective summary: Each trainee will submit a summary (up to 500 words) of their reflections on their contributions to the SIPP and their learning from the experience.

All trainees must undertake a formative ‘SIPP’ experience  prior to undertaking the summative assessment.  This allows trainees to familiarise themselves with the aims and methods used in the assignment and to obtain formative feedback on their interaction and influencing skills, which are the focus of the assessment.

Guide to assignment submission timings

2018-2020 cohorts

Full time pathway

Year Month Submissions
One December The self-assessment exercise ()
March Thesis Preparation Assignment ()
May PALS #1
From June Thesis proposal
Two November PASE or PALS #2
April PASE or PALS #2 or #3
Service Improvement Poster Presentation
Three October PASE or PALS #3
March Thesis submission

Part time pathway

Year Month Submissions
One
Two December The self-assessment exercise (first viva)
Aug PALS #1
March Thesis Preparation Assignment
May PASE or PALS #2
Three

 

 

Jan PASE  or PALS #2 or #3
Apr Service Improvement Poster Presentation
Nov PASE  or PALS #3
Four
July Thesis submission

2021 cohort

Full time pathway

Year Month Submissions
One December The self-assessment exercise ()
March Thesis Preparation Assignment
May Thesis Proposal
June PALS #1
June Thesis proposal
Two September PALS #2
December Service Improvement Poster Presentation
August PASE
Three October PALS #3
March Thesis submission

Part time pathway

Year Month Submissions
One December The self-assessment exercise
Two Sep PALS #1
March Thesis Preparation Assignment
Jan PALS #2
May Thesis Proposal
Jun Service Improvement Poster Presentation
 

 

Three

 

 

Mar PASE
June PALS #3
Four July Thesis submission

Complementary Tasks

While not formally examined in the way the assignments above are, there are other tasks which we would expect to be completed before the doctorate can be awarded. These are:

  • Take part in one formative Standardised Role Play Simulation near the beginning of training
  • Presentation to colleagues, programme staff and other stakeholders on third year placement activity
  • Give a presentation to colleagues relating to their third year leadership teaching

All these presentation dates are indicated in the annual plan/teaching schedules and trainees should be aware that if they are unable to attend the scheduled dates, alternative dates will be arranged.

Useful documents

Assessment submission points

Self-Assessment Exercise (SAE)
Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA)
Placement Assignment – Live Skills (PALS)
Placement Assignment – Service Evaluation (PASE)
Service Improvement Poster Presentation (SIPP)
DClinPsy Assessment Domain List

2017 cohort and earlier

Formal Assessment

In terms of academic assignments, trainees must submit/complete all of the following:

For trainees in 2015, 2016 and 2017 cohorts:

  • Placement Portfolio (DACS-PP1&2) comprising of two sets of the following submitted across the first 4 placements of the programme:
    • 2 Assessment and Action Plan reports which are based on clinical activity – AAP 1 & 2 are 2000 words, AAP 3 & 4 are 2750 words (with an additional allowance of 300 words for a context paragraph which means the total word count cannot exceed 3050 words)
    • 1 Recording of Clinical Activity: 30 minute excerpt
    • 1 Clinical Recording Report (based on the submitted recording of clinical activity): Transcription (not included in the word count) and commentary on two 5 minute sections up to 2000 words, an introductory/context section of up to 500 words, and a reflective element up to 1500 words. In total (excluding the transcript commentary) the report is 4000 words
  • Roleplay (DACS-SRPS) comprising of an assessed roleplay performance, taking place toward the latter part of the first year of training.
  • Professional Issues Assignment: 2,500 word essay relating to one or more professional practice issues. It is submitted in the first few months of training.
  • Systematic Literature Review (SLR): a 6,000 word systematic review of either quantitative or qualitative studies, submitted in the summer of the first year (for the 2015 cohort) or winter of the second year (for the 2016 cohort onwards).
  • Service-Related Project (SRP): a 6,000 word report of research conducted in a service setting, submitted around half way through training.

For trainees in cohorts 2014 and earlier:

  • Placement Presentation and Report (PPR): two 7,000 word reports of a piece of clinical work/activity comprising of:
    • 2 Initial Reports – 1500 word report based on a communication from clinical placement (4 must be submitted, but only two are examined)
    • 2 Presentations – 15 minutes based on piece of work from placement
    • 2 Discussions with examiners based on presentation material
    • 2 Main Reports – 5500 words based on work from placement
  • Roleplay (DACS-SRPS): see above (for 2014 cohort only, earlier cohorts do not undertake this assignment)
  • Professional Issues Assignment: see above but with addition of PIA 2, an essay of the same word length submitted towards the latter part of the second year of training.
  • Systematic Literature Review: see above
  • Service-Related Project: a 12,000 word report of research conducted in a service setting

Complementary Tasks

While not formally examined in the way the assignments above are, there are other tasks which we would expect to be completed before the doctorate can be awarded. These are:

  • Take part in one formative Standardised Role Play Simulation near the beginning of training (2014 cohort onwards)
  • Presentation of initial SRP idea to a peer group
  • Presentation of completed SRP to colleagues, programme staff and other stakeholders
  • Presentation of completed first Professional Issues Assignment to colleagues and programme staff
  • Presentation of the thesis to colleagues, programme staff and other stakeholders
  • Presentation to colleagues, programme staff and other stakeholders on third year placement activity
  • PDR presentation to colleagues

All these presentation dates are indicated in the annual plan and trainees should be aware that if they are unable to attend the scheduled dates, alternative dates will be arranged.

Standard assignment submission schedules

Year 1
Professional Issues Assignment February
DACS-PP1 Assessment and Action Plan 1 (Child) May
DACS – Standardised Role Play Simulation July
DACS-PP1 Assessment and Action Plan 2 (Adult) September
Year 2
DACS-PP1 Clinical Recording 1 and Clinical Recording Report 1 October
Systematic Literature Review December
Service Related Project February
DACS-PP2 Assessment and Action Plan 3 (Older Adult/Neuro/Health) May
DACS-PP2 Assessment and Action Plan 4 (LD) September
Year 3
DACS-PP2 – Clinical Recording 2 and Clinical Recording Report 2 October
Thesis May

Assignment submission dates

Assessment general principles

Assessment on the Doctorate in Clinical Psychology is guided by a number of different frameworks including the Health and Care Professions Council’s (HCPC’s) standards of education and training and standards of proficiency, the British Psychological Society’s (BPS’s) accreditation through partnership framework and Lancaster University’s own guidance for postgraduate students. Links to all relevant documentation are included at the end of this section.

The programme’s assessment strategy is developed and monitored by the Assessment Development and Implementation Group (ADIG). The aims of the ADIG are to monitor and review each academic assignment, and to develop the framework of academic assessment to best fit trainee competencies. Each assignment is reviewed annually by the Assessment Development and Implementation Group. Once results have been ratified by the Exam Board, the coordinator for each assignment submits a report for discussion by the ADIG on the process of the assignment, including feedback from external examiners and other stakeholders. Any proposed changes to assignments are initially discussed at the Assessment Development and Implementation Group, and then brought to the Operational Management Group for approval.

The programme’s assessment strategies are informed by the HCPC’s standards of proficiency for practitioner psychologists and the BPS’s learning outcomes and objectives. For trainees up to the 2017 intake, assignment evidence for specific competencies is collected and rated for each assignment. For the 2018 intake onwards, this system of competencies has been replaced with an updated system of assessment domains. Under both systems, evidence within specific areas is collected and rated for each assignment. This approach to assessment means that each competency or domains (e.g., critical analysis & synthesis) will be assessed repeatedly throughout training but the way trainees are required to demonstrate these will vary according to the specific assignment.

It should be noted that only by successfully completing the Doctorate in Clinical Psychology can trainees become eligible to apply to the HCPC to be registered as a clinical psychologist. Furthermore, only HCPC approved programmes can confer eligibility to apply for HCPC registration. The programme does not offer any other route except to the full award of the doctorate in clinical psychology: no aegrotat award is offered.

The HCPC Standards of Proficiency for practitioner psychologists
HCPC Standards of education and training
BPS Standards for the accreditation of Doctoral programmes in clinical psychology

 

Assessment Development and Implementation Group (ADIG)

The Assessment Development and Implementation Group (ADIG) is responsible for reviewing and transforming assessment processes on the Lancaster DClinPsy programme to ensure that they are fit for purpose, and develop in line with changes in the delivery of healthcare both within the NHS and wider contexts.

The overall aims of the group are:

  • To review the current methods and processes of assessing trainee competency on the programme
  • To continuously improve and develop the framework of assessment of trainee competencies
  • To review and develop all of the assessment processes, responding to feedback from a range of stakeholder groups

Members of the programme team within the DIG are responsible for leading the implementation of the policies, strategies and procedures developed and reviewed by the group. The ADIG reports to the Operational Management Group. The membership of the group comprises members of the programme team with specific assessment responsibilities and members of the stakeholder groups (e.g. markers, practice placement supervisors, trainees and LUPIN members).

Assessment Development and Implementation Group Terms of Reference

Public Involvement on the Lancaster DClinPsy programme (LUPIN)

“Involvement is intended to refer to principles and approaches that lead to individuals having real choices … and their voices heard and heeded both individually and collectively” (British Psychological Society, 2010).

Principles Underpinning Public and Service User Involvement on the Lancaster DClinPsy Programme

Partnership

Research suggests that embedded participation based on a partnership approach is most effective at achieving lasting change. We intend for service users to be key players or partners in the achievement of the vision and aims jointly developed by the programme and service users. We will actively promote the involvement and participation of service users in as many aspects of the programme’s work as appropriate.

Intention to Change

The Lancaster programme has a fundamental intention and commitment to adapt and evolve as a result of service user participation.

Power Relationships

We acknowledge that many service user involvement initiatives have not achieved their stated aims, due to a failure to truly involve users, or through limited or tokenistic involvement, or through professional and organisational resistance. We will seek to minimise, where possible, the effects of power relationships between service users and trainees and members of programme staff.

We aim for service users and carers to be active partners, and for initiatives and the achievement of aims to be as participative and user-led as possible. We acknowledge that this involvement needs to take place within certain constraints (e.g. finance, organisational policy and HCPC & BPS standards and guidance).

Expertise

The programme will recognise the validity and worth of the unique expertise that service users have developed through experience, and will aim to treat service users and carers as ‘experts by experience’.

Representativeness

Service users and carers are often asked to be more ‘representative’ than any other group of stakeholders in the change management process (SCIE, 2015), and service users who are marginalised from mainstream services can also be found to be under or unrepresented in the participation intended to develop those services.

The Lancaster DClinPsy programme aims to promote the representation of as wide a range of users of services as practical. Service users from a range of services will be invited to be involved in the work of the programme.

Managing Expectations

The programme and service users will aim to be as clear as possible about their expectations and limits of the partnership. The process and impact of service user involvement will be monitored and evaluated on an ongoing basis through trainee, staff and service user feedback.

Inclusivity

The programme welcomes the involvement of people regardless of age, gender, ethnicity, faith, sexual orientation, or ability. Service users who currently work with the course are a diverse group, and include people who have used mental health services, care for those who use services, or have an interest in mental health professional training.

LUPIN

The Lancaster University Public Involvement Network (LUPIN) aims to increase public involvement in the Lancaster Doctoral Programme in Clinical Psychology. LUPIN was set up in early 2008 and its members include current and former users of clinical psychology services, carers, members of the public interested in mental health service development, programme staff and trainee clinical psychologists. We are clear that staff members and trainees can also be current or historical service users and/or carers and we welcome this perspective.

LUPIN and the course are working together to make sure that a public involvement perspective is woven throughout all aspects of the DClinPsy programme. This is to improve the experience of training so that trainees learn from the experiences of service users and carers.

Structure, Processes and Methods of Involvement

LUPIN members are involved in a range of work on the programme including selection interviews for trainees, teaching, advising on trainee research projects and membership of programme committees. LUPIN is also linked into various groups both locally and nationally that help to promote the involvement of service users and carers in clinical psychology and wider services.

LUPIN meets as a steering group, which aims to guide the overall strategy. Future strategic aims for LUPIN are currently in development.

Service users have been involved in several aspects of the work of the programme:

Teaching

Service users (including, but not restricted to, LUPIN members) have contributed to the planning and delivery of teaching sessions and workshops with trainees and clinical psychologists external to the programme. LUPIN members have contributed to the peer observation of teaching sessions to trainees.

Members of service user groups representing other specialities (such as people with learning disabilities) also regularly contribute to teaching on the programme.

Selections and Admissions

LUPIN members are members of the interview panels which select each new intake of trainees. A variety of other service users are also involved in the “video discussion task”, one of the four elements of the recruitment process during selection week.

Research

Trainees are encouraged to involve experts by experience in the planning and management of their individual research projects. Please see the Public Participation in Research Activity guidance.

Programme Management

LUPIN members contribute to the programme development and implementation group meetings and the Programme Board.

Fitness to Practise

LUPIN members form part of the Fitness to Practise panel.

Dedicated resources

The programme will ensure that dedicated time from programme staff is available to support service user involvement in all its aspects. This will include members of the clinical, research and administrative staff. The programme will provide suitable meeting venues, travel expenses, and payment for activities when appropriate.

Leadership

Programme staff will take responsibility for chairing LUPIN steering group and subgroup meetings. Programme administrative staff will be responsible for keeping and circulating meeting minutes.

Payment for Service User Involvement

LUPIN members are involved in a wide range of course-related activities and we wish to recognise the skills and expertise that are brought to these activities, as well as the time that members give to help us improve and develop the training course.

What types of payment are offered?

Fees.  Payment is offered for all course-related activities in which experts by experience are involved. There are different options available for payment and these are discussed when someone is interested in joining LUPIN. The payment structure is currently under review and will be available for the handbook when finalised.

LUPIN steering group

The LUPIN steering group meets every three months and aims to guide the overall strategy of service user and carer involvement with the course.  The terms of reference for the group are currently being updated.

Support, Training and Development

Reasonable adjustment will be made for those who are disabled in any way by society in order for service users to participate in programme activities. This includes, for example, accessible meeting venues, and aids and adjustments for visual, cognitive or hearing impairments.

The level of involvement by service users in programme activities is dependent on personal choice, and the programme does not have specific expectations of how much time people need to commit.

Through discussion at LUPIN steering group meetings the programme aims to meet any specific and relevant training and development needs that are highlighted through the work. For example, to date, this has led to arranging a training session for LUPIN members to understand policy and legislation on Equality and Diversity.

Recruitment

We are keen to encourage trainee representation on the LUPIN steering group. We are also keen to recruit more members of the public and service users to LUPIN. We would encourage trainees, whilst on placement, to publicize LUPIN.

LUPIN If you are interested in becoming involved please get in touch with the staff team who facilitate LUPIN: –

Zarah Eve: z.eve@lancaster.ac.uk

Anna Duxbury: a.duxbury@lancaster.ac.uk

Suzanne Hodge: s.hodge@lancaster.ac.uk

Useful documents

Public participation in research activity

Service related project (SRP) trainee guidance

2016 and 2017 cohorts

N.B. The SRP is only undertaken by trainees in the 2017 cohort and earlier

It is a requirement for each trainee to submit one SRP for examination during their training. Although the planning for this SRP will start in your first year, it will not have to be submitted until part way through your second year (or later if you are on a bespoke training path). This project is designed to provide you with experience of the following which are also required elements of the assessment:

  • choosing (together with your field and research supervisors) an appropriate project
  • developing this project in terms of its methodology, in collaboration with relevant others
  • considering the ethical issues for the project and applying for ethical approval, from either an NHS ethics committee, or the Faculty ethics committee when necessary
  • following all appropriate R&D procedures where applicable
  • collecting your own data or extracting relevant data from datasets collected by others
  • analysing your own data (with appropriate advice)
  • writing up your project in not more than 6,000 words
  • considering appropriate dissemination routes

In choosing your SRP, you must make sure that it is an example of service-related research within a clinical context. While it does not necessarily have to be explicitly psychological in focus (e.g., it could include an analysis of referral patterns to a clinical psychology department), it has to address issues of relevance to the practice of clinical psychology, and ideally should be of interest to local practitioners. If it is not particularly service-based (e.g., research around clinical psychology training) it has to have relevance to the practice of clinical psychology. In terms of its scope, it should be methodologically sound, ethically responsible and appropriately analysed. Within the SRP there is an expectation of a strategy for the dissemination of your research findings. This will likely involve identifying a journal to publish your results or writing a report for the service that commissioned the research. The dissemination strategy should be realistic (do not aim for publication in a very high impact factor journal) and take account of the various audiences (e.g., professionals, service users/experts by experience, carers, patient organisations) who might be interested in the research.

Examples of suitable projects could be:

  • evaluation of a therapeutic intervention using appropriate quantitative or qualitative methodology
  • evaluation of the operation of a new aspect of a service (e.g., a new support group or a client assessment strategy)
  • staff’s experiences of a particular aspect of a service

Alternatively the SRP could be used to inform the development of the thesis research project by incorporating pilot work of a suitably advanced nature. The SRP does not have to be directly linked to any placements but, since it is service-related, it will need to be linked to a service of some kind (even one offered at a national level). Alternatively it may be linked to one of your placements (or to none of your placements). It could even be linked to training course developments as this impacts on the practice of clinical psychology more widely.

There are no specific requirements for the methods to be used in SRPs, although it is expected that SRPs will, for example, not just rely on descriptive statistics as the sole form of analysis. It must involve the consideration of all relevant ethical issues and could also involve an independent submission to an ethics committee (NHS- or university-based). It is also expected that, if using qualitative designs and collecting new data, you will transcribe the data yourself. The programme does not usually pay for transcription or allow others to transcribe your data for you.

SRP supervision

Trainees are encouraged to develop their networks with clinical psychologists practising in the region and, ideally, approach a potential SRP supervisor. In some cases, however, the clinical (or ‘field’) supervisor for the SRP may be a member of the programme staff and, in some cases, a placement supervisor may take up the role of SRP supervisor. In addition to this ‘field’ supervision, all trainees will be allocated a research supervisor (from the Programme’s Research Team). You will be given a number of suggested ideas from local clinicians and programme staff at the SRP introduction days (in September/October of the first year) and you are encouraged to contact local clinicians to discuss these further and find out whether they would be willing to act as your field supervisor. Your project also needs to gain the agreement in principle from one of the research team staff to supervise it.

Building a good supervisory relationship involves a process of negotiation, learning about each other’s strengths and areas of expertise, and ascertaining what each party can bring to the SRP process. Some trainees may already be strong in their chosen topic area or research method, and need little guidance on this. Some trainees may specifically seek a supervisor because of their expertise or their access to prospective research participants. There is no single, fixed set of things that supervisors will need to offer. Instead, deciding what is needed from supervision will involve a process of discussion between the trainee and the two supervisors.

The following list gives an idea of the kinds of things a field supervisor may be able to offer. Not all of these attributes will necessarily be needed; the needs will depend on the trainee and on the nature of the particular SRP. It is perfectly possible for someone to take up the role of field supervisor without being able to offer all of these.

  • support in choosing an appropriate topic
  • identifying how it fits with a particular service or clinical question
  • support in developing the necessary networks
  • support in identifying the relevant ethics committee and R&D personnel
  • support in developing the project, including thinking through issues of feasibility
  • support in making contact with prospective research participants
  • feedback on the written proposal
  • feedback on the ethics application
  • feedback on up to two drafts of the SRP report

When you arrive on the programme you will be allocated a temporary research tutor who will offer you advice and support on choosing an appropriate topic in the first few weeks. Once this has been decided upon you will be allocated a research supervisor, who is usually a member of the research team and who will also become your research tutor for the duration of your SRP. Once your project has been approved (see process below) you will then complete a contract with both your supervisors so that everyone is clear about their role. You can expect the following support from your research supervisor:

  • advice on the general suitability of the proposed research project
  • support in developing this project in terms of its methodology
  • advice on a power calculation, if applicable, although you will be expected to have attempted this previously
  • support in applying for ethical approval and following R&D procedures where necessary
  • advice on data analysis
  • detailed feedback on up to two drafts of the SRP report (provided submitted to agreed deadlines)

The kind of draft feedback that can be expected from supervisors will include: general advice on the content, format and clarity of the draft; comments aimed at the structural elements of the work. It is not the draft reader’s responsibility to: advise on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of your understanding of that material; correct work to make it conform to APA style. Please consult the consistency framework for further guidance on how your supervisors will contribute to the SRP.

The proposal process

To begin the process of working up your SRP you will need to discuss your ideas with your temporary research tutor. By the end of October (precise dates will be given in your SRP teaching) you will need to submit an SRP topic form. This outlines briefly the general area you intend to research (e.g., research in learning disabilities or physical health) and the methodology (quantitative or qualitative) that you intend to employ as well as the likely field supervisor. This form will be used to allocate you a research supervisor.

You will then work with your supervisors (field supervisor and research supervisor) to develop a formal SRP proposal using the SRP proposal form. This will be submitted towards the end of November (dates to be given in SRP teaching) and will be reviewed by members of the research team, including the Research Director. The aim of this process is to provide a rigorous examination of the relevance, design and feasibility of the proposal.

You and your supervisors will then receive feedback on this proposal which you need to record formally on the feedback form, along with how you intend to address any concerns. Once any concerns have been addressed satisfactorily and we have a final version of your feedback form, you will receive notification (by email) that your SRP title has been approved by the Exam Board.

The SRP co-ordinator will give guidance on appropriate procedures and a timeline to follow.

What makes a good SRP?

It is difficult to provide clear rules about what makes a good SRP; indeed, part of the purpose of doing one is for you to be able to judge for yourselves what is an acceptable project. However we think the following list will be useful for all service-related research: Projects that have gone well have…

  1. Started early to allow for things to go wrong
  2. Carefully investigated the feasibility of the project
  3. Gone through any of the relevant NHS R&D and ethical clearance procedures in good time
  4. Addressed a clear research question
  5. Used an appropriate research design and method to address the question
  6. Used an appropriate research design and method for the resources you have
  7. Addressed an issue of importance to a local service
  8. Had the active support of key personnel within the service
  9. Allowed plenty of time for data collection, analysis and writing up
  10. Conformed to the American Psychological Association (APA) formatting guidelines
  11. Been sensitive to the data actually collected in the written report
  12. Clearly written why the project was done, how it was done, what it found, and what the implications are

Projects that run into difficulties have…

  1. Started late
  2. Relied on others’ reports of feasibility, rather than trainees’ checking for themselves
  3. Not checked early enough on local R&D and/or ethical approval procedures
  4. Been unclear in their aims
  5. Been over-ambitious or unrealistic about what can be achieved
  6. Been conducted in the face of indifference or outright opposition from key personnel
  7. Have addressed an issue seen as irrelevant by the local service
  8. Been extremely rushed in terms of data collection, analysis and writing up
  9. Used inappropriate statistics/analysis
  10. Been sloppy in presentation
  11. Been written in a way that is vague, unfocused, careless, or effortful to understand
  12. Did not have a clear dissemination strategy (e.g. either in terms of publishing the results or formally feeding back the results to the service)

Available guidance and ethical procedures

For detailed guidance on the research process, please consult the handouts and materials suggested in the research teaching. You can also access information on how to write a research protocol in the online handbook.

Ethics procedures are changing all the time so consult your supervisor on the appropriate ethical approval route for your project. Websites that might be useful include the HRA website and IRAS website (suitable for NHS and other public agency approval) and the Faculty Ethics Committee website.

Expenses for research

Details about research resources including information about research expenses can be found in the online handbook.

You need to ascertain as early as possible whether your project is likely to incur any additional expenses above those covered in the research expenses documentation as this will need to be discussed with your research supervisor and field supervisor and approved by the Research Director. An example of such expense would be the use of interpreters or room bookings, and you need to discuss as early as possible with your tutor and supervisors whether your project may warrant the inclusion of participants who would need this service to take part in your research.

Timeline

Individual projects will vary. The following is intended only as a general guide:

Date Stage
Oct Define your SRP topic and identify a likely field supervisor
Nov Work on literature review, submit initial proposal
Dec / Jan Address any concerns from feedback and submit feedback form. Receive approval email from Exam Board
Jan / Feb / Mar Arrange three-way meeting with supervisors to discuss SRP research contract, find out about R&D and ethics processes, and develop research protocol and materials
Mar / Apr / May Finalise research materials and submit ethics application (when appropriate)
Apr / May / Jun / Jul Work through ethics and R&D processes where necessary
Aug / Sept / Oct Fieldwork and begin writing up introduction and method of report
Oct / Nov Analysis and writing
Dec / Jan Submit draft for supervisors’ feedback
Feb Submit SRP

Make sure that you follow through with the services that have supported the research, ensuring that they receive feedback in an appropriate form. As detailed above, this is now a formal requirement for the SRP and you will be asked to demonstrate an appropriate dissemination strategy within the write up. In most cases, it is expected that this will involve writing up the research for publication. However, there are cases where the work is not appropriate for publication, so alternative dissemination strategies needs to be demonstrated (e.g. PowerPoint presentation, report to the service, etc).

If for some reason you feel that data collection needs to continue beyond the hand-in date this needs to be discussed with your research supervisor.

The report and its appendices

The format and style of presentation of the SRP must reflect the purpose of the project and all reports should be in the publication format of the American Psychological Association (see the APA publication manual for details; a copy of the most recent, sixth edition is available in the trainee room). The SRP should normally include the following sections (unless a radically different format is required, in which case this should be agreed in advance with the course team).

  • Abstract (no more than 200 words; not included within the 6000 word limit)
  • Introduction to the research question, referring to any relevant literature and providing a clear statement of the specific question being addressed by the project. The introduction should provide justification for your research, demonstrating that it is timely, needed, and appropriate and that your chosen method of analysis is relevant to the research question
  • Methods What was your research design or strategy? Who or what was your research sample? Which research methods did you use and what procedure(s) did you carry out to collect the information? Briefly mention ethical issues and refer readers to the main ethics section (see below)
  • Results or Findings These should be presented in a clear and concise manner. Clarity of presentation is more important than wowing the markers with fancy inferential statistics
  • Discussion A brief discussion of the project’s findings. How do they relate to the research question? What were the limitations of the research project? What recommendations can you make for service provision and future research?
  • Reference list
  • Required appendices
  • Dissemination Strategy This is a short section that details your dissemination strategy. It may give the journal of choice for your submission and give evidence of your thoughts about the appropriate vehicle of dissemination. Alternatively, you may have agreed to produce an article for a service publication (e.g. newsletter) or produce a report for the service
  • Ethical reflection The report should also contain a separate section where the ethical issues which were pertinent to the project are considered
  • Ethics section Include your proposal to the ethics committee (if appropriate) and any ethical committee application forms, your information sheets and consent forms, the approval letter of the ethics committee (all appropriately redacted)
  • Other appendices as appropriate

The report of the SRP should be no more than 6000 words. This word count is for the introduction, methodology, results/findings, discussion and conclusions. This does not include the abstract, dissemination strategy, ethical reflections, the ethical section, any tables, the references and any other appendices. Within the ethics section it is expected that it contains any appropriate ethical material including, where relevant, the ethics application, information sheets, consent forms, and approval letter from the ethics committee. For qualitative projects, quotes from participants are included in the word count.

Thus the 6000 words for the main body of the report could be divided up like this:

  • Introduction: 1500 words
  • Method section: 1200 words
  • Results: 2000 words
  • Discussion and Conclusions: 1300 words

It is expected that the dissemination strategy will be approximately 500 words and that the abstract will be no more than 200 words.

The word numbers given above provide you with a rough guide only. Marks are not allocated per section of the SRP but, rather, the SRP will be marked as a whole document.

Qualitative projects will typically need more words in the results section than quantitative projects do. This will automatically affect the balance of word numbers between the results, the discussion and the introduction. It is important that you (in consultation with your supervisors) make this balance work well for your particular project. It is perfectly acceptable in qualitative projects to combine the Results and Discussion sections. You will not be penalised for this. It would then be usual for this joint Results and Discussion section to be followed by a much shorter Conclusion section.

A full set of the ethics materials – appropriately redacted to exclude identifiers – does need to be included (this may be scanned). The ethics materials should not impinge on your ability to do justice to the research write-up. For this reason, the ethics section is not included in the word count. However, it is expected that you are succinct in your ethics section. Examiners should be able to see the approval letters from your ethics/R&D applications.

It is important to use the write-up to demonstrate transparency in the research process and thoroughness in your critical reflections on the process, and to engage with relevant methodological literature.

Writing tips and draft reading

Please try to ensure that drafts are written to a timetable agreed with supervisors well in advance. This will help supervisors give feedback in a thorough and timely way.

The value of a carefully-written report cannot be overstated. Do pay close attention to editing and proof-reading and leave plenty of time for this part of the process. Apostrophes, spelling, grammar, paragraphing and the clear expression of ideas are all crucial to the overall impression. Be aware that draft readers will not have time to do proof-reading and editing: this is your job! You will also need your report to be written in APA style. Copies of the APA style guide are available in the trainee room.

Submission process

Details of the submission process will be sent to you nearer the time, although some general guidelines are available in the online handbook. This includes a list of the required documents for a complete submission.

Presentation guidelines

Following the submission of your SRP, you will be required to give a short presentation of your work to fellow trainees, supervisors and members of the wider faculty. This should be thought of as a public presentation and afterwards trainees are given the option to make their presentations available publicly through the course website. You should bear this in mind when choosing what to present and include on your slides.

Previous SRP presentations can be found on the programme website. Copies of the proposal form, the proposal feedback form and the topic form are available from the SRP coordinator.

HRA website
IRAS website
Faculty Ethics Committee
SRP trainee feedback form (2016 cohort onwards)
SRP instructions to markers (2016 cohort onwards)
SRP marker booklet (2016 cohort onwards)
Service-Related Project Contract and Action Plan (all cohorts)

2015 cohort

N.B. The SRP is only undertaken by trainees in the 2017 cohort and earlier

It is a requirement for each trainee to submit one SRP for examination during their training. Although the planning for this SRP will start in your first year, it will not have to be submitted until part way through your second year (or later if you are on a bespoke training path). This project is designed to provide you with experience of the following which are also required elements of the assessment:

  • choosing (together with your field and research supervisors) an appropriate project
  • developing this project in terms of its methodology, in collaboration with relevant others
  • considering the ethical issues for the project and applying for ethical approval, from either an NHS ethics committee, or the Faculty ethics committee when necessary
  • following all appropriate R&D procedures where applicable
  • collecting your own data or extracting relevant data from datasets collected by others
  • analysing your own data (with appropriate advice)
  • writing up your project in not more than 6,000 words
  • considering appropriate dissemination routes

In choosing your SRP, you must make sure that it is an example of service-related research within a clinical context. While it does not necessarily have to be explicitly psychological in focus (e.g., it could include an analysis of referral patterns to a clinical psychology department), it has to address issues of relevance to the practice of clinical psychology, and ideally should be of interest to local practitioners. If it is not particularly service-based (e.g., research around clinical psychology training) it has to have relevance to the practice of clinical psychology. In terms of its scope, it should be methodologically sound, ethically responsible and appropriately analysed. Within the SRP there is an expectation of a strategy for the dissemination of your research findings. This will likely involve identifying a journal to publish your results or writing a report for the service that commissioned the research. The dissemination strategy should be realistic (do not aim for publication in a very high impact factor journal) and take account of the various audiences (e.g., professionals, service users/experts by experience, carers, patient organisations) who might be interested in the research.

Examples of suitable projects could be:

  • evaluation of a therapeutic intervention using appropriate quantitative or qualitative methodology
  • evaluation of the operation of a new aspect of a service (e.g., a new support group or a client assessment strategy)
  • staff’s experiences of a particular aspect of a service

Alternatively the SRP could be used to inform the development of the thesis research project by incorporating pilot work of a suitably advanced nature. The SRP does not have to be directly linked to any placements but, since it is service-related, it will need to be linked to a service of some kind (even one offered at a national level). Alternatively it may be linked to one of your placements (or to none of your placements). It could even be linked to training course developments as this impacts on the practice of clinical psychology more widely.

There are no specific requirements for the methods to be used in SRPs, although it is expected that SRPs will, for example, not just rely on descriptive statistics as the sole form of analysis. It must involve the consideration of all relevant ethical issues and could also involve an independent submission to an ethics committee (NHS- or university-based). It is also expected that, if using qualitative designs and collecting new data, you will transcribe the data yourself. The programme does not usually pay for transcription or allow others to transcribe your data for you.

SRP supervision

Trainees are encouraged to develop their networks with clinical psychologists practising in the region and, ideally, approach a potential SRP supervisor. In some cases, however, the clinical (or ‘field’) supervisor for the SRP may be a member of the programme staff and, in some cases, a placement supervisor may take up the role of SRP supervisor. In addition to this ‘field’ supervision, all trainees will be allocated a research supervisor (from the Programme’s Research Team). You will be given a number of suggested ideas from local clinicians and programme staff at the SRP introduction days (in September/October of the first year) and you are encouraged to contact local clinicians to discuss these further and find out whether they would be willing to act as your field supervisor. Your project also needs to gain the agreement in principle from one of the research team staff to supervise it. It is likely that the project will be related to the research team member’s area of interest.

Building a good supervisory relationship involves a process of negotiation, learning about each other’s strengths and areas of expertise, and ascertaining what each party can bring to the SRP process. Some trainees may already be strong in their chosen topic area or research method, and need little guidance on this. Some trainees may specifically seek a supervisor because of their expertise or their access to prospective research participants. There is no single, fixed set of things that supervisors will need to offer. Instead, deciding what is needed from supervision will involve a process of discussion between the trainee and the two supervisors.

The following list gives an idea of the kinds of things a field supervisor may be able to offer. Not all of these attributes will necessarily be needed; the needs will depend on the trainee and on the nature of the particular SRP. It is perfectly possible for someone to take up the role of field supervisor without being able to offer all of these.

  • support in choosing an appropriate topic
  • identifying how it fits with a particular service or clinical question (relevant for the commissioning service)
  • support in developing the necessary networks
  • support in identifying the relevant ethics committee and R&D personnel
  • support in developing the project, including thinking through issues of feasibility
  • support in making contact with prospective research participants
  • feedback on the written proposal
  • feedback on the ethics application
  • feedback on up to two drafts of the SRP report

If you choose a project from the list we provide, then one or more research team members will probably already be indicated as potential supervisors and they are the first people to approach for initial discussions. If you wish to pursue an alternative project you are encouraged to speak to the SRP coordinator in the first instance to see if someone in the research team will be able to supervise it. In October you will then be allocated a member of the research team as a supervisor. Once your project has been approved (see process below) you will then complete a contract with both your supervisors so that everyone is clear about their role. You can expect the following support from your research supervisor:

  • advice on the general suitability of the proposed research project
  • support in developing this project in terms of its methodology
  • advice on a power calculation, if applicable, although you will be expected to have attempted this previously
  • support in applying for ethical approval and following R&D procedures where necessary
  • advice on data analysis
  • detailed feedback on up to two drafts of the SRP report (provided submitted to agreed deadlines)

The kind of draft feedback that can be expected from supervisors will include: general advice on the content, format and clarity of the draft; comments aimed at the structural elements of the work. It is not the draft reader’s responsibility to: advise on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of your understanding of that material; correct work to make it conform to APA style. Please consult the consistency framework for further guidance on how your supervisors will contribute to the SRP.

The proposal process

To begin the process of working up your SRP you will need to discuss your ideas with the appropriate research team member. By the middle of October (precise dates will be given in your SRP teaching) you will need to submit an SRP topic form. This outlines briefly the general area you intend to research (e.g., research in learning disabilities or physical health) and the methodology (quantitative or qualitative) that you intend to employ as well as the likely field supervisor. This form will be used to allocate you a research supervisor.

You will then work with your supervisors (field supervisor and research supervisor) to develop a formal SRP proposal using the SRP proposal form. This will be submitted towards the end of November (dates to be given in SRP teaching) and will be reviewed by members of the research team, including the Research Director. The aim of this process is to provide a rigorous examination of the relevance, design and feasibility of the proposal.

You and your supervisors will then receive feedback on this proposal which you need to record formally on the feedback form, along with how you intend to address any concerns. Once any concerns have been addressed satisfactorily and we have a final version of your feedback form, you will receive notification (by email) that your SRP title has been approved by the Exam Board.

The SRP co-ordinator will give guidance on appropriate procedures and a timeline to follow.

What makes a good SRP?

It is difficult to provide clear rules about what makes a good SRP; indeed, part of the purpose of doing them is for you to be able to judge for yourselves what is an acceptable project. However we think the following list will be useful for all service-related research:
Projects that have gone well have…

  1. Started early to allow for things to go wrong
  2. Carefully investigated the feasibility of the project
  3. Gone through any of the relevant NHS R&D and ethical clearance procedures in good time
  4. Addressed a clear research question
  5. Used an appropriate research design and method to address the question
  6. Used an appropriate research design and method for the resources you have
  7. Addressed an issue of importance to a local service
  8. Had the active support of key personnel within the service
  9. Allowed plenty of time for data collection, analysis and writing up
  10. Conformed to the American Psychological Association formatting guidelines
  11. Been sensitive to the data actually collected in the written report
  12. Clearly written why the project was done, how it was done, what it found, and what the implications are

Projects that run into difficulties have…

  1. Started late
  2. Relied on others’ reports of feasibility, rather than trainees’ checking for themselves
  3. Not checked early enough on local R&D and/or ethical approval procedures
  4. Been unclear in their aims
  5. Been over-ambitious or unrealistic about what can be achieved
  6. Been conducted in the face of indifference or outright opposition from key personnel
  7. Have addressed an issue seen as irrelevant by the local service
  8. Been extremely rushed in terms of data collection, analysis and writing up
  9. Used inappropriate statistics/analysis
  10. Been sloppy in presentation
  11. Been written in a way that is vague, unfocused, careless, or effortful to understand
  12. Did not have a clear dissemination strategy (e.g. either in terms of publishing the results or formally feeding back the results to the service)

Available guidance and ethical procedures

For detailed guidance on the research process, please consult the handouts and materials suggested in the research teaching. You can also access information on how to write a research protocol in the online handbook.

Please talk to your supervisor about the appropriate route for your project to receive ethical review

Expenses for research

Details about research resources including information about research expenses can be found in the online handbook.

You need to ascertain as early as possible whether your project is likely to incur any additional expenses above those covered in the research expenses documentation as this will need to be discussed with your research supervisor and field supervisor and approved by the Research Director. An example of such expense would be the use of interpreters or room bookings, and you need to discuss as early as possible with your tutor and supervisors whether your project may warrant the inclusion of participants who would need this service to take part in your research.

Timeline

Individual projects will vary. The following is intended only as a general guide:

Date Stage
Oct Define your SRP topic and identify a likely field supervisor
Nov Work on literature review, submit initial proposal
Dec / Jan Address any concerns from feedback and submit feedback form. Receive approval email from Exam Board
Jan / Feb / Mar Arrange three-way meeting with supervisors to discuss SRP research contract, find out about R&D and ethics processes, and develop research protocol and materials
Mar / Apr / May Finalise research materials and submit ethics application (when appropriate)
Apr / May / Jun / Jul Work through ethics and R&D processes where necessary
Aug / Sept / Oct Fieldwork and begin writing up introduction and method of report
Oct / Nov Analysis and writing
Dec / Jan Submit draft for supervisors’ feedback
Feb Submit SRP

Make sure that you follow through with the services that have supported the research, ensuring that they receive feedback in an appropriate form. As detailed above, this is now a formal requirement for the SRP and you will be asked to demonstrate an appropriate dissemination strategy within the write up. In most cases, it is expected that this will involve writing up the research for publication. However, there are cases where the work is not appropriate for publication, so alternative dissemination strategies needs to be demonstrated (e.g. PowerPoint presentation, report to the service, etc).

If for some reason you feel that data collection needs to continue beyond the hand-in date this needs to be discussed with your research supervisor.

The report and its appendices

The format and style of presentation of the SRP must reflect the purpose of the project and all reports should be in the publication format of the American Psychological Association (see the APA publication manual for details; a copy of the most recent, sixth edition is available in the trainee room). The SRP should normally include the following sections (unless a radically different format is required, in which case this should be agreed in advance with the course team).

  • Abstract (no more than 200 words; not included within the 6000 word limit)
  • Introduction to the research question, referring to any relevant literature and providing a clear statement of the specific question being addressed by the project. The introduction should provide justification for your research, demonstrating that it is timely, needed, and appropriate and that your chosen method of analysis is relevant to the research question
  • Methods What was your research design or strategy? Who or what was your research sample? Which research methods did you use and what procedure(s) did you carry out to collect the information? Briefly mention ethical issues and refer readers to the main ethics section (see below)
  • Results or Findings These should be presented in a clear and concise manner. Clarity of presentation is more important than wowing the markers with fancy inferential statistics
  • Discussion A brief discussion of the project’s findings. How do they relate to the research question? What were the limitations of the research project? What recommendations can you make for service provision and future research?
  • Reference list
  • Required appendices
  • Dissemination Strategy This is a short section that details your dissemination strategy. It may give the journal of choice for your submission and give evidence of your thoughts about the appropriate vehicle of dissemination. Alternatively, you may have agreed to produce an article for a service publication (e.g. newsletter) or produce a report for the service
  • Ethical reflection The report should also contain a separate section where the ethical issues which were pertinent to the project are considere
  • Ethics section Include your proposal to the ethics committee (if appropriate) and any ethical committee application forms, your information sheets and consent forms, the approval letter of the ethics committee (all appropriately redacted)
  • Other appendices as appropriate

The report of the SRP should be no more than 6000 words. This word count is for the introduction, methodology, results/findings, discussion and conclusions. This does not include the abstract, dissemination strategy, ethical reflections, the ethical section, any tables, the references and any other appendices. Within the ethics section it is expected that it contains any appropriate ethical material including, where relevant, the ethics application, information sheets, consent forms, and approval letter from the ethics committee. For qualitative projects, quotes from participants are included in the word count.

Thus the 6000 words for the main body of the report could be divided up like this:

  • Introduction: 1500 words
  • Method section: 1200 words
  • Results: 2000 words
  • Discussion and Conclusions: 1300 words

It is expected that the dissemination strategy with be approximately 500 words and that the abstract will be no more than 200 words.

The word numbers given above provide you with a rough guide only. Marks are not allocated per section of the SRP but, rather, the SRP will be marked as a whole document (see the SRP trainee feedback marksheet for details).

Qualitative projects will typically need more words in the results section than quantitative projects do. This will automatically affect the balance of word numbers between the results, the discussion and the introduction. It is important that you (in consultation with your supervisors) make this balance work well for your particular project. It is perfectly acceptable in qualitative projects to combine the Results and Discussion sections. You will not be penalised for this. It would then be usual for this joint Results and Discussion section to be followed by a much shorter Conclusion section.

A full set of the ethics materials – appropriately redacted to exclude identifiers – does need to be included (this may be scanned). The ethics materials should not impinge on your ability to do justice to the research write-up. For this reason, the ethics section is not included in the word count. However, it is expected that you are succinct in your ethics section. Examiners should be able to see the approval letters from your ethics/R&D applications.

It is important to use the write-up to demonstrate transparency in the research process and thoroughness in your critical reflections on the process, and to engage with relevant methodological literature.

Writing tips and draft reading

Please try to ensure that drafts are written to a timetable agreed with supervisors well in advance. This will help supervisors give feedback in a thorough and timely way.

The value of a carefully-written report cannot be overstated. Do pay close attention to editing and proof-reading and leave plenty of time for this part of the process. Apostrophes, spelling, grammar, paragraphing and the clear expression of ideas are all crucial to the overall impression. Be aware that draft readers will not have time to do proof-reading and editing: this is your job! You will also need your report to be written in APA style. Copies of the APA style guide are available in the trainee room.

Submission process

Details of the submission process will be sent to you nearer the time, although some general guidelines are available in the online handbook. This includes a list of the required documents for a complete submission.

Presentation guidelines

Following the submission of your SRP, you will be required to give a short presentation of your work to fellow trainees, supervisors and members of the wider faculty. This should be thought of as a public presentation and afterwards trainees are given the option to make their presentations available publicly through the course website. You should bear this in mind when choosing what to present and include on your slides.

Copies of the SRP proposal form, the proposal feedback form and the topic form are available from the SRP coordinator.

SRP trainee feedback form (2015 cohort)
SRP examiner booklet (2015 cohort)

Self-Assessment Exercise (SAE)

Introduction

The Self-Assessment Exercise (SAE) is designed to help trainees identify what their strengths are and what their areas for development are from the beginning of their training. It enables trainees to become active and engaged participants in their own learning and development and provides an opportunity to engage in different exercises to understand themselves and their needs better.

The assignment comprises a brief written reflective report and a ‘clinical viva’ with the markers (usually the trainee’s individual clinical and research tutor). The report is based on a series of essential and desirable activities with the viva being based on the report. It is a ‘broad skills’ assignment.

Actively assessed domains

The SAE will actively assess the following domains: –

  1. Collating information and knowledge
  2. Critical analysis & synthesis
  3. Strategy for application (deciding)
  4. Responsive to impact & learning from experiences
  5. Communicating information effectively

Preparing for the assignment

Trainees undertake a number of essential and desirable formative activities prior to submitting the written component of the assignment. This begins with a broad self-appraisal exercise (see form below) and then includes a range of other self-assessment exercises covering a range of knowledge and skills (e.g. statistical ability, writing skills, basic clinical engagement skills, and engaging with the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC) student code of conduct). Trainees are expected to identify strengths and areas of development needs or challenge together with strategies to address identified areas of development or challenge and write about these in the 1,500 word report which is submitted to markers in advance of the clinical viva meeting (more details can be found in the ‘how to’ guide).Trainees are offered the chance to meet with their individual tutors on two occasions to discuss and reflect on their progress on these activities prior to submitting their written report.

Preparation for the ‘clinical viva’ will involve the trainees being familiar with what they have written in the report and be able to answer any questions about how they reached the conclusions they have in the report about their strengths/needs and strategies to address.

Structure of the Assignment

The written component of the SAE is completed using the SAE form (link below) and comprises a 500 word initial self-appraisal section and a 1,000 word consideration of the outcome of the self-assessment process. Trainees also append the outcome of all formative activities undertaken (with the exception of the Quick Scan assessment) to the submission. Trainees who have additional considerations (e.g. adjustments the programme needs to be aware of) that they wish to discuss as part of the SAE can be permitted to submit a form with a higher word count (see trainee ‘how to’ guide for details).

The clinical viva focuses on discussing with the trainee their identified strengths and development needs and the path by which they identified these as being most important.

Process of Assessment

The submitted SAE form is read by the tutor pair prior to the viva. During the viva the tutors ask questions based on the contents of this form.

Trainee performance in the viva is assessed by the markers who will jointly determine domain ratings together. The trainee feedback form, including the outcome, will be sent to the trainee following the viva.

If a Pass is awarded the trainee is not required to do anything further with the SAE. If no fails, but at least one ‘pass with conditions’ rating is awarded for a domain, the overall mark will be pass with conditions. Under these circumstances the trainee will be required to make some amendments to their SAE form (which will be detailed to them in the trainee feedback form) and resubmit these. If approved, the mark will then be converted to a full pass. A fail will require the trainee to have a second attempt viva and they may be required to make changes/amendments to the SAE form in advance of the viva.

Assessment guidance and forms

SAE – guide to materials
SAE – how to guide
SAE – trainee feedback
SAE – trainee form

Exercises and tools

SAE – initial self appraisal exercise
SAE – Moodle resources

Placement Presentation and Report (PPR) guidance for markers

Introduction

The Placement Presentation and Report (PPR) is an assessment linked to placement activity. It consists of:

  • a 1500-word initial report which is handed in at the end of each core placement
  • a presentation by the trainee and subsequent discussion with the trainee and markers (to be held after placements 2 and 4)
  • a 5,500-word main report (handed in following the presentation and discussion). The initial 1,500 word report will be combined with this main report bringing the maximum acceptable word count to 7,000 words. Should the initial report be less than 1,500 words, the word count for the main report should still be a maximum of 5,500 words. Word count is not transferable between the two reports

The initial report

The initial report should be between 1,000 and 1,500 words. The word count should be presented on the document and any reports not within this word count will be returned to the trainee. This report should reflect some aspect of a formal clinical/service related communication which was conducted in relation to the piece of clinical/service related work the trainee decides to present. This could include a final letter to a client, report of the outcome of a group or an evaluation of an intervention/training targeted at staff. It should include a brief statement concerning: how the work came about, context of the service and consideration of consent. The main content of the initial report could contain background information; assessment methods; formulation/synthesis of psychological understanding; intervention and outcome. A figure or diagram may be attached but should not have a substantial written component. The introductory paragraph and references (where appropriate) are to be written in APA style. The remainder of the initial report does not have to conform to APA style.

The initial report will be submitted at the end of each of the four placements. For those initial reports submitted after the first and third placements, the office will hold the report and it will not be considered for assessment until the presentation element of the assessment takes place. Where a placement is subsequently failed, the trainee will not be able submit a PPR from that placement and, consequently, the initial report will be returned to the trainee. The trainee will not be allowed to retrieve an initial report, once submitted, even though it might not be examined for up to six months (or longer if a trainee intercalates), unless in exceptional circumstances and this will be authorised by the Chair of the Exam Board. The initial report will not be accepted by the office unless a declaration form completed by the clinical supervisor is also submitted for that work, indicating that it is an accurate representation of the trainee’s work and that appropriate consent has been obtained from those involved to us the material for the assignment. Should the trainee not pass the placement (but not fail it, for example, if the trainee has been seriously ill and therefore not been able to complete the placement), a decision will be made by the Chair of the Exam Board, in consultation with another Director and the trainee’s review tutors, on whether an initial report can be submitted. Where it is felt that a trainee is not able to submit an initial report from such a placement, two may be submitted from one placement. Where this is not possible, a decision will be made by the Chair of the Exam board in consultation with others as to how to proceed.

The presentation and discussion

The two markers for the PPR will be taken from the DClinPsy list of approved markers who have undertaken specific training on the requirements of the PPR and its assessment procedures. The marker pair will be made up of at least one clinical psychologist working in the speciality in which the trainee is presenting and at least one marker who has examined the PPR before (this may include a member of the programme team). Markers will have a minimum of one year post qualification experience and none of the markers will be known to the trainee in any of the following capacities: placement supervisor, individual clinical/research tutor, personal tutor or having any other close personal or professional relationship with the trainee. A system has been created to allow both the marker and trainee to indicate any such relationships.

A member of the programme team will chair the presentation process. The Chair’s role is to keep the PPR to time and, where necessary, provide guidance or an alternative viewpoint on any areas of disagreement between markers.

The marker pair will receive the relevant initial report, the one from the work which the trainee will present to read prior to the trainee presentation. It is expected that the markers will discuss (without the trainee present) the contents of the report prior to the presentation. The markers will not usually have had sight of this report prior to this time. The other initial report will not be formally assessed but kept by the office in case it is needed in case of failure by the trainee of the first PPR.

The trainees will be told on the day of the presentation, around 30 minutes before they are due to present, which presentation they will be asked to deliver. More guidance on what the presentation should cover is contained within the document Placement Presentation and Report (PPR) information for trainees. They will present for 15 minutes, and this will be kept to time by the chair of the presentation process. They will then have around 10 minutes of discussion with the trainee in which the trainee is encouraged to discuss and reflect on their work. After a brief time in which the markers reflect together (without the trainee) on the presentation and the evidence collected, the trainee is invited back in to receive verbal feedback. A copy of the feedback is sent out to trainees following the presentation process with a copy stored electronically by the programme office. Feedback given by markers includes strengths and areas for development. Trainees are required to reflect on the feedback points in the main report section of the PPR. All scoring schedules are detailed in the scoring booklets.

If the presentation is considered unacceptable (i.e. trainee discloses something which raises serious professional or ethical issues), the process needs to be halted. Markers are asked to progress through the process to their private discussion time and during this time to make contact with the PPR Co-ordinator/Chair of the Exam Board. Consultation will take place between the PPR Co-ordinator/Chair of the Exam Board and the markers as to why it has been necessary to halt the process and seek advice. The Chair of the Exam Board will consult with colleagues (including the Clinical Director if the concern raised is a serious professional concern). If the concern is deemed sufficient to require action by the employer, the PPR assessment process will be suspended whilst advice is sought from the employing body as to how to proceed. Other outcome options following consultation with the Chair of the Exam Board are the resumption of the original presentation process, the presentation of the PPR material from the alternative placement and/or referral to the Exam Board about how to proceed. If it is decided that the trainee needs to present their alternative PPR material, this will be scheduled in as soon as is practically possible with a different marker pair.

If the trainee presents extremely poorly (so would score Unacceptable on the Presentation Skills competency), this will be communicated to the trainee after the private discussion between the markers (with advice from the Chair of the Exam Board if required). In this situation, the trainee will have one more attempt to give the presentation at that specific day of presentations where scheduling will allow. If s/he fails at this second attempt, then a fail has to be recorded for the whole PPR and the trainee must re-take the assessment (i.e. have an alternative initial report available and present the relevant presentation). The date for re-assessment will be confirmed by letter from the Exam Board. The re-assessment will be scheduled with a different marker pair. As the presentation skills competency is the only one which is not also assessed during the marking of the initial and main PPR reports, it is appropriate to inform the trainee at this point that they have failed.

It is important to note that trainees who cannot attend the presentations due to illness must provide the programme with a medical certificate. Failure to provide such a certificate will result in the presentation being awarded a fail mark. This will then indicate that the PPR is failed.

Main report

The main report should be no longer than 5,500 words. The main report and the initial report combined should be no longer than 7,000 words. This excludes any reasonable; appendices. Any work exceeding this will be sent back to the trainee immediately for editing. The report should reflect the piece of work already presented and will include the initial report (the word count for this is included in the maximum 7,000 word count), and a larger (main) report which can be structured to reflect the piece of work conducted. However, included within this larger report must be some reflections of the discussion at the presentation session. As with most written assignments on the course, the Main Report should be written to conform to APA style. The only exception to this is within the Main Report is that tables and diagrams can be included within the text as opposed to at the end of the report.

Assessment issues

All aspects of the PPR relating to one candidate will be marked by the same set of markers. The initial reports and main reports, as written pieces of work, will be available for external marker scrutiny in the normal way. All the presentations will also be video recorded and will therefore also be available for scrutiny. The programme’s external markers will be sent an example of a low, average and high submission (consisting of the initial report, video of the presentation, feedback and main report). The recordings of all instances where the trainee has failed the presentation skills aspects or, in the exceptional case, where trainees’ presentations have been stopped for professional reasons will be sent for external marker review. The two internal markers are required to reach an agreed grade for every competency assessed so externals should not have to adjudicate where markers disagree. If internal markers cannot reach agreement, a third marker will be introduced.

Where an identifier or identifiers are found in the work the markers are asked to note them and inform the chair of exam board/PPR co-ordinator. markers are asked to consider whether the identifier significantly compromises the confidentiality of the individual or service and take account of it in the evidence collecting process either under the Professional Behaviour or Standard Setting Competency. Where the identifier is found in the written elements of the assignment, the trainee will be asked to resubmit that part of the assignment.

The detailed marking schedule is available to markers during marker training & during the examination process. A blank copy of the feedback sheet given to trainees, which shows the competencies and score calculation system, is available here. In summary, the evidence collected from presentation and report are marked against a competency rating system. The competencies assessed are: knowledge and skills; reflection and integration; professional behaviour; analysis and critical thinking; effective verbal communication (only in presentation); resilience; standard setting; and effective written communication (in initial and main reports). A single grade (unacceptable, weak, appropriate for stage of training, advanced for stage of training, or exceptional) is given for each of the relevant competencies for the evidence collected from the presentation and main report as a whole, with a composite final grade across each competency being agreed by both markers. This grading then translates into a score. The pass mark is 50. A piece of work that is ‘satisfactory’ throughout (but no better) will receive a score in the mid 50s; pieces of work that are satisfactory in parts but have at least two areas of weakness will fail, and pieces of work that are good throughout will score in the low 70s. Specific guidance is given in the PPR documentation sent to markers on the final scores of work where one (or more) competencies are judged as unacceptable. However, it is important to note that one grade of ‘unacceptable’ would be sufficient to see the work overall failed. Where a piece of work fails, the trainee will be given guidance after the fail has been discussed at the Exam Board as to whether they can represent and resubmit the same piece of work or whether an alternative piece of work should be submitted. Assignment of the ‘unacceptable’ grade on any competency will mean the whole assignment needs to be resubmitted.

Placement Presentation and Report (PPR) information for trainees

The PPR is for the 2014 cohort and earlier only. The structure of the PPR is as follows

Initial Report submitted at end of each core placement (min 1000 – max 1500 wds excluding references & appendices)
Presentation and Discussion to be held after placements 2 & 4
Main Report Submitted following the Presentation / Discussion (maximum 5500 words excluding references & appendices)

The initial report and main report together are no longer than 7000 words. Word count cannot be transferred between the different reports if one is longer or shorter. The word count limits quoted above are upper limits for each report with the exception of the Initial Report which has a lower word limit also. Submissions falling outside of the word limits will be returned to trainees for editing and may be subject to the deadlines policy.

The assessment process

The PPR is assessed by two examiners. They collect evidence from all the different parts of the PPR process for each competency. With the exception of presentation skills, all the competencies will be rated at the end of the process (presentation skills will be rated by examiners at the time of the presentation, but the grade will not be given out at the presentation). The examiners are asked to give you a grade for each competency based on the evidence they have collected across the whole PPR process (with the exception outlined above). They will also give you some written feedback for each competency (sent out with your letter from the exam board following ratification of PPR marks). This is intended to be helpful and to be part of your overall learning and development. The grades are converted to a final mark which corresponds to the University marking procedure (i.e. distinction, good pass, pass, fail, poor fail).The grades examiners are asked to award for the competencies can be found below:

UNACCEPTABLE (U) The piece of work shows an extremely poor ability in this competence that requires urgent attention. NB: If this grade is given to any competency it automatically leads to the PPR being failed
WEAK (W) The evidence collected suggests that this competency is below the expected standard at this stage in training.
APPROPRIATE for stage of training (P) The evidence collected suggests that the competency is of an acceptable/appropriate standard for the stage in training, but does not excel in any way.
ADVANCED for stage of training (V) There is evidence that good skills in the competency exist, which are above what is expected for a piece of work submitted at this stage of training.
EXCEPTIONAL (E) Strong evidence has been collected that the trainee has developed this competence to a degree well beyond what would be expected at this stage of training. Use this grade only for outstanding or highly exceptional work.

The competencies being rated in the PPR are based on research exploring the competencies required for training (Phillips, Hatton & Gray, 2001). They are not the BPS competencies. Appendix I outlines how the PPR competencies map onto the BPS competencies and also gives a definition for each competency.

Choosing material for your PPR

It is important to choose a piece of work which demonstrates your development as a practitioner and allows you to provide evidence of the competencies being assessed. The piece of work chosen can take many different forms, but could include a clinical case, an aspect of a case, indirect work, consultation work, group work or any other piece of clinical/placement based work you have undertaken. The piece of work you choose should demonstrate your ability to reflect on the work undertaken; present a rationale for the work which links theory and practice; consider professional, clinical and ethical issues. It should also be a vehicle for you to provide evidence of your competencies for your examiners.

Examiners will be looking for evidence of presentation skills, ability to manage volume of information, reflections, effective communication skills, understanding of professional/ethical issues, ability to apply knowledge and skills and resilience.

A good or complete outcome from a piece of clinical work is not necessarily required as part of the PPR process. Often key learning points can arise from pieces of work where there have been challenges which might not have reached resolution prior to the end of your placement. How you demonstrate your learning and competency development is what the examiners are interested in.

In summary, key factors to consider when choosing material for your PPR are:

  • whether the piece of work will allow you to provide evidence of all the competencies
  • whether you can clearly demonstrate your learning and development
  • it is OK to consider drawing on one or two key aspects of a more complex piece of work, but let your examiners know this is what you are doing and why
  • you have been able to gain consent to use the piece of work for your PPR

Clinical tutors will discuss with you at your mid-placement meeting the work you are considering using for the PPR. You will also have an opportunity within each teaching block to discuss the piece of work you are intending to use for the PPR with a clinical tutor and your peers. Feedback will be given as to the suitability of the material you are intending to use.

If you are unsure about the suitability of the material you have chosen, please contact your clinical tutor as soon as possible to discuss it further.

Please ensure that any client/service related material you use as part of the PPR process is made anonymous in the write up to protect client confidentiality.

Consent

Please ensure that you have gained appropriate consent to use any confidential information and as a minimum you have undertaken the following:

  • Shared the information from the PPR client information sheet with the intended individual(s) you would like to seek consent from
  • Adapted the method of giving the information to match the ability level of the person/people seeking consent from to ensure that any consent given is fully informed
  • Approached a suitable alternative person if the individual does not have capacity to consent i.e. a main carer (family member or keyworker) or an advocate who could act in their best interest
  • Your supervisor is fully aware of the steps you are taking to gain consent and your progress in achieving this
  • You have recorded the whole process undertaken in the individual’s clinical notes or in process notes if undertaking consultation or service related developments

Some services/supervisors have developed forms to be completed for client notes. Please complete them in line with the processes outlined above.

If a significant proportion of your write up is likely to cover and report on work with staff and it is possible they could recognise themselves in your write up (e.g. series of supervision/consultations) you will need to seek the consent of the individual staff members. As above please discuss with your supervisor and document carefully the steps you have taken in the most appropriate place (e.g. process notes/supervision records).

If you wish to present a piece of work based on a series of consultations and or supervision sessions with another professional which requires you to outline information gained about a client through this process, it is important that client consent is gained even though you have had no direct contact with them. It is important that you ask the professional concerned to approach the client on your behalf. Below are some suggestions about wording/considerations to support the professional to do this:

  • That as part of their work and to ensure the quality of their work they have discussed the clients’ case with a psychologist to gain a psychological perspective.
  • The psychologist is in training and wants to use the content of the discussions between me (the professional) and the psychologist as part of a piece of work they have to submit as part of their training.
  • The focus will be on how the trainee is developing their skills in terms of how they have been helping/supporting me, but they will also need to give some background details about the discussions I have had with them about the work we have done together.
  • The psychologist has asked me to ask you if this is OK. They will make sure that any details they give are anonymous.
  • They have given me an information sheet to give/go through with you so you are able to make an informed decision about whether this is OK or not.
  • The client can choose to say no – which will not affect their treatment in any way.

An information sheet is available for clients to help them make an informed choice about whether or not to consent to their material being used as part of the PPR process. This information sheet is appended to this document at the bottom of the page.

Please remember to give an indication that consent has been obtained and any steps taken to facilitate the process in the introduction to your Initial Report. It would be appropriate to append any adapted materials to the Initial Report to demonstrate part of the process you undertook to gain consent.

Initial report

Maximum word limit 1500 words (excluding references and appendices). Please note that the word limit is an upper word limit for this part of the PPR. Pieces of work with fewer words are acceptable (but no lower than 1000 words). Unused word count cannot be transferred to the main report.

The initial report is submitted at the end of each placement. You will need to ask your supervisor to complete a supervisor declaration form and return it to us via email (downloadable from the bottom of the page).

The initial report is designed to be as close to a written communication you have undertaken in the programme of your work as possible e.g. a final letter to a family/individual client, report of the outcome of a group, report of a period of staff consultation to the commissioner of the work etc. It can include additional material such as illustrations/pictures if this is appropriate to the communication and is suitably anonymised is required.

The initial report is submitted at the end of each placement and stored by the office. It cannot be altered between first hand-in and submission of full report. However, reflections on the initial report (e.g. omissions, ideas subsequent to doing the initial report or reflections on the style/structure for example indicated by service you are in) that may have come out of the presentation and discussion can be added to the main report. This is intended to be helpful to help you develop a sense of your own report writing style.

Examiners will read and use your initial report to orientate themselves to your work prior to your presentation. Evidence from the initial report will be collected at the same time as your main report. The key area of competence examiners will be assessing when they read your initial report is your ability to adapt your writing style to the intended audience (Written communication competency). They will also collect evidence of other competencies if present in your initial report.

The initial report can take various formats to reflect the piece of work you are reporting on. It must always be introduced by a short appropriately anonymised statement (written in APA style) to orientate the examiner to:

  1. The service you are working in
  2. How the work came about
  3. The audience the content of your initial report is aimed at i.e. a letter to family/referrer/report of a group etc
  4. What the content of the initial report is i.e. report, initial assessment letter, therapeutic letter at stage x, report of consultation, report of service development initiative
  5. How consent was obtained to write up the piece of work (with any anonymous information appended if appropriate e.g. consent form, letter/e-mail from relevant individual). Please see section on consent

The remainder of the initial report should be written in the style you used on placement.

Please add in additional context where appropriate within the main body of the initial report to facilitate the examiners understanding. It is important that enough context is given to allow the initial report to make sense on its own i.e. a person with no prior knowledge of the piece of work is able to understand what kind of service the material is from, who the document is aimed at and what the issues were and how they were addressed. However, please be aware that the initial report is designed to capture a certain point in your work and is not meant to cover the entirety of the work undertaken. The additional context added is to facilitate understanding of the time point you are capturing.

Below are some examples of introductions to initial reports:

I was based in child & family psychology service in an urban area. A referral from paediatrician X was received requesting advice and input for the family around anxieties attending school. Below is an extended letter written to the family following my input with them. Consent was gained through discussion with parents and as the client was considered too young to give fully informed consent.

My placement was in a behavioural intervention team in a learning disability service. A referral was made by a local voluntary provider team leader Y for input around behavioural management issues with client Z. Following consultation with my supervisor and the team leader it was agreed that the main focus of my intervention would be with the staff team. Below is an account of the work carried out with the staff team written for the staff team to access. I consulted the staff team at a training event for their consent to use this piece of work for my PPR. I distributed the information sheet to them all as part of the process. The team consented to my using the material for the PPR. The client was unable to give their consent due to a lack of capacity, I consulted with their family advocate to seek consent to use the client’s material in my PPR. The family advocate consented to my using their family member’s material for my PPR.

I was based in a tier three Community Adolescent and Children’s Mental Health (CAHMS) service. A review of referrals by the CAMHS team indicated the need for running a group for adolescents with autistic spectrum disorder, aimed at improving social functioning. This was conducted by the trainee, together with a qualified clinical psychologist and an advisory teacher. Below is a short account of the content of the group sessions and client outcomes, along with some of the process issues highlighted within the group. Consent from the group and my co-facilitators was sought through discussion and distribution of the PPR information sheet. All consented to my use of the material from the group.

The Older Adult psychology service my placement was in provides regular consultation sessions to the staff working on [name] inpatient ward to discuss any clients they have concerns about. One of my tasks on placement was to lead these consultations sessions. The following report provides a summary description for the service manager on how I have conducted the consultations over the course of the placement, in what ways they have been helpful, and how they should proceed in the future, together with some relevant examples. Consent to use the information gained through the consultation sessions was gained through discussion with individuals attending the sessions and their seeking consent from their clients.

My placement was in an Adult Community Mental Health Team (CMHT) in a regional town. I was asked to run an anger management group for six clients during my placement. The following document was the summary of the group work which was sent back to the referrer of one of the clients once the group had finished. Consent to use the group material for my PPR was discussed with the group in the initial group session and revisited at the final session where I gained consent from the group.

Presentation & Discussion

The presentation is 15 minutes. For this reason it would be good to plan and develop a clear structure for your presentation. It may be that you choose to present one aspect of your work which demonstrates all of the above e.g. an issue/dilemma your work presented you with, or an overview of the piece of work. Areas to consider when developing your presentation include:

  • Orientating your examiners to the piece of work e.g. very brief intro/background/service context (please bear in mind examiners will have access to your initial report just prior to your presentation.)
  • Outlining what you intend to address and/or outline your rationale for focusing on particular aspects of the work (important if you are choosing to focus on a part of case rather than all)
  • Key points from the work e. how you approached the piece of work/assessment material / formulation/synopsis of work/ outcomes
  • Key learning points for you & your personal reflections on your own development
  • Professional/ethical issues
  • Critical reflections of the work
  • Theory-Practice links

PowerPoint or other presentation aids are encouraged. Photographs or video material of clients are not encouraged even if identifying features are masked. Facilities for PowerPoint presentations will be available at the PPR presentation day. Please ensure you have your presentations on a memory stick and have also e-mailed them to yourself via your Lancaster University e-mail account for the presentation day. If you require any alternative presentation aids (e.g. OHP projector, flipchart, bluetac, pens etc) please inform the office two weeks before the presentation day. If you ask the office after this they cannot guarantee they will be able to provide the aid requested. Therapeutic material/props (e.g. puppets/pictures) can be used if they support and enhance presentation. Please do not use/bring if they are just for the examiners to look at following the presentation.

Please be clear in your presentation when you are using words which are your clients words and when you are using your own words to prevent confusion. Please ensure that you anonymise all client material to preserve confidentiality. Please make it clear you have done this in your presentation and that you are using pseudonyms.

Where you have chosen not to include a formulation, please be prepared to discuss why you haven’t included one (e.g. not applicable to approach used i.e. SFBT).

The presentation is 15 minutes. You will be given a one minute warning and asked to stop at 15 minutes. It is advisable to practice your presentations so that they do not over-run.

Following the presentation there will be 10 minutes of discussion with you about your piece of work led by the examiners.

You will then be asked to leave the room while the examiners discuss your work and agree feedback points (approximately 10 minutes). Following this you will be invited back into the room to receive brief feedback and be given your feedback points to address in your main report. The feedback points given will be based on your presentation. They consist of three strengths and three areas the examiners would like you to address in the context of your main report. Please ask for clarification at the time the points are given if you are unsure of anything concerning them.

Examples of possible feedback points:

  • Please expand on the issue you raised concerning boundaries. Please discuss in relation to the impact on the work (both professional and personal), your reflections and policy/best practice guidance.
  • We would like more evidence of your ability to adapt your work to best meet the needs/ability level of the client. Please also consider and discuss the implications of this issue in relation to working with his population.
  • Please describe, discuss and comment on how the experience you described in your presentation in relation to the therapeutic alliance has impacted on your development as a clinician. What have you learnt from it?
  • Please clarify your understanding of and application of XX theory to your piece of work. Please critique the approach you took and reflect on at least one other approach which you could have applied.

The feedback points will be copy typed and be made available to you as soon as possible (we aim to send them out by e-mail on the same day as the presentations).

The presentation will be video-recorded. The recordings are made available to examiners to help them decide what grades to award. Trainees will have access to the presentation, discussion with examiners and feedback recording as soon as possible following the presentation day. You will be asked to sign a disclaimer stating that you will not use the recording for anything other than your own learning (e.g. not post on YouTube).

Be aware that presentation skills is one of the competencies being examined and that the examiners are collecting evidence about your presentation skills.

Main report

The main report can be up to 5500 words long (excluding references and appendices). Please note the word limit quoted is an upper word limit, shorter reports are acceptable. The carrying over of word count not used in the initial report is not allowed. The main report style and format should conform to current APA guidance. Please write the main report in the first person.

The structure for the main report is deliberately fluid to allow:

  • for variation in pieces of work
  • for inclusion of material pertaining to the examiner feedback
  • for one aspect of work within a complex case to be reported on (rather than all)
  • your examiners insight into your ability to structure a piece of work (written communication competency)

The main report forms a significant part of the PPR process. It is important to ensure that you have provided evidence of your development/ability in relation to the competencies in the main report. In order to operationalise this, below is an outline of the key areas to cover in your main report divided into two main areas.

When the main report is sent out to your examiners, they are also sent the initial report and asked to read it again before they read the main report. You might want to consider this and the information your examiners have had access to in your presentation when writing your introductory paragraph to the main report.

The balance of how many words you allow per area/point will depend on the piece of work you are reporting on and the feedback points from the Presentation and Discussion. It is expected that areas highlighted in the feedback points will potentially carry more words, but will not form the sole foci of the main report. Depending on the feedback points you may wish to weave the points into the main narrative or address them in separate sections.

Examples of how trainees have previously structured their main reports are below:

  • A traditional case report format i.e. background information, hypotheses, assessment, formulation, intervention and outcome.
  • A ‘step by step’ approach documenting the journey through the piece of work and influences on decision making and their learning at different points
  • A structure explicitly guided by the competencies (although be careful that this doesn’t lead to a disjointed report)
  • Or a mixture!

Outlined below are areas you may wish to include/consider in order to provide evidence of the competencies in your report (please note this is not meant to be an exhaustive list):

  • Key learning points
  • Reflections on the processes of the work undertaken and how this is helping you to prepare to be a fully qualified clinician e.g. nature of the client group, the supervisory process, the nature of the work etc.
  • Any ethical/professional/clinical/diversity issues in the work & what you have learnt from them.
  • Critical analysis/evaluation of the literature & where/how this work sits within the literature/policy context (local, regional & national). To include a formulation/ synthesis of psychological understanding (with diagram where appropriate).
  • Critical evaluation of outcome including critical reflections on the approach taken to measure change and critique of the relevant literature

Preparation for the PPR

Be mindful of all pieces of work you undertake on placement as they could be potential material for the PPR. Keep a reflective diary of the work you undertake – this will help you with the PPR process, particularly when you are trying to remember key decision making or shift points.

Gather information, literature and policies as you go along – again this will help stagger your prep for the PPR and help prevent being an additional stressor at the time of the PPR presentations.

Please be prepared to have materials available which support the PPR process before you leave your placements. This is in case you may need to append extra information to your main report (e.g. outcome of neuro assessment). Please be aware that you need permission from the author of any letters/reports/documents to use as part of the examination process. Please ensure that your client has given their consent for confidential material to be used. Please anonoymise all information to be stored and be mindful of how and where you store this information (i.e. if stored electronically that access is password protected. Hard copies of information are held in a secure place e.g. in a locked filing cabinet).

PPR organisational processes

Prior to the PPR presentation day you will be sent a list of examiners together with a form asking you to declare if any of the examiners are known to you in any capacity. We will not be asking you to declare in what capacity they are known to you to preserve confidentiality (e.g. personal tutor). We do not need to know about anyone who you know very casually or have met only once or twice. We only need to know about individuals where the examination process would be compromised by their prior knowledge of you. The examiners will also be sent a trainee list and asked to declare if any trainees are known to them. Again we will not be asking for details about in what capacity trainees are known to them. This is to prevent us inadvertently allocating a trainee to an examiner where they are known to each other. It is important for this information to be returned as quickly as possible to allow the slot allocation to take place.

Slots for the PPR day will be randomly assigned by the office taking into account the information received about individuals who are known to each other.

Trainees will be notified of their allocated time slot at least two weeks in advance of the day. Please note this is the time slot only not which stream (e.g. child/adult).

Please try to arrive 30 minutes before your allocated slot on the day. Information detailing which stream you have been allocated to is available 30minutes before your slot. (i.e. child or adult, OA/Health/Neuro or LD).

Programme staff will act as chair people for the PPR process. Clinical tutors also act as reserve examiners. In the event that a clinical tutor will need to be an examiner, they will not examine trainees they are responsible for either in a clinical tutor position or research tutor position.

Draft reading

Draft reading is not offered for the initial reports by the programme team. As this piece of work is expected to be very similar to work undertaken on placement, please approach your supervisors to draft read the initial report.

Draft reading will be offered by the programme team for the main report submitted for PPR1. Draft reading for the PPR2 will not be offered unless there are identified additional support needs.

Absenteeism for PPR day

If you are absent on the day of the presentation because of illness you will be asked to provide a medical note from your GP to this effect in accordance with University guidelines for absenteeism for examinations Please report your ill health in the usual manner. If you are aware in advance that you will not be able to attend the presentation day due to extenuating circumstances, please advise the Chair of the Exam Board as soon as possible. Similarly if you are delayed on the day of the presentation for whatever reason, please inform the office as soon as possible. Individual circumstances will be considered by the Chair of the Exam Board and PPR co-ordinator in relation to rescheduling the presentation process.

Identifiers in the PPR

Trainees are required to make anonymous all identifying information relating to the client/service in their PPR. If identifiers are found in submitted work, the trainee will be asked to resubmit the piece of work with the identifier removed. If the identifier is found in the Initial Report, the trainee will be asked to resubmit the initial report with their main report. If the identifier is found in the main report, the trainee will be asked to resubmit the main report as soon as possible.

An identifier is classed as anything which could ultimately compromise the identity of the individual(s)/service reported on in the piece of work. This could include the inadvertent use of individual’s real name, name/location of service based in/visited, address (part or whole) of individual/service, name of supervisor, name of NHS trust.

Examiners are asked to bring the existence of identifiers to the attention of the PPR Coordinator/chair of the Exam Board as they need to be noted together with action taken under the Exam Board business, Examiners are asked to consider the significance of the identifier and record it either under Standard Setting (minor use of identifier) or Professional Behaviour (significant use of identifier).

Failure of the PPR

If an Unacceptable (U) grade is given for any competency rating, then the PPR is automatically failed. If a U grade is awarded for any competency other than the Presentation Competency, the exam board will make a recommendation based on feedback from examiners about how to proceed with resubmission.

If a trainee presents extremely poorly on the presentation day (e.g. because of anxiety) to the extent that the examiners would consider awarding a U rating for the Presentation Competency, the trainee will be informed of this immediately and will be offered an opportunity to present again (where possible on the same day). If following this second attempt the examiners still feel a U rating is justified, then a fail for the PPR is recorded and the PPR assessment would need to be retaken at a different time. This matter would then be referred to the Exam Board for a decision on how to proceed.

If examiners are concerned about the content of the presentation given (i.e. trainee describes something which could be deemed as professional misconduct), they are asked to seek advice from the PPR Co-ordinator/Chair of the Exam Board at the time of the presentation. Outcome options following consultation with the Chair of the Exam Board are the resumption of the original presentation process, the presentation of the PPR material from the alternative placement and/or referral to the Exam Board about how to proceed. If it is decided that the trainee needs to present their alternative PPR material, this will be scheduled in as soon as is practically possible with a different examiner pair. Or, if the concern is deemed sufficient to require action by the employer, the PPR assessment process will be suspended whilst advice is sought from the Clinical Director/employing body as to how to proceed.

Study time

The PPR for all trainees will take place in a two week study block. Trainees are strongly encouraged to not take leave during allocated PPR study time.

PPR results

Trainees will receive a letter informing them of the outcome of their PPR from the exam board following the board meeting in the January following the PPR process. Trainees will also receive examiner feedback on the individual competencies.

References

Phillips, A., Hatton, C., Gray, I., Baldwin, S., Burrell-Hodgson, G., Cox, M., Hoy, J., McCormick, R., Rockliffe, C. and Wilson, J. (2000). Core competencies in clinical psychology: A view from trainees. Clinical Psychology ,1, 27-32.

Phillips, A., Hatton, C. & Gray, I. (2001). Which selection methods do clinical psychology courses use? Clinical Psychology, 8, 19-24.

Phillips, A., Hatton, C. & Gray, I. (2004). Factors predicting the short-listing and selection of trainee clinical psychologists. Clinical Psychology and Psychotherapy, 11, 111-125.

Outline of PPR competencies

PPR Competencies BPS Competencies maps onto
Presentation skills
considers verbal and non verbal communication plus associated planning and performance skills in presenting
communication & teaching
Written communication
considers style in relation to appropriateness for intended audience, coherence, structure and flow.
communication & teaching
Knowledge and skills
focuses on the demonstration of knowledge i.e. that the trainee has the appropriate information and understanding. In turn they are able to apply the knowledge in the form of clinical skill and techniques
assessment / formulation / intervention / evaluation / communication & teaching / service delivery
Analysis and critical thinking
considers creativity in transferring theory and adapting its application to practice across context(s) together with a focus on problem solving and the ability to synthesise information from multiple sources
assessment / formulation / intervention / evaluation / service delivery / personal & professional development
Reflection and integration
focuses on evidence of a reflective stance taken in relation to the work and the process of integrating learning from the reflective process.
personal & professional development / transferable skills
Professional behaviour
focuses on evidence of professional behaviour during the examination process (including the presentation) and in the work described.
personal & professional development
Resilience
considers the ability to face challenges confidently and persist appropriately despite setbacks and or complexity.
personal & professional development / transferable skills
Standard setting
focuses on the setting of appropriately high standards in the quality of one’s work and behaviour.
personal & professional development / transferable skills

Other documents

The PPR information for clients sheet attached below gives clients background on the PPR and the way in which information is used. Also attached is the PPR supervisor declaration form which should be signed by supervisors to confirm that the work presented for a Placement Presentation and Report is an accurate and true reflection of the clinical work undertaken whilst on placement.

PPR information for clients
PPR supervisor declaration form

Placements Overview

Full time route

Practice placements are an integral part of the whole programme of training in clinical psychology at Lancaster. Practice placement work constitutes over 50% of the time that a trainee spends on the programme. This section addresses the management, governance and assessment of this significant element of the programme.

The programme’s Clinical Director manages and oversees the entire placement planning and support process. The day to day activity involved in accessing, arranging supporting and reviewing practice placements is devolved to a team of clinical tutors and administrative support. Strategic development of these processes is led by the Placement Development and Implementation Group (PlaDIG) led by the senior clinical tutor (placements).

Placement range of experience

The placement programme is designed to offer trainees practice experience of the range of clinical psychologist activities. This can range from therapeutic work with individuals, families and groups across the age range and across a diverse range of contexts, working practices and presenting difficulties to consultation, leadership and service development. The main function of achieving this diversity is to afford the trainees appropriate opportunities to nurture and develop their skills and competencies to the level required by the Standards of Proficiency (SoPs) set out by the HCPC for Practitioner Psychologists (including those specific to the practice of clinical psychology) and to be confident in achieving these standards by the completion of their training. A trainee will typically have clinical experience   with populations across the lifespan, as well as in contexts where cognitive/neuro diversity or challenge is present (for example working with people who have a learning disability and/or people with cognitive change/deterioration).. Placements are selected based on opportunities for competency development and that are appropriate for an individual trainee’s training journey. We also look to develop skills which relate to the broader role of a clinical psychologist in a modern NHS climate (eg leadership, service development) or in ‘non-clinical’ settings, such as in community based or third sector work contexts. The focus is on trainees accessing the appropriate learning opportunities to build their competence to that of a fully trained clinical psychologist over the whole length of the programme; paths to this end may differ, and being flexible in this way will always be designed around achieving this end.

Time spent on placement

Pre-thesis hand in

The general plan is for trainees to be available for placement work for three days each week.

There may be occasional extra teaching days and meetings, but these should be rare and it is anticipated that trainees use some of their private study/research time, if necessary, for these extra commitments. Private study is generally one day each week, so there is room for negotiation between supervisors, trainees, and the programme staff about allocation of time for commitments that fall outside of placement activity.

Each week there is also one day set aside for teaching. Once on placement the general pattern is teaching on a Wednesday in year one, Tuesday in year two and Monday’s in year three.

Post-thesis hand in

From the end of May in their third year, trainees are available for placement work for four days each week until the end of the programme. Where trainees are late in their thesis submission, they should still attend placement for the extra placement days unless other arrangements have been specifically made and approved by the directors. This fourth day of placement activity, can under some circumstances (and with careful planning with trainees, clinical tutors and supervisors) be used to undertake a separate placement activity to the main placement.

Placement Schedule over Three Years (2021 cohort onwards)

Scheduling involves three clinical practice  placements (Jan-Sept in years 1, 2 & Jan-Aug in year 3) with a project focused block at the start of year 2 and a shorter community focused placement at the start of year 3. Placement preparation activities will take place in the extended induction block at the start of year 1. The end of the third longer placement is on 31st August in line with the end of the contract of employment. A broad outline of placement activity is set out below:

Placement Schedule Clinical Placement (3 days each week)
Year 1
Sept, Oct, Nov, Dec Induction Programme – including NHS induction/shadowing days and community North West reflection project days
Jan-Sept Direct skills placements
Year 2
Oct-Dec Project block (including completion of the associated assessment of performance)
Jan-Sept Indirect skills placements
Year 3
Oct- Dec Community focus placement
Jan-Aug Leadership and Influencing placement

Placements are to be organised by competency rather than speciality in order to scaffold the trainee’s learning and orientate clinical supervisors to what is expected to be focused on during the placement. The taught curriculum will broadly match the focus of each placement in order to facilitate learning and application. Placement allocation is made in conjunction with the North West DClinPsy training programmes based in Liverpool and Manchester.

Should trainees intercalate (e.g. through illness or maternity leave), this may necessitate a variation in this schedule; in this case trainees’ attendance at teaching sessions will be negotiated so that they will have appropriate access to teaching content to support them on their placements.

Placement Schedule over Three Years (2020 cohort and earlier)

Placements on the Lancaster University DClinPsy fall into a precise pattern across the three years. For the first two years, two placements each year notionally go between the beginning of October and the end of March, then beginning of April and the end of September. In the third year the placement start is negotiable according to when the trainees would like to use their thesis study allocation. The end of the fifth/specialist placement is on 31st August in line with the end of the contract of employment. A broad outline of placement activity is set out below: :

Placement Schedule Clinical Placement (3 days each week)
Year 1
September (No Placement – Induction Programme)
October – March Children and Families
April – September Adult Mental Health
Year 2
October – March Older Adults, Physical Health or Neuropsychology
April – September People with Learning Disabilities
Year 3
October – August Fifth placement activity to include thesis study allocation to be taken in negotiation between trainee and fifth placement supervisor.

This pattern allows the three doctoral clinical psychology programmes across the northwest to share and integrate their placement arrangements, selecting placements from the whole pool of placements available within the northwest. This consistent order of placements also enables the programme to match the contents of the taught curriculum that runs alongside the placements to the broad needs of each placement. Should trainees intercalate (e.g. through illness or maternity leave), this may necessitate a variation in this schedule; in this case trainees’ attendance at teaching sessions will be negotiated so that they will have appropriate access to teaching content to support them on their placements.

Placement support and monitoring

Once a placement is allocated, the clinical tutor will make contact with the supervisor and plan the support for the placement. Clinical tutors are responsible not only for supporting the trainee on placement and arranging for any trainee specific needs to be met, but also for liaising between the programme and the supervisor and supporting the supervisor in any of their placement related needs, including planning placement reviews (a minimum of two per nine month placements) and arranging end of placement reviews with supervisors. In addition to quality assurance visits, pre-placement or start of placement meetings might be offered if the clinical tutor and supervisor agree they would be useful to facilitate preparation of the placement for the trainee (for example, for a trainee with a support plan or other specific support needs).

Trainees can expect to have 90mins of formal clinical supervision per week on their first placement and 60mins per subsequent placement which is pro rata for part time trainees as 60mins of formal supervision per week on first placement and 40mins per subsequent placement.

Start of the Placement

The placement contract should be drawn up between the trainee and the supervisor. This should be sent to the Programme Assistant (Placements) and the trainee’s clinical tutor by the end of the first two full weeks of the placement. The establishment of the placement contract is the first priority at the start of any placement. The trainee’s clinical tutor will review the contract for appropriateness. Supervisors and trainees are also strongly encouraged to form a psychological contract regarding the supervision process at the beginning of the placement. In addition, an appropriate induction to each placement must be carried out, including identifying any risk or safety issues that are specific to the placement and service specific procedures that may be relevant to the trainee’s work on the placement. These matters will be subject to individual service policy. However, the placement contract does specifically ask that trainees be made aware of the practice placement provider’s extant Equality and Diversity Policy, including how these apply to the trainee and how they will be implemented and monitored (to ensure compliance with the HCPC SET 5.5).

Placement review processes

A key role of the Clinical Tutor is to support the placement process for both trainee and supervisor.  A first contact made is by the trainee’s clinical tutor to the clinical supervisor(s) to arrange the Quality Assurance placement review prior to the trainee starting on placement. The clinical tutor is responsible for setting up subsequent Placement Review meetings which both trainee and clinical supervisor(s) attend. There is a minimum of two reviews per clinical placement (i.e. Direct, Indirect and Influencing and Leadership placements). The clinical tutor is available to be contacted by either supervisor or trainee to support any issues arising from the placement. Further review meetings will be arranged as needed.

When placement reviews are arranged by the clinical tutor, supervisors will be asked to ensure that they have completed the Supervisor Assessment of Trainee (SAT) form in draft form, to be sent to the clinical tutor one week in advance of the arranged review date. This draft can then be used by supervisors when completing the SAT form at the end of the placement, adding any elements that had been evidenced in the remaining time on the placement.

Similarly, trainees would be asked to send tutors their draft Placement Audit & Log (PALOG), one week in advance of the review. During the meeting itself, these draft documents would inform the respective conversations, as set out in the schedule below.

Reviews will take place either at the placement location or via MS Teams (or other video conferencing facility). Broadly following procedures outlined in the BPS Guidelines on Clinical Supervision, the placement review will incorporate the following structure: –

  • Tutor meets trainee (focus on  the PALOG)
  • Tutor meets supervisor (focus on the SAT & PALOG)
  • 3-way meeting between tutor, trainee and supervisor, in order to collectively review the trainee’s progress, provide feedback to the trainee and the supervisor, and agree appropriate goals for the remainder of the placement

The SAT, PALOG do not cover everything that might be discussed but it is the tutor’s role to check that all angles and issues have been addressed – so even if the above documents don’t address, for example, finding an appropriate piece of clinical work to use for an assignment, the tutor will be checking these issues out.

Although the time allocated to meeting with the trainee and supervisor separately and collectively may vary depending upon individual need, it is advisable for supervisors to allow two hours for the visit.

After the placement review, the tutor will e-mail the supervisor and trainee with a short summary of the meeting (within, ideally, two weeks of the visit). The e-mail will set out key points arising from and agreed during the review. This e-mail will also be sent to the Placement Administrator, along with the draft documents (already submitted) as attachments. This will form the record of the placement review, and will be stored by programme.

This allows any concerns to be noted and any action plans to address these concerns to be recorded. For example, an opportunity for the achievement of a particular type of learning objective may have been lost on placement, and this record would acknowledge that this learning might need to be replaced by a different, more achievable objective in the placement circumstances.

End of Placement

Whilst the clinical tutor provides the support throughout the placement, further placement reviews with supervisor and/ or trainee are only scheduled should a query or difficulty arise. At the end of placement, the clinical tutor contacts the supervisor to confirm that the trainee’s progress on placement has continued as planned, and to respond to any difficulties or queries they have, both generally and specifically in completing the Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee or SAT form and to provide an opportunity for supervisors to review their own supervisory practice.  A trainee Individual Training Plan (ITP) meeting is held between the trainee and the tutor pair around the time of the end of the placement to review progress.

BPS Guidelines on Clinical Supervision

Part time route

Practice placements are an integral part of the whole programme of training in clinical psychology at Lancaster. Practice placement work constitutes over 50% of the time that a trainee has during their time on the programme. This document addresses the management, governance and assessment of this significant element of the programme.

The programme’s Clinical Director manages and oversees the entire placement planning and support process. The day to day activity involved in accessing, arranging supporting and reviewing practice placements is devolved to a team of clinical tutors and administrative support. Strategic development of these processes is led by the Placement Development and Implementation Group (PlaDIG) led by the senior clinical tutor (placements).

Placement range of experience

The placement programme is designed to offer trainees practice experience of the range of clinical psychologist activities. This can range from therapeutic work with individuals, families and groups across the age range and across a diverse range of contexts, working practices and presenting difficulties to consultation, leadership and service development. The main function of achieving this diversity is to afford the trainees appropriate opportunities to nurture and develop their skills and competencies to the level required by the Standards of Proficiency (SoPs) set out by the HCPC for Practitioner Psychologists (including those specific to the practice of clinical psychology) and to be confident in achieving these standards by the completion of their training. A trainee will typically have clinical experience with populations across the lifespan as well as in contexts where cognitive/neuro diversity or challenge is present (for example working with people who have a learning disability and/or people with cognitive change/deterioation). Placements are selected based on opportunities for competency development and that are appropriate for an individual trainee’s training journey. We also look to develop skills which relate to the broader role of a clinical psychologist in a modern NHS climate (eg leadership, service development) or in ‘non-clinical’ settings, such as in community based or third sector work contexts. The focus is on trainees accessing the appropriate learning opportunities to build their competence to that of a fully trained clinical psychologist over the whole training period; paths to this end may differ, and being flexible in this way will always be designed around achieving this end.

Time spent on placement

Pre-thesis hand in

The general plan is for trainees to be available for placement work for two days each week.

There may be occasional extra teaching days and meetings, but these should be rare and it is anticipated that trainees use some of their private study/research time, if necessary, for these extra commitments. Private study allocation will be half a day each week, so there is room for negotiation between supervisors, trainees, and the programme staff about allocation of time for commitments that fall outside of placement activity.

Each week there is also one day set aside for teaching. Once on placement the general pattern for the 2021 and subsequent intakes is that teaching alongside the direct skills placement is on a Wednesday, for the indirect skills placement and project block on a Tuesday, and Mondays for the community focus placement and influencing and leadership placements. Part time trainees will also be expected to join research teaching at the start of their year 2 on a Thursday. This will take place over 4 weeks with no other teaching scheduled at this time. For trainees in the 2020 cohort and below, teaching in year 1 is on Wednesday, year 2 on Tuesday, Year 3 on a Tuesday, Year 4 on a Monday. Part time trainees will also have breaks in their teaching scheduling during which time study time is scheduled and will be required to join the cohort below for some of the scheduled teaching.

Post-thesis hand in

Following submission of their theses (usually from July of the final year) trainees continue to be available for placement work for two days each week until mid August when teaching ends. Following this trainees attend placement for three days each week until the end of the course. This third day of placement activity, from mid August onwards, can under some circumstances (and with careful planning with trainees, clinical tutors and supervisors) be used to undertake a separate placement activity to the main placement.

Placement Schedule (2021 cohort onward)

Placements on the Lancaster University Part Time DClinPsy fall into the following pattern across the 4 years and 4 months. The order of placement activity is the same as for full time peers (i.e. Direct Skills placement, Project block, Indirect skills placement, Community focussed placement and Influencing and Leadership placement) but is spread out over a longer period of time. Placement preparation activities will take place in the extended induction block at the start of year 1. A broad outline of placement activity is set out below:

Placement Schedule Clinical Placement (2 days each week)
Year 1
Sept, Oct, Nov, Dec Induction programme including NHS induction /shadowing days and North West Reflection project days
Jan-Feb (Yr 2) Indirect placement
Year 2
Feb- June Project block and associated assessment of performance
June/July Study block
July-Aug (Yr 3) Indirect skills placement
Year 3 Indirect skills placement (contd)
Sept Thesis study
Year 4
Oct, Nov, Dec Community focused placement
Jan-Dec (yr5) Leadership and Influencing placement

Placements are to be organised by competency rather than specialty in order to scaffold the trainee’s learning and orientate clinical supervisors to what is expected to be focused on during the placement. The taught curriculum will broadly match the focus of each placement in order to facilitate learning and application, and will be directly alongside placements for the part time route as much as possible (trainees stay with nominated cohorts for teaching activities to facilitate contact with other trainees and undertake group learning). Placement allocation is made in conjunction with the North West DClinPsy training programmes based in Liverpool and Manchester.

Should trainees intercalate (e.g. through illness or maternity leave), this may necessitate a variation in this schedule; in this case trainees’ attendance at teaching sessions will be negotiated so that they will have appropriate access to teaching content to support them on their placements.

Placement Schedule (2020 cohort and earlier)

Placements on the Lancaster University Part Time DClinPsy fall into a precise pattern across the 4 years and 4 months. For the first 37 months of training, four placements take place; these occur from Oct – June, July – March, April – Nov and Dec – Oct. In the final year the placement starts in Nov and finishes in Dec the following year. The broad nature of the services within which each of these placements is provided is given in the table below:

Placement Schedule Clinical Placement (2 days each week)
September Yr 1 (No Placement – Induction Programme)
October Yr 1 – June Yr 1 Children and Families
July Yr 1 – March Yr 2 Adult Mental Health
April Yr 2 – Nov Yr 3 People with Learning Disabilities
Dec Yr 3 – Oct Yr 4 Older Adults, Physical Health or Neuropsychology
Nov Yr 4 – Dec Yr 5 Final Year/ Fifth Placement (placement activity often 3 days each week from mid August)

This pattern allows the three doctoral clinical psychology programmes across the north west to share and integrate their placement arrangements, selecting placements from the whole pool of placements available within the north west. This consistent order of placements also enables the programme to match the contents of the taught curriculum that runs alongside the placements to the broad needs of each placement. Should trainees intercalate (e.g. through illness or maternity leave), this may necessitate a variation in this schedule; in this case trainees’ attendance at teaching sessions will be negotiated so that they will have appropriate access to teaching content to support them on their placements.

Placement support and monitoring

Once a placement is allocated, the clinical tutor will make contact with the supervisor and plan the support for the placement. Clinical tutors are responsible not only for supporting the trainee on placement and arranging for any trainee specific needs to be met, but also for liaising between the programme and the supervisor and supporting the supervisor in any of their placement related needs, including planning placement reviews (2 per practice placement) and arranging end of placement reviews with supervisors. In addition to quality assurance visits, pre-placement or start of placement visits might be offered if the clinical tutor and supervisor agree they would be useful to facilitate preparation of the placement for the trainee (for example, for a trainee with a support plan or other specific support needs).

Trainees can expect to have 90mins of formal clinical supervision per week on their first placement and 60mins per subsequent placement which is pro rata for part time trainees as 60mins of formal supervision per week on first placement and 40mins per subsequent placement.

Start of the Placement

The placement contract should be drawn up between the trainee and the supervisor. This should be sent to the Programme Assistant (Placements) and the trainee’s clinical tutor by the end of the first three full weeks of the placement. The establishment of the placement contract is the first priority at the start of any placement. The trainee’s clinical tutor will review the contract for appropriateness. Supervisors and trainees are also strongly encouraged to form a psychological contract regarding the supervision process at the beginning of the placement. In addition, an appropriate induction to each placement must be carried out, including identifying any risk or safety issues that are specific to the placement and service specific procedures that may be relevant to the trainee’s work on the placement. These matters will be subject to individual service policy. However, the placement contract does specifically ask that trainees be made aware of the practice placement provider’s extant Equality and Diversity Policy, including how these apply to the trainee and how they will be implemented and monitored (to ensure compliance with the HCPC SET 5.5).

Placement review processes

A key role of the Clinical Tutor is to support the placement process for both trainee and supervisor.  A first contact made is by the trainee’s clinical tutor to the clinical supervisor(s) to arrange the Quality Assurance placement review prior to the trainee starting on placement. The clinical tutor is responsible for setting up subsequent Placement Review meetings which both trainee and clinical supervisor(s) attend. There is a minimum of two reviews per clinical placement (i.e. Direct, Indirect and Influencing and Leadership placements). The clinical tutor is available to be contacted by either supervisor or trainee to support any issues arising from the placement. Further review meetings will be arranged as needed.

When placement reviews are arranged by the clinical tutor, supervisors will be asked to ensure that they have completed the Supervisor Assessment of Trainee (SAT) form in draft form, to be sent to the clinical tutor one week in advance of the arranged review date. This draft can then be used by supervisors when completing the SAT form at the end of the placement, adding any elements that had been evidenced in the remaining time on the placement.

Similarly, trainees would be asked to send tutors their draft Placement Audit & Log (PALOG), one week in advance of the review. During the meeting itself, these draft documents would inform the respective conversations, as set out in the schedule below.

Reviews will take place either at the placement location or via MS Teams (or other video conferencing facility). Broadly following procedures outlined in the BPS Guidelines on Clinical Supervision, the placement review will incorporate the following structure: –

  • Tutor meets trainee (focus on  the PALOG)
  • Tutor meets supervisor (focus on the SAT & PALOG)
  • 3-way meeting between tutor, trainee and supervisor, in order to collectively review the trainee’s progress, provide feedback to the trainee and the supervisor, and agree appropriate goals for the remainder of the placement

The SAT, PALOG do not cover everything that might be discussed but it is the tutor’s role to check that all angles and issues have been addressed – so even if the above documents don’t address, for example, finding an appropriate piece of clinical work to use for an assignment, the tutor will be checking these issues out.

Although the time allocated to meeting with the trainee and supervisor separately and collectively may vary depending upon individual need, it is advisable for supervisors to allow two hours for the visit.

After the placement review, the tutor will e-mail the supervisor and trainee with a short summary of the meeting (within, ideally, two weeks of the visit). The e-mail will set out key points arising from and agreed during the review. , This e-mail will also be sent to the Placement Administrator, along with the draft documents (already submitted) as attachments. This will form the record of the placement review, and will be stored by programme.

This allows any concerns to be noted and any action plans to address these concerns to be recorded. For example, an opportunity for the achievement of a particular type of learning objective may have been lost on placement, and this record would acknowledge that this learning might need to be replaced by a different, more achievable objective in the placement circumstances.

End of Placement

Whilst the clinical tutor provides the support throughout the placement, further placement reviews with supervisor and/ or trainee are only scheduled should a query or difficulty arise. At the end of placement, the clinical tutor contacts the supervisor to confirm that the trainee’s progress on placement has continued as planned, and to respond to any difficulties or queries they have, both generally and specifically in completing the Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee or SAT form and to provide an opportunity for supervisors to review their own supervisory practice.  A trainee Individual Training Plan (ITP) meeting is held between the trainee and the tutor pair around the time of the end of the placement to review progress.

BPS Guidelines on Clinical Supervision

Placements: preparation of trainees

Whilst the quality of available placements needs to be assured, the programme also has a responsibility to assure that the trainees it sends on placement are appropriately prepared and fit to work with the public in the services to which they are being sent. Whilst trainees are carefully supervised, they do offer a clinical service to the public under that supervision. Therefore, the following measures are taken to ensure trainees are safe and ready to practise on placement.

Disclosure and Barring Service

All trainees should have appropriate clearances for the services in which they work. In effect, this means that all need to have clearance from the Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) before the start of the training programme. If any convictions or cautions are identified by the DBS clearance process, then a Fitness to Practise Panel will be convened to address this and determine whether the trainee can begin to train, and if any additional safeguards or conditions are necessary. In addition, trainees will have appropriate occupational health clearance carried out by the employing NHS trust at the start of their employment, to determine that they are capable of carrying out the duties of a clinical psychologist.

Mandatory Training

All trainees will have completed appropriate mandatory training (including, in the case of the first placement, training during their induction period so that they complete the mandatory training required to enable them to engage in autonomous client contact on placement). This is done in conjunction with the employing trust to assure that the preparation of trainees is compliant with NHS Litigation Authority and Care Quality Commission standards for NHS staff engaged in the (supervised) level of work of a trainee clinical psychologist. Completion of this mandatory training is monitored and recorded by the Programme Assistant (Teaching), and an exception report is made to the employing trust (Lancashire and South Cumbria Foundation NHS Trust) on a bi-annual basis (every May and November). In addition, trainees are made familiar with the HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance & Ethics, which form a central and key part of their taught curriculum during their induction to the programme and prior to their first placement (in addition to the standards of conduct recommended by the British Psychological Society).

Induction

Before trainees start their first placement, they undertake a four month induction programme of teaching and learning, within which there is a significant proportion of the curriculum devoted to preparing them for active clinical practice on their first placement

Previous placement failure or previous placement incomplete

Where a previous supervisor’s assessment of trainee (SAT) form recommends a fail, a plan would be put in place to address/ support the trainee in making sure their practice on the planned placement was of an acceptable standard, by making an explicit, specific set of targets for the trainees to demonstrate the necessary standards. This would include having a planned programme of education or support in place to address any trainee support or learning needs identified.

Where a previous placement has not been completed, for example through illness or intercalation, a similar plan or process to address their needs would be put in place. Both of these plans would be formulated by the designated clinical tutor, in liaison with the trainee and the Clinical Director.

Fitness to practise

If it has been deemed appropriate to withdraw a  trainee from a practice placement due to concerns about fitness to practise, then a subsequent placement allocation will not be made until the appropriate level of fitness to practise procedures are complete (although plans for timely allocation, to be made as soon as these issues are resolved, may well be made). Should the fitness to practise process be complete, the outcomes of that process will provide for any necessary plans to be put in place to address and resolve the concerns that gave rise to these procedures, as well as to support the trainee around these issues. More details are available in the Fitness to practise section of this handbook (see links below).

Reasonable adjustments

Plans will also be put in place for trainees where there are any reasonable adjustments that might need to be made by the practice placement providers and educators when providing a placement to a trainee. Guidance will be sought from Occupational Health and student support services regarding the necessary adjustments. This is consistent with the programme’s Inclusivity agenda. This is also in compliance with the Equality Act (2010).

Equality Act (2010)
Fitness to practise

Placement provision

Minimum standards

Placement providers must be capable of providing: –

  • supervised practice consistent with the standards set out in BPS Accreditation through Partnership Handbook Guidance for Clinical Psychology programmes (p.27-30) enabling the trainees to achieve the learning outcomes set out sections 1
  • HCPC & BPS accreditation best practice requirements that supervisors attend supervisor training once every 5 years as a minimum.

Supervision in relation to the innovative placement activity may fall outside of the above specifications, particularly if the focus of the innovative placement is non-clinical work. Quality of supervision in relation to this work will be closely monitored by the tutor team in both the planning and active phases of the work.

North west network

The programme works closely with the other two North West DClinPsy programmes to ensure that enough placements of suitable quality are available.to each programme at any point in the placement provision cycle (i.e. core or specialist). The programme also works closely with practice placement providers, services and special interest groups within the profession, so that the impact of local and national workforce issues can be noted and, if necessary, acted upon to keep the availability of good quality placements high on the agenda of local services and practitioners in the North West. The Placement Development and Implementation Group also strives to maintain links with Practice Education Facilitators (PEF) in the NHS trusts across the region, to identify issues with placement capacity, troubleshoot short term difficulties and work to ensure that Trusts in the region are upholding their training agreements by providing the agreed quantity of placements.

Selection of the final placement is more bespoke, as these placements are negotiated and designed to meet the remaining clinical training needs of each trainee as they approach qualification.

Placement description forms

Potential supervisors are asked to fill in a placement description form. This provides information about the characteristics of the placement and helps distinguish those placements that might meet the specific needs of specific trainees, which informs the placement allocation process.

Quality assurance

All practise placements are subject to a quality assurance check before a trainee starts on placement. This typically takes the form of a meeting between supervisor and a member of the clinical tutor team (usually the clinical tutor of the trainee allocated to the placement) The check includes the following:

  • Suitability of supervisor to provide the placement (i.e. current HCPC registration; supervisor training requirements have been met etc)
  • Suitability of placement setting (i.e. access to facilities, policies; safe working practices/environ etc)
  • Considerations that the placement can meet trainee need in relation to their progression/additional needs/reasonable adjustments

If a placement is deemed not suitable based on the outcome of the quality assurance check – then an alternative will be found for the trainee. Where appropriate, supervisors will be offered support to remedy the issue leading to the placement not having passed the quality assurance check.

This pre-placement contact by a clinical tutor to all new placements also serves as extra support to supervisors new to the programme as the tutor will help orientate new supervisors to the programme.

Review of feedback

The programme team will review any of the records the programme holds about previous placements provided by any potential supervisor and the service in question to identify whether there has been a serious concern raised about the quality of this placement or supervisor before.

In addition, regular liaison takes place between the three North West training programmes so that any previous difficulties can be identified and addressed. Should any problems have been identified that have put into question the appropriateness of a specific placement, the placement providers are consulted and assurance sought that (i) any issues identified have been addressed and (ii) there is a process in place to assure the ongoing quality of the placement. If such assurances are not received, the offer of a placement will not be taken up by the programme.

BPS Accreditation through partnership handbook
Placement quality assurance form
Placement description form

Placement information for supervisors

For any clinical placements, the Programme Office ensures that all supervisors, once the allocation has been made, are sent the key information such as placement dates and trainee contact details in an email within a week of the programme placement allocation meeting. The key information provided to supervisors will include: –

  • the name of the trainee who will be on placement
  • their identified clinical tutor
  • the start and end dates of the placement
  • details of the teaching programme(s) running alongside the placement (including any extra dates for which the trainee will be required away from the placement)
  • the deadline for submission of evaluation forms

In the allocation email there will also be direct links to all the necessary documents for supervisors (e.g. the evaluation forms for completion at the end of the placement). Supervisors are also encouraged to make use of the web based handbook for any queries they have about support, resources and procedures for any elements of training on the programme.

Placement documentation and assessment

Placements are planned so that trainees have the best opportunity to achieve the learning objectives that relate to acquisition of clinical competence, which meet the HCPC’s Standards of Proficiency for Practitioner Psychologists and the standards set out in the BPS Accreditation through Partnership Handbook; Guidance for Clinical Psychology Programme.

Placement Contract

For each practice placement, the document that articulates this plan to link opportunities on placement to the learning objectives and acquisition of competencies is the Placement Contract. It is submitted to the programme via email to the trainee’s clinical tutor and placement admin assistant at the start of the placement (2 weeks for full time trainees, 3 weeks for part time trainees)

The designated clinical tutors are available to provide guidance to supervisors in the use of the contract in setting out and monitoring learning objectives that demonstrate acquisition of clinical competence for each trainee. Supervisors and/or trainees are encouraged to contact the clinical tutor with any questions or queries regarding the contract.

It is the trainee’s responsibility to make their subsequent supervisor aware of their training needs arising from their training thus far. Trainees are asked to share the SAT form from their previous placement with their next placement supervisor. The clinical tutor reviews the placement contract to ensure for example, that trainee needs from previous placements, are incorporated into the contract. General ‘gaps’ in experience (e.g. opportunities to teach, or use psychometric tests, or conduct group work, or work within another therapeutic orientation) are identified for each trainee at the end of each placement to take into the contract planning process of their subsequent placement.

Psychological Contract

In addition to a Placement Contract, which sets out explanations about clinical work and the practicalities of supervision, trainees and supervisors should consider drawing up a psychological contract. Deriving from the field of Organisational Psychology, the term psychological contract usually refers to an implicit contract, or unwritten set of expectations, between an individual and his/her organisation, which determines what each party expects to give and receive from each other. Even when it remains unwritten, the psychological contract is a powerful determiner of behaviour in organisations; breaches of this contract in the work setting can have deleterious effects, such as lowering of trust and job satisfaction. Making this contract explicit through agreeing it should make it easier to address and manage difficulties should they arise.

The psychological contract is equally applicable to the training situation (although not submitted to the programme). When applied to supervision, the key questions related to the psychological contract are:

  • How are supervisor and trainee going to relate to each other?
  • What expectations do each have of the other?
  • What is the role of each?

Placement Audit and Log book (PALOG)

The placement audit and log book (PALOG)  is completed during and  at the end of each practice placement, by the trainee assessing their experience of the quality of that practice placement and capturing a log of placement activity (this information has previously been captured in two separate documents – the Placement Audit Form (PAF) and Log Book which have been combined together). The form includes the following:

  • Amount of formal direct supervision received (for full time trainees at least one hour per week, with that being extended to a minimum of 90 minutes per week for trainees on their first practice placement and for part time trainees at least 40 minutes per week extending to at least one hour for the first practice placement).
  • levels of support, safety, challenge and resources available within the specific supervisory relationship(s).
  • Review of facilities on placement
  • Entries regarding clinical placement activities
  • Review of service provision (including consideration of accessibility and issues of diversity)

These forms are reviewed by a clinical tutor (who is also a member of the Placement Development and Implementation Group) and collated across each cohort. Key information about from this review of documentation is then reported to the Placement Development and Implementation Group (relating, for example, to quality assurance processes, placement access and development). Any issues requiring action (e.g. specific trainee development issues) are taken up by designated clinical tutors, with broader issues monitored by the Placement Development and Implementation Group. In addition, any information gathered about the quality of provision of placements by a supervisor or placement provider is recorded and made available to the next round of placement selection Information regarding trainee progression is reported to the Exam Board.

 Placement Assessment

Practice placement supervisors assess whether a trainee has satisfactorily met the level of competence expected for their stage of training across the required domains of both specific and transferable competence. The assessment is based on the work undertaken on the placement with evidence being entered into the Supervisor Assessment of Trainee (SAT) form. This includes supervisors seeking direct feedback from people seen by the trainees to contribute to the supervisors overall assessment of the trainee via the SAT form (information about this process can be found in the document links below)

Supervisors Assessment of Trainee (SAT)

The SAT form is a report of a trainee’s performance on placement in the development of skills and competencies across all domains of clinical psychology practice.

Supervisors can only assess performance on the available opportunities and activities on the specific placement, which have been framed from the start by the placement contract and recorded in the Placement Audit and Log book (PALOG). The SAT asks supervisors to judge whether, through their supervised practice on the placement, the trainee has demonstrated enough progress across the range of competencies to merit passing the placement (a rating of “satisfactory”), whether they should pass with some recommendation to attend to specific areas requiring development (areas for development/ areas of concern), or whether they should fail the placement (“unsatisfactory”). These ratings are accompanied by qualitative feedback on the nature of their progress. These ratings are given for each of the competencies, as well as an overall rating for performance on the whole placement. During early placements in the programme, it is anticipated that some of the above broad areas will be rated as “areas for development” as a trainee will only acquire a full set of competencies over the whole three years of the programme. However, this also means that a final placement SAT form should have ratings of satisfactory across the whole range of areas. This sensitivity to the developmental nature of training is communicated to all trainees and supervisors.

The current SAT form has been agreed by all three DClinPsy courses in the North West region.

Document submission and Exam Board processes

In terms of document submission , the programme must receive completed copies of the SAT and Placement Audit and Log book (PALOG) in electronic form, emailed from the supervisor’s work email address, by the final day of the placement period. If these documents are not received in compliance with this process (which acts in lieu of a system of supervisors ‘signing’ a form), the Exam Board will not be able to formally award a pass to the trainee for that placement.

Outcome of placement assessments are available to trainees at the end of the Exam Board that meets after the completion of the placement. The SAT form constitutes a formal recommendation to that Exam Board regarding the pass or failure of the placement.

Recommendation of Fail for the placement

Where a fail grade is recommended by a supervisor for a placement, relevant documentation is sent to an External Examiner prior to the Exam Board. The External Examiner is external to the programme and local services. Their role is to give an opinion on the documentation and evidence presented from the position of being a trainer in Clinical Psychology. In some cases the External Examiner may also wish to see other materials (e.g. reports or letters written on placement). At an Exam Board where placement failure has been recommended by the supervisors, at least one external examiner will be in attendance and it is expected to be the one who has previously scrutinised the documentation.

The decision of outcome i.e. for the placement to pass or fail is made by the Exam Board following scrutiny of the documentation and presentation of evidence to the board.

If the Exam Board endorses a fail grade for the practice placement, the practice placement will need to be repeated. The repeated placement will not take the place of another placement. It is possible that the trainee might need to complete the placement or a subsequent placement ‘out of contract’ at their own expense. Trainees must pass all scheduled placements in order to qualify from the programme. If the practice placement is failed at the second attempt, the trainee will not be allowed to progress further on the programme.

The HCPC Standards of Proficiency for practitioner psychologists
BPS Accreditation through partnership handbook
Placement contract
Sample placement contract
Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee (SAT) form – February 2023 onwards
Placement Audit and Log (PALOG)
BPS Committee on Training in Clinical Psychology Accreditation standards
Feedback from people who trainees have been working with – guidance for supervisors and trainees
Providing feedback about trainee clinical psychologists – client information sheet
Providing feedback about the trainee clinical psychologist you are – feedback form

Placement Development and Implementation Group (PlaDIG)

The Placement Development and Implementation Group is established to plan and review the provision of practice placements for trainees on the Lancaster University DClinPsy programme. Each year, the trainees on the programme spend more than 50% of their time on practice placements, which are distributed across the North West of England. The Placement Development and Implementation Group is established to explore the broad national and regional policy and practice landscape of clinical psychology, especially where changes are occurring, and so plan how to respond to these changes in the context of the provision of practice placements. The group also aims to make sure that trainees on the Lancaster programme are getting the best possible practice placements to enable them to become competent, confident qualified clinical psychologists. The Placement Development and Implementation Group’s main aims are therefore:

  • ensuring and improving the future availability of practice placements
  • ensuring and improving the future quality of practice placements
  • ensuring and improving the “fitness for purpose” of the practice placements over the medium to long term.

Members

Whilst the clinical tutor team leads the co-ordination, review of practice placements, as well as the support to them, the programme is committed to the meaningful involvement of key stakeholders in the oversight and strategic planning of these placements – which could not be provided without them. Therefore, alongside members of the clinical team who lead on different aspects of placement support and planning (and on implementing the decisions of the group), the following stakeholder groups are represented at the Placement Development and Implementation Group:

 

  • Service Users (through LUPIN)
  • The NW Placement Development Network (who review the provision of all practice placements across NHS professions on behalf of Health Education NW)
  • NHS Trusts, in whose services trainees are placed (through Practice Education Facilitators)
  • Supervisors
  • Newly qualified clinical psychologists (to provide a trainee perspective – as this is one policy group where direct trainee representation is considered not appropriate)

The group meets four times a year, in March, June, September and November

Placement Development and Implementation Group Terms of Reference

Placement difficulties

Difficulties on placement fall into three broad categories – concerns expressed by trainees, those expressed by tutors and those expressed by supervisors (these might also include the concerns of other professionals or service users on placement). Although the concerns of all do often overlap, these concerns will be considered separately in the interests of clarity. The below paragraphs identify the processes which will be followed to support trainees and supervisors, as well as to address these concerns directly should they arise.

Concerns of trainees

Trainees may experience personal problems on placement but feel unable to discuss these with their supervisor. They may find that the experience offered to enable them to develop some specific competencies is minimal due to, for example, local circumstances. Trainees may also feel that the quality or quantity of supervision does not meet their expectations (See BPS Guidelines on Clinical Supervision at the bottom of the page).

In every case the most important action to take is to communicate. The first person the trainee should inform of their concerns should be the supervisor. If this does not happen or if the trainee feels unable to communicate concerns directly to the supervisor then the trainee must contact their clinical tutor. The tutor can discuss with the trainee the difficulties they are experiencing over the phone or in person. They may be able to help address the issue with the supervisor. Whilst a mentor may help by acting as an advocate for the trainee or by supporting the trainee in communicating with their supervisor or clinical tutor.

Should problems persist and/or if they constitute a breach of the agreed contract, the programme subscribes to a policy (available at the bottom of the page) entitled “How the Programmes Manage Serious Concerns with Supervision on Placement” in conjunction with the Liverpool and the Manchester DClinPsy programmes. Supervisors receive a copy of this policy when allocated a trainee, which states what is expected of them as supervisors and how any problems in achieving these standards of supervision will be addressed. Accordingly, programme staff will follow the procedures detailed in the policy when trainees raise minor or more significant concerns.

Consistent with this policy, trainees who raise minor concerns about quality will be asked to include a full account of these concerns (and how they have been resolved) in their Placement Audit and Log book (PALOG) at the end of the placement, so that these concerns can be noted in assuring the quality of subsequent placements.

Concerns of placement breakdown

In some circumstances during the course of a placement, a supervisor or the service in which they operate may cease to be able to provide the practice placement experience required by the trainee. Service provision can often change over a short period, which can deliver a different training experience. These changes are usually discussed and managed within the placement between supervisor and trainee, with input and support by the trainee’s clinical tutor (see Concerns of trainees above). Other changes, such as long term sickness absence of the supervisor, can threaten to compromise the quality of the placement. The following process should be followed to reduce the impact caused to the trainee’s learning experience:

  1. Communication of concerns: Should a supervisor or service manager (where the supervisor is absent) become aware that a change is happening or is expected to happen to placement delivery that would result in the placement no longer being able to meet the minimum required standards for placement quality (see Quality assurance of practice placements in the Programme Specification), they will communicate this directly with a member of the course staff – preferably the clinical tutor for the trainee in question, the Senior Clinical Tutor for Practice Placements or the Clinical Director.
  2. Review of concerns: The clinical tutor concerned or another member of the clinical team, with support from Senior Clinical Tutor for Practice Placements and / or Clinical Director, will discuss the situation with whoever raised the concern, and in the first instance attempted to see what measures might need to be taken to return the placement provision to the required standards. This may be achieved with staff or resource provision from the programme (for example, if this is required over a short period).
  3. Taking stock: Should an immediate solution not be achievable, then a period of time will be agreed to “take stock” of the situation. During this period, the trainee may continue with placement practice only if there is sufficient and appropriate supervision to make this safe (for the trainee and service users); alternatively, the trainee may be asked to use placement time for study elsewhere. The principle of doing this is not to rush any party involved, whilst recognising that the earlier the trainee returns to full placement practice, the better. During this period, the Senior Clinical Tutor for Practice Placements, supported by the clinical tutors, will be exploring alternative options for placement provision.
  4. Review of ongoing or new placement provision: Once either the original placement has been renegotiated so that it can meet the required standards (and therefore the trainee’s needs on placement) or a new placement has begun, then the clinical tutor will consult with both the supervisor and the trainee, to plan appropriate placement visits, offer placement support as necessary and review the placement contract.

Concerns of supervisors and tutors

Concerns about trainee performance may be triggered by concerns that the trainee is struggling to meet the requirements of the placement. There may also be concerns about the level of appropriate professional behaviour, adherence to the HCPC’s Guidance on Performance, Conduct and Ethics or the BPS’s Code of Conduct, Ethical Principles and Guidelines or compliance with local or employing Trust policies. In every case the supervisor and/ or tutor should discuss their concerns with the trainee as soon as problems arise and begin documenting discussions and events. Generally, such concerns can lead to (i) consideration of placement failure, (ii) consideration of whether the trainee is fit to continue practicing, and (iii) consideration of whether to pursue disciplinary action against the trainee as an employee of Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust.

Placement Failure Concerns

The procedures outlined are intended to offer a framework of good practice and protection for all concerned in the hope that remedial action will be taken before formal placement failure becomes a consideration. It is important to remember that the supervisor provides information and recommendations to the Exam Board regarding the trainee’s performance but does not make the final decision regarding placement failure.

If the supervisor’s concerns are not resolved within supervision they should contact the trainee’s clinical tutor, with the full knowledge of the trainee, to alert them to their concerns. The following procedure is then followed:

  • The clinical tutor speaks to both supervisor and trainee to gain an overview of the situation and arranges a meeting at the placement base as soon as possible. The tutor also informs the Clinical Director that such concerns have been expressed.
  • The clinical tutor meets the trainee and supervisor separately at the start of the meeting.
  • The Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee form is used as a framework and the other documents (e.g. the Placement Audit and Log book (PALOG) and Placement Contract, the HCPC’s Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics and, if available, any draft Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee form) act as a resource to ensure that the trainee is aware of the exact concerns of the supervisor. The trainee is invited to respond and their concerns are noted. At the end of the meeting, an action plan is completed containing clearly defined targets, and these are documented and agreed by the tutor, trainee and supervisor. The aim is to facilitate the achievement of the placement goals within the remaining time on placement. A review date is set. Where a trainee is not in agreement, this will be documented, and a clear rationale as to why these targets are being set (i.e. to achieve the required standards) will also be documented. If the trainee still feels these targets are unreasonable, a meeting will be arranged with the clinical tutor and the trainee to address this, if necessary including the clinical director, to allow for any alternative solutions to be explored (e.g. extra support may be identified, or a trainee may request to take a break in their training).
  • The clinical tutor concerned informs the Clinical Director that there is a “serious concerns on placement plan” in place for the trainee.
  • Contact between the clinical tutor, supervisor and trainee takes place between the initial visit and the review date to monitor the situation. This will vary according to need but will be a minimum of one contact every two weeks.
  • Trainee, supervisor and clinical tutor meet on the review date set and consider the trainee’s progress towards goals on the remedial action plan. If the review occurs at the end of placement, the relevant forms (SAT, Placement Audit form, Log ) are completed and seen by each party. If the review takes place early in the placement the action taken depends on the progress made by the trainee. A further review meeting may be necessary if the outcome of the first meeting is unsatisfactory. Contact and monitoring may be the only action needed if the trainee is making progress.

When the supervisors have made their recommendations on the SAT form, the formally constituted Exam Board considers the ratings given by the supervisor, alongside the comments of the trainee. More information is available in the criteria for placement failure section of the online handbook.

BPS Guidelines on Clinical Supervision
How the Programmes Manage Serious Concerns with Supervision on Placement
HCPC standards of conduct performance and ethics
BPS code of ethics and conduct

Placement availability and selection

Services within the Northwest area which are considered able to provide successful practice placements are contacted in good time prior to the start of the placement to seek offers of placements. Approaches for placement offers are coordinated with the other two north west programmes who also seek placements within the same geographical area.

When a placement is offered it is subject to checks to ensure that it is fit for purpose according to the following criteria (the relevant HCPC standards of education and training will be referenced by number after each of the below):

  • Does the placement have the potential to meet the learning needs of the trainees at the specific point in their training (e.g. are there enough appropriately qualified staff available in a small service to supervise and support the trainee, or does a third year placement have access to work suitable to address any gaps remaining in the trainee’s learning?) (SET 5.2; 5.6; 5.7)?
  • Will the placement provide a safe and supportive environment for the trainees (SET 5.3)?
  • Is the placement situated in a service which has all the necessary governance and assurance frameworks in place to ensure the safety and promote the wellbeing of clients and trainees, including appropriate policies and procedures around equality and diversity in relation to trainees (SET 5.5)?
  • Are the prospective supervisors appropriately registered (SET 5.9)?
  • Have they undertaken appropriate training as supervisors (SET 5.8)?

HCPC Standards of education and training
Supervisor oversight and quality assurance of supervision processes – allied health professionals

Placement allocation

2021 cohort onwards

Competency skills focused practice placements

There are three long practice placements focusing on clinical skill development (direct, indirect and leadership/influencing). For Direct skills and Indirect skills focused placements the Placement Team take the lead in sourcing placements and allocating. For Influencing and Leadership placements – trainees have more input into the choice of the placement dependent on their experiences and needs in order to successfully complete their training.

Once Direct and Indirect skills focused placements have been identified, a placement allocation process takes place approximately 2 months  before the scheduled start of that placement (for out of sync trainees this will be on a case by case basis). The process involves key members of the programme team and considers information indicated by trainees in their ‘placement preference form’ and learning needs identified from the previous placement. Allocations are made on achieving the best fit between identified learning needs of the trainee (which is the most important factor) and other factors such as geography/other identified needs (e.g. health/carer needs). Influencing and Leadership placement allocations have a slightly different process which takes place over a longer time period and involves close liaison with Manchester and Liverpool programmes. Placements are made across the whole of the north west of England and may be located in Lancashire, Cheshire, Greater Manchester, Merseyside or Cumbria.

Any requests for out of area placements are only agreed in exceptional circumstances, and must be made to the Clinical Director.

Community focused placements

There is one community focused placement during the training schedule. The allocation of this placement will be facilitated by experiences the trainee has had prior to the placement in terms of working with populations from across the lifespan and range of ability level. Trainees seek out organisations which they consider to meet their learning needs. This process begins once the Influencing and Leadership placement allocations are made so that trainees can make informed decisions about any areas they need to experience before the end of training.  Clinical tutors follow up possible placements to ensure that they are fit for purpose. This placement is not formally assessed and can be undertaken within the programme commissioned boundaries across the whole of the north west of England and may be located in Lancashire, Cheshire, Greater Manchester, Merseyside or Cumbria.

2020 cohort and earlier

Core placements

The first four placements are typically referred to as “core placements”. Once placements have been identified, a placement allocation process takes place approximately six weeks before the scheduled start of that placement (for out of sync trainees this will be on a case by case basis). The process involves key members of the programme team and considers information indicated by trainees in their ‘placement preference form’ and learning needs identified from the previous placement . Allocations are made on achieving the best fit between identified learning needs of the trainee (which is the most important factor) and other factors such as geography/other identified needs (e.g. health/carer needs). Placements are made across the whole of the north west of England and may be located in Lancashire, Cheshire, Greater Manchester, Merseyside or Cumbria.

Fifth/specialist placement

Allocation to the fifth placement is more bespoke to the learning and development needs of each trainee. Any identified core competency related learning needs not achieved during the first four core placements will need to be addressed on the fifth placement. Trainees in such a position will be allocated a fifth placement to address their learning needs. If a satisfactory level of core competence has been achieved, trainees have the opportunity to seek a placement in an area of speciality interest or build on previous experience in one of the core placement areas.

Trainees are expected to start thinking about ideas for their fifth placement in advance of the placement start. A fifth placement showcase day currently forms part of the autumn curriculum and allows trainees the opportunity to consider in depth the range of learning and development opportunities open to them. Each trainee will also have an individual meeting with their designated clinical tutor to discuss their learning needs and placement preferences, following which they are asked to communicate final preferences to the clinical tutor organising fifth/specialist placements. This tutor reviews all expressed preferences in conjunction with the other two North West DClinPsy programmes. Trainees are asked not to approach any potential supervisors until they are told they can do so by the tutor organising the fifth placement. This is to prevent supervisors in popular placements being approached multiple times. Trainees are also asked not to make ‘definite arrangements’ with a supervisor. Allocations to fifth placements are, and can only be made, by the organising tutor in liaison with the other two North West programmes.

Our policy across all three Programmes in the North West is to give priority to core/direct/indirect skills placement provision, so trainees are less likely to be allocated to a placement/supervisor who is used for a core placement (unless that supervisor can offer two placements or the demand for core placement provision is low).

Fifth/specialist placements are typically in the North West region. Any requests for out of area placements are only agreed in exceptional circumstances, and must be made to the Clinical Director.

NHS Constitution

The NHS says the following about its constitution: –

The NHS Constitution has been created to protect the NHS and make sure it will always do the things it was set up to do in 1948 – to provide high-quality healthcare that’s free and for everyone.

No government can change the Constitution without the full involvement of staff, patients and the public. The Constitution is a promise that the NHS will always be there for you.

What is the NHS Constitution?

For the first time in the history of the NHS, the constitution brings together in one place details of what staff, patients and the public can expect from the National Health Service. It also explains what you can do to help support the NHS, help it work effectively, and help ensure that its resources are used responsibly.

The Constitution sets out your rights as an NHS patient. These rights cover how patients access health services, the quality of care you’ll receive, the treatments and programmes available to you, confidentiality, information and your right to complain if things go wrong.

Rights and pledges

One of the primary aims of the Constitution is to set out clearly what patients, the public and staff can expect from the NHS and what the NHS expects from them in return.

The Handbook To The NHS Constitution
The NHS constitution for England

Criteria for placement failure

Introduction

The criteria for failure reflect the requirements of the profession, as set out in the following standards produced by the regulatory body (Health and Care Professions Council – HCPC) and the professional body (British Psychological Society- BPS):

  • Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics See document link below
  • Health and Care Professions Council .
  • Health and Care Professions Council (2015) Standards of Proficiency for Practitioner Psychologists. See document link below
  • British Psychological Society (BPS) (2018) Code of Ethics and Conduct See document link below
  • British Psychological Society (BPS) (2017). BPS practise guidelines  . See document link below
  • British Psychological Society (BPS) (2019). BPS Committee on Training in Clinical Psychology (CTCP) Accreditation Standards  See document below.

If a trainee does not fulfil these requirements on a practice placement by the end of that placement, to a standard acceptable to the placement supervisor and the programme staff, this will result in a recommendation to the exam board that a failure of that practice placement is recorded. This recommendation is made by means of the evaluation form “Supervisor’s Evaluation of Trainee” (SAT). The supervisor will recommend to the Examination Board whether, overall, the placement (i.e. the trainee’s achievement of expected learning outcomes) falls into the category of ‘unsatisfactory’ rather than ‘satisfactory’. These judgements and the subsequent recommendation are informed by the above standards, the training of the programme staff, the training of the supervisors, and by the goals and intended learning outcomes as articulated in the placement contract agreed between trainee and supervisor (and approved by the visiting clinical tutor) at the start of the placement. These requirements are operationally defined as criteria for placement failure and are set out explicitly in this document below.

It is worth noting that, prior to the evaluation of the trainee’s placement performance, there are opportunities to monitor trainee progress, both via weekly supervision sessions and also reviews with clinical tutor;. Where there are placement difficulties, the course has specific guidance on procedures to be followed and these  can found on the Placement difficulties handbook webpage.

In the case where the supervisor recommends that, overall, the placement ratings are ‘unsatisfactory’, the External Examiner will be asked to comment and will be sent samples of the trainee’s work and the Placement Audit and Log book (PALOG), prior to the Examination Board.

The Examination Board will consider the SAT form, the PALOG and its relation to the Placement Contract, the views of the External Examiner and any other relevant material, before making its recommendation to the University. The Criteria for Placement Failure (below) will form a focus for the Examination Board discussion and recommendation

Criteria for Placement Failure

1. Clinical experience

Within the contract there will be goals relating to:

  • Range and number of clients
  • Client problems and settings
  • Individual and/or group work
  • Types of clinical involvement e.g. assessment, intervention, consultancy, direct/indirect work, models to be used

It may be that goals need to be slightly revised, particularly at a placement review with a visiting member of course staff, to encompass unforeseen developments. For example, if certain types of referrals are not available, alternative work may be found; if work with client(s) proves to be much more detailed than originally envisaged, then simply adding to client numbers may be inappropriate. That is a matter for discussion during the placement  review.

However, if by the end of the placement, the trainee has been unable to fulfil the clinical goals to the satisfaction of the supervisor, then following consultation, the supervisor may decide to recommend an ‘unsatisfactory’ rating on this aspect of the work.

2. Clinical Competence

The contract will contain goals that relate to all areas of clinical competence, within the limits of what areas of competence are reasonable to expect to develop on a specific placement (e.g. it will not be possible to develop skills in working with children on all placements). However, the goals of all four placements over the three year programme, will, in total, provide each trainee with a complete set of opportunities to achieve all of Health Professions Council (2015) Standards of Proficiency for Practitioner Psychologists, and to acquire all of the competencies to satisfy the British Psychological Society (2019) Committee on Training in Clinical Psychology: Criteria for the accreditation of postgraduate training programmes in clinical psychology.

This is why the achievement of the goals/ expected learning outcomes articulated in the placement contract are so important to judgements about whether the trainee’s performance on placement should be deemed satisfactory or not – they relate directly to the achievement of the requirements of the profession as listed in the introduction to this document.

Some of the requirements are in areas that are not specific to a practice placement area. For example, skills in teaching, research, consultation and organisational work can be acquired on most placements. These areas will focus on, for example, opportunities for team work, meetings to be attended, services to be visited and liaison with other professionals. The acquisition of these proficiencies, in particular, are cumulative of the three years of training, and it is with this in mind that achievements on any one placement will be assessed. However, all areas of proficiency will be assessed through the lens of a developmental framework. As such, the rating “requires attention” on the SAT form (which is available to assessing supervisors for all the specific areas of competence, although not on the overall rating) will refer to those areas of competence where it is recommended that subsequent placements and their respective contracts should focus. As a result, the “requires attention” option is not available to final placement supervisors, as the trainee should satisfy all proficiency and competence standards by the end of their final placement.

It is not possible to be prescriptive about number of goals not achieved (or ‘seriousness’ of a single goal not met) to warrant an ‘unsatisfactory’ rating. Instead, once it is identified that a trainee is at risk of failing on a placement, there is a process that is followed to make the specific concerns of the supervisor (after discussions with programme staff as well as the trainee concerned) clear and explicit, which will in turn also involve the creation of clear, explicit and achievable goals during the remainder of the placement. Only if a trainee fails to achieve these goals will an unsatisfactory rating be awarded. It allows the assessment of trainees in this respect to be sensitive to the cumulative process of professional training and the complexities of professional standards.

3. Ethical and Professional Behaviour

In all aspects of clinical work the trainee must comply with the HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and the BPS Code of Ethics and Conduct, Ethical Principles and Guidelines. Within these documents, and within the Division of Clinical Psychology (DCP) Professional Practice Guidelines there are descriptions of how practitioners are expected to behave. The HCPC also provides guidance on conduct and ethics to students (as listed above). Unprofessional or unethical behaviour on the part of trainees may lead to disciplinary action. Such behaviour might also lead to consideration within the programme’s Fitness To Practise processes but is also grounds to consider placement failure. All three (or any combination) of these avenues may be appropriate to pursue at the same time, should the breach of ethical or professional boundaries merit it. Such professional matters are so crucial to training they are considered within the programme as part of the Induction to the programme.

Appropriate professional behaviour on placement is a wide issue and something that should be ‘shaped’ and discussed within supervision. The areas that the supervisor will be regularly monitoring and discussing will include:

  • Reliability (time keeping; diary management; placement administration)
  • Organisation of workload and managing priorities
  • Degree of independence appropriate to the stage of learning
  • Ethical issues such as consent, confidentiality, record keeping, keeping within the legal framework.
  • Risk/safeguarding identification and management

Again, whilst it is not possible to be specific about any one problem behaviour that would lead to an ‘unsatisfactory’ rating, over all the items listed the supervisor will be expecting appropriate professional and ethical standards of behaviour. Should the trainee not demonstrate behaviour to the satisfaction of the supervisor, e.g. (i) where the trainee is frequently late or absent for meetings or (ii) does not take confidentiality into account within clinical practice, then this should, in the first instance, be the subject of discussion in supervision. If the trainee does not respond to feedback, does not change their approach to behave in a sufficiently professional way, and does not meet very specific goals (that may be set down after consultation with staff and supervisor at mid-placement visit) then the supervisor may give an ‘unsatisfactory’ rating on this section of the SAT. As highlighted above, disciplinary and/or fitness to practise concerns may arise simultaneously and be pursued separately from any determination about pass or failure of a placement.

4. Overall failure of a placement with a final summary rating of ‘unsatisfactory’ on the SAT

There may be a number of sections or only one section of the SAT that the supervisor considers ‘unsatisfactory’. There are no prescribed number of ‘unsatisfactory’ categories that will lead automatically to the SAT form recommending a failed placement to the Examination Board.

The implications of the failure to meet a single goal may be as important as the number of goals not met. For example, (i) if with client work the trainee, despite extensive supervision, cannot formulate the problems of any of the clients then this may lead to overall failure of the placement by the Examination Board (ii) if there is a single example of gross professional misconduct this will usually lead to failure of the placement (and most likely the programme). The trainee’s clinical tutor will be available to support the supervisor and trainee in the event of placement difficulties and to discuss, with the supervisor, particular aspects of the SAT form and to give guidance as appropriate in consultation with the Clinical Director as necessary.

Practitioner psychologists | (hcpc-uk.org)

Standards of conduct, performance and ethics | (hcpc-uk.org)

Code of Ethics and Conduct – The British Psychological Society (bps.org.uk)

BPS Practice Guidelines (2017) – The British Psychological Society

BPS Committee on Training in Clinical Psychology Accreditation standards

Consent for participation in clinical teaching

Background: Possible stresses linked to clinical teaching

For the most part trainees tell us that their teaching programme is stimulating and interesting. However, because of its aims and its focus, training in Clinical Psychology as a whole can present personal challenges to trainees and it is widely recognised that clinical teaching itself can be, at times, personally demanding. At some point in their training it is quite likely that trainees will feel uncomfortable or upset by material to which they are exposed. While this is often a transient experience, some trainees may experience a more sustained impact. The “triggers” for this upset might occur when:

  • trainees recognise some aspect of themselves in the clinical material
  • teaching makes them more uncomfortably aware of long-standing personal issues which they had previously managed well
  • some of the issues being discussed echo current dilemmas or life-events (such as bereavement, or relationship difficulties)
  • some of the content of teaching is at variance with the trainee’s personal, cultural or religious beliefs or values

Teaching on the programme is not restricted to passive listening; it also involves active participation in exercises which trainees can find rather demanding. For example, most people find it somewhat exposing to role play in front of their peers, to disclose personal feelings, or to discuss their personal viewpoints; such things which can occur in experiential sessions, or in sessions where the focus is on feelings about professional work and career development.

Focusing on the ways in which teaching could be stressful is not intended to indicate that there is any intent to make it so. When planning training, the programme staff take into account the potential impact of the teaching content and the teaching method, especially when the topic is a sensitive one. We know that learning is inhibited by high levels of stress, which means that there are powerful educational reasons for keeping any stresses contained and manageable. We support our teachers in facilitating this within the sessions they provide.

Support for trainees

Although we expect trainees to be appropriately robust in relation to the issues which they encounter in training, we also expect them to be able to reflect on and to talk about their feelings. On the other hand, for all of us there may be times – maybe when we can no longer be as robust as we would like – when seeking support from others is the most appropriate action. Although it can be very hard to draw the programme’s attention to difficulties, not communicating is unhelpful, and is not a good model for a professional career. There are, therefore, professional competencies that we expect you to develop during your training – resilience and reflective ability – that we would want to support you in developing, in the face of any of these challenges, stresses and demands that you experience within your participation in teaching (as well as in all other domains of your training).

Your consent to participation in clinical teaching

It is a requirement of the Health and Care Professions Council that when students participate as service users in clinical teaching they have given informed consent to this. Whilst you would rarely be “service users” within teaching, we want to expand this to include consent for all personally challenging activities within the taught curriculum. For this consent to be meaningful it is important to set out the programme’s expectations, and the rights of trainees.

Programme expectations in relation to clinical teaching

The programme expects that trainees will actively participate in all aspects of the academic programme, including:

  • Lectures
  • Experiential exercises which take place as part of lectures
  • Workshops on clinical topics
  • Seminars (including clinical seminars, academic seminars, reflective practice seminars and modality specific clinical seminars)
  • Role-play as part of the above activities (including taking the role of both therapist and client)

Where a trainee finds participation difficult they are entitled to withdraw, but the programme expects them to do this in an appropriately professional manner. If their level of personal distress is very high and results (for example) in prolonged withdrawal from specific areas of teaching, it is expected that the trainee take appropriate action. Trainees will be required to discuss this with their Individual Clinical Tutor at the earliest opportunity, who can then arrange for them to be exempted from teaching activities, and who will also discuss the most suitable strategies for managing the situation.

In practical terms, trainees who find themselves distressed during a lecture or a workshop are entitled to leave, but should do so as quietly as possible, returning if they feel able to, and if possible discussing their absence with the lecturer or workshop leader. Trainees who feel that a workshop task is too personally demanding are entitled not to participate, but should do so in an appropriately negotiated manner, discussing this with the workshop leader and notifying a member of the administrative staff (the withdrawal from teaching will be noted and may be discussed subsequently within the programme team in order to enhance support of trainees as well as review the teaching programme).

Disclosure of personal information

During academic teaching there should be no pressure on trainees to disclose personal information which they feel uncomfortable revealing and especially personal information which they do not see as relevant to the task of training. However, the nature of the programme means that discussion of personal feelings in relation to professional development is often appropriate and necessary, and there is an expectation that trainees will be open to discussion of these feelings if these are relevant to their clinical work and professional development.

Where there is a potential for, or an expectation of, discussion around personal feelings, responses or actions (for example, Personal Development and Reflection sessions, or Professional Issues Review and Reflection sessions), workshop leaders will ensure that appropriate ‘ground rules’ around the disclosure of personal information, and the confidentiality of this, are discussed and agreed with trainees.

Consenting to participate in clinical teaching

At the end of this page is a formal consent form. Completing and returning it means that you acknowledge and accept the expectations set out above. Because these make it clear that there may be circumstances where you might wish to withdraw from clinical teaching, it should be clear that while you are consenting to participate in teaching this consent is not absolute, and includes the right to withdraw if there are good grounds for doing so.

You are not obliged to sign this form, but it may be a condition of your employment to do so, please check your contract with your employer. If you have any queries about it, you are free to discuss it and its implications with one of the directors of the programme.

Consent for Participation in Clinical Teaching form

The thesis: a guide for external supervisors

2018 cohort onwards

Date of last update: 20/04/23

Introduction

The thesis is the largest piece of research work undertaken by trainees on the Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology. Trainees usually begin work on this in the first year of study immediately following their completion of the first part of the Thesis Preparation Assignment and submit in March of their third year of study. They are normally examined during the summer of their third year.

Information about the thesis

The thesis consists of an investigation involving human participants within a subject of relevance to the theory and practice of clinical psychology, with the results constituting a substantial contribution to existing knowledge. In terms of scope, the DClinPsy thesis is smaller than a PhD and only includes one research chapter. Trainees should aim to produce work that is of a publishable standard. The word count limits for the three papers within the thesis are 8,000 words for the systematic literature review, 8,000 words for the research paper and 4,000 words for the critical appraisal. It is expected that the systematic literature review and research paper are submitted for publication.

For more information on the thesis, please see the Thesis process guidance for trainees in the online handbook.

For a list of titles of the theses submitted by trainees recently please see the previous thesis topics section of the online handbook.

Approximate timeline for the thesis

Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA) & Thesis
YEAR 1
Sep – Oct
  • Thesis supervisor allocated
Nov – Dec
  • TPA proposal form submitted
Jan – Mar
  • TPA introduction draft read
  • TPA literature review section submitted
Apr – June
  • Finalise thesis topic
  • Identify Field supervisor
  • TPA thesis proposal section submitted
  • Thesis contract / action plan meeting
Jul – Sep
  • Thesis proposal reviewed
  • Identify ethics committee(s) to apply to. Get relevant forms and deadlines for submission.
YEAR 2
Oct – Dec
  • Hand in complete draft ethics proposal.
  • Finalise ethics proposal and submit for ethical approval.Decide on topic for Systematic Literature Review chapter and begin collecting references
Jan – Mar
  • Obtain ethical approval for thesis study.
  • Draft introduction and method of Systematic literature review chapter
Apr-Jun
  • Draft introduction and method to Empirical paper
  • Data collection
  • Begin analysis
Jul – Sep
  • Complete data collection
  • Review literature for Systematic review
  • Identify topic for critical appraisal chapter
YEAR 3
Oct– Dec
  • Draft results and discussion of systematic literature review chapter
  • Complete analysis of data
  • Draft results and discussion of  empirical paper
Jan – Mar
  • Draft critical appraisal
  • Final drafts of  other chapters
  • Final formatting of thesis
  • SUBMIT THESIS
Apr – Aug
  • Viva voce examination
  • Corrections to thesis as required

Research collaborations

The programme actively encourages research collaborations with experts in the field. If you are interested in collaborating with the programme please download a copy of the collaboration form at the end of this page. You can either email your completed form to Sarah Heard at s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk or upload it to OneDrive.

Presentations

The trainees present their findings at the third year presentation day in the June of their final year. This event is an opportunity for the trainees to showcase their research to peers, programme staff, course stakeholders and service users. The day is a stimulating experience and we very much welcome field supervisors to attend. The presentation day will usually feature a seminar from a guest speaker. Copies of presentations from previous years can be downloaded from the programme website. An invitation is usually circulated in May; please contact Sarah Heard (details below) for more information.

Contact details

For more information about the practical arrangements for the thesis please contact Sarah Heard, Research Coordinator, either by phone, 01524 592754, or email, s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk. Please contact Ian Smith, Research Director (i.smith@lancaster.ac.uk) with any other queries.

2014 to 2017 cohort

Introduction

The thesis is the largest piece of research work undertaken by trainees on the Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology. Trainees usually begin work on this in the second year of study and submit in May of their third year of study. They are normally examined during the summer of their third year.

Information about the thsis

The thesis consists of an investigation involving human participants within a subject of relevance to the theory and practice of clinical psychology, with the results constituting a substantial contribution to existing knowledge. In terms of scope, the DClinPsy thesis is less than a PhD and only includes one research chapter. Trainees should aim to produce work that is of a publishable standard. The word count limits for the three papers within the thesis are 8,000 words for the literature review, 8,000 words for the research paper and 4,000 words for the critical appraisal. It is expected that the literature review and research paper are submitted for publication.

For more information on the thesisplease see the Thesis process guidance for trainees in the online handbook.

For a list of titles of the theses submitted by trainees in the past 10 years please see the previous thesis topics section of the online handbook.

Approximate timeline for the assignment

Year Period Actions
2 June/July You will be contacted by the course for potential project ideas.
By December Your project ideas circulated to trainees, and you will be approached by trainees interested in your project ideas. Please feel free to contact the Research Coordinator if you have any questions at this point s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk
December/ January You will work with your trainee and their academic supervisor to make the idea suitable for a thesis in content and methodology. Negotiate a research contract between you, the trainee and the academic supervisor. This document outlines the responsibilities of the various individuals involved.
3 December – January You should start receiving initial drafts of the thesis from the trainee.
March/April You should receive a final draft of the thesis from the trainee.
May The trainee submits the thesis
June The trainees present their findings at the third year presentation day which you will be invited to attend.
June – July The trainee attends the viva examination.
August You can now finalise publication plans with the trainee.

Presentations

The trainees present their findings at the third year presentation day in the June of their final year. This event is an opportunity for the trainees to showcase their research to peers, programme staff, course stakeholders and service users. The day is a stimulating experience and we very much welcome field supervisors to attend. The presentation day will usually feature a seminar from a guest speaker. Copies of presentations from previous years can be downloaded from the programme website. An invitation is circulated around May; please contact Sarah Heard (details below) for more information.

Contact details

For more information about the practical arrangements for the thesis please contact Sarah Heard, Research Coordinator, either by phone, 01524 592754, or email, s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk. Please contact Ian Smith, Research Director (i.smith@lancaster.ac.uk) with any other queries.

2013 cohort

Introduction

The thesis is the largest piece of research work undertaken by trainees on the Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology. Trainees begin work on this in the second year of study and submit in the May of their third year of study. They are examined during the summer of their third year.

Information about the assignment

The thesis consists of an investigation involving human participants within a subject of relevance to the theory and practice of clinical psychology, with the results constituting a substantial contribution to existing knowledge. In terms of scope, the DClinPsy thesis is less than a PhD and only includes one research ‘chapter’. Trainees should aim to produce work that is of a publishable standard. The word count limits for the three papers within the thesis are 8,000 words for the literature review, 8,000 words for the research paper and 4,000 words for the critical appraisal. It is expected that the literature review and research paper are submitted for publication.

For more information on the assignment please see the Thesis process guidance for trainees in the online handbook.

Approximate timeline for the assignment

Year Period Actions
2 June/July You will be contacted by the course for potential project ideas.
September Your project ideas will be presented to trainees at the thesis planning day.
September – November You will be approached by trainees interested in your project ideas. If you are not approached by the end of December you can assume that your project idea has not been taken up. Please feel free to contact the Research Coordinator if you have any questions at this point, s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk.
December/ January You will work with your trainee and their academic supervisor to make the idea suitable for a thesis in content and methodology.
February – May If your suggested idea is chosen the trainee will arrange for a research contract to be agreed between you, the trainee and the academic supervisor (one of the course team). This document outlines the responsibilities of the various individuals involved.
3 December – January You should start receiving initial drafts of the thesis from the trainee.
March/April You should receive a final draft of the thesis from the trainee.
May The trainee submits the thesis
June The trainees present their findings at the third year presentation day which you will be invited to attend.
June – July The trainee attends the viva examination.
August You can now finalise publication plans with the trainee and their academic supervisor.

Presentations

The trainees present their findings at the third year presentation day in the June of their final year. This event is an opportunity for the trainees to showcase their research to peers, programme staff, course stakeholders and service users. The day is a stimulating experience and we very much welcome field supervisors to attend. The presentation day will usually feature a seminar from a guest speaker. Copies of presentations from previous years can be downloaded from the programme website. An invitation is circulated around May; please contact Sarah Heard (details below) for more information.

Contact details

For more information about the practical arrangements for the thesis please contact Sarah Heard, Research Coordinator, either by phone, 01524 592754, or email, s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk.

2012 cohort

Introduction

The thesis is the largest piece of research work undertaken by trainees on the Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology. Trainees begin work on this in the second year of study and submit in the May of their third year of study. They are examined during the summer of their third year.

Information about the assignment

The thesis consists of an investigation involving human participants within a subject of relevance to the theory and practice of clinical psychology, with the results constituting a substantial contribution to existing knowledge. In terms of scope, the DClinPsy thesis is less than a PhD and only includes one research ‘chapter’. Trainees should aim to produce work that is of a publishable standard. The word count limits for the three papers within the thesis are 8,000 words for the literature review, 8,000 words for the research paper and 4,000 words for the critical appraisal. It is expected that the literature review and research paper are submitted for publication.

For more information on the assignment please see the Thesis process guidance for trainees in the online handbook.

Approximate timeline for the assignment

Year Period Actions
2 June/July You will be contacted by the course for potential project ideas.
September Your project ideas will be presented to trainees at the thesis planning day which you are welcome to attend.
September – November You will be approached by trainees interested in your project ideas. If you are not approached by the end of November you can assume that your project idea has not been taken up. Please feel free to contact the Research Coordinator if you have any questions at this point, s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk.
December/ January You will work with your trainee and their academic supervisor to make the idea suitable for a thesis in content and methodology.
February – May If your suggested idea is chosen the trainee will arrange for a research contract to be agreed between you, the trainee and the academic supervisor (one of the course team). This document outlines the responsibilities of the various individuals involved.
3 December – January You should start receiving initial drafts of the thesis from the trainee.
March/April You should receive a final draft of the thesis from the trainee.
May The trainee submits the thesis
June The trainees present their findings at the third year presentation day which you will be invited to attend.
June – July The trainee attends the viva examination.
August You can now finalise publication plans with the trainee.

Presentations

The trainees present their findings at the third year presentation day in the June of their final year. This event is an opportunity for the trainees to showcase their research to peers, programme staff, course stakeholders and service users. The day is a stimulating experience and we very much welcome field supervisors to attend. The presentation day will usually feature a seminar from a guest speaker. Copies of presentations from previous years can be downloaded from the programme website. An invitation is circulated around May; please contact Sarah Heard (details below) for more information.

Contact details

For more information about the practical arrangements for the thesis please contact Sarah Heard, Research Coordinator, either by phone, 01524 592754, or email, s.heard@lancaster.ac.uk.

Research Collaboration Proposal Form

Previous thesis topics

Graduating year 2022

Rosie Ainsworth
A sense of belonging: Childhood abuse, intolerance of uncertainty and bipolar disorder

Cerys Bailey
A qualitative exploration of emergency practitioner’s perspectives towards functional seizures and self-harm behaviours

Gina Bannister
Emotion regulation and psychological mechanisms in parenthood

Fiona Boyd
The qualitative explorations of mental health in rural adolescents and UK sheep farmers

Julieanne Briones
The relationships between the flows of compassion and job-related affective wellbeing in helpline volunteers

Amy Burgess
Fathers experiences of perinatal loss

Hayley Butler
How people make sense of their partner’s cognitive and emotional difficulties following acquired brain injury

Aimee Cairns
Telehealth imagery focused therapy for people with delusions

Sophie Cochrane
A qualitative exploration of communication impairment following stroke

Rachel D’Sa
The experiences of staff who support people with intellectual disabilities

Shannon Dandy
Parenting a child with congenital heart disease: Experiences of diagnosis, identity and parental role

Claire Evans
Neurodevelopmental disorders and the journey to diagnosis: An exploration of adults’ experiences 

Emily Goodman
Working on the frontline of public service

Samantha Harpur
The experience of psychological care for women with endometriosis

Heather Havlin
A qualitative exploration of limb loss

Mike Heyes
Influences on worker’s role with children in residential settings: A grounded theory

Sophie Holding
Understanding the barriers and enablers to escaping homelessness throughout the pathway to rough sleeping

Michaela Lagdon
Issues in acute psychiatric inpatient services: staff experiences of suicide and risk-assessments

Emma Mellor
The experience of eating difficulties for individuals with inflammatory bowel disease

Corinna Milroy
Factors associated with the mental wellbeing of medical professionals

Holly Riches
Team formulation: A qualitative exploration of service users’ views

Tom Speight
Team formulation for foster carers: A qualitative analysis

Laura Williams
Measurement and impact of childhood bullying experiences

Becky Wright
Professional quality of life and wellbeing with mental health professionals

Graduating year 2021

Sara Asensio Cruz
The experiences of men who self-harm: A qualitative analysis

Johanna Barraclough
Caregivers’ engagement with online support

Sylwia Bazydlo
Functional movement disorders: Exploring lived experiences and psychological interventions

Jessica Creighton
Self-esteem and wellbeing in Deaf adults

Susan Doak
The influence of individual and social factors on attitudes and stigma towards Deaf people

Nina Fernandes
Multidisciplinary team perspectives of borderline personality disorder and clinicians’ experiences of support

Ciaran Foley
Exploring the experience of stigma in functional neurological disorder and mindfulness for functional seizures

Helen Gowling
Psychological factors associated with distress and wellbeing in dystonia

Sophie Green
How does receiving a personality disorder diagnosis affect wellbeing? A grounded theory investigation

Gemma Hayes
The role of self-concept clarity in adult attachment, adverse childhood experiences and psychotic like experiences

Nina Hewitson
A qualitative study of the experiences of moving on from a non-residential democratic therapeutic community

Rebecca Mayor
A meta-synthesis of stigma in epilepsy and an empirical exploration of self-disgust in epilepsy

Amy Nickson
Social psychological factors in healthcare engagement

Adam Pitt
Democratic therapeutic communities and the experience of belongingness: A qualitative exploration

Emily Retkiewicz
Healthcare professionals’ capacity for compassion and interactions with people diagnosed with eating disorders

Thomas Rozwaha
“Like working on the battlefield”: Experiences of nurses during emerging infectious disease epidemics

David Saddington
Burnout and retention among psychological practitioners: A qualitative investigation into the influence of organisational factors

Jess Smith
A qualitative exploration of the impact of persistent pain

Tom Speight
Team formulation for foster carers: A qualitative analysis

Amy Tomlinson
Narratives of voice hearing and mental health

Rosie Wheeler
Clinical psychologists’ use of reflection within their clinical work

Gina Wieringa
The experience of living with a neurodegenerative condition

Debbie Wood
Examining the caregiver-child dynamic on youth disclosure of transgender identity

Natalie Yau
Autistic adults’ experiences of psychological therapy and wellbeing: A qualitative analysis

Graduating year 2020

Jenni Benkoff
Emotional experiences in emergency ambulance services

Amy Brown
Impact of obstructive sleep apnoea and experiences of using positive airway

Helena Coleman
The impact on emotional well-being: Experiences of being a palliative care volunteer

Claire Downs
The paradox of forensic care: Supporting sexual offenders

Emma Fowler
Using an assessment tool to support capacity assessments undertaken remotely in the context of a global health crisis: A feasibility study

Hannah Gordon
The experience of body image for people with a left ventricular assist device

Sophie Harrison
The “sub-culture” created through austere measures: Understanding the cycle to break it

Chris Hunt
Experiences of therapy in a gender and sexually diverse world

Natalie Leigh
The influence of a lack of social support and perceived stigma for individuals with multiple sclerosis and motor neurone disease

Lily Lewis
Self-conscious emotions amongst survivors of trauma

Melissa Longworth
Self-compassion and coping in chronic illness groups

Sam Mellor
Exploring staff experiences of therapeutic relationships and team formulation in forensic mental health services

Rohan Morris
Assessing the relationships people have with their voices

Lindsay Prescott
Associations between illness perceptions, self-criticism, self-reassurance and recovery outcomes following traumatic brain injury

Laura-Jayne Richardson
A qualitative exploration of emotional expression for healthcare professionals working within end-of-life

Hayley Slater
Experiences of psychological distress, uncertainty and coping amongst people with cancer

Lizzy Steyert
Young people’s experiences of abuse and conflict within their intimate partner relationships

Charlotte Thompson
Social Justice is the best therapy: Exploring lived-experiences of welfare reform on the United Kingdom

John Timney
Stigma, fear of compassion and chronic pain

Graduating year 2019

Cormac Duffy
An exploration of the neuropsychological needs of individuals experiencing homelessness

Sana Gill
Acknowledging the unseen: Muslim practitioners’ understandings and processes of alleviating emotional distress with British Muslims

Kristian Glenny
The experience of professionals working with children and young people who display harmful sexual behaviours

Kathryn Hughes
Disordered eating and the relationships with post-traumatic stress, self criticism and fear of compassion

Melissa Leigh
Living well with an acquired visual impairment: A narrative analysis

Gemma Parry
Veterans experiences of reintegration and successfully managing post-traumatic stress

Phaedra Robinson
Self-harm and suicidality among lesbian, gay, bisexual and trans youth: The role of school-based connectedness

Jessica Sheffield
Experiences of supporting organ transplant recipients

Natalie Sowter
Cognition, compassion and wellbeing among people with Parkinson’s

Catrina Stansfield
Psychological factors influencing women’s postpartum mental health

Elizabeth Tane
Burnout and compassion in acute mental health wards

Jeri Tikare
The experience of adjusting to acquired brain injuries

Sophie Valavanis
The relationships between nurses’ emotional intelligence

Andrew Wah
A qualitative exploration of how people with bipolar disorder consider risk-taking in everyday situations

Marie Winterson
Exploring psychological and therapeutic needs among refugees and asylum seekers

Graduating year 2018

Natasha Cullingham
Psychological inflexibility and non-epileptic attack disorder

Benjamin Helliwell
The role of self-disgust in the relationship between childhood trauma and psychotic experience

Elizabeth Hickman
Understanding compassion in learning disability services

Maximilian Homberger
Exploring the experiences and understandings of psychosis through relationships with family members, mental health services, and society

Kimberley Keegan
‘I am simply an ahtlete’: A psychological exploration of athletic identity in physical impairment and amputation

Javier Malda Castillo
Asthma, caregiving and mental health: The mind keeps the score

Shaneela Malik
Does prosthetist communication style predict psychosocial adjustment and satisfaction with a prosthesis following limb amputation

Helen McGauley
The experience of living in poverty, the role of stigma and mental health: A qualitative analysis

Mattia Monastra
The role of affective theory of mind in the association between trauma and psychotic-like experiences

Andrew Morgan
The impact and experience of living with dystonia

Selane Rigby
Cancer: Emotional experiences

Leona Rose
An exploration of emotional distress and sleep in a stroke rehabilitation setting

Lauren Rutter
Emergency personnel’s experiences of their role

Eleanor Catherine Taylor
Experiences of being maintained on a ventricular assist device

Ellysia-Grace Thompson
The cost of caring: What contributes to compassion fatigue?

Danielle Verity
Stigma, perceived control and health-related quality of life for individuals experiencing Parkinson’s disease

Graduating year 2017

Rebecca Ashton
A qualitative exploration of the impact of stress and workplace adversity on healthcare staff experiences, well-being and resilience

David Baker
Psychological perspectives on stigma and self-compassion in adults with epilepsy

Laura Binsale
Self-concept clarity, adverse experiences and psychopathology

Joanna Cheng
The mechanisms of psychological therapy with people with long-term physical health conditions

Aoife Clarke
A systematic review of the concept of self-disgust, and an empirical examination of its role in post-traumatic stress difficulties

Toni Deavin
A qualitative exploration of family members’ experiences of paediatric chronic illness

Ruth Elsdon
A qualitative exploration of the experiences of women involved in sex work

Kate Empson
Family carers and mental health: The role of self compassion

Stephanie Fagan
A compassionate and relational understanding of borderline personality disorder

Rachael Faulkner
Experiences of transition to secondary school in children with a cleft lip and/or palate

Gemma Foat-Smith
Staff experiences in paediatric trauma services: Exploring perceptions of resilience when dealing with distress

Thomas Heavey
A qualitative exploration of how risk is conceptualised and worked with in mental health services

Hayley Higson
Exploration of mental health professionals’ views on hope and austerity: The synergy of a paradox?

Mel Hugill
Early life adverse experiences and the effect on parenting stress and schizotypal symptons

Ciara Joyce
Lived long-term experience of eating disorders: A narrative exploration

Rosie Kirkham
Exploring the experiences of staff working in forensic mental health settings

Jessica Moore
A qualitative exploration of the movement disorder experience

James Oliver
Being the parent of a child with either a cleft lip and /or palate or limb difference

Alice Pettitt
Women’s stories of emotional distress, relational experiences and sense-making. Listening in a different way

Rebecca Potts
Disability following traumatic brain injury: Considering the wider context

Lucy Rathbone
The role of emotions in obsessive-compulsive experiences

Charlene Rouski
Looked after children’s experiences of self-harm: A qualitative analysis

Anna Chiara Sicilia
Risk-taking behaviour in people diagnosed with bipolar disorder

Laura Smith
What are the experiences of caring for a loved one with a chronic illness

Rachel Watterson
Emotional and systemic experiences of having a partner with dementia

Laura Wedlock
The role of interpreters in accessing psychological support and developing relationships in mental health and deafness

Emma Williamson
Does professional language affect help seeking in young people? A randomised study

Graduating year 2016

Rachel Barcroft
Chronic fatigue syndrome/myalgic encephalomyelitis and fibromyalgia: A social model of disability perspective

Claire Browne
Psychological interventions in forensic learning disability services: A focus on anger and aggression

Nicolas Burden
Body image and self-disgust as self-appraisals influencing adjustment to limb amputation

Anna Clancy
An exploration of experiences of bipolar disorder with couples

Josie Davies
Psychosocial pathways involved in the development of psychosis

Anna Duxbury
What is the process by which a decision to administer electroconvulsive therapy (ECT) or not is made: A grounded theory informed study from the perspectives of those involved

Natasha Goakes
The relationships between mental health experiences, trauma and posttraumatic growth

Mirella Hopper
Quantitative investigations of compassion satisfaction and challenges to compassion in mental health professionals

Kerry Irving
Relatives’ experiences of last resort interventions for people with mental health difficulties

Rachel McKail
Exploring transracial and transethnic international adoption

Jay McNeil
An exploration of transgender people’s mental health

Kelly Price
What is the relationship between self harm and self compassion in the context of voice hearing

Laurence Regan
The views of adults with Huntington’s disease on assisted dying: A psychological exploration

Graham Simpson-Adkins,
Parents, adverse childhood experiences and psychological distress

Claire Smith-Gowling
Towards an understanding of the self-behaviour of vulnerable young people

Heather Spankie
The importance of addressing the impact of contextual difficulties on mental health

Liz Tallentire
Psychological characteristics related to epileptic and non-epileptic seizures

Rachael Theed
Psychological distress in the context of Huntington’s disease

Nicola Tikare
The experience of seizures: Epilepsy and non-epileptic attack disorder

Emma Warren
An exploration of adult attachment, style, empathy and social distance

Graduating year 2015

Jo Bradley
Sleep disturbances following traumatic brain injury: Lived experiences and the use of psychological interventions

Kay Brewster
Client experiences of CBT: Factors influencing engagement

Laura Cramond
Exploring experiences of compassion and resilience in clinical psychologists working in palliative care

William Curvis
Self-esteem and social anxiety following brain injury

Sarah Davidson
Recovery and sense of self for individuals with a borderline personality disorder diagnosis

Benjamin Dawson
The experience of low grade and pituitary tumours

Pascal Diab
Neuropsychological assessment and coping in traumatic brain injury

Nicola Faye Edwards
Experiences of support following a diagnosis of breast cancer

Rachael Ellis
What is the lived experience of young people during their admission to a psychiatric inpatient unit

Rebecca Hough
Psychiatric diagnosis: Learning from people who experience distress and the practitioners who work with them

Charlotte Ingham
Experiences of non-heterosexual women in relation to psychological wellbeing

Melissa Leigh
Living well with acquired visual impairment: A narrative analysis

Helen Lewthwaite
Challenging behaviours: Caregiver attributions and emotional experiences

Ailsa Lord
The experiences of staff supporting people with dementia, death and bereavement

Sarah Parry
Qualitative explorations of talking therapies for CSA survivors and therapeutic relationships for people experiencing dissociation

Bethan Roberts
An exploration of the way in which services support adolescents with eating disorders

Sarah Saveker
Relationships between mental imagery, emotion and suicidality in extreme mood states

Elizabeth Margaret Tallentire
Psychological factors related to epileptic and non-epileptic seizures

Roisin Turner
Psychiatric diagnosis: Views of service users and professionals

Emma Tyerman
Family experiences after paediatric acquired brain injury

Helen Walls
Well-being in psychologists

Marcelina Watkinson
Mothers’ experiences of postpartum psychosis and negative emotions during breastfeeding

Graduating year 2014

Dawn Johnson
Exploring experiences of parenting a child with autism

Amy Singleton
Young people’s perspectives on the role of the media in wellbeing

Kate Houlihan
Caring for looked after children from the perspectives of foster carers and social workers

Olivia Wadham
Understanding shared experiences of couples and families in which one person has dementia

Caroline Wyatt
Postnatal mental distress: Exploring the experiences of professionals, mothers, and significant others

Reed Cappleman
Managing bipolar moods without medication: A qualitative investigation

Amy D’Sa
Exploration of how children and young people self-construe following a traumatic experience

Hannah Wilson
Clinical psychologists’ experiences of accessing personal therapy during training

Rachel Wass
Compassion and burnout in community mental health work

Jennifer Hewitt
Young people, home and homelessness: A narrative exploration

Lucy Morris
The process of change in non-residential therapeutic communities

Diarmaid O’Lonargain
Experiencing health services and mentalisation-based treatment for borderline personality disorder: Service user perspectives

Roxanna Mohtashemi
An exploration of psychiatrists’ understanding and use of psychological formulation

Richard Colley
Hearts and minds: How do people experience and psychologically recover from traumatic cardiac treatment-related events?

Alexandra Turner
Caring for patients with dementia in a general hospital setting

Lisa Jones
An exploration of coping in sex work

Irram Walji
Narrative identities and self-constructs of individuals with histories of sexual and violent offences

Graduating year 2013

Jade Ark
Navigating the organ donation journey

Catherine Elson
The narratives of life before and after cardiothoracic transplant

Victoria Cairns
Experiences of support for first-episode psychosis: Family member seeking help and service user engagement with psychosocial formulation

Emma Chorlton
An exploration of the experiences of people with coexisting mental health and substance use difficulties

Sophie Croft
Does coping mediate the relationship between attachment style and substance use in a clinical and non-clinical sample?

Peter Dargan
Mental imagery and self-injury

Jannine Dowling
Therapists’ perceptions of the therapeutic alliance in ‘mandatory’ therapy with sex offenders

Samantha Fitzpatrick
Evolutionary processes in paranoia

Tim Fullen
Stories from adoptive parents: A narrative analysis

Suzanne Heffernan
The role of religion and faith in the recovery journey of individuals with experience of psychosis

Samantha Large
Service users’ experiences of risk management in relation to their own self-harm

Peter Lydon
Lived experiences of rupture and endings in psychological therapy

Gail Meadows
The development of the fatigue severity scale for people who have experienced a traumatic brain injury

Peter Morgan
A qualitative analysis of mindfulness-based cognitive therapy for stress for therapy health care workers

Nicola Pilkington
The experiences of body image in young women with type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1DM)

Jennifer Pomfret
Narratives of living well with cystic-fibrosis

Sumayah Refaat
Experience of bipolar disorder from the perspectives of parents with the diagnosis of family members

Stacey Story
Providing therapy whilst pregnant: Reflections of clinical psychologists after returning to work

Katherine Taylor
Art, creativity and mental health

Graduating year 2012

Claire Anderson
What is the process by which placement supervisors make difficult decisions in trainee assessment?

Eirini Athanasopoulou
Understanding previous experiences and developing parenting views: The perspective of adults who have been in care

Sharon Carr
Clients’ experiences of CBT: Meta-synthesis exploring experience and a narrative analysis of maintaining change

Helen Casey
Experiences of apathy in people with Parkinson’s disease: A qualitative exploration

Samantha Cooke
Narratives of experts by experience and conceptualisations of mental health recovery

Katy Flynn
“A post-transplant person”. Narratives of heart of lung transplantation and intensive care unit delirium

Ian Gill
Psychological factors associated with posttraumatic stress following brain injury

James Heath
Living with a pituitary tumour: A narrative analysis

Yvonne Heslop
Admission to discharge: Experiences of inpatient mental health care from the perspective of individuals with a diagnosis of borderline personality disorder

Carla Innes
Mechanisms of change in compassion focused therapy: A grounded theory investigation

Susan Knowles
Exploring parents’ understandings of their child’s journey into offending behaviours: A narrative analysis

Caroline Maxted
Huntington’s disease: Family experiences and presymptomatic genetic testing in young people

Claire McDonald
Palliative care professionals’ experiences of unusual spiritual phenomena at the end of life

Sinead Murphy
Narratives of change in fathers who have completed an Incredible Years parent training programme

Cara Pouchly
Cultural competence: The importance of exploring identity

Karen Quinn
The experience of stroke from the perspectives of survivors and partners

Elizabeth Rushbrooke
Exploring intimate relationships for people with intellectual disabilities

Carey Viala
Eating disorders, alexithymia and emotions: A narrative review and qualitative study

Rebecca Waldron
Navigating the solid organ transplant process

Samuel Watts
Cultural factors in the provision of psychological support

Graduating year 2011

Deb Anderson
Making sense of intimacy and sexual health for people with exstrophy-epispadias complex conditions

Natalie Arran
Illness perceptions, coping styles and psychological distress in adults with Huntington’s disease

Suzey Breckon
Listening to the voices of intellectually disabled offenders: Qualitative enquiry in secure services

Ruth Clayton
The journey through early intervention services: A narrative analysis

Catherine Cooper
Stories of ongoing transition: An exploration of becoming and being retired

Deanna Donnellan
The interpersonal impact of trauma: Couples’ experiences and current approaches to treatment

Rebecca Dunn
The relationship between trauma and psychosis

Jana Fusekova
Mechanisms of change: A qualitative investigation into the emergence of exits in cognitive analytic therapy

Ayse Gurpinar-Morgan
The process of seeking asylum in the United Kingdom

Victoria Lee
Older people’s experiences of residential care

Claire Matchwick
The perceptions of cause and control in people with Alzheimer’s disease

Kriten Mistry
Exploring the psychological experiences of people living with a diagnosis of motor neurone disease

Charlotte Morris
Emotion and self-harm

Kathryn Pemberton
Self-conscious emotions and eating disorders

Jodie Quigg
An exploration into the active ingredients within therapeutic practice: A meta-synthesis of the therapeutic alliance and a grounded theory of the mechanisms of change

Karen Seal
Family experiences of the cancer journey

Nicola Spence
Improving the effectiveness of supervision: A clinical psychology perspective

Emily Suter
Obesity: An emotion focused understanding and the role of clinical psychology

Graduating year 2010

Elizabeth Allsop
The construction of the coparenting relationship: A qualitative enquiry

Melanie Booth
The self regulation model and psychological outcomes of people with primary brain tumours

Elizabeth Chamberlain
Stories of adoption: A narrative analysis

Suzi Curtis
Aspects and stories of helpful therapy and its outcomes: A narrative enquiry

Mary Delaney
Perceptions of cause and control of impulse control disorders in people with Parkinson’s disease

Amy Fisher
Partners of alcohol-dependent adults: intervention effectiveness, predictors of enabling behaviours and gathering data by-proxy

Tessa Franken
A qualitative exploration into adolescents’ understanding of emotional difficulties in female peers

Karen Green
Couples’ participation in dementia research and partners’ perspectives on their relationship in young onset dementia

Rebecca Jones
An investigation of vicarious posttraumatic growth

Catherine Keen
A qualitative exploration of sensing presence of deceased following bereavement

Rachel Lever
Religiosity: Effects on client and clinician

Christina Mason
A narrative exploration of the experiences of clinical psychologists following client suicide

Lindsay McMahon
The experience of fibromyalgia: A narrative inquiry

Zoe Nowell
The subjective experience of personhood in dementia care settings

Cathy Parker
A qualitative investigation of the experience of coping and recovery from stroke at a young age

Aneela Pilkington
Psychological well-being and barriers to accessing psychological services within South Asian and Muslim populations

Helena Rose
Using a participatory approach to explore how young people understand the concept of social inclusion

Ian Rushton
Developing an early therapeutic alliance with the transferred client

Sangeetha Senthinathan
A qualitative exploration of the role of identity in older people experiencing chronic pain

Rachel Skippon
Exploring and supporting stories of resilience in parenthood

Greg Taylor
A qualitative investigation into non-clinical voice hearing: What factors may protect against distress?

Graduating year 2009

Rachel Chin
A qualitative exploration of first time fathers’ experiences of becoming a father

Keely Clarke
Do shame, self-criticism and/or depression mediate the relationship between negative early life experiences and later problems with eating?

Beatrice Cox
How does having Asperger syndrome affect parenting experience?

Fiona Eccles
Perceptions of cause and control in people with Parkinson’s disease

Kathryn Evans
Support staff’s experiences of relationship formation and development in secure services

Kara Garforth
Service users’ perceptions of change following treatment in democratic therapeutic communities

Katie Hatton
The experience of guilt, shame and entrapment in carers of people with dementia and the relationship of these variables to psychological outcome

Katie Jackson
Understanding young offenders’ experiences of drinking alcohol: An interpretative phenomenological analysis

Jenny King
Dementia and long-term care experiences from a relative’s perspective

Amy Mawson
A qualitative exploration of voice hearing within an interpersonal context

Victoria Molyneaux
The caring relationship: reflections on terminology and the concept of ‘couplehood’ compulsions in people with dementia

Rachel Orr
A qualitative study exploring people’s responses to their partners’ and spouses’ obsessions and compulsions

Hannah Osborne
A psychosocial model of parent fixation in people with dementia: The role of personality and attachment

Amie Smith
Attachment patterns, supervisory style and the supervisory working alliance

Katie Splevins
Theories of posttraumatic growth: Vicarious and cross-cultural aspects

Lesley Taylor
Listening to people with learning disabilities about their identity and experiences of therapy

Jan Warnes
‘Rebuilding after the storm’: Stories of young motherhood

Louise Woods
Multiple Sclerosis and the experience of self

Graduating year 2008

Jane Bewley
Does alexithymia mediate the relationship between obligatory exercise and eating pathology in adult female exercisers?

Claire Blackburn
Client attachment to services, satisfaction with services and their predictors

Naomi Brown
Retrospective accounts of cognitive behaviour therapy for eating disorders: Which aspects were most useful

Clare Dixon
A qualitative exploration into young children’s perspectives and understandings of emotional difficulties in other children

Jennifer Elvish
Clinical and demographic predictors of poor insight in individuals with obsessions and compulsions

Sara Evans
Stroke, psychological outcomes and the self-regulatory model

Stephen Field
Subjective experiences of personal relationships throughout the course of schizophrenia: Low secure service-users’ perspectives

Lee Fitzpatrick
A qualitative analysis of mindfulness-based cognitive therapy in Parkinson’s disease

Sonia Guirguis
Burnout and ways of coping among workers in young offender services

Kathryn Heaton
Men with intellectual disabilities who display sexually abusive behaviour

Gemma Horridge
BurnEd: Exploring the factors influencing a burn-injured child’s return to education.

Clare Jefferson
The pregnancy and health care experiences of women who became mothers when they were teenagers

Kelly McCarthy-Sweeney
The impact of adolescent self-harm on parental well-being

Louise McKenzie
An examination of the factors that affect activities of daily living skills in individuals who have undergone coronary artery bypass graft surgery

Chantel Morland
An investigation of the factors associated with body dissatisfaction in adult men

Louise Phin
Paradox and conflict: An exploration of personal accounts of self-harm and self-injury

Jonathan Rust
Evaluation of a school-based intervention addressing children’s appraisals of interparental conflict

Rachel Scullion
Exploring bereavement and spirituality in adults with intellectual disabilities

Emma Simpson
The experiences of administrative staff working in Child and Adolescent Mental Health: A grounded theory study

Alison Thorpe
Patients’ experiences of psychiatric intensive care: A wellbeing perspective

David Todd
A phenomenological analysis of delusions in people with Parkinson’s disease

Jane Toner
Asking about childhood trauma: The experiences of psychological therapists in early intervention services

Sharon Twigg
Facial difference: Psychosocial implications for individuals and relevant others

Stephen Weatherhead
Muslim views on mental health and psychology

Graduating year 2007

Hayley Bailey
Distress and the self-care practices of trainee clinical psychologists.

Dominic Basson
An investigation into the role of worry and rumination in deliberate self harm

Elizabeth Bray
A qualitative study of postnatal resilience in fathers and mothers and what services can do to help.

Claire Beale
Mothers’ experiences of raising a child with autism.

Anna Caudwell
Differential coping with disease-related stressors and its effects on psychological outcomes and quality of life in people with Parkinson’s disease and their spouses

David Dawson
The implicit relational procedure: Assessing the implicit beliefs of sexual offenders.

Jennifer Deakin
An exploratory study to identify obstacles and enablers to communication about erectile dysfunction following cardiac trauma

Johan Elliott
The relationship between magical thinking, thought-shape fusion and symptoms associated with eating difficulties in a non-clinical population

Ashley Fallon
Forensic inpatient sexuality: A qualitative investigation of the nursing perspective

Joanna Farrington
A study investigating the relationship between parental conflict, self-concept and the roles children play in bullying situations

Louise Ferguson
The effects of training on the ability of adults with a learning disability to give informed consent to medication

Nicholas Gore
Theory of mind and perspective – taking ability amongst people with intellectual disabilities

Joanne Gorry
Conceptualisations of risk within female sex work: A literature review

Chris Groom
Online game playing, lifestyle factors and general health in men aged 18-40

Sarah Holden
Subjective experiences of transgenerational parenting effects: A qualitative analysis

Amy Hothersall
Illness beliefs, coping and psychological outcome in people with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease

Matthew Kemsley
User involvement in personality disorder literature: Methodological, clinical and theoretical considerations

Jane Lawton
The use of alcohol in a chronic pain population: Physical and psychosocial factors

Rachael Line
Understanding intimacy and its effects on wellbeing for a sample of older women: A grounded theory approach

Shirley Lockeridge
The experience of carers of people with young onset dementia

Andrew McLean
Psychological well-being and perceptions of stigma in people with a disability

Laura Pickering
The role of attachment in paranoia and hallucination

Joanne Singleton
Shame in adults: Exploring the relationships between shame, attachment, the family system and psychological outcome

Graduating year 2006

Elizabeth Billington
Does hopefulness predict good adjustment to chronic renal failure and consequent dialysis?

Aileen Burnett
An investigation into self-harm in primary school aged children

James Carr
The impact of pre-morbid personality on challenging behaviour in dementia

Lisa Gallimore
Young children’s beliefs and attitudes towards mental health

Amanda Gill
Development and primary validation of the Thought Control Questionnaire (TCQ) for adolescents

Hannah Goring
Measures of depressive rumination and of underlying metacognitive beliefs: A factor analytic study

Lynne Heyes
Investigating the relationship between presence of negative thoughts and control strategies in postnatally depressed and non-postnatally depressed mothers after childbirth

Rebecca Humphreys
The effect of individual differences upon response styles to low mood

Rasha Khiami
Relationships between perfectionism, perseverative negative thinking and affect

Paula Killean
How do nursing staff, working in a secure forensic setting, talk about their responses to patients’ challenging behaviours: A qualitative study

Fiona Lattimer
The impact of child-centred play taught in behavioural parent training on the development of children’s language skills

Suzanne Lee
The psychological impact of a diagnosis of Alzheimer’s disease

Rachael McNulty
The experience of obesity: A qualitative study

Kavita Misra
The ruminative response scale: A cross-cultural factor analysis and gender comparison

Kirsty Pratt
An investigation of the psychosocial characteristics of individuals requesting cosmetic surgery on the NHS

Clare Punshon
Emotional reactions to receiving a diagnosis of Asperger’s syndrome

Sandra Renga
Harnessing hope to promote positive reappraisal coping and post-traumatic growth

Laura Shotton
The role of appraisal and coping in post-acquired brain injury adjustment; A qualitative investigation

Becky Simm
An understanding of self harm in primary school children

Stephanie Sneider
Trauma experiences of adolescents with psychosis

Caroline Williamson
Caregivers’ experiences of caring for a spouse with Parkinson’s disease and psychotic symptoms

Jacqui Wood
Adapting the Illness Perception Questionnaire for mothers of children with autism and Down’s syndrome

Anwen Woodcock
Does rumination run in families?

Anna Warm
The role of attachment experiences and emotional regulation in deliberate self-harm

Graduating year 2005

Yasmeen Akram-Saleem
A study to investigate empathy amongst adult offenders and non-offenders with mild intellectual disabilities

Jennifer Atkinson
A study to investigate the emotional and behavioural adjustment of asylum seeker, refugee and British children attending a primary school in the United Kingdom

Clare Calvert
An exploration of the relationships between trauma and delusional ideation in secure services

Rachel Crossley
Experiments of antipsychotic medication for people with learning disabilities

Ruth Fowlie
Social inclusion, citizenship and people with intellectual disabilities

Ruth Fox
A study of the relationship between childhood trauma and symptom profiles of bipolar disorder

Tamsin Fryer
The experience of being diagnosed with multiple sclerosis: An interpretive phenomenological analysis

Angela Goddard Walsh
An exploration of clinical psychologists’ experiences of informed consent in psychodynamic therapy

Joanna Hearne
Experiences of the child protection system for women with alcohol problems

Leanne Holcroft
Post traumatic stress disorder after stroke

Catherine Houseman
Anger beliefs and behaviour; an investigation of associations with hypomania in a non-clinical sample

Linsay Kirk
A phenomenological study to explore the impact on children of parental brain injury

Tania Mann
Problem-solving confidence, rumination and depression

Ruth McIver
Illness representations and psychological adjustment in people with end-stage renal disease on dialysis

Karen Shimmon
An investigation of inhibitory control in hard to manage preschoolers and the effects of ‘executive skills’ training

Jenny Shuttleworth
Factors affecting the correspondence between teacher and child self-reports of anxiety and depression

Rachel Stretton
An exploratory investigation into sex-related communications by parents of an adolescent with intellectual disabilities

Louise Talbot
Psychological outcome in people with Parkinson’s disease and their spouses: The effect of motor fluctuations

Lorraine Tatum
ADHD: Diagnosis, medication and self-identity in adolescents. An interpretative phenomenological analysis

Claire Wilde
Relationships between parenting styles and metacognitive beliefs about rumination in depression

Graduating year 2004

Lucy Attenborough
Changing young people’s attitudes toward people with mental health problems: Evaluation of an educational Approach

Amy Burns
Family and marital adaptation following traumatic brain injury

Erica Clayton
The experiences and identity issues of men with intellectual disabilities who sexually offend against women

Cindy Davies
The impact of a booster session following behavioural parent training

Saffron Dickinson
Repetitive thought as a predictor of treatment outcome in individuals who misuse alcohol

Dickson Katharine
Body site specificity of self-injurious behaviour in children with severe intellectual disability

Ailyn Garley
A case series to pilot cognitive behaviour therapy for female urinary incontinence

Kate Green
An Investigation of transgenerational parenting constructs and their relationship to childhood behaviour difficulties

Pauline Hall
Postnatal negative cognitions: A review of current understanding and development of a self-report scale

Lindsey Hampson
Parental attributions, responses, and expectancy towards behaviours of children with a diagnosis of Asperger’s syndrome

Catherine Marshall
Breast reconstruction: Its impact on patients’ and partner’ sexual functioning

Stephen Mullin
Does executive functioning predict behaviour change in offenders following the enhances thinking skills programme?

Paul Russell
Carer responses to challenging behaviour: The role of optimism

Jennifer Seamans
Experiences of pregnancy for women with eating disorders: A qualitative investigation

Paul Skirrow
The prevalence and correlates of burnout amongst direct care workers of adults with intellectual disabilities

Sara Williamson
Self-esteem and psychological adjustment in adolescents with Asperger syndrome

Jonathan Willis
An Investigation into the association between physical activity and dimensions of psychological well-being among children with an intellectual disability

Graduating year 2003

Susanne Albrecht
The involvement of people with learning disabilities in person-centred planning

Sara Banks
Models of illness amongst carers of people with dementia

Jo Black
The impact of a child with Asperger’s syndrome on parents

Julie Blakeley
Quality of life amongst adolescent survivors of childhood heart surgery

Caroline Browne
Attachment behaviours and parent fixation amongst adults with dementia

Louise Cumbley
Factors associated with hallucinations and delusions in children

Christina Fitzgerald
Sexuality and women with learning disabilities

Lucinda Harter
Understanding of the basic principles of CBT amongst older adults and adults with dementia

Lloyd Humphreys
Family environment and challenging behaviour in families with a young child with learning disabilities

Joanne Johnson
Meta-cognition and rumination in depression

Elizabeth Peacock
Post-traumatic stress disorder amongst adults experiencing burns

Jacqueline Peyton
Comparing models of hypertension between older adults and professionals

Lorraine Turnbull
What skills are necessary for people with learning disabilities to engage in community leisure activities?

Graduating year 2002

Alison Blackshaw
An investigation to determine the social and psychological characteristics of people who frequently attend accident & emergency services

Nigel Colbert
A qualitative investigation into the experiences of clients and therapists engaged in psychodynamic interpersonal therapy following an episode of deliberate self-harm

Rupa Gone
Illness representations, coping, depression and anxiety in South Asian and British people with inflammatory arthritis

Cheryl Hutton
Children’s adjustment following parental separation: The role of interparental conflict and children’s appraisals

Alec Laraway
Prevalence of emotional disorders in adults with Asperger syndrome and access to mental health services

Richa Mehta
Burnout in clinical psychologists in the UK: An examination of its nature, extent and correlates

Karen Mellor
Emotion identification, emotion word fluency and alexithymia in people with learning disabilities

Moira Phillips
Theory of mind and concept of death in children with autistic spectrum disorder

Helen Rhodes
Care staff responses to behaviour changes resulting from dementia in people with learning disabilities

Julie Riding
Psychological functioning, coping strategies and metabolic control in adolescents with insulin dependent diabetes mellitus

Kirsty Sherratt
Emotional and behavioural responses to music in people with dementia

Julie Walmsley
Parental attributions and responses towards challenging behaviour displayed by children and adolescents with learning disabilities

Graduating year 2001

Gerrard Burrell-Hodgson
Theory of mind and children with autism: A cross-modal deficit?

Magdalene Cox
Thought-shape fusion, obsessive-compulsive disorder and eating disorders

Clare Firth
Women considering preventive mastectomy: A qualitative investigation of the decision-making process

James Hoy
Central coherence and children with autism: Consistency of deficits across central coherence tasks

Rachel McCormick
Women experiencing domestic violence during pregnancy: Impact on the mother and the child.

Gill McIntee
Dissociation and self-harm in adolescent women attending A&E departments.

Andrew Moss
The role of dysfunctional attitudes and knowledge in health anxiety: The case of HIV/AIDS education

Victoria Pike
Physical functioning, coping and quality of life amongst adults in need of long-term rehabilitation.

Claire Rockliffe-Fidler
Sexual functioning in women with diabetes

Samantha Todd
Attributions, emotional reactions and willingness of offer help to a person with dementia and challenging behaviours: comparing support staff and clinical psychologists

Jacqueline Wilson
Testing the congruent schema/life event theory of depression in outpatients of an adult mental health service

Graduating year 2000

Caroline Belcher
The impact on parents of their pre-school child being accidentally burned: A phenomenological investigation.

Jaime Craig
Social reasoning, paranoia and theory of mind in adults with Asperger’s syndrome and paranoid psychosis

Catherine Gartside
Social support as a mediator of the impact of crime on the mental health of older adults

Rebecca Hughes
Negative therapist interventions and patient outcomes in psychodynamic psychotherapy

Warren Larkin
Attributions, hallucinations, delusions and post traumatic stress disorder amongst paramedic staff

Ian Smith
The role of autobiographical memory in problem solving and challenging behaviour in people with mild/moderate learning disabilities

David Wheatcroft
Attitudes towards help-seeking, coping and mental health in farmers

Guidance on the thesis process for trainees

2019 cohort and onwards

The thesis is the largest piece of research work that trainees undertake. It requires considerable planning. This section tells you how to go about planning for your thesis.

Initial proposal form for thesis project

In October of the first year (full time programme) or second year (part time programme) trainees will be asked to submit a form expressing a preference for up to five topic areas from those identified in the thesis ideas booklet for that year, which must include topics offered by at least three different supervisors. The trainee will then be allocated an academic research supervisor, who will in most cases be a member of the programme team. The trainee will then   receive supervision from their supervisor relating to  the Thesis Preparation Assignment (submission in March) and then draft a thesis proposal form with the input of their supervisor(s) for submission in June of the first year of training. The level of support provided is detailed in the consistency framework for research. This proposal will be reviewed and the trainee informed of the outcome.

Ethics committee proposal(s)

For trainees to plan their research time effectively, it is vital that they are ready to start work on their project in good time. For trainees on the full-time programme this is normally considered to be by January of the second year, and for trainees on the part-time programme April of the third year. This means gaining approval from relevant ethics committee(s) well between October and December in the second year. Therefore, it is recommended that trainees make applications to relevant ethics committee(s) as early as possible. This is to allow time to make any alterations ethics committees require, considering the fact that some ethics committees do not meet as frequently over the summer. Supervisors would expect to see at least one complete draft of the ethics application before submission, including copies of measures and draft information sheets and consent forms.

Custodianship of the data

Please note that your thesis supervisor will act as the data custodian throughout the life of the project.

Funding for research

Trainees may wish to consult the policy on funding for research in the online handbook.

The Thesis

The thesis is comprised of three papers; a literature review, research paper and critical appraisal. For details regarding the supervisory support that trainees can expect for the thesis, please see the ‘consistency framework’. Links to both resources can be found at the bottom of the page.

Presentation guidelines

Following the submission of your thesis, you will be required to give a short presentation of your work to fellow trainees, supervisors and members of the wider faculty. This should be thought of as a public presentation and copies of the presentation will be made available afterwards to the public through the course website. You should bear this in mind when choosing what to present and include on your slides.

Electronic submission in the library

Trainees are required to submit an electronic copy of their thesis to the University Library using an online system. More information about this can be found in the guide to depositing your thesis below.

Guide to the thesis format and examination
Thesis contract and action plan
Thesis proposal form
Research expenses
Data collection and analysis methods
Deposit your Thesis – a how to guide
Consistency framework

2014 - 2018 cohort
The thesis is the largest piece of research work that trainees undertake. It requires considerable planning. This section tells you how to go about planning for your thesis.

Initial proposal form for thesis project

After the Introduction to the Thesis teaching session the trainee will identify three broad topic ideas and email these to the research co-ordinator in October. The trainee will then be allocated an academic research supervisor from the programme team. The trainee then drafts a thesis proposal form with the input of their supervisor(s). This form is to be completed in the first part of the second year. This proposal will be reviewed and the trainee informed of the outcome.

Ethics committee proposal(s)

For trainees to plan their research time effectively, it is vital that they are ready to start work on their project by October of the third year. This means gaining approval from relevant ethics committee(s) well before October in the third year. Therefore, it is recommended that trainees make applications to relevant ethics committee(s) as early as possible. This is to allow time to make any alterations ethics committees require, taking into account the fact that some ethics committees do not meet as frequently over the summer. Supervisors would expect to see one complete draft of the ethics application before submission, including copies of measures and draft information sheets and consent forms.

Custodianship of the data

Please note that your thesis supervisor will act as the data custodian throughout the life of the project.

Funding for research

Trainees may wish to consult the policy on funding for research, which can be found in the online handbook.

Literature review

To assist trainees in writing the literature review in good time, supervisors would expect to see the following:

Draft literature review structure. This should be no more than a couple of pages of A4, and should contain the proposed title of the literature review and any subheadings, together with brief outlines of what issues each trainee is planning to discuss under each subheading. This should enable trainees to plan the overall structure of the literature review. Supervisors would expect to see this draft literature review structure in the first part of the s year. At the same time, supervisors also need to see the name of the target journal that is being considered for the literature review and the notes for contributors for that journal.

A first complete draft of the literature review should normally be completed and handed in to supervisors by mid-December of the third year. It should be a complete first draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, literature review, any tables/figures and reference list.

A second complete draft of the literature review should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of February of the third year. It should be a complete second draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, literature review, any tables/figures and reference list.

Research paper

To assist trainees in writing the research paper in good time, the research team would normally expect to see the following:

By the end of December of the third year, the name of the target journal that is being considered for the research paper and the notes for contributors for that journal. This is to ensure that trainees begin writing the research paper in the appropriate format for their target journal. However, a trainee may find that he or she wishes to change the target journal at some point; this is not a problem as long as the new target journal is acceptable to the research team.

A first draft of the introduction and method of the research paper should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of January of the third year. This should be written in the format of the target journal, and should also contain a title page and a reference list of the references cited in the research paper so far.

A complete draft of the research paper should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of March of the 3rd year. It should be a complete draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, introduction, method, results, discussion, tables/figures and reference list.

Critical appraisal section of the thesis

The research team would normally expect to see a first draft of the critical appraisal, completed and handed in to the research team by the end of March in your third year. This should be written in the format of the target journal used for the research paper, and should also contain a title page and a reference list. Given that the critical appraisal contains reflections on the whole thesis process, it is usual to leave this section to the end to write.

The Thesis

The research team would normally expect to see a complete draft of the thesis by the end of April of the third year. This should contain all the constituent parts of the thesis, including a cover page, word counts, the declaration, acknowledgements, contents pages, the literature review, the research paper, the critical appraisal, the ethics committee proposal, and appendices. Please also refer to the consistency framework for details of support.

Presentation guidelines

Following the submission of your thesis, you will be required to give a short presentation of your work to fellow trainees, supervisors and members of the wider faculty. This should be thought of as a public presentation and copies of the presentation will be made available afterwards to the public through the course website. You should bear this in mind when choosing what to present and include on your slides.

Examples of previous presentations can be found on the programme website.

Electronic submission in the library

Trainees are required to submit an electronic copy of their thesis to the University Library using an online system. More information about this can be found in the guide to depositing your thesis below.

Guide to the thesis format and examination
Thesis contract and action plan
Thesis proposal form
Research expenses
Deposit your Thesis – a how to guide
Consistency framework

2013 cohort
The thesis is the largest piece of research work that trainees undertake. It requires considerable planning. This section tells you how to go about planning for your thesis.

Initial proposal form for thesis project

After the Introduction to the Thesis teaching session the trainees need to gain agreement, in principle, from a member of the research team to act as the academic supervisor. The trainee then works up a thesis proposal form with the input of their supervisor(s). This form is to be completed by mid-December of the second year. Ideas for the thesis project do not have to be finalised at this point. The academic supervisor will then liaise with another member of the research team to gain feedback on the proposal which will be communicated to trainees. The trainee should then complete and submit the thesis feedback form.

Ethics committee proposal(s)

For trainees to plan their research time effectively, it is vital that they are ready to start work on their project by October of the third year. This means gaining approval from relevant ethics committee(s) well before October in the third year. Therefore, it is recommended that trainees make applications to relevant ethics committee(s) for June meetings (of the second year) at the latest. This is to allow time to make any alterations ethics committees require, taking into account the fact that some ethics committees do not meet as frequently over the summer. After consultation with a research team member, staff would normally expect to see one complete draft of the ethics committee application by the end of May of the second year, including copies of measures and draft information sheets and consent forms.

Custodianship of the data

Please note that the pFACT form asks about the custodianship of the data relating to your thesis. The Research Director will act as the data custodian throughout the life of the project.

Funding for research

Trainees may wish to consult the policy on funding for research, which can be found in the online handbook.

Literature review

To assist trainees in writing the literature review in good time, the research team would normally expect to see the following:

Draft literature review structure. This should be no more than a couple of pages of A4, and should contain the proposed title of the literature review and any subheadings, together with brief outlines of what issues each trainee is planning to discuss under each subheading. This should enable trainees to plan the overall structure of the literature review. The research team would expect to see this draft literature review structure by the end of October in the third year. At the same time, staff also need to see the name of the target journal that is being considered for the literature review and the notes for contributors for that journal.

A first complete draft of the literature review should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by mid-December of the third year. It should be a complete first draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, literature review, any tables/figures and reference list.

A second complete draft of the literature review should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of February of the third year. It should be a complete second draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, literature review, any tables/figures and reference list.

Research paper

To assist trainees in writing the research paper in good time, the research team would normally expect to see the following:

By the end of December of the third year, the name of the target journal that is being considered for the research paper and the notes for contributors for that journal. This is to ensure that trainees begin writing the research paper in the appropriate format for their target journal. However, a trainee may find that he or she wishes to change the target journal at some point; this is not a problem as long as the new target journal is acceptable to the research team.

A first draft of the introduction and method of the research paper should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of January of the third year. This should be written in the format of the target journal, and should also contain a title page and a reference list of the references cited in the research paper so far.

A complete draft of the research paper should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of March of the 3rd year. It should be a complete draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, introduction, method, results, discussion, tables/figures and reference list.

Critical appraisal section of the thesis

The research team would normally expect to see a first draft of the critical appraisal, completed and handed in to the research team by the end of March in your third year. This should be written in the format of the target journal used for the research paper, and should also contain a title page and a reference list. Given that the critical appraisal contains reflections on the whole thesis process, it is usual to leave this section to the end to write.

The Thesis

The research team would normally expect to see a complete draft of the thesis by the end of April of the third year. This should contain all the constituent parts of the thesis, including a cover page, word counts, the declaration, acknowledgements, contents pages, the literature review, the research paper, the critical appraisal, the ethics committee proposal, and appendices. Please also refer to the consistency framework for details of support.

Presentation guidelines

Following the submission of your thesis, you will be required to give a short presentation of your work to fellow trainees, supervisors and members of the wider faculty. This should be thought of as a public presentation and copies of the presentation will be made available afterwards to the public through the course website. You should bear this in mind when choosing what to present and include on your slides.

Examples of previous presentations can be found on the programme website.

Electronic submission in the library

Trainees are required to submit an electronic copy of their thesis to the University Library using an online system. More information about this can be found on the eTheses guide below.

Thesis format, word limits and advice given to examiners
Thesis proposal form
Thesis feedback form (2014 cohort onwards)
Thesis feedback form (2013 cohort)
Thesis feedback form (2012 cohort)
eTheses Guide

2012 cohort
The thesis is the largest piece of research work that trainees undertake. It requires considerable planning. This section tells you how to go about planning for your thesis.

Initial proposal form for thesis project

The thesis proposal form is to be completed by of December of your second year. Ideas for the thesis project do not have to be finalised at this point, but this form gives the thesis review panels (made up of course staff, trainees and service users) the opportunity to evaluate each trainee’s initial thesis research idea, and to allocate to each trainee the most appropriate research team member.

Ethics committee proposal(s)

For trainees to plan their research time effectively, it is vital that they are ready to start work on their project by October of the third year. This means gaining approval from relevant ethics committee(s) well before October in the third year. Therefore, it is recommended that trainees make applications to relevant ethics committee(s) for June meetings (of the second year) at the latest. This is to allow time to make any alterations ethics committees require, taking into account the fact that some ethics committees do not meet as frequently over the summer. After consultation with a research team member, staff would normally expect to see one complete draft of the ethics committee application by the end of May of the second year, including copies of measures and draft information sheets and consent forms.

Custodianship of the data

Please note that the pFACT form asks about the custodianship of the data relating to your thesis. The Research Director will act as the data custodian throughout the life of the project.

Funding for research

Trainees may wish to consult the policy on funding for research, which can be found in the online handbook.

Literature review

To assist trainees in writing the literature review in good time, the research team would normally expect to see the following:

Draft literature review structure. This should be no more than a couple of pages of A4, and should contain the proposed title of the literature review and any subheadings, together with brief outlines of what issues each trainee is planning to discuss under each subheading. This should enable trainees to plan the overall structure of the literature review. The research team would expect to see this draft literature review structure by the end of October in the third year. At the same time, staff also need to see the name of the target journal that is being considered for the literature review and the notes for contributors for that journal.

A first complete draft of the literature review should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by mid-December of the third year. It should be a complete first draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, literature review, any tables/figures and reference list.

A second complete draft of the literature review should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of February of the third year. It should be a complete second draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, literature review, any tables/figures and reference list.

Research paper

To assist trainees in writing the research paper in good time, the research team would normally expect to see the following:

By the end of December of the third year, the name of the target journal that is being considered for the research paper and the notes for contributors for that journal. This is to ensure that trainees begin writing the research paper in the appropriate format for their target journal. However, a trainee may find that he or she wishes to change the target journal at some point; this is not a problem as long as the new target journal is acceptable to the research team.

A first draft of the introduction and method of the research paper should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of January of the third year. This should be written in the format of the target journal, and should also contain a title page and a reference list of the references cited in the research paper so far.

A complete draft of the research paper should normally be completed and handed in to the research team by the end of March of the 3rd year. It should be a complete draft, written in the format of the target journal, containing a title page, abstract, introduction, method, results, discussion, tables/figures and reference list.

Critical appraisal section of the thesis

The research team would normally expect to see a first draft of the critical appraisal, completed and handed in to the research team by the end of March in your third year. This should be written in the format of the target journal used for the research paper, and should also contain a title page and a reference list. Given that the critical appraisal contains reflections on the whole thesis process, it is usual to leave this section to the end to write.

The Thesis

The research team would normally expect to see a complete draft of the thesis by the end of April of the third year. This should contain all the constituent parts of the thesis, including a cover page, word counts, the declaration, acknowledgements, contents pages, the literature review, the research paper, the critical appraisal, the ethics committee proposal, and appendices. Please also refer to the consistency framework for details of support.

Presentation guidelines

Following the submission of your thesis, you will be required to give a short presentation of your work to fellow trainees, supervisors and members of the wider faculty. This should be thought of as a public presentation and copies of the presentation will be made available afterwards to the public through the course website. You should bear this in mind when choosing what to present and include on your slides.

Examples of previous presentations can be found on the programme website.

Electronic submission in the library

Trainees are required to submit an electronic copy of their thesis to the University Library using an online system. More information about this can be found on the eTheses guide below.

Thesis format, word limits and advice given to examiners
Thesis proposal form
Thesis feedback form (2012 cohort)
eTheses Guide

Research expenses

2022 cohort onwards

The Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology (DClinPsy) programme has a limited amount of funds which can be used in some cases to support research expenses. Research expenses should be avoided wherever possible and if they are necessary must be kept to a minimum. Due to the limited budget for these expenses, it may not always be possible to reimburse all expenses. Where expenses are approved, these are charged to the trainee’s £500 training budget. Please note that £100 of the training budget is ring-fenced for the payment of the involvement of experts by experience in research.

Policy details

Trainees are required to outline the anticipated costs within their research proposals and seek approval from the Research Director before any costs are committed to. Approval of the research proposal does not constitute approval of the expenses outlined in the form.

Examples of the types of costs this is likely to be, and guidance about how this is requested and monitored, are included in the table below.

Type of cost Details Action required by trainee
Postage Postage for envelopes sent from the university does not incur a charge(1). None
Postage for envelopes sent from off campus are to be purchased by the Research Coordinator. Email Research Coordinator to request the stamps that are required a week in advance.
Freepost labels to be added for participants to return post to the trainee are costed at the price of a standard second class stamp per label. Trainees are given sheets of Freepost labels. The trainee should inform the research coordinator if any are not returned by potential participants.
Stationery A4, A5 and small white envelopes are available – these are costed at 2p per envelope Collect from Research Coordinator. For larger quantities email in advance.
Travel to research interviews Details for any travel outside the North-West region(2) must be approved in advance Email the Research Coordinator with the details. Complete and return the NHS expenses form to Programme Assistant – Placements. Include the county on the form.
Travel for research participants to attend interviews Participants are reimbursed for their travel for research interviews up to a maximum of £20, subject to the approval of the Research Director. Guidelines for this process are covered within this policy
Outgoing mobile phone calls Any outgoing calls must be approved by the Research Director in advance. All trainees should use either a landline within HIO or Teams for research interviews where possible, subject to ethics approval. An email must be sent to the Research Coordinator in advance of any outgoing call to seek approval for the cost. A mobile phone handset can be borrowed from the programme.
Translation Costs for translation must be approved in advance Inform the Research Coordinator of the translation required and a quote before the booking is made.
Prize draws and thank you gifts for participants It is unlikely that prize draws and thank you gifts will be funded Inform the Research Coordinator in advance

(1) The 1st and 2nd class labels are only postage paid when sent from the university. For items sent outside the university standard stamps are required. For participants to return documents the freepost address envelopes should be used.
(2) For these purposes the North-West region is defined as Cumbria, Cheshire/Wirral, Merseyside, Greater Manchester and Lancashire

Reimbursement of expenses incurred by trainees for travel to research interviews

Trainees must use the NHS travel expense claim form for this expenditure and return this to the Programme Assistant – Placements.

Mileage to academic teaching No payment
Mileage to and from placement At public transport rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage to clinical research At public transport rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage within placement At official rate

In all cases the trainee’s base is the University teaching site. It is appreciated that a number of trainees who live some distance from their base may feel disadvantaged but the above arrangements are consistent with current employment arrangements. When trainees visit participants for their research work or go to a site to conduct research for their thesis research, claims can only be made when the distance is greater than home to base, and then only at public transport rate. For example, if a trainee lives 50 miles from Lancaster but is collecting data for research at a hospital base (or participant’s house) that is 48 miles from home, then no claim could be made. If the hospital base (or participant’s house) is 52 miles from home, then a claim can be made for 52-50 = 2 miles at public transport rate.

Trainees should always attempt to find, and use, the cheapest form of transport. Claims may not be reimbursed where this is not the case.

Reimbursement of travel expenses incurred by research participants

We feel that it is important we allow trainees to offer reimbursement to potential research participants for travel where possible. In order to reimburse any travel expenses incurred trainees need to follow the following procedure:

  1. Email the Research Coordinator with the details of the anticipated travel who will seek approval from the Research Director.
  2. Ask the participant for an estimate of the expense they will incur to travel to and from the interview. At this point, if the participant intends to travel by public transport, check whether they are able to provide us with the receipts/tickets for their travel at the interview; for bus and train travel the participants may need their ticket for the return journey. If they are unable to provide receipts/tickets at the interview unfortunately we would not be able to reimburse their expenses there and then. If this is the case collect a copy of the business expense claim form and a freepost envelope for the form to be returned in from the office. When we receive the completed form from the participant we will authorise it and send it to the Finance Office to be processed for payment. Participants who have travelled by car can claim to be reimbursed for their total mileage at the 45p/mile rate by ticking the appropriate box on the receipt template.
  3. Inform the Research Coordinator of the sum you will require and the date you will need to collect it on giving at least 1 week’s notice. We are only able to reimburse expenses up to a maximum of £20 for each participant per interview.
  4. Collect the funds from the Research Coordinator and sign a sheet to confirm that you have received them.
  5. The Research Coordinator provides a ‘receipt’ for the participant to sign at the interview in order to confirm they have received payment for their expenses at the interview.
  6. Return the ‘receipt’ signed by the participants, alongside any receipts for public transport fares, to the office within 1 week of the collection date. If the participant has travelled by car they do not need to provide receipts for petrol and should be reimbursed using the 45p/mile rate.

No Funding Available

Apart from exceptional circumstances there is no budget to transcribe interview recordings.

Mobile phones

The course has a number of mobile phones for trainees to use to receive calls from participants in relation to the research they carry out on the course, therefore negating the need to give out either a personal or office number. If trainees intend to make longer outgoing calls it is possible to book a meeting room in HIO and use a landline for this purpose. If this is not possible trainees should use Teams for research interviews subject to ethical approval. The handsets are contracted to the course and if any calls are made on the handsets the course receives an itemised bill outlining the usage.

If you wish to borrow a phone contact the admin team.

Training budget

Please note that any costs that are incurred for research purposes will be included in your training budget.

Tariff information
Calls to landlines, EE and Orange mobile numbers 2p
Calls to other mobile networks 5p
Texts 3p
2019 to 2021 cohorts

The Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology (DClinPsy) programme has a limited amount of funds which can be used in some cases to support research expenses. Research expenses should be avoided wherever possible and if they are necessary must be kept to a minimum. Due to the limited budget for these expenses, it may not always be possible to reimburse all expenses. Any expenses that are approved are charged to the trainee’s £400 training budget.

Policy details

Trainees are required to outline the anticipated costs within their research proposals and seek approval from the Research Director before any costs are committed to. Approval of the research proposal does not constitute approval of the expenses outlined in the form..

Examples of the types of costs this is likely to be, and guidance about how this is requested and monitored, are included in the table below.

Type of cost Details Action required by trainee
Postage Postage for envelopes sent from the university does not incur a charge(1). None
Postage for envelopes sent from off campus are to be purchased by the Research Coordinator. Email Research Coordinator to request the stamps that are required a week in advance.
Freepost labels to be added for participants to return post to the trainee are costed at the price of a standard second class stamp per label. Trainees are given sheets of Freepost labels. The trainee should inform the research coordinator if any are not returned by potential participants.
Stationery A4, A5 and small white envelopes are available – these are costed at 2p per envelope Collect from Research Coordinator. For larger quantities email in advance.
Travel to research interviews Details for any travel outside the North-West region(2) must be approved in advance Email the Research Coordinator with the details. Complete and return the NHS expenses form to Programme Assistant – Placements. Include the county on the form.
Travel for research participants to attend interviews Participants are reimbursed for their travel for research interviews up to a maximum of £20, subject to the approval of the Research Director. Guidelines for this process are covered within this policy
Outgoing mobile phone calls Any outgoing calls must be approved by the Research Director in advance. All trainees should use either a landline within HIO or Teams for research interviews where possible, subject to ethics approval. An email must be sent to the Research Coordinator in advance of any outgoing call to seek approval for the cost. A mobile phone handset can be borrowed from the programme.
Translation Costs for translation must be approved in advance Inform the Research Coordinator of the translation required and a quote before the booking is made.
Prize draws for participants It is unlikely that prize draws will be funded Inform the Research Coordinator in advance

(1) The 1st and 2nd class labels are only postage paid when sent from the university. For items sent outside the university standard stamps are required. For participants to return documents the freepost address envelopes should be used.
(2) For these purposes the North-West region is defined as Cumbria, Cheshire/Wirral, Merseyside, Greater Manchester and Lancashire

Reimbursement of expenses incurred by trainees for travel to research interviews

Trainees must use the NHS travel expense claim form for this expenditure and return this to the Programme Assistant – Placements.

Mileage to academic teaching No payment
Mileage to and from placement At public transport rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage to clinical research At public transport rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage within placement At official rate

In all cases the trainee’s base is the University teaching site. It is appreciated that a number of trainees who live some distance from their base may feel disadvantaged but the above arrangements are consistent with current employment arrangements. When trainees visit participants for their research work or go to a site to conduct research for their thesis research, claims can only be made when the distance is greater than home to base, and then only at public transport rate. For example, if a trainee lives 50 miles from Lancaster but is collecting data for research at a hospital base (or participant’s house) that is 48 miles from home, then no claim could be made. If the hospital base (or participant’s house) is 52 miles from home, then a claim can be made for 52-50 = 2 miles at public transport rate.

Trainees should always attempt to find, and use, the cheapest form of transport. Claims may not be reimbursed where this is not the case.

Reimbursement of travel expenses incurred by research participants

We feel that it is important we allow trainees to offer reimbursement to potential research participants for travel where possible. In order to reimburse any travel expenses incurred trainees need to follow the following procedure:

  1. Email the Research Coordinator with the details of the anticipated travel who will seek approval from the Research Director.
  2. Ask the participant for an estimate of the expense they will incur to travel to and from the interview. At this point, if the participant intends to travel by public transport, check whether they are able to provide us with the receipts/tickets for their travel at the interview; for bus and train travel the participants may need their ticket for the return journey. If they are unable to provide receipts/tickets at the interview unfortunately we would not be able to reimburse their expenses there and then. If this is the case collect a copy of the business expense claim form and a freepost envelope for the form to be returned in from the office. When we receive the completed form from the participant we will authorise it and send it to the Finance Office to be processed for payment. Participants who have travelled by car can claim to be reimbursed for their total mileage at the 45p/mile rate by ticking the appropriate box on the receipt template.
  3. Inform the Research Coordinator of the sum you will require and the date you will need to collect it on giving at least 1 week’s notice. We are only able to reimburse expenses up to a maximum of £20 for each participant per interview.
  4. Collect the funds from the Research Coordinator and sign a sheet to confirm that you have received them.
  5. The Research Coordinator provides a ‘receipt’ for the participant to sign at the interview in order to confirm they have received payment for their expenses at the interview.
  6. Return the ‘receipt’ signed by the participants, alongside any receipts for public transport fares, to the office within 1 week of the collection date. If the participant has travelled by car they do not need to provide receipts for petrol and should be reimbursed using the 45p/mile rate.

No Funding Available

Apart from exceptional circumstances there is no budget for the following:

  • to transcribe interview recordings
  • to fund ‘thank you gifts’ to participants

Mobile phones

The course has a number of mobile phones for trainees to use to receive calls from participants in relation to the research they carry out on the course, therefore negating the need to give out either a personal or office number. If trainees intend to make longer outgoing calls it is possible to book a meeting room in HIO and use a landline for this purpose. If this is not possible trainees should use Teams for research interviews subject to ethical approval. The handsets are contracted to the course and if any calls are made on the handsets the course receives an itemised bill outlining the usage.

If you wish to borrow a phone contact the admin team.

Training budget

Please note that any costs that are incurred for research purposes will be included in your training budget.

Tariff information:
Call to landlines 3p
T-Mobile group 2.4p
T-Mobile other 4.6p
X network 13.8p
Texts 3p and 4.6p

 

2018 cohort and earlier
The Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology (DClinPsy) programme supports all research conducted by trainees.

Trainees may be allowed up to a maximum of £300 to cover costs incurred for the research they conduct throughout the course of training that have been approved by the Research Director. They are also required to outline the anticipated costs within their research proposals.

Examples of the types of costs this is likely to be, and guidance about how this is requested and monitored, are included in the table below.

Type of cost Details Action required by trainee
Postage Postage for envelopes sent from the university are not charged(1). None
Postage for envelopes sent from off campus are to be purchased by the Research Coordinator. Email Research Coordinator to request the stamps that are required a week in advance.
Freepost labels to be added for participants to return post to the trainee are costed at the price of a standard second class stamp per label. Trainees are given sheets of Freepost labels and these are charged to their budget. The trainee should inform the research coordinator if any are not returned by potential participants.
Stationery A4, A5 and small white envelopes are available – these are costed at 2p per envelope Collect from Research Coordinator. For larger quantities email in advance.
Travel to research interviews For travel within the North-West region(2) costs are not charged to the trainee’s research budget Complete and return the NHS expenses form to Programme Assistant – Placements. Include the county on the form.
For travel outside the Northwest region the NHS costings(3) are used Complete and return the NHS expenses form to Programme Assistant – Placements, include county on the form. Also complete and return the research travel form outlining the out of area travel to the Research Coordinator.
Travel for research participants to attend interviews Participants are reimbursed for their travel for research interviews up to a maximum of £20. All travel for participants is costed against the trainee’s research budget. Guidelines for this process are covered within this policy
Outgoing mobile phone calls Any outgoing calls made are included in the research budget. It is possible to use video conferencing for research interviews subject to ethics approval. An email must be sent to the Research Coordinator in advance of any outgoing call to seek approval for the cost. A mobile phone handset can be collected from the Research Coordinator.
Psychometric tests If the purchase of a psychometric test is required the test will remain the property of the programme and the cost will not be deducted. However any costs for administrations of the test will be taken from the trainee’s research budget. Send an email to the Research Coordinator with a link for the test to be purchased from and the number of administrations required
Translation Costs for translation will be taken from the trainee’s research budget Inform the Research Coordinator of the translation required and a quote before the booking is made.
Prize draws for participants If a prize draw is given this will need to be costed to the budget. Inform the Research Coordinator in advance

(1) The 1st and 2nd class labels are only postage paid when sent from the university. For items sent outside the university standard stamps are required. For participants to return documents the freepost address envelopes should be used.
(2) For these purposes the North-West region is defined as Cumbria, Cheshire/Wirral, Merseyside, Greater Manchester and Lancashire
(3) LSCFT NHS trust reimburse mileage at a rate of 28p/mile

Reimbursement of expenses incurred by trainees for travel to research interviews

Trainees must use the NHS travel expense claim form for this expenditure and return this to the Programme Assistant – Placements.

Mileage to academic teaching No payment
Mileage to and from placement At public transport rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage to clinical research At public transport rate (for distance exceeding home to base)
Mileage within placement At official rate

In all cases the trainee’s base is the University teaching site. It is appreciated that a number of trainees who live some distance from their base may feel disadvantaged but the above arrangements are consistent with current employment arrangements. When trainees visit participants for their research work or go to a site to conduct research for their thesis research, claims can only be made when the distance is greater than home to base, and then only at public transport rate. For example, if a trainee lives 50 miles from Lancaster but is collecting data for research at a hospital base (or participant’s house) that is 48 miles from home, then no claim could be made. If the hospital base (or participant’s house) is 52 miles from home, then a claim can be made for 52-50 = 2 miles at public transport rate.

Trainees should always attempt to find, and use, the cheapest form of transport. Claims may not be reimbursed where this is not the case.

Reimbursement of travel expenses incurred by research participants

We feel that it is important we allow trainees to offer reimbursement to potential research participants for travel. In order to reimburse any travel expenses incurred trainees need to follow the following procedure:

  1. Ask the participant for an estimate of the expense they will incur to travel to and from the interview. At this point, if the participant intends to travel by public transport, check whether they are able to provide us with the receipts/tickets for their travel at the interview; for bus and train travel the participants may need their ticket for the return journey. If they are unable to provide receipts/tickets at the interview unfortunately we would not be able to reimburse their expenses there and then. If this is the case collect a copy of the business expense claim form and a freepost envelope for the form to be returned in from the office. When we receive the completed form from the participant we will authorise it and send it to the Finance Office to be processed for payment. Participants who have travelled by car can claim to be reimbursed for their total mileage at the 45p/mile rate by ticking the appropriate box on the receipt template.
  2. Inform the Research Coordinator of the sum you will require and the date you will need to collect it on giving at least 1 week’s notice. We are only able to reimburse expenses up to a maximum of £20 for each participant per interview.
  3. Collect the funds from the Research Coordinator and sign a sheet to confirm that you have received them.
  4. The Research Coordinator provides a ‘receipt’ for the participant to sign at the interview in order to confirm they have received payment for their expenses at the interview.
  5. Return the ‘receipt’ signed by the participants, alongside any receipts for public transport fares, to the office within 1 week of the collection date. If the participant has travelled by car they do not need to provide receipts for petrol and should be reimbursed using the 45p/mile rate.

No Funding Available

Apart from exceptional circumstances there is no budget for the following:

  • to transcribe interview recordings
  • to fund ‘thank you gifts’ to participants

Mobile phones

The course has a number of mobile phones for trainees to use to receive calls from participants in relation to the research they carry out on the course, therefore negating the need to give out either a personal or office number. If trainees intend to make longer outgoing calls it is possible to book a meeting room in Furness and use a landline for this purpose. There is also the option of video conferencing subject to ethical approval. The handsets are contracted to the course and if any calls are made on the handsets the course receives an itemised bill outlining the usage.

If you wish to borrow a phone collect a handset from the Research Coordinator.

Tariff information:
Call to landlines 3p
T-Mobile group 2.4p
T-Mobile other 4.6p
X network 13.8p
Texts 3p and 4.6p

Research budget travel form

Public participation in research – all cohorts

Framework for Ensuring Consistency in Research Work

2022 cohort onwards

Background and aims

The aim of this framework is to:

  • Ensure that all research staff have consistent guidelines on the extent and type of input they should provide for the Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA) and the thesis.
  • Ensure that each trainee is aware of the extent and type of help which they can expect.
  • Make explicit the programme’s expectations in terms of the trainees’ development in research skills.

Under normal circumstances the below details the standard amount of input that can be provided by a supervisor. However, individual training plans (ITPs) may detail appropriate adjustments in the form of specific additional support to be provided to individual trainees.

NB It is up to trainees to decide whether or not to accept their supervisors’ advice and, whether or not they do, they must be able to defend and justify all decisions taken in relation to their work.

Level and type of input

Support for trainees with regard to the TPA and thesis come in three forms:

  1. Supervision meetings and other contacts to discuss the work
  2. Draft reads
  3. Additional support from other sources (see learning structures outside formal teaching)

It should be noted that trainees need to take a lead in their thesis work, whilst being mindful that their academic supervisor often retains the role of chief investigator in their empirical research. This means that trainees should strike a balance between keeping supervisors informed regularly about the progress of their thesis work and checking out any significant decisions relating to the empirical work before implementing these, whilst ensuring that they also focus their requests for help and feedback where these are likely to of most benefit. Trainees are responsible for the quality of all submitted work.

Trainees are expected to complete and submit their thesis by the deadline established for their cohort and pathway (full time or part time) and to complete their viva voce examination and any required changes by the end of their employment contract. Exceptions to this should only be made in extraordinary circumstances.

  1. Supervision meetings

NB meetings may take place in person, by phone or online. The kind of support and advice that can be provided in such meetings is detailed in appendix 1.

TPA

Once trainees are allocated a supervisor from the research team and begin work on their TPA assignment then they may expect to meet with their supervisor on up to a maximum of five occasions to discuss their choice of topic and progress on the assignment.

Thesis

    • A thesis contract / action plan meeting should take place between all supervisors and the trainee to establish responsibilities and working arrangements as early as possible following the submission of the TPA assignment, and ALWAYS before a submission for ethical approval is made.
    • The core of support from supervisors comes from monthly meetings of 30-60 minutes. Once the TPA assignment has been submitted, trainees should schedule such meetings en bloc to take place once per month through the life of the project with their primary supervisor (and others as appropriate). Specific meetings can subsequently be re-scheduled if necessary to take account of leave etc.
    • It is anticipated that these meetings will be supplemented on a few occasions during the life of the thesis work by other meetings with the supervisor(s) to consider specific issues such as data analysis. It is also anticipated that trainees will have email contact with supervisors when significant queries arise which cannot wait until the next supervision meetings.
    • Contact with the project supervisor(s) will be supplemented by attendance at peer supervision meetings scheduled into the teaching timetable where progress is reviewed and common issues arising from conducting the thesis can be addressed.
  1. Draft reading

Below are lists detailing the TOTAL number of drafts that will be read across all supervisors (these may be read by the academic supervisor or another member of the supervisory team – this can be detailed in the thesis contract and action plan). Details of the focus of drafts reads and feedback is provided in appendix 2, below.

TPA

One draft of the TPA review topic form
One draft read of the TPA in full provided the trainee submits this by the specified date
One draft of the thesis proposal form prior to submission for review

Thesis

If necessary, one review of highlighted / tracked changed amended version of the thesis proposal form following review.
One full draft of all ethics documentation
If necessary, one review of highlighted / tracked changed second draft of ethics documents based on feedback above (NB the trainee should always gain approval of the final ethics from the supervisor prior to submission)
A draft of the structure of the literature review (1-2 sides of A4), including the type and scope of review being planned.
Up to two drafts of the completed introduction and method sections of the systematic literature review section
Up to two drafts of the completed results and discussion sections of the systematic literature review paper
Up to two drafts of the completed introduction and method sections of the empirical research paper
Up to two drafts of the final results section of the empirical research paper
Up to two drafts of the completed discussion section of the empirical research paper
One draft of the critical appraisal paper.

Scheduling draft reads

Drafts must be submitted by a date agreed in advance with the draft reader. When submitted as agreed, comments should be returned to the trainee within one week. Once trainees have reviewed the feedback, they will also have the opportunity to have a conversation with the draft reader to talk through anything they are unclear about.

We understand that schedules do not always go according to plan and that sometimes draft reading deadlines may need to be changed. However changing submission deadlines at short notice is very disruptive for the draft reader, and could be deemed unprofessional behaviour on the part of the trainee. It can also contribute to substantial delays in completing thesis work due to supervisor availability. For this reason

  1. Trainees should give notice a to a draft reader as early as possible (at least a week prior to the deadline) if they wish to change the agreed draft submission date. Except in exceptional circumstances such as illness, if this period of notice is not given then it will not be possible to re-arrange the deadline.
  2. It is also the trainee’s responsibility to provide a full draft of the agreed papers or sections that is within the word limit to the draft reader. Overly long drafts will be returned unread, and incomplete drafts will be read as if they were a full draft. Trainees should note that reading an incomplete draft significantly reduces the reader’s ability to provide the most helpful feedback.

Appendix 1: Remit of supervision meetings

Thesis Preparation Assignment Literature Review

The trainee can expect:

  • Advice on the appropriateness of the subject area under consideration for the review and research proposal.
  • Guidance on seeking appropriate literature for the review section which will help provide justification for the research proposed for the thesis.
  • Advice will include: general guidance on the content, format and clarity of argument. Major issues will be highlighted for attention.

Thesis Proposal & Thesis

  • Advice on the general suitability of the proposed research project and its methodology before completion of the proposal section.
  • Discussion of research governance, local NHS R&D procedures and other ethical considerations.
  • Advice on the type and scope of systematic review being considered.
  • Advice on a power calculation, if applicable, although the trainee will be expected to have attempted this previously.
  • Advice on the suitability of the trainee’s proposed analysis.
  • Advice on the appropriateness of target journals identified by the trainee for thesis papers.
  • For trainees carrying out a quantitative project, advice on a power calculation, giving guidance on the analysis, and reviewing of the output of the analysis can be provided.
  • For trainees carrying out a qualitative project, then it is reasonable to expect one/both of the research supervisors to look at a transcript with the trainee to discuss coding etc. Supervisors at their discretion may also expect to review the recording of an initial interview to provide feedback on interview technique etc.
  • Supervisors may request to further review the data and analysis with trainees if necessary.

Appendix 2: Remit of draft reading

The draft reader will comment on:

  • The structure of drafts.
  • The consideration of conceptual and contextual issues.
  • The consideration of practical issues relating to research design, procedure and analysis.
  •  Broad issues relating to the clarity of written communication.
  • The degree and nature of general critical engagement within the drafts.

Research staff will try to provide as comprehensive feedback as possible on the above. Trainees should expect feedback to take the form of specific tracked changes an overall summary of feedback within a draft. The opportunity to meet with the draft reader to discuss the feedback will also be offered.

It is not within the remit of the draft read to provide the following:

  • Advice on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of the trainee’s understanding of that material (although if the reader identifies obvious errors or omissions, these can be indicated).
  • Proof reading (checking of spelling, grammatical, punctuation or typographical errors) although the reader might want to indicate should they feel this is still an outstanding issue.
  • Coaching in developing academic writing style (although readers may wish to highlight this if it appears to be an area requiring development). Trainees who need to further develop their skills in this area to achieve the standard necessary for doctoral level work are expected to do so independently by making use of the support available from Student Services and elsewhere.
  • Correcting the trainee’s work to make it conform to the appropriate journal style.
  • Checks on whether previously advised corrections have been made.
  • Draft readers will not complete missing sections of any draft.
2019 to 2021 cohorts

Background and aims

The aim of this framework is to:

  • Ensure that all research staff have consistent guidelines on the extent and type of input they should provide for the Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA) and the thesis.
  • Ensure that each trainee is aware of the extent and type of help which they can expect.
  • Make explicit the programme’s expectations in terms of the trainees’ development in research skills.

Under normal circumstances the below details the standard amount of input that can be provided by a supervisor. However, individual training plans (ITPs) may detail appropriate adjustments in the form of specific additional support to be provided to individual trainees.

NB It is up to trainees to decide whether or not to accept their supervisors’ advice and, whether or not they do, they must be able to defend and justify all decisions taken in relation to their work.

Level and type of input

Support for trainees with regard to the TPA and thesis come in three forms:

  1. Supervision meetings and other contacts to discuss the work
  2. Draft reads
  3. Additional support from other sources (see learning structures outside formal teaching)

It should be noted that trainees need to take a lead in their thesis work, whilst being mindful that their academic supervisor often retains the role of chief investigator in their empirical research. This means that trainees should strike a balance between keeping supervisors informed regularly about the progress of their thesis work and checking out any significant decisions relating to the empirical work before implementing these, whilst ensuring that they also focus their requests for help and feedback where these are likely to of most benefit. Trainees are responsible for the quality of all submitted work.

Trainees are expected to complete and submit their thesis by the deadline established for their cohort and pathway (full time or part time) and to complete their viva voce examination and any required changes by the end of their employment contract. Exceptions to this should only be made in extraordinary circumstances.

  1. Supervision meetings

NB meetings may take place in person, by phone or online. The kind of support and advice that can be provided in such meetings is detailed in appendix 1.

TPA

Once trainees are allocated a supervisor from the research team and begin work on their TPA assignment then they may expect to meet with their supervisor on up to a maximum of five occasions to discuss their choice of topic and progress on the assignment.

Thesis

    • A thesis contract / action plan meeting should take place between all supervisors and the trainee to establish responsibilities and working arrangements as early as possible following the submission of the TPA assignment, and ALWAYS before a submission for ethical approval is made.
    • The core of support from supervisors comes from monthly meetings of 45-60 minutes. Once the TPA assignment has been submitted, trainees should schedule such meetings en bloc to take place once per month through the life of the project with their primary supervisor (and others as appropriate). Specific meetings can subsequently be re-scheduled if necessary to take account of leave etc.
    • It is anticipated that these meetings will be supplemented on a few occasions during the life of the thesis work by other meetings with the supervisor(s) to consider specific issues such as data analysis. It is also anticipated that trainees will have email contact with supervisors when significant queries arise which cannot wait until the next supervision meetings.
    • Contact with the project supervisor(s) will be supplemented by attendance at peer supervision meetings scheduled into the teaching timetable where progress is reviewed and common issues arising from conducting the thesis can be addressed.
  1. Draft reading

Below are lists detailing the TOTAL number of drafts that will be read across all supervisors (these may be read by the academic supervisor or another member of the supervisory team – this can be detailed in the thesis contract and action plan). Details of the focus of drafts reads and feedback is provided in appendix 2, below.

TPA

One draft of the TPA review topic form
One draft read of  the main body (review) part of the TPA provided the trainee submits this by the specified date.
One draft of the thesis proposal form prior to submission for review

Thesis

If necessary, one review of highlighted / tracked changed amended version of the thesis proposal form following review.
One full draft of all ethics documentation
If necessary, one review of highlighted / tracked changed second draft of ethics documents based on feedback above (NB the trainee should always gain approval of the final ethics from the supervisor prior to submission)
A draft of the structure of the literature review (1-2 sides of A4), including the type and scope of review being planned.
Up to two drafts of the completed introduction and method sections of the systematic literature review section
Up to two drafts of the completed results and discussion sections of the systematic literature review paper
Up to two drafts of the completed introduction and method sections of the empirical research paper
Up to two drafts of the final results section of the empirical research paper
Up to two drafts of the completed discussion section of the empirical research paper
One draft of the critical appraisal paper.

Scheduling draft reads

Drafts must be submitted by a date agreed in advance with the draft reader. When submitted as agreed, comments will be returned to the trainee within one week. Once trainees have reviewed the feedback, they will also have the opportunity to have a conversation with the draft reader to talk through anything they are unclear about.

We understand that schedules do not always go according to plan and that sometimes draft reading deadlines may need to be changed. However changing submission deadlines at short notice is very disruptive for the draft reader, and could be deemed unprofessional behaviour on the part of the trainee. It can also contribute to substantial delays in completing thesis work due to supervisor availability. For this reason

  1. Trainees should give notice a to a draft reader as early as possible (at least a week prior to the deadline) if they wish to change the agreed draft submission date. Except in exceptional circumstances such as illness, if this period of notice is not given then it will not be possible to re-arrange the deadline.
  2. It is also the trainee’s responsibility to provide a full draft of the agreed papers or sections that is within the word limit to the draft reader. Overly long drafts will be returned unread, and incomplete drafts will be read as if they were a full draft. Trainees should note that reading an incomplete draft significantly reduces the reader’s ability to provide the most helpful feedback.

Appendix 1: Remit of supervision meetings

Thesis Preparation Assignment Literature Review

The trainee can expect:

  • Advice on the appropriateness of the subject area under consideration for the review and research proposal.
  • Guidance on seeking appropriate literature for the review section which will help provide justification for the research proposed for the thesis.
  • Advice will include: general guidance on the content, format and clarity of argument. Major issues will be highlighted for attention.

Thesis Proposal & Thesis

  • Advice on the general suitability of the proposed research project and its methodology before completion of the proposal section.
  • Discussion of research governance, local NHS R&D procedures and other ethical considerations.
  • Advice on the type and scope of systematic review being considered.
  • Advice on a power calculation, if applicable, although the trainee will be expected to have attempted this previously.
  • Advice on the suitability of the trainee’s proposed analysis.
  • Advice on the appropriateness of target journals identified by the trainee for thesis papers.
  • For trainees carrying out a quantitative project, advice on a power calculation, giving guidance on the analysis, and reviewing of the output of the analysis can be provided.
  • For trainees carrying out a qualitative project, then it is reasonable to expect one/both of the research supervisors to look at a transcript with the trainee to discuss coding etc. Supervisors at their discretion may also expect to review the recording of an initial interview to provide feedback on interview technique etc.
  • Supervisors may request to further review the data and analysis with trainees if necessary.

Appendix 2: Remit of draft reading

The draft reader will comment on:

  • The structure of drafts.
  • The consideration of conceptual and contextual issues.
  • The consideration of practical issues relating to research design, procedure and analysis.
  •  Broad issues relating to the clarity of written communication.
  • The degree and nature of general critical engagement within the drafts.

Research staff will try to provide as comprehensive feedback as possible on the above. Trainees should expect feedback to take the form of specific tracked changes an overall summary of feedback within a draft. The opportunity to meet with the draft reader to discuss the feedback will also be offered.

It is not within the remit of the draft read to provide the following:

  • Advice on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of the trainee’s understanding of that material (although if the reader identifies obvious errors or omissions, these can be indicated).
  • Proof reading (checking of spelling, grammatical, punctuation or typographical errors) although the reader might want to indicate should they feel this is still an outstanding issue.
  • Coaching in developing academic writing style (although readers may wish to highlight this if it appears to be an area requiring development). Trainees who need to further develop their skills in this area to achieve the standard necessary for doctoral level work are expected to do so independently by making use of the support available from Student Services and elsewhere.
  • Correcting the trainee’s work to make it conform to the appropriate journal style.
  • Checks on whether previously advised corrections have been made.
  • Draft readers will not complete missing sections of any draft.
2018 cohort

Background and aims

The numbers of trainees and research staff working on the DClinPsy Programme have highlighted the need to produce a consistency framework for the assessment and management of the research component of the course. The aim of such a framework is to:

  • Ensure that all research staff have consistent guidelines on the extent and type of input they should provide for every item of assessed work
  • Ensure that each trainee is aware of the extent and type of help which they can expect with each item of assessed work
  • Make explicit the programme’s expectations in terms of the trainees’ development in research skills.

It should also be noted that individual training plans (ITPs) may offer additional support to that outlined here. The programme also supports the importance of trainees recognising their own developmental needs, raising them and seeking ways to meet those needs.

Level and type of input for each piece of assessed work

This specification is for trainees following the conventional three year training pathway. For trainees on different pathways, then the same support per academic assignment is available but focused on the specific assignment as opposed to its position in the training year.

Thesis Preparation Assignment

The trainee can expect:

  • Advice on the appropriateness of the subject area under consideration for the review and research proposal with guidance on matching to supervisors’ expertise
  • Guidance on seeking appropriate literature for the review section and putting together the justification for the research.
  • Advice will include: general guidance on the content, format and clarity of argument. Major issues will be highlighted for attention.
  • Advice on the general suitability of the proposed research project and its methodology before completion of the proposal section.
  • Discussion of research governance, local NHS R&D procedures and other ethical considerations.
  • Advice on a power calculation, if applicable, although the trainee will be expected to have attempted this previously.
  • Advice on the suitability of the trainee’s proposed analysis.

The thesis

Given that the thesis comprises several sections, these will be considered in turn. It should also be noted that where research staff are supervisors on projects which are not part of their own core research areas, trainees cannot expect more detailed feedback on specific areas or aspects of the relevant literature.

  • Ethics proposal: comments will be made on one completed proposal and research protocol per ethics committee. If the initial proposals need multiple corrections then these can be checked. Arrangements for submission must be managed by the trainee and this includes finding out relevant ethics committee dates and the logistic arrangements (e.g., when copies need to be submitted by). The trainee should not use their academic supervisor as a proof reader. All NHS ethics applications need to be signed off by the Pro VC for Research who acts as the university’s representative regarding research governance issues.
  • Literature review: a draft of the structure of the literature review (1-2 sides of A4) can be submitted during the second year. This can include the type and scope of review being considered. The academic supervisor will comment on this structure. At the same time as the draft structure, the trainee should also submit the name of the target journal (with notes for contributors) for the literature review and the suitability of this will be assessed. The reader will provide detailed comments on one full draft of the literature review, including title page, abstract, literature review, tables and references. Although it is not the reader’s responsibility to advise on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of the trainee’s understanding of that material, should the reader uncover obvious errors or omissions, these can be indicated. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. A second draft may be considered, although it is not the reader’s responsibility to make sure that the advised corrections have been made. Comments at this stage are at a more general level on any outstanding issues. At this stage detailed corrections of spelling etc. will not be made although the reader might want to indicate should they feel this is still an outstanding issue. It is not the reader’s responsibility to correct the trainee’s work to make it conform to the appropriate journal style.
  • Thesis research project: the trainee will be given guidance from both supervisors in relation to the completion of the thesis proposal form which should be formally submitted in the first half of the first year. The proposal must be complete and, while not being definitive, must provide an indication that serious consideration has been given to every aspect of the study. Research staff will not complete missing sections, e.g., on the proposed data analysis, although advice will be given if aspects of the method are not considered appropriate (see TPA). Feedback will be given on the proposal which will be communicated to the trainee. By January of the third year, the trainee will have submitted the name of the target journal for the research paper and the research team will advise on the appropriateness of this. The final choice of journal is the trainee’s responsibility.
  • For trainees carrying out a quantitative project, the output of the analysis can be checked. For trainees carrying out a qualitative project, then it is reasonable to expect one/both of the research supervisors to look at a selected number of transcripts with the trainee to discuss coding etc.
  • The research team will provide comments on the introduction and method at a time negotiated in advance with the research team member. It is reasonable to expect detailed comments at this stage on general structural and conceptual issues. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. However, trainees should not assume that the absence of corrections indicates a flawless piece of work.
  • The research team will also provide comments on the results and discussion section separately, if submitted at an agreed time. Again, given the more provisional nature of this draft, comments are likely to be of a more ‘broad-brush’ nature.
  • A complete and final draft of the research paper should be submitted at a time negotiated in advance. The research team will provide comments on the clarity of all sections and the appendices. However, references will not be edited, checked for completeness or assessed on whether they conform to the specific journal’s house style. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. However, trainees should not assume that the absence of corrections indicates a flawless piece of work. Ultimately it is the trainee’s decision as to what advice they decide to take on board.
  • Critical appraisal section: If the first draft of this is submitted at a time negotiated with the research team member, comments will be made on its content, structure and clarity. Although it is not the responsibility of the reader to consider all possible methodological issues in the research, should these occur to the reader, these can be indicated. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. However, trainees should not assume that the absence of corrections indicates a flawless piece of work. Ultimately it is the trainee’s decision as to what advice they decide to take on board.

In order to provide some consistency to trainees in the level of feedback from research staff, the following criteria have also been agreed:

  • If trainees submit an unfinished piece of work for a draft deadline this may be considered to be a full draft.
  • If work is submitted on the agreed date, it will be returned within one to two working weeks, unless alternatives arrangements are agreed. The standard of one to two week turnaround has been agreed by all the research team. Trainees are often asked to agree a meeting date at which feedback can be discussed.
  • Work submitted outside agreed dates will be returned within a maximum of one month. Trainees are asked to note that during the three months prior to thesis submission, research staff are extremely busy and will have to pencil work in their diaries (often drafts from other trainees) to make sure that all drafts are read. If a trainee misses his or her agreed deadline then the time set aside to read the draft will have gone. The research team staff will then have to find another time to read the draft; at busy times this can be very difficult.
  • Research staff will try to provide as comprehensive feedback as possible, but within the guidelines outlined above. Trainees are responsible for the quality of all submitted work. It is up to trainees to decide whether or not to accept their supervisors’ advice and, if they do, they must be able to defend and justify all decisions taken in relation to their work.
2017 cohort and earlier

Background and aims

The year on year increase in the number of trainees admitted onto the Lancaster DClinPsy and the growing number of research staff have highlighted the need to produce a consistency framework for the assessment and management of the research component of the course. The aim of such a framework is to:

  • Ensure that all research staff have consistent guidelines on the extent and type of input they should be providing for every item of assessed work
  • Ensure that each trainee is aware of the extent and type of help which they can expect with each item of assessed work
  • Make explicit the programme’s expectations in terms of the trainees’ development in research skills.

It should also be noted that individual training plans (ITPs) may offer additional support to that outlined here. The programme also supports the importance of trainees recognising their own developmental needs, raising them and seeking ways to meet those needs.

Level and type of input for each piece of assessed work

This specification is for trainees following the conventional three year training pathway. For trainees on different pathways, then the same support per academic assignment is available but focused on the specific assignment as opposed to its position in the training year. If trainees submit an unfinished piece of work for a draft deadline this may be considered to be a full draft.

Systematic literature review – first year

The trainee can expect:

  • Advice on the appropriateness of the subject area under consideration for the systematic literature review. A formal decision on this will be made by the Chair of the Examination Board. Deadlines to get your systematic literature review topic area to the Chair of the Exam Board will be given in the systematic literature review teaching.
  • Comments on one completed draft. Multiple drafts containing different sections will not be looked at. Comments will include: general advice on the content, format and clarity of the draft. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and may be corrected. More major errors will be highlighted for attention. It is not the reader’s responsibility to advise on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of the trainee’s understanding of that material. It is not the reader’s responsibility to correct the trainee’s work to make it conform to the guidelines of the chosen peer reviewed journal.

SRP – first year and first half of the second year

The trainee can expect:

  • Advice on the general suitability of the proposed research project and its methodology before completion of the initial proposal.
  • Guidance from the research tutor on topics for research to aid trainees in the completion of the topic form which is submitted by mid October. Trainees are then allocated an academic supervisor from the research team.advice on the general suitability of the proposed research project and its methodology before completion of the initial proposal.
  • Detailed comments on all sections of the initial proposal.
  • Advice on a power calculation, if applicable, although the trainee will be expected to have attempted this previously.
  • Feedback from the coordinator of the SRP and the Research Director in relation to the proposal form.
  • Clarification and modification of the proposal should then be discussed with their academic supervisor.
  • Discussion of research governance, local NHS R&D procedures and other ethical considerations. Comments will be made on one completed proposal and research protocol per ethics committee. If the initial submission needs multiple amendments then these can also be discussed and checked by the academic supervisor. Arrangements for submission must be managed by the trainee and this includes finding out relevant ethics committee dates and the logistics (e.g., number of copies) for submission. The trainee should not use their academic supervisor as a proof reader. All NHS ethics applications need to be signed off by the Pro VC for Research who acts as the university’s representative regarding research governance issues.
  • Advice on the suitability of input, where appropriate, on a data analysis programme (SPSS, Atlas TI etc)
  • Advice on the suitability of the trainee’s proposed analysis. The supervisor may also check, on the basis of the documentation provided, that the analysis seems to have been performed correctly
  • Detailed comments on one working draft. Comments will include: general advice on the content, format and clarity of the draft. Errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and suggested corrections made. However, the advice at this stage is very much as if the draft is a ‘work in progress’ with comments aimed at more the basic, structural elements of the work. Although it is not the reader’s responsibility to advise on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of the trainee’s understanding of that material, should the reader uncover obvious errors, these can be indicated.
  • A second draft can also be considered if this is submitted in time although it is not the reader’s responsibility to make sure that the advised corrections have been made. Comments at this stage are at a more general level but may include attention to punctuation, stylistic issues and expression. It is not the reader’s responsibility to correct the trainee’s work to make it conform to APA style. Ultimately it is the trainee’s decision as to what advice they decide to take on board.

The thesis: second year and, in particular, the third year

Given that the thesis comprises several sections, these will be considered in turn. It should also be noted that where research staff are supervisors on projects which are not part of their own core research areas, trainees cannot expect more detailed feedback on specific areas or aspects of the relevant literature.

  • Ethics proposal: comments will be made on one completed proposal and research protocol per ethics committee. If the initial proposals need multiple corrections then these can be checked. Arrangements for submission must be managed by the trainee and this includes finding out relevant ethics committee dates and the logistic arrangements (e.g., when copies need to be submitted by). The trainee should not use their academic supervisor as a proof reader. All NHS ethics applications need to be signed off by the Pro VC for Research who acts as the university’s representative regarding research governance issues.
  • Literature review: a draft of the structure of the literature review (1-2 sides of A4) can be submitted at the beginning of the third year. This can include the type and scope of review being considered. The academic supervisor will comment on this structure. At the same time as the draft structure, the trainee should also submit the name of the target journal (with notes for contributors) for the literature review and the suitability of this will be assessed. The reader will provide detailed comments on one full draft of the literature review, including title page, abstract, literature review, tables and references. Although it is not the reader’s responsibility to advise on the comprehensiveness of the material covered or the accuracy of the trainee’s understanding of that material, should the reader uncover obvious errors or omissions, these can be indicated. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. A second draft may be considered, although it is not the reader’s responsibility to make sure that the advised corrections have been made. Comments at this stage are at a more general level on any outstanding issues. At this stage detailed corrections of spelling etc. will not be made although the reader might want to indicate should they feel this is still an outstanding issue. It is not the reader’s responsibility to correct the trainee’s work to make it conform to the appropriate journal style.
  • Thesis research project: the trainee will be given guidance from both supervisors in relation to the completion of the thesis proposal form which should be formally submitted in the first part of the second year. The proposal must be complete and, while not being definitive, must provide an indication that serious consideration has been given to every aspect of the study. Research staff will not complete missing sections, e.g., on the proposed data analysis, although advice will be given if aspects of the method are not considered appropriate. Feedback will be given on the proposal which will be communicated to the trainee. By January of the third year, the trainee will have submitted the name of the target journal for the research paper and the research team will advise on the appropriateness of this. The final choice of journal is the trainee’s responsibility.
  • For trainees carrying out a quantitative project, the output of the analysis can be checked. For trainees carrying out a qualitative project, then it is reasonable to expect one/both of the research supervisors to look at a selected number of transcripts with the trainee to discuss coding etc.
  • The research team will provide comments on the introduction and method at a time negotiated in advance with the research team member. It is reasonable to expect detailed comments at this stage on general structural and conceptual issues. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. However, trainees should not assume that the absence of corrections indicates a flawless piece of work.
  • The research team will also provide comments on the results and discussion section separately, if submitted at an agreed time. Again, given the more provisional nature of this draft, comments are likely to be of a more ‘broad-brush’ nature.
  • A complete and final draft of the research paper should be submitted at a time negotiated in advance. The research team will provide comments on the clarity of all sections and the appendices. However, references will not be edited, checked for completeness or assessed on whether they conform to the specific journal’s house style. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. However, trainees should not assume that the absence of corrections indicates a flawless piece of work. Ultimately it is the trainee’s decision as to what advice they decide to take on board.
  • Critical appraisal section: If the first draft of this is submitted at a time negotiated with the research team member, comments will be made on its content, structure and clarity. Although it is not the responsibility of the reader to consider all possible methodological issues in the research, should these occur to the reader, these can be indicated. Minor errors of spelling, punctuation and grammar can be highlighted and corrections made. If the work contains too many errors for the reader to correct, this will be brought to the attention of the trainee. However, trainees should not assume that the absence of corrections indicates a flawless piece of work. Ultimately it is the trainee’s decision as to what advice they decide to take on board.

In order to provide some consistency to trainees in the level of feedback from research staff, the following criteria have also been agreed:

  • If work is submitted on the agreed date, it will be returned within one to two working weeks, unless alternatives arrangements are agreed. The standard of one to two week turnaround has been agreed by all the research team. Trainees are often asked to agree a meeting date at which feedback can be discussed.
  • Work submitted outside agreed dates will be returned within a maximum of one month. Trainees are asked to note that during the three months prior to thesis submission, research staff are extremely busy and will have to pencil work in their diaries (often drafts from other trainees) to make sure that all drafts are read. If a trainee misses his or her agreed deadline then the time set aside to read the draft will have gone. The research team staff will then have to find another time to read the draft; at busy times this can be very difficult.
  • Research staff will try to provide as comprehensive feedback as possible, but within the guidelines outlined above. Trainees are responsible for the quality of all submitted work. It is up to trainees to decide whether or not to accept their supervisors’ advice and, if they do, they must be able to defend and justify all decisions taken in relation to their work.

Inclusive teaching

Introduction

All education programmes should include and represent people with varied life experiences, belief systems and backgrounds. However on our programme, we believe there is an additional imperative to do this, not only for the benefit of learners, but because we are training health professionals who need to be able to engage with difference in their work with clients and wider professional activities.

We are trying to develop our own practice around this, through staff CPD and training for external teachers, many of whom are practising clinical psychologists in the region. We also ask trainees in teaching feedback to reflect on how inclusive each teaching session was, and to give additional feedback in relation to this question. Teaching feedback is shared with teachers allowing discussions and learning to take place.

Anti Racism Strategy

The Lancaster DClinPsy is working to address structural and individual experiences of racism within the programme and clinical psychology as a profession. When gathering teaching feedback, we ask our trainees to comment on whether the teacher included, or was sensitive to, issues of social justice, such as anti-racist practice, or not. Trainees also reference the wheel of power and privilege when answering this question.

You may find it helpful to engage with and reference our critical reflection tool when preparing your teaching.

Hints & Tips for Inclusive teaching

Tutors and LUPIN members have compiled a ‘Hints and Tips’ document below, for all teachers on the programme to read. The aims of this document are to provoke thought and develop skills in teaching in an inclusive way.

We hope you find it helpful, please feel free to give comments and additional suggestions to Clare Dixon, Chair of the Inclusivity Development and Implementation Group (IDIG) via c.dixon3@lancaster.ac.uk. If you would like more support in this area, please do get in touch with Clare, initially by explaining what you would find useful (e.g. discussion of your material, someone to peer observe you and provide feedback, ideas for developing the programme). She will pass on the request to the relevant person on the course team.

Hints and Tips for Teachers

We request all teachers to send in their slides in advance of their session so these can be made available to all trainees online. A number of trainees have specific learning difficulties and recommendations include that teaching material is available prior to the day to enable them to read this in advance and/or utilise specialist software or equipment to access the material as a reasonable adjustment.

Ensure that all your handouts, presentations and online course materials are accessible. This means, for example, using high-contrast text/ background colours, legible fonts, or ensuring the text you write can be read correctly by screen-reading software. Legislation requires that all online material, including our teaching content, is accessible; for Microsoft Office documents, you can check the accessibility of your existing documents by clicking on File, Check for Issues, Check Accessibility. Where teachers have an honorary contract with the university, they can also access the training available for staff. Please contact Christina Pedder c.pedder@lancaster.ac.uk or Clare Dixon c.dixon3@lancaster.ac.uk for further information on accessing this training.

From September 2020 it has been a legal requirement for all video used in teaching to be accessible, i.e. to be captioned. Teachers may find the following resources useful in adapting teaching content:

Creating accessible resources, creating accessible videos and Accessibility & Inclusion

Also, MS Teams enables participants to turn on live captioning while accessing a live remote teaching session using this platform. All recordings via Teams are added to MS Stream. MS Steam can also automatically generate captions.

More information is available in the guidance in relation to understanding new accessibility requirements for public sector bodies.

The following are some ideas around being inclusive of different experiences and backgrounds in your teaching sessions.

Assume that the cohort you will be working with is diverse

Any group of trainees will be made up of people who ‘differ’ from each other and from the teacher in many ways- for example in their socioeconomic background, their cultural beliefs or their learning needs. As humans we can tend to focus on ‘difference’ that we can see (such as ethnicity or gender), rather than remaining aware of other less visible differences which are just as influential. We can make assumptions about what is ‘the norm’ based on our own life experience or on a ‘majority view’, which can exclude the many people who would not identify themselves with this.

In order that your teaching reflects the real diversity of life, and includes all trainees, we would ask you at every stage of teaching (from planning through delivery and to review) to hold in mind that there will be a wealth of different experience and backgrounds in the room. You can welcome and engage with this, to foster a rich learning environment that includes and is relevant to all, for example:-

  • Avoid treating certain ideas or behaviours as ‘the norm’, this can often be done just in the implicit messages which we give about what we assume or expect, the examples we choose, our discussion about life in general. For example, a teacher who always chooses examples from Christian festivals assumes this is the ‘normal’ religion; always asking about a person’s ‘Mum and Dad’ presumes heterosexuality; referring to gay people as ‘they’ assumes ‘we’ must be straight.
  • Strive to give examples (in your presentation/lecture, in the case studies you use, in the literature you draw on, in small group discussion topics or when answering questions) that relate to a wide range of human experience. For instance, when providing case examples of family work, you could use vignettes representing people from varied ethnic or socioeconomic backgrounds, or with different configurations rather than just a heterosexual nuclear family.
  • When you are planning your teaching, run through it and imagine yourself listening to the teaching, as a listener who would class themselves as ‘differing’ to yourself (e.g. in sexuality, socioeconomic status, life experience, belief system, experience of using mental health services and more). Ask yourself, what assumptions have I made here about the world? How can I increase representation (or at least acknowledgement) of diverse views and experiences?
  • Promote discussion and critique about the theories/models/research you are teaching about, how may it be representative or unrepresentative of a broad range of life experiences, cultures, beliefs etc.
  • Consider service user input in some form, (e.g. co-presenting, on video, in a verbal account, or in an exercise to consider other perspectives). This can be one of the richest and most memorable ways of hearing about experiences which may or may not be familiar to learners.

Perfection is not possible (or necessary).

We so often feel scared to ‘get things wrong’ in this area; we are silenced by political correctness (e.g. not knowing the ‘right’ words to use, not wanting to cause offence) which stops us having genuine debate and learning about difference, and conversations become bland or avoid difference altogether. We believe that most people can sense when a question or discussion is respectful, open and interested and that this is more important than perfectly diplomatic language.

  • At the start of a session, explain that you are striving to represent a range of life experiences, beliefs and behaviours, but you recognise that there will be times when you inevitably fail in this. Ask trainees to help you by pointing out times when they don’t feel that difference is being included or represented, or your material jars with their own experience.
  • At the start, talk about a culture of open discussion, it being OK ‘not to know’, that we can help each other learn about difference with an open and respectful attitude.
  • Don’t feel that you have to be perfect, it can be useful to present both successes around inclusivity in your work, as well as challenges/failures. We want to acknowledge that we can only strive towards inclusivity, rather than be perfect at it.

Bring Diverse Experience into the Classroom. Life Experience is Welcome!

If we present teaching about mental health problems as being about people external to ourselves or the profession, it can foster a sense of ‘us’ and ‘them’, where service users are the ‘other’. In reality, all of us will have experience of challenge and difference, and most will have encountered mental health difficulties in ourselves or our friends and family, which can give us a sense of shared experience and empathy, as well as existing knowledge and competence to build on as mental health practitioners.

Self-disclosure is potentially threatening but provides a great opportunity for inclusivity, acknowledgement of experience or difference, and acceptance of different perspectives. We want trainees to be able and feel safe enough to risk being themselves and sharing their life experiences, in order to make a diverse, stimulating and representative classroom. To do this, it can be helpful to make sure you encourage and prepare for self-disclosure: –

  • Acknowledge throughout a session that the material may be familiar to people NOT just in their working life but also in their personal experience and assume resonance. Model self-disclosure about this, and explicitly encourage trainees to discuss examples and issues from their personal and professional experience, if they wish to do so, e.g. using the question “who has experience of this (in life generally)?” rather than “who has come across this in their work?”
  • Consider sizes of groups (or give chance for individuals to work alone at times), think about what you ask for in feedback, set ground-rules for safety, offer support to trainees in asking questions or discussing experience – while making clear there is no obligation to disclose.
  • Build in opportunity to share personal experience in a planned, predictable way, so trainees know it will happen, when and where (e.g. in plan of the day: “After the break, we will do an exercise around our own experience of this”).
  • Consider the message you give to trainees about times when teaching resonates with them, encourage them to stay in the room and discuss their feelings and experiences, if they feel able, rather than giving an initial (often implicit and well-intentioned) message that they should leave the room if they get upset.
  • Consider the option of sending an email prompt to get people in the ‘space’ (e.g. that the session is experiential, reflective), and that you would like them to consider their own personal experience, how things may differ according to peoples’ different beliefs, experiences and lives. You could provide quiet space at the end of the session (perhaps with some prompt questions) to allow people to consider their own position and learning in relation to the topic in hand.

Please let us know of any comments or additional suggestions that you have found helpful in your own inclusive practice, or any feedback for us as a programme. Please email Clare Dixon (c.dixon3@lancaster.ac.uk).

Thank you for your interest.

Useful resources

There is more information available about Lancaster University’s aim to make our courses as inclusive as possible, including helpful information on how to do this.

The Higher Education Academy have published a report on inclusive teaching in Higher Education which may be of interest.

Sheffield University have produced a helpful resource The Inclusive Learning & Teaching Handbook. The Plymouth University inclusivity resources  may also be useful.

 

Life as a Trainee Clinical Psychologist

The Doctorate in Clinical Psychology programme is normally a three-year, full-time programme. Successful completion of the programme confers eligibility to apply for registration with the Health and Care Professions Council. Students work as trainee clinical psychologists and are employed by Lancashire & South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust. They all begin their employment at the entry point of Agenda for Change pay scale band 6 and progress to the intermediate step point over the course of training. Although previous continuous NHS service does not confer pay protection, it does increase the number of days of annual leave entitlement during training. Students are also registered as full-time postgraduate students at Lancaster University.

In addition to the full-time programme, we provide a 0.7wte part time training route spanning 52 months. The part time programme differs only in the way it is structured, with no changes to the content of teaching, assessment, or placement requirements compared to the full time route. The total hours on placement, in teaching and study are the same across FT and PT routes. Trainees on the 0.7wte route receive a pro-rata salary and annual leave entitlement.

 

Inclusivity Development and Implementation Group (IDIG)

The Inclusivity Development and Implementation Group (IDIG) is concerned with supporting inclusive practice in Clinical Psychology training at Lancaster. It is driven by the value that training, clinical practice and the use of Clinical Psychology services must be accessible to all who can benefit and/or make a contribution. We seek to provide an environment where trainees, staff and all stakeholders can flourish. Inclusivity is the basis for innovation and excellence and leads to robust and respectful practice. However, existing structures, procedures and communications can be experienced as excluding and support is sometimes needed to realise the benefits of diversity. The IDIG’s role is to be proactive in identifying positive ways to enable all trainees to reach their potential and to be vigilant for challenges to this.

The IDIG:

  • Monitors course activities e.g. admissions, teaching and placements, and provides a focus for checking that procedures enhance inclusivity rather than reduce it.
  • Supports initiatives designed to address inequality and to raise awareness of the importance of inclusivity. This includes the annual trainee-led cross-cohort inclusivity event.
  • Provides a hub to collect ideas and concerns of trainees, staff and LUPIN members to signal the need for new initiatives, procedures or modifications.
  • Works to increase recruitment of clinical psychology applicants from a variety of cultural, ethnic, economic, religious and other minority backgrounds currently underrepresented in the clinical psychology profession. The aim of our Widening Participation work described below is to diversify the clinical psychology profession.
  • The IDIG’s Chair updates the programme’s Equality Scheme annually and reports on admissions data, through the lens of inclusivity.

Membership

The Inclusivity Development and Implementation Group (IDIG) is comprised of the following:

  • Members of the DClinPsy programme staff
  • LUPIN members
  • Trainee representatives from each year

Widening Participation activities

The Widening Participation Outreach Group at Lancaster University is passionate about inclusivity and as such we are interested in recruiting clinical psychology applicants from people who identify with a minority group.

Background and rationale

This is a national issue affecting all training courses.

In 2022, 77% of total applicants were white, with 12% of Asian origin, 5% Black and 4% mixed ethnicity. 79% of applicants were female, 76% under 30 years of age, 79% heterosexual and 83% identified themselves as not-disabled.

Our aim is to diversify the clinical psychology profession by disseminating information about how to become a clinical psychologist to sixth form schools and colleges that have large minority populations. Our outreach focuses on recruiting applicants from minority groups who are currently under-represented in the clinical psychology profession.

What we’ve done so far

Some members volunteer for Inspiring the Future and we have been invited to talk about clinical psychology and the course at local schools, 6th Forms, and universities. This has been helpful in de-bunking some myths about admission requirements and sharing our ethos and commitment to diversifying the profession. We have also recently provided a presentation to AQA psychology teachers, who we hope will spread the word to their students and support under-represented groups in considering clinical psychology as a career.

Inclusivity Development and Implementation Group Terms of Reference

Summary of a successful admissions process

  1. The candidate applies via the Clearing House in Clinical Psychology.
  2. Lancaster programme staff check that all applicants to the Lancaster DClinPsy meet the minimum entry requirements. If the candidate discloses a disability they may be contacted by programme staff to check if any reasonable adjustments are required. Applicants should contact the programme if they require adjustments.
  3. The candidate takes a screening test online. Applicants with the top scores (number selected will vary based on commissions) progress to the next stage of the selection process. Please check our website at https://www.lancaster.ac.uk/dclinpsy/applicants for up to date information on the process for this application cycle. Candidates to whom a provisional offer of a place is made will be asked to take a test similar to the initial screening test, online and under supervised conditions, to confirm their initial scores.
  4. A provisional offer is made subject to:
    • University requirement: A satisfactory score on a repeat of the screening test under supervised conditions
    • Trust requirement: Employment references from the previous 3 years
    • Trust requirement: Completion of LSCFT’s ‘Self Declaration Form A’
    • Trust requirement: Occupational health check
    • Trust requirement: Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) check
  5. Where any exceptional issues arise during the admissions process about a candidates suitability for training outside, the programme may require the applicant to participate in our fitness to practice process if they wish to proceed with an application

Selections and Admissions Development and Implementation Group (SADIG)

The SADIG meets regularly and is formed of two related membership groups. The staff SADIG is a project implementation group. It meets often during busy periods of the annual selection planning and delivery process and less regularly during quiet periods. There are sometimes meetings at short notice to deal with issues as they arise. The full SADIG membership includes staff, trainees from each cohort, members of LUPIN and other stakeholders. This group meets three times a year and informs strategy.  Improvements to the process are also discussed. There are two SADIG half away days each year following the most recent admissions round. A full SADIG meeting focuses on reviewing the process and making recommendations.  The staff SADIG meeting reviews the recommendations of the full SADIG and creates an implementation plan.

Selection and Admissions DIG Terms of Reference

Specific therapy teaching

The Lancaster programme is approved by the HCPC and accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS). The BPS requires all programmes to teach CBT and at least one other approach over 3 years. At Lancaster, we offer CBT, neuropsychology, cognitive analytic therapy and systemic practice. Within the systemic practice teaching there are also specialist teaching sessions on narrative therapy. Teaching on other models is also part of the curriculum.

Clinical experiences are shaped to provide clinical skills development in the trainees’ preferred approach(es) wherever possible. Trainees record their experiences in a portfolio and can consolidate their relevant experience after the programme ends. The programme is currently developing pathways via which trainees can obtain the necessary the experiences to obtain membership of specific therapy model professional bodies leading to accreditation with UKCP.

Equality scheme

1. Values

The Lancaster DClinPsy Programme is committed to celebrating the diversity of all those associated with it: trainees, staff, members of our Public Involvement Network (LUPIN), teachers, supervisors and assessors, the Learning Together Group and others. This commitment is underpinned by an emphasis on inclusivity and equity. Learning experiences provided and facilitated by this programme, and the quality of our professional relationships, are informed by this overarching principle.

2. The Policy Landscape

The DClinPsy Equality Scheme is in development, pending the appointment of an EDI Lead. It will be based on the policies of our stakeholders, below, but will show actions and plans specific to the DClinPsy Programme:

For more detail on legislation governing equality policies, precise definitions of terms and equality policies and strategies at an institutional level, please follow the links above.

3. Dimensions

Both LSCFT and Lancaster University organise their equality strategies around six equality strands:. The Equality Act 2010 specifies nine protected characteristics which cannot be used as a reason to treat people unfairly: race and ethnicity, disability, gender, age, religion/belief, sexual orientation,  gender reassignment, marriage & civil partnership, and pregnancy and maternity. The Act says that socio-economic factors must be considered, in terms of strategy, by public bodies but does not specifically include higher education institutions in this. The Lancaster DClinPsy regards equality of outcome regardless of socio-economic background as important, however, and we are taking steps to monitor and improve this aspect of our selection process. The BPS’s human rights statement reflects the values of the Lancaster DClinPsy Programme by changing the emphasis of their equality strategy from diversity to inclusivity:

“generally, human rights, social inclusion and social equity must be promoted, as there is clear evidence that these issues are intimately related to healthy, supportive communities which support high levels of personal and psychological well-being”

The Lancaster DClinPsy aims to support high levels of psychological wellbeing in those associated with the programme by ensuring that our activities support their inclusion and full contribution.

4. Programme Structure

The Lancaster DClinPsy Inclusivity Development and Implementation Group (IDIG) is chaired by Clare Dixon and comprises: members of the programme team, trainee representatives from each year of training and a number of members of LUPIN. This meets 6 times a year and makes recommendations to the Operational Management Group (OMG). The OMG makes decisions which may be implemented or discussed by the Inclusivity DIG.

The Anti-Racism Accountability Group (ARAG) was set up in 2020 in a response to the ongoing systemic racism within our course, the profession, and wider society. We wanted to ensure that on the DClinPsy there is a group that is embedded in the course’s process and structure that can hold the course to account on anti-racist practice.

The ARAG sits above the Development and Implementation Groups (DIGs) and guides and hold them account to anti-racist practice. The group, which consists of trainees from the global majority, and staff, meet monthly.

5. Widening Participation in the Profession

Clinical Psychology is not a diverse profession, in terms of the six equality strands. For example, in 2022, 77% of total applicants were white, with 12% of Asian origin, 5% Black and 4% mixed ethnicity. 79% of applicants were female, 76% under 30 years of age, 79% heterosexual and 83% identified themselves as not-disabled.

Undergraduates on UK psychology degree courses match this profile closely so the issues begin earlier than selection for training. In order to encourage applicants from underrepresented groups the Lancaster DClinPsy has taken a number of steps to widen participation:

  • Outreach. The IDIG works to encourage applicants from a variety of underrepresented groups to apply to the Lancaster DClinPsy programme for clinical training. The aim is a match between the membership of the Clinical Psychology profession and the general population. The IDIG disseminates information about how to become a clinical psychologist to sixth form schools and colleges that have been identified as having students from underrepresented groups. Widening participation is a standing item on the IDIG agenda and is discussed regularly. Members of this group attend careers fairs, speak to students about the programme and promote diversity and inclusivity. Some members of the group also volunteer with Inspiring the Future.
  • In July 2022 we delivered a live, online presentation for GCSE and A Level psychology teachers in collaboration with AQA, with the aim of providing information on a career in clinical psychology, current activities to improve equity of access to training for marginalised groups and Lancaster’s selections and admissions process.

6. Admissions

The admissions process

The DClinPsy Programme changed its admissions procedures in 2005 in order to widen participation to the profession. Previously, applicants were selected for interview by rating their relevant previous experience, academic qualifications and references. This privileged those who were able to study for further degrees and/or take a number of poorly paid jobs or voluntary work. This is much easier where family/other financial support is available so we stopped rating experience and academic attainment. We now ask all applicants to take a short online test of deductive reasoning as the first stage of our selection process. There is evidence that the results of general mental ability tests predict success in complex careers at a postgraduate level. Competencies established by job analyses and a competency mapping exercise are assessed during the selection event(s).

Applicants declaring a disability

Applicants with a disability are encouraged to contact the programme in advance of the screening phase of our selection process so we can provide appropriate support in all their contacts with us. When students declare a disability at any stage of the programme, they are offered support tailored to their needs. The Lancaster DClinPsy Programme is committed to making reasonable adjustments to supporting candidates with a disability in achieving the HCPC’s standards of proficiency for practitioner clinical psychologists. Please see the HCPC’s Disabled Person’s Guide to becoming a Health Professional.

In 2022, 14% of Lancaster applicants disclosed a disability at application stage. 17% of applicants invited to interview declared a disability, and 16% of those accepting places declared a disability.

Applicants for clinical training at Lancaster will continue to be surveyed after the event and particular attention paid to adjusting arrangements for those declaring a disability which support them in demonstrating their competence and values.

Data review

Data are provided by the Clearing House in Clinical Psychology each year. These show the profile, in terms of equal opportunities, of all applicants to the Lancaster DClinPsy at each stage of the admissions process: application, written task and selection event. We can see the profile of those who accepted places. A review of the data for the 2022 intake can be found in the online handbook. This data is used to highlight areas where we can improve in relation to inclusive selections and admissions.

Selectors

Many selectors are Clinical Psychologists, which is not a diverse group in terms of the nine equality strands identified within the Equality Act, 2010. There is a danger that applicants similar to selectors will be privileged and steps are taken to mitigate against this possibility. Applicants are rated using a competency-based framework and all selectors are trained in its use each year. Current trainees are full members of selection panels, alongside clinical psychologists and a member of the staff team. Members of Learning Together NorthWest Ltd (a local training consultancy which works to build awareness of learning disabilities), are part of the selection process, as are members of the public involvement network associated with the programme (LUPIN).  Selectors rate applicants on a number of competencies, available on our website.

In 2022 we surveyed our selectors’ demographic details: – 16% of our selectors were male, and 3% non-binary/third gender; 1% were transgender; 11% were non-heterosexual; 13% were disabled under the Equality Act; 41% had lived experience of mental health difficulties; 30% came from an economically deprived background; and 4% were Asian, 3% mixed ethnicity and 1% Black. Increasing, the diversity of our selection panels is a priority. In 2017 and 2018, selection panels were audio recorded as quality assurance to mitigate against any impact of unconscious bias. In 2020 and 2021 we approached EDI leads from local NHS Trusts and other organisations to engage potential selectors from the global majority. This is an ongoing process and will inform selector training in future years.

7. Widening participation in the Programme

Public involvement

In 2008, the LUPIN group was established to facilitate the influence of service users and carers on the activities of the Lancaster DClinPsy. Since then, LUPIN members have had an important role in shaping teaching and selection procedures. Their role in supporting research is developing and LUPIN members have been invited to all programme Development and Implementation Groups as full members.

Flexible working patterns for trainees

A number of trainees have atypical working patterns and paths through training. This may be due to pregnancy, family commitments, or to manage chronic health conditions. Applications for extra funding from Health Education England are submitted when required.

The programme now offers an accredited part time training pathway alongside the full time route. In 2020, 2 trainees became the first to take up this opportunity, and in 2021 we had 4 trainees accept an offer to train part time.

Flexible working for staff

Many DClinPsy staff work part time or have flexible working arrangements e.g. annualised hours, to enable their full participation in the DClinPsy programme whilst undertaking other activities e.g. a clinical role or raising a family.

Reasonable adjustments

Reasonable adjustments to working life are made in negotiation with staff and trainees as it becomes apparent that they are needed to facilitate their full involvement in the programme and their maintenance/attainment of the HPC standards of proficiency. Many trainees do not declare a disability at the point of selection but find it useful to signal their need for adjustments during training. The programme works closely with the university Disability Service and Trust HR partners.

8. Inclusive Teaching

Please see Inclusive Teaching handbook page for more information.

9. Practice Placements

Trainees discuss barriers and drivers for inclusivity in relation to the service and how connected it is with the local community with their placement supervisors at the start of placement; reflections are documented within the placement contract.

A review of the way diversity is audited as an element of clinical experience on placement led to changes in the use of placement documentation. The Placement Audit Log Book is a record of all experiences on a practice placement and includes open-ended questions intended to prompt thinking around inclusivity issues on placement.

Trainees are asked to reflect on service-user involvement in the service, and about how their thinking around inclusivity issues has developed over the course of the placement. Clinical Tutors who lead the Placement DIG routinely review trainees’ Placement Audit Log Books at the end of each placement to check for any relevant placement quality issues, such as trainees feeling excluded on placement. Additionally, Clinical Tutors enquire about placement inclusivity issues during placement reviews and Individual Trainee Progress meetings with trainees.

10. Trainee support

The DClinPsy Programme values the contributions of all trainees and works to support them in reaching their full potential. Trainees are supported by their tutor pair, buddy system, programme staff, personal mentors, placement providers and colleagues. Trainees who feel excluded due to identification with a marginalised group can use the opportunities offered to help them address these issues and challenge barriers to inclusion. For example, each trainee is offered a small number of individual cognitive analytic therapy (CAT) sessions as part of the training experience (‘personal reformulation’ sessions) during their training. In addition to the opportunity to reflect on individual values and behaviour, the experience of receiving therapy is somewhat akin to that of a service user and provides an insight into the power imbalances which can occur inadvertently in therapy. In 2020 we set up a reflective space for trainees who experience racism. A reflective space for trainees with a disability and/or lived experience of mental health difficulties was set up in 2022, as was a similar space for LGBTQIA+ trainees.

11. Equal opportunities data

You can view the information on the applicants for Clinical Psychology training across the UK compared to Lancaster on our Admissions Equal Opportunities page.

12. Links to Policy & Resources


Lancaster University Equality, Diversity and Inclusion (EDI) Stratgey
LSCFT’s equality and diversity web page
HCPC’s Equality and Diversity Policy
BPS Declaration on Equality, Diversity & Inclusion
Association of Clinical Psychologists (ACPUK) Equity, Diversity and Inclusion: Context and Strategy for Clinical Psychology
Equality Act (2010)
HCPC’s guidance: ‘A disabled person’s guide to becoming a health professional’
Guidance on document and slide preparation
Marking for assignments in relation to a specific learning difficulty

 

Marking for assignments in relation to a specific learning difficulty (SpLD)

In line with university guidelines, DClinPsy trainees with a diagnosis of a SpLD have their diagnosis highlighted to academic markers by the use of the university’s standard coversheets.

This requests that markers are aware of the relevant guidelines and will be sent as applicable to those marking assignments.

In addition to the university coversheet, an explanatory programme-specific addendum (see below) will be sent to markers to clarify the requirements.

Lancaster DClinPsy Guidance to Markers in relation to trainees with a Specific Learning Difficulty (SpLD)

In line with university guidelines, trainees with a diagnosis of dyslexia, dyspraxia, and dysgraphia have the opportunity to highlight their diagnosis to academic markers by the use of the university’s standard coversheet, hereby requesting that markers are aware of relevant guidelines. As effective written communication is a specific competence required by clinical psychologists, and in line with BPS guidelines on assessing work of trainees with SpLD, the programme would like to highlight that markers are requested to provide constructive feedback where issues relevant to the disability are apparent in the work, but NOT to make allowances in the marks given for written communication due to this. Reasonable adjustments, such as study skills support and proof reading, are accessible to trainees prior to submission.

Identification of work

All work which is sent to examiners or assessors will be identified by means of a coversheet advising the examiner/assessor that the candidate has been diagnosed with a SpLD and referring to these guidelines.

General guidelines for marking work by candidates with dyslexia

An individual with dyslexia has difficulty both with the expression of his/her ideas in written form and with the correct use of language. It is commonly recommended, therefore, that wherever possible assessors award marks that reflect the candidate’s understanding of the subject rather than the level of linguistic skills. However, it is not intended that academic rigour be sacrificed, and where the marking criteria award marks for presentation or language special consideration should not be given.

However, some errors might still mean a fail is appropriate. For example, psychologists are often engaged in report writing which requires sources to be correctly referenced. As this is a skill necessary to fulfil the psychologists’ role, an adjustment would not normally be made.

For example, a candidate for the Qualification in Forensic Psychology might include in their evidence a report written for a parole board. This is a key requirement of the forensic psychologist’s role and they must be able to do this in order to be a competent forensic psychologist. Adjustments might be made to assist the candidate in preparing such a report to the required standard. However, it is possible that a candidate may lack the necessary skills to communicate in writing to the parole board and, in such circumstances, it would be appropriate for the assessors to fail the work.

University Assessment marking guidelines for students with a SpLD

Academic Standards

You may have concerns about compromising academic standards when making allowances for dyslexia. You should be reassured that the need to maintain academic standards is a fundamental premise within the law. There must be no difference in the requirement for students with dyslexia to provide evidence of learning than for their peers and reasonable adjustments cannot involve failure to penalise lack of knowledge or understanding. Also, where aspects of performance such as accurate spelling and grammar are part of the competence standards for a module, reasonable adjustments do not have to be made.

Providing feedback to trainees

Be sensitive toward individuals and their work in your feedback. Constructive criticism that is sympathetic to the students’ difficulties can help individuals to progress.

ILSP Assessment Coversheet Marking Guidelines (accessible to staff only)

Admissions equal opportunities data

Each year the Clearing House in Clinical Psychology provides data on applicant numbers for each of the UK Clinical Psychology Programmes and for the UK as a whole. They also provide a breakdown of applicants by gender, cultural background, age, disability, number of dependants etc. The programme compares its data to national patterns. Equal opportunities information is also collected from each intake of trainees after appointment. The data are analysed and provide a direction for future actions.

Equal Opportunities Data: Lancaster compared to UK wide courses

Structure of Assignment and Thesis Activity

2018 cohort onwards - full time route

Trainees are engaged in assessed academic activities across the three years of training in parallel to the teaching and placement activities. Whilst the exact timings will differ for each trainee, a typical timetable of this activity for a trainee on a full-time pathway is detailed in the table below.

Typical timetable of trainee assignment and thesis activity over the programme

Self-Assessment Exercise
(SAE)
Placement Assignment Live Skills (PALS#1) Further Live Skills Assignments (PALS#2, PALS#3, PASE) Service Improvement Poster Presentation (SIPP) Thesis Preparation Assignment (TPA) & Thesis
YEAR 1
Sep – Oct
Initial self-appraisal  written

 

Formative roleplay & other  self-assessment activities

Start first placement Thesis supervisor allocated
Nov – Dec Submit SAE form

 

SAE clinical viva

Start videoing  placement work for PALS TPA proposal form submitted
Jan – Mar Finalise choice of work for PALS. Collate information and video. TPA introduction draft read

 

TPA literature review section submitted

Apr – June Submit PALS#1 Second placement begins.

 

Decide on PALS#2 or PASE.

 

If PASE obtain approval at placement and submit PASE proposal form

 

IF PALS begin videoing work

Finalise thesis topic

 

Identify Field supervisor

 

TPA thesis proposal section submitted

Jul – Sep Continue work on PALS#2 or PASE Thesis proposal reviewed

 

Thesis contract / action plan meeting

Identify ethics committee(s) to apply to. Get relevant forms and deadlines for submission.

YEAR 2
Oct – Dec
Submit PALS#2 or PASE

 

Third placement begins.

 

Decide on  PALS#3 PALS#2,or PASE (if not already  completed)

 

If PASE obtain approval at placement and submit PASE proposal form

 

IF PALS begin videoing work

SIPP assessed project work week and presentation Hand in complete draft ethics proposal.
Finalise ethics proposal and submit for ethical approval.Decide on topic for Systematic Literature Review chapter and begin collecting references
Jan – Mar Continue work on PALS or PASE

 

Submit PALS or PASE.

Obtain ethical approval for thesis study.

 

Draft introduction and method of Systematic literature review chapter

Apr-Jun Fourth placement begins.

 

If PASE obtain approval at placement and submit PASE proposal form

 

IF PALS#3 begin videoing work

Draft introduction and method to Empirical paper

 

Data collection

 

Begin analysis

Jul – Sep Continue work on PALS or PASE

 

Submit PALS or PASE.

Complete data collection

 

Review literature for Systematic review

 

Identify topic for critical appraisal chapter

YEAR 3
Oct– Dec
 Draft results and discussion of systematic literature review chapter

 

Complete analysis of data

 

Draft results and discussion of  empirical paper

Jan – Mar Draft critical appraisal

 

Final drafts of  other chapters

 

Final formatting of thesis

 

SUBMIT THESIS

Apr – Aug Viva voce examination

 

Corrections to thesis as required

Part time route

Structure of Assignment and Thesis Activity

Part time route

Trainees are engaged in assessed academic activities across the four years, 4 months of training in parallel to the teaching and placement activities. Whilst the exact timings will differ for each trainee, a typical timetable of this activity for a trainee on a part-time pathway is detailed in the table below.

 

Timepoint in training Self-Assessment Exercise
(SAE)
Placement Assignment Live Skills (PALS#1) Further Live Skills Assignments (PALS#2, PALS#3, PASE) Service Improvement

Poster Presentation (SIPP)

Thesis Preparation

Assignment (TPA)

& Thesis

Year 1

Sept – Oct

Initial self-appraisal  written

Formative roleplay & other self-assessment activities.

 

Start first placement

 

     
Nov – Dec Submit SAE form

SAE clinical viva

Start videoing  placement work for PALS      
Feb – May    

 

Finalise choice of work for PALS. Collate information and video.

     
JUNE   First placement ends    
July    

 

Second placement begins.

 

   
Aug   Submit PALS#1 Decide on PALS#2 or PASE.

If PASE obtain approval at placement and submit PASE proposal form

 

IF PALS begin videoing work

   
Year 2 Sept – Oct         Thesis supervisor allocated

 

Oct – Feb 1.5 study days per week – work on TPA and PALS#2/PASE

Nov – Dec         TPA proposal form submitted
Jan         TPA introduction draft read

 

Continue work on TPA

    Continue work on PALS#2 or PASE    
March     Second placement ends

 

Formative SIPP

 

TPA literature review section submitted
April     Third placement begins

Submit PALS#2 or PASE

 

 
April – Aug     Decide on  PALS#3 PALS#2,or PASE (if not already  completed)

If PASE obtain approval at placement and submit PASE proposal form

IF PALS begin videoing work

  Finalise thesis topic

Work on thesis proposal

 

Identify Field supervisor

Year 3          
Oct     Continue work on PALS or PASE

 

  TPA thesis proposal section submitted
Nov – Dec       Thesis proposal reviewed

Thesis contract / action plan meeting

Identify ethics committee(s) to apply to. Get relevant forms and deadlines for submission.

DEC     Third placement ends  
Jan     Fourth placement begins

If PASE obtain approval at placement and submit PASE proposal form

Submit PALS#3 or PASE.

   
JAN – March     IF PALS#3 begin videoing work

Continue work on PALS or PASE

 

Summative SIPP Hand in complete draft ethics proposal.
Finalise ethics proposal and submit for ethical approval.Decide on topic for Systematic Literature Review chapter and begin collecting referencesMarch – Aug 1.5 study days per week to include some thesis study allocation
April – June     Continue work on PALS or PASE

 

  Obtain ethical approval for thesis study.

Draft introduction and method of Systematic literature review chapter

July – Sept     Continue work on PALS or PASE

 

  Draft introduction and method to Empirical paper

Data collection

Begin analysis

Year 4          
Oct     Fourth placement ends  
Nov     Final placement begins

 

Submit PALS#3 or PASE.

  From Nov take majority of thesis study allocation in addition to 0.5 study days a week
Oct – Dec         Complete data collection

 

Review literature for Systematic review

Identify topic for critical appraisal chapter

         
Jan – April          

Draft results and discussion of systematic literature review chapter

 

Complete analysis of data

Draft results and discussion of  empirical paper

May – June         Draft critical appraisal

Final drafts of other chapters

June         Final formatting of thesis
July         SUBMIT THESIS
         
Year 5

Sept – Oct

 

 

 

 

DEC – end of training

        Viva voce examination

 

Corrections to thesis as required

 

 

Staff Continuous Professional Development Strategy

The Lancaster Doctorate in Clinical Psychology is committed to the continuous professional development (CPD) of its programme staff as an integral part of development and quality assurance. The staff CPD strategy aims to strike a balance between individual career development needs, as identified through the annual Professional Development Review (PDR) process, and the needs of the programme, in terms of areas of progression which require new knowledge and skills as well as more routine updating of core staff competencies. All programme staff, whether NHS- or university-employed or part-time or full-time, have a PDR with their immediate line manager. The action plans resulting from the PDRs are reviewed at regular intervals during the year and targets monitored.

Involvement in national committees, as well as acting as an external examiner is considered to be continuing professional development as well as a key professional responsibility. However, these roles and responsibilities need to be considered in terms of the needs of the programme and will also form part of the PDR discussions.

Staff may also be supported to attend conferences and seminars so as to present their own research, as part of their professional development.

Network/Conference Attendance and Membership of Online Forums

  • Psychological Professions’ Network
  • NHS England strategy events
  • Group of Trainers in Clinical Psychology service user conferences (BPS)
  • Group of Trainers in Clinical Psychology conferences, meetings and events (BPS)
  • National and North West Division of Clinical Psychology events (BPS)
  • Children and Young People Conference (BPS)
  • Health Inequalities events
  • Westminster Forum Events
  • Public Health England events
  • Assessment Practice Conference
  • Global Health Research Funding
  • Solution Focused World Conference
  • Managing Disability Conference
  • Asylum: Action & Reaction Conference
  • British Association for Behavioural and Cognitive Psychologists conference
  • Research Evidence & Findings in Therapeutic Communities
  • Beyond the Therapy Room
  • Inclusive Practice Event
  • Community Psychology UK

Development and maintenance of clinical skills mix

Internal and external supervision – using a variety of models including:

  • Coaching
  • Narrative
  • Cognitive analytical therapy
  • Acceptance and commitment therapy
  • Compassion focussed therapy

Gaining specific clinical qualifications in:

  • Cognitive analytic supervision
  • Clinical neuropsychology
  • Compassion Focussed Therapy
  • Tree of Life Narrative Approach
  • Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
  • Certificate in third wave CBT

Anti-racism development

  • Whiteness in Clinical Psychology Training with Nimisha Patel

National roles

  • Co-chair Group of Trainers in Clinical Psychology (BPS)

Plagiarism

The term ‘plagiarism’ relates to the ‘unacknowledged use of someone else’s work, usually in coursework, and passing it off as if it were his/her own’ (Dealing with plagiarism by students; an institutional framework; p.3). It includes collusion, commission, duplication of the same work for more than one assessment, inappropriate acknowledgement of text from another source and submission of another student’s work (regardless of that student’s consent). Fabrication of results relates to the presentation of data or results which have not actually been collected.

This document has been produced to dovetail with the university’s existing framework.

Background

Cases of plagiarism by trainees are rare, but given the programme’s status as a postgraduate professional doctorate, plagiarism has implications  in terms of fitness to practise. It is also important that inadvertent plagiarism can occur through a lack of knowledge of appropriate referencing devices.

Teaching

E-learning on what constitutes plagiarism (and why it is important not to engage in it knowingly or accidentally) is included in the induction to the programme. If trainees at any stage in their training need advice on whether text which they are producing constitutes plagiarism or not, they can discuss this informally with a member of staff. Trainees are also encouraged to use the university’s resources on avoiding plagiarism. The programme is committed to providing every opportunity for uncertainties and ambiguities to be clarified before the formal assessment stage. Consequently, this does mean that, should plagiarism be detected in a trainee’s work, lack of knowledge or uncertainty about whether this constituted plagiarism will not be considered an adequate or mitigating justification.

The university makes use of a number of practices  to detect plagiarism:

  1. Turnitin plagiarism detection software is routinely used to check all written submissions before they are sent to markers. This software checks both against published work and past coursework submissions so that any reliance on work submitted by previous trainees can be detected. This includes trainees or students on other programmes nationally.
  2. Guidance on plagiarism is sent to all markers of assessed work. This includes advice on what to do if plagiarism is suspected. It is the markers of assessed work who have the primary responsibility to detect plagiarism;
  3. Plagiarism is discussed at marker training workshops;
  4. Suspected plagiarised texts will also be checked using other databases such as Google Scholar and, if necessary, hand searching through relevant articles.

Where there are concerns around falsification of data, trainees must be willing to provide evidence of appropriate data collection.

Investigation process and sanctions

Where plagiarism is believed to be present in any piece of work authored by a trainee then a concern will be raised regarding this behaviour. The result of the concern meeting may be a referral to the the Division of Health Research’s Academic Officer for scrutiny. Should this happen, the Academic Officer will call a meeting with the trainee to discuss the alleged plagiarism. The trainee will be informed that a representative from either the LU students’ union or a colleague is welcome to attend this. The Academic Officer will then decide whether plagiarism has occurred. If it has, then a letter attesting to this will go to the registry and will be attached to the trainee’s file. The trainee will then be asked to respond to this letter to indicate how they will work to ensure that future work does not contain plagiarism. This letter will also be kept on file.  The Academic Officer may also recommend to the programme that a further concern or Fitness to Practise procedure be considered with respect to the trainee as a result of the plagiarism.

Appeals

Trainees only have the right of appeal upon failure of the whole DClinPsy programme.

Where a recommendation from the programme’s Exam Board has been made that the trainee fails the programme, the trainee’s case is automatically referred by the Chair of the Exam Board to student registry, who will offer them the right of appeal. More details are available in the university appeal process. However, an appeal to the University can only be heard on specific criteria, for example that there were either extenuating circumstances that had not previously been made known or procedural irregularities. Appeals are not allowed on the basis of errors in academic judgement.

More detail on this is available in the University’s Manual of Academic Regulations and Procedures (MARP).

All decisions made by the  university’s Standing Academic Committee are binding on Boards of Examiners.

Subsequent to this, the final avenue for appeal against exclusions is via the Office of the Independent Adjudicator for students in higher education.

Advice on the various levels of the appeals procedures can be sought from trainees’ tutor team, mentor or a student union representative.

 

Office of the Independent Adjudicator for students in higher education
Manual of Academic Regulations and Procedures (MARP) Academic Appeals

Personal and professional development for trainees

TYPE OF TRAINEE SUPPORT PSYCHOLOGISTS AND OTHERS INVOLVED FREQUENCY OF MEETINGS WITH TRAINEES
Tutor pair and individual training plan (ITP) Programme staff: one member of the clinical team oversees the training pathway in partnership with a member of the research team Meet with trainees at least monthly. Individual training plan meetings at least twice per year.End of training interview in last year of training.
Mentoring Scheme Clinical psychologists and other appropriately registered professionals external to the course that are working in the region. The system is coordinated by the Mentoring Scheme Associate Tutor There is no specific frequency; varies in accordance with trainee (mentee) needs and wishes and mentor availability.
Mini Cognitive Analytic Therapy (CAT) Cognitive Analytic Therapist external to the programme. Trainees have £500 available to use for CPD and research purposes over the course of their training. These may be used to undertake CAT reformulation sessions. There is no specific frequency or number; varies in accordance with trainee choice.
Reflective space for trainees who experience racism Self-facilitated trainee space for peer support around experiences of racism Monthly
Reflective peer support space – Disability / Lived Experience Self-facilitated accessible to any current trainee who self-identifies as disabled and/or as having lived experience which adversely impacts their daily life. This encompasses physical and mental health conditions, self-diagnosis, and prior disability and/or lived experience Monthly
Reflective peer support space – LGBTQ+ Self-facilitated trainee space for peer support around LGBTQ+ experiences and identities Monthly
Personal Therapy Individual tutors and/or the Mentoring Scheme Associate Tutor will support trainees in finding appropriate therapeutic input. As necessary
Peer support; buddy system Trainees. Jo Armitage coordinates the buddy system Peer support: during teaching days (generally weekly) and as arranged by trainees. Buddy system: as necessary.
Student Learning Advisor Service No programme staff involved. A student learning advisor is based in the faculty who can provide study and learning support for trainees on an individual needs-led basis Frequency of meetings agreed as necessary
LSCFT assistance LSCFT Employee Assistance Programme:

Health Assured on free phone: 0800 030 5182 or via the On-line Health Portal @ www.healthassuredeap.co.uk Username: Lancashire, Password: Care.

 

LSCFT Well Service Website:

We are pleased to share with all staff the Staff Health and Wellbeing website. The website has been designed in collaboration with the ICS and provides a holistic repository for staff health and wellbeing information, tools and resources.

This website is accessible to staff, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week and can be used to access immediate support or to find out how you can make positive healthy changes to your lifestyle.

Website: www.lscwellservice.co.uk

Username: LSCFTWELL

Occupational Health Employee Assistance Program:

If you wish to access our Employee Assistance Programme please call 0800 028 0199.  This provides 24/7 telephone support, advice and information to help with your mental health and wellbeing.  You can receive independent confidential counselling support.

As necessary

Personal therapy & personal reformulation

The programme supports trainees seeking personal therapy. Trainees considering personal therapy are encouraged to discuss this with either their mentor, tutors, or with the Personal Development Clinical Tutor (Claire Anderson), who will assist them as appropriate in finding personal therapeutic support (for example advising them where to search). Neither course staff nor the Personal Development Associate Tutor would have any direct contact with a trainee’s therapist, and trainees would not be required to share any details of arrangements made around their own therapy. Trainees are able to use a proportion of their trainee budget to access personal therapy.

Currently, the course is able to facilitate access to Personal Reformulation sessions. These sessions are offered by Cognitive Analytic Therapists and consist of an initial meeting and a follow up session. Trainees can opt to fund these session out of their allocated trainee budget. If trainees are interested they can access a list of potential CAT therapists and find out further details about this opportunity through the ‘Personal reformulation information for trainees’ document.

Personal reformulation information for trainees

Exceptional Circumstances Committee

The remit of the programme’s Exceptional Circumstances Committee is to consider submissions by a trainee relating to events outside their control which may have resulted in them failing to complete assessed work to a standard of academic performance that might reasonably have been expected on the basis of their performance elsewhere during their study. The committee, which meets monthly, considers any submissions and reaches a judgement on whether the circumstances have been detrimental to a trainee’s academic performance. If so, it proposes a remedy for consideration by the Exam Board. The current Chair of the committee is Dr Euan Lawson, Senior Clinical Lecturer in General Practice, Lancaster Medical School. Other committee members are the clinical director, the chair of the pastoral development and implementation group, the chair of the examination board and the programme assistant – academic. If any of these members are unable to attend a meeting then their deputy may attend in their place. On each deadline date a request for any documentation is circulated to trainees. Any exceptional circumstances forms relating to a given assignment must be submitted within two weeks of that assignment submission. Exceptional circumstances cannot be submitted for an assignment submission that has not yet been made – in this situation the trainee should instead seek a deadline extension. Any queries regarding the administration/scheduling of the committee can be addressed to the Programme Assistant – Academic.

Some guidelines for submission of exceptional circumstances

  1. On the monthly deadline date a request for any documentation is circulated to trainees
  2. This documentation should comprise an exceptional circumstances form and supporting documents evidencing the medical condition or other adverse personal events for consideration as amounting to exceptional circumstances
  3. Circumstances likely to be considered ‘detrimental and requiring a remedy are only those that have not previously taken into consideration in terms of support for and adjustments to a particular assignment submission. Examples are:
    • Significant illness experienced by the trainee
    • Significant illness of an individual for whom the trainee has a caring responsibility
    • Death of a family member
    • Family breakdown
    • Significant unexpected life event
  4. Trainees must provide appropriate evidence to support their exceptional circumstances. This often takes the form of doctor’s notes or discharge letters.
  5. Trainees are advised to discuss their exceptional circumstances with their clinical and/or research tutor prior to submission. These staff members can advise on an appropriate submission and what would be considered sufficient supporting evidence.


Exceptional Circumstances form for students

Management Structure and Position within the University

The programme is situated managerially within the Division of Health Research (DHR), which is part of the Faculty of Health and Medicine (FHM). The current head of DHR is Dr Mark Limmer and the Dean of FHM is Professor Jo Rycroft-Malone. The Faculty for Health and Medicine, and therefore the programme, is situated within the Health Innovation One (HIO) building. For more information on the wider DHR and School structures, please refer to the relevant webpages in the appendix.

The programme is managed by three directors, the Programme Director, Clinical Director, and Research Director. All directors are clinical psychologists on the HCPC register. The Clinical Director manages the clinical tutors and trainees; the Research Director manages the research lecturers, and the Programme Administrator manages the administrative staff.

Department of Health Research (DHR) website

Guidelines for trainee professional behaviour

Background

Trainee clinical psychologists work in a variety of different contexts and are subject to many, sometimes conflicting, demands in terms of their roles and responsibilities. It is acknowledged that the role of the ‘developing professional’ on placement both in the NHS and elsewhere can jar with trainees’ expectations of holding a student-type identity within the university. The purpose of the document is to clarify expectations. It is not meant to serve as a commentary on trainees’ current behaviour. However, if an individual repeatedly acts in an unprofessional manner this will be recorded and the appropriate measures taken (see monitoring section below). As a general standard, it is important to acknowledge that the training programme functions best when all individuals, both staff and trainees, adopt a cooperative and respectful approach.

It is also important for trainees to note that as employees of Lancashire and South Cumbria Foundation NHS Trust, they are subject to the levels of professional behaviour outlined in this Trust’s policy documents. Ultimately, trainees must consider themselves as employed to train and behave as if they were within an NHS context regardless of their physical location.

Behaviour at University

  • The aim of our carefully thought out teaching programmes is to help you gain your core competencies and develop into qualified practitioners. To help achieve this, your attendance at all teaching sessions is expected in the same way as attendance at work would be required. Unauthorised absences are always followed up and poor time keeping will be acted upon. If you need to take annual leave, please arrange this with the administration office team in advance. A record of this will be kept and a request may be refused if it is recognised that significant levels of teaching are being missed. Obviously, some teaching sessions will be missed due to illness or exceptional circumstances but frequent one-day illnesses on teaching days will be noted (please see the absence from work policy).
  • If you are aware there will be a need to leave teaching early on a particular day you must make a request to discuss this with your clinical tutor or the Clinical Director in advance. This leave will need to be authorised by the Clinical Director. There are legitimate reasons for needing to leave early such as medical appointments and attending interviews. If you suddenly become aware you will need to leave teaching unexpectedly you need to try and discuss this in person with your clinical tutor or the Clinical Director. If no one is available you must follow the absence procedure and report that you have had to leave work unexpectedly. It is not permitted to leave teaching early without seeking authorisation. Authorisation cannot be given by individuals facilitating the teaching session. Where teaching is being delivered remotely, i.e. via Microsoft Teams or equivalent and trainees are having to contend with conflicting demands, such as carer responsibilities, this should be discussed with your clinical tutor and appropriate adjustments can be made.
  • Teachers work hard to prepare and deliver the curriculum. Please respect this and engage in the session. Your feedback regarding teaching is sought in a number of ways and we are always attempting to improve the quality and coherence of the teaching programmes. If you are unhappy about components of a session, this can be acted upon at a later date; please do not express your dissatisfaction through disengagement. Question asking, participation in exercises, comments and debate, all make for a richer learning experience for those involved. Some examples of not being engaged are being late, being otherwise engaged and remaining silent/not contributing to the chat function during virtual sessions. This list is not exhaustive; please monitor your own behaviour to make sure it communicates your engagement to the teacher(s). As stated above, where teaching is being delivered remotely, i.e. via Microsoft Teams or equivalent and trainees are having to contend with conflicting demands, such as carer responsibilities, this should be discussed with your clinical tutor and appropriate adjustments can be made. However, there will still be an expectation of ongoing engagement with teaching sessions when in attendance.
  • It is the trainee’s responsibility to check the teaching timetable when it is published to identify any days which may be problematic with regards to caring responsibilities. If any teaching days are identified as likely to be problematic–trainees are asked to raise and discuss with their clinical tutors as soon as possible and in advance of the day(s) as to how to best manage them. Options available are as follows:
    • Taking annual leave – this can be booked in hours rather than full days
    • Making a request to leave teaching early for a proportionate and reasonable amount of time (for example leaving teaching in time to meet the usual nursery pick up if on a 7.5 hour placement day). This needs to be explicitly agreed in advance with the clinical tutor
    • Where teaching is being delivered remotely, i.e. via Microsoft Teams or equivalent and trainees are having to contend with conflicting demands, such as carer responsibilities, this should be discussed with your clinical tutor and appropriate adjustments can be made.
  • It is important that any request is made in advance and explicitly agreed before the teaching day. The trainee is responsible for organising any agreements. If a trainee is absent without an agreement being in place then the trainee could be considered to be in breach of their contract as technically they are working for less hours than they are being paid for.
  • If a trainee needs to leave teaching (or placement) early because of an urgent need (e.g. child becomes ill) then trainees can request carers leave at short notice. This needs to be made via the absence phone.
  • Laptops, mobile phones and other devices must only be used for the purposes of the learning experience, for example accessing PowerPoint slides and note taking. Any use of electronic devices not related to the learning experience could lead to a concern form being submitted.
  • Each individual begins the course with different levels of experience and confidence. Everybody has something unique to offer their colleagues and this should be valued and respected. Listening to each other’s thoughts, questions and comments is important and mostly beneficial.
  • There may be some days when you are expected to be somewhere other than Health Innovation One for teaching. The teaching timetables, available on Moodle, detail where you should be and when. You will have electronic access to the annual plan via Outlook. It is your responsibility to check the timetables and get all the relevant dates in your diary. If you are not where you are supposed to be, it will be noted and you will be asked to provide an explanation. You will have to take unauthorised absence as annual leave.
  • After consultation with trainees and staff the following guidance for the use of cameras during remote teaching have been agreed. Trainees should have their cameras on for small group discussion, larger group feedback and certain exercises when requested by the teacher. Cameras can be turned off (if preferred) for PowerPoint and other types of presentations. If trainees are having technological issues that is fine, just let the teacher(s) and your cohort know via the chat. We really encourage contributions in all our teaching sessions. We are happy if that comes in the form of a verbal contribution but also happy for people to use the chat function. We recognise how difficult it can be to communicate on Teams and want to facilitate ways that people can contribute in a way that they are comfortable with.

Behaviour on placement

Generally, trainees are expected to adhere to the HCPC’s guidance on conduct and ethics for trainees, the BPS Code of Ethics and Conduct  (2018), the BPS Code of Human Research Ethics (2021), and also to bear in mind that the needs of clients are paramount at all times. Trainees are encouraged to familiarise themselves with all these documents before going on placement; however, it is imperative that trainees read the HCPC’s guidance thoroughly.

  • Clinical tutors monitor trainees’ progress and the experiences provided by the placement through mid-placement visits. It is important to note that the trainee’s professional behaviour and attitude relating to the above issues are reviewed and discussed, as well as their clinical competencies.
  • The Placement Contract (drawn up between trainee and supervisor) maps onto the core competencies in the Supervisor’s Assessment of Trainee (SAT) form. Supervisors complete the SAT form prior to placement visits and this forms the basis of discussions in this meeting. The form is then updated and completed, and submitted long with a log of placement experience and the placement audit form (PAF) as a formal evaluation of the trainee’s performance near the end of the placement. Again, personal and professional skills are among the ‘core competencies’ being evaluated.
  • Trainees are accountable to their clinical supervisor whilst on placement. Consequently, trainees must keep their supervisor informed (and the course via the absence phone) if they are off sick. Please refer to the guidance on sick leave procedures and reporting absences.
  • It is the trainees’ responsibility to inform their supervisor of any teaching that falls on a placement day. Supervisors must be informed promptly, i.e. as soon as the trainee is informed of the teaching dates or any changes to teaching dates. If a problem arises through a change in teaching date, this needs to be brought to the attention of both placement supervisor and the trainee’s clinical tutor. Trainees should inform supervisors at the start of training of any teaching which is scheduled to fall on a day usually reserved for placement activity.
  • Adjustments to hours on placement: requests to work outside of the typical 9-5 working pattern can usually be made (e.g. working 8-4) but they still need to cover the hours the trainee is contracted to do. They also need to fit with times when the service is open and be in negotiation with the placement supervisor and clinical tutor. Where all, or the majority, of a trainee’s placement activity is being undertaken remotely (i.e. at home), then flexible working patterns must still be negotiated with the placement supervisor and the clinical tutor.
  • The course staff do recognise the competing demands of the programme and the importance of supporting trainees’ personal and professional development. There are many different ways in which trainees can gain support during the course. However, it is the trainees’ responsibility to access and take up this support and to let somebody know if they are experiencing difficulties.
  • Given that the needs of clients are paramount at all times, if the trainee experiences any difficulties on placement, s/he should, if possible, approach their supervisor in the first instance or their individual clinical tutor for advice and support.

Contact with all staff involved in the provision of training

  • The overarching aim of the programme is to help trainees develop during training so that they meet the HCPC’s standards of proficiency. The role of staff is to help make this happen. Much is invested in supporting trainees through the many demands of the programme. This works best when all interactions are professional, respectful and courteous.
  • If you decide to contact a member of staff by e-mail, s/he will normally respond as soon as they are able. Some staff members work full time on the programme and will often be able to respond promptly. Other staff members have other professional commitments and do not have daily access to their e-mails. Please practise patience and direct any truly urgent queries to an appropriate member of staff; telephone contact, rather than email contact, may be more appropriate.
  • If you receive an e-mail from any member of staff that requires a response, it is expected that you respond promptly. Much important information is communicated this way and those trainees who do not respond put extra stress on programme systems. Every trainee has a Lancaster university e-mail account that can be accessed easily both whilst on campus and via the internet. The programme also maintains a Moodle e-learning web resource which trainees are expected to access regularly. Any trainees who consistently fail to respond to e-mails will be considered to be acting unprofessionally.
  • Staff do try to be as available and friendly as possible. Often, impromptu meetings are possible and staff will try to help trainees with any queries/difficulties. However, staff are not always available for many reasons and, where possible, trainees should try and arrange an appointment with the appropriate member of staff in advance.
  • The administration team are extremely busy and this needs to be respected. They are consistently helpful and friendly but this should not be abused – for example they are not able to provide you with administrative support for tasks you can complete yourself. If you have a query, make sure it is something that you really cannot find out yourself before asking them.
  • Please make sure you cannot find the answer to a query yourself before asking a member of staff. No member of the research team has memorised the APA guidelines. They have to look things up as well!

Monitoring

These guidelines exist to aid the smooth running of the programme and help all trainees to progress steadily. We hope everyone involved with the course is committed to promoting a culture of good communication, respect and courtesy, on which many of these guidelines are based. After reading this document trainees should be clear what they can expect from staff and what is expected of them in terms of their professional behaviour across different contexts. It is not expected that these guidelines will be regularly transgressed. However, the following procedures are in place should they be required:

  • Concern about trainee behaviour process
  • Persistent and/or major examples of unprofessional behaviour would be dealt with through the programme’s Fitness to Practise process

Absence from work policy and annual leave procedure
Concern about trainee behaviour
Fitness to practise
HCPC guidance on conduct and ethics for students
BPS code of ethics and conduct
BPS code of human research ethics
LSCFT code of conduct for employees
LSCFT disciplinary policy
LSCFT disciplinary guidance
LSCFT Managing unsatisfactory work performance policy

Directors committee

Responsibility

The Directors’ Committee takes an overview of the management of the Programme to ensure that it is operating according to the specifications within the contract between the Health Education England and Lancaster University. It considers, in its actions, the view of all partners in training. Members of the Directors’ Committee are the directors and deputy directors of the doctorate in clinical psychology and the programme administrator/deputy programme administrator.

The overall aims of the Directors’ Committee are:

  • The committee shall be responsible for the management of the programme budget
  • The committee shall be responsible for review of systems relating to mentoring and appraisal of all Programme staff
  • The committee shall consider issues relating to staff appointments
  • The committee shall consider issues relating to the integration of the Programme within DHR and within the wider context of the University
  • The committee shall consider the management of change that will become necessary to fit evolving demands and requirements of the NHS purchaser and of the University
  • The committee shall consider the wider context of management to ensure the Programme continues to meet standards set by the Health and Care Professions Council, the British Psychological Society, and other quality assurance agencies that may change over time
  • Programme staff will be invited to suggest items for the agenda

Directors Committee Terms of Reference

Concerns about the programme (for trainees)

As a programme team, we endeavour to undertake our duties in a respectful and ethical way, however there may be times when trainees wish to raise concerns about any aspect of the Programme and the following document outlines the procedures for doing so.

Trainees’ experience of training, their feedback and ideas for improvement are key elements of the programme. Trainees are represented on DClinPsy committees and development and implementation groups in order for their views about DClinPsy process/policy/assessments to form part of the strategic development of the programme. There are also two cohort tutors for each year group, including those on a ‘bespoke’ / part time pathway. Cohort tutor meetings are a regular forum for open dialogue about trainee’s experience of the DClinPsy and an opportunity to address any concerns about process/policy/assessment.

Where issues concern an individual member of staff then we would expect both trainees and staff to be committed to resolve any issues in an informal way, through discussion, mutual respect and understanding. If this does not achieve resolution then trainees should seek the support of their individual tutor pair. The tutor pair will discuss an action plan with the trainee and if appropriate facilitate further discussion with the staff member in question. Where this is not possible, or where the concern is regarding a member of the individual tutor pair, then the concern can be raised with the Directors. Again, all efforts will be made to resolve the issue without recourse to formal processes. If the issue concerns any of the Directors then the trainee should seek the advice of their individual tutor team.

Where all efforts to tackle the issue informally have not led to resolution that the trainee is satisfied with then the next step is to consider a formal complaints procedure. There are two separate routes for doing so: –

Any trainee wishing to consider a formal complaints procedure can seek the advice of Lancaster University students union and/or the Trainee Advocate.

Trainee feedback

The programme staff value feedback from trainees on all aspects of their experience in training. Some methods of obtaining feedback are very formal, for example after each teaching session trainees are required to provide feedback via an online system. Others can be less formal, such as conversations with teaching coordinators.

With placement activity trainee feedback is given on a form called the Placement Audit Form and this supplements verbal feedback to the programme staff during placement visits. There are more details relating to this in the Placements pages of the handbook.

Placement audit form

Trainees’ views on research are sought during the teaching sessions in the formal way described. However, with research there is considerable individual tuition given by the research team and trainees usually talk very openly about their experience of their research work and their support and liaison with research supervisors.

In addition to the above, trainees are encouraged to talk more generally about their view on training, in informal settings with staff and also within the more formal context of the various programme committees. There are also the individual training plan meetings, which occur at least twice a year, and the end of training interview which, again, provide useful forums for feedback.

Feedback is received and acted upon (as appropriate) following discussion in the placement and teaching reviews, and then in the appropriate development and implementation groups. The way the programme has decided to act upon trainee feedback is detailed at Programme Board meetings. The programme feels it important that the way feedback has been used is communicated to all providers of feedback, including trainees.

University student complaint procedure
LSCFT grievance procedure

Cohort tutors

Why do we have cohort tutors?

  • To provide a point of contact for each cohort (with the bespoke/part time group being considered as a fourth ‘cohort’) for the duration of training
  • To address specific cohort-related issues
  • To provide a conduit for information between trainees and the programme

How does the cohort tutor system work?

  • There are two members of the programme team (one clinical tutor and one research tutor) who act as cohort tutor for each cohort of trainees. The cohort tutors meet with the cohort once a month/every six weeks (or more frequently in exceptional circumstances, such as a pandemic) with meetings typically held on teaching days. The purpose of these regular, scheduled meetings are for trainees to inform the tutors of any issues affecting the cohort; and for the cohort tutors to pass on information to the cohort. These meetings can take place via Microsoft Teams or face-to-face on campus, dependant on which is most appropriate/possible.
  • Cohort tutor meetings are also a forum for trainee committee reps to feed back any items from committees and development and implementation groups they have attended.
  • The cohort tutors meetings are a standing agenda item for monthly staff team meetings. This allows for issues to be shared between cohort tutors and taken forward in efficient and systematic ways.
  • The cohort tutors pass information/concerns raised by the cohort on to the relevant individual or development and implementation group.
  • The cohort tutors are not responsible for individual trainee issues. Any issues affecting individual trainees should be taken to the trainee’s tutor pair in the first instance.

Qualtrics web based survey software

Qualtrics is a web based survey and data collection tool which is licensed for use by all staff and trainees.

To use Qualtrics, just visit : –

https://lancasteruni.eu.qualtrics.com

You will need to login using your University account details.

The interface is relatively simple to use and does not require any specific prior training to use. Extensive online training is available as part of the qualtrics site. If you have any questions about the system, contact the admin team for assistance.

Moodle Virtual Learning Environment

Moodle is a web based system which the programme uses to post teaching materials and allow trainees to submit assignments. Soon after being registered at the University trainees are able to access the information posted on Moodle relating to their teaching.

To access the DClinPsy section of Moodle just click on the link below:

https://modules.lancaster.ac.uk/course/view.php?id=2503

When you click this link you may be asked to log in with your username and password. These details are the same as the details you use to log on to the University network and will have been given to you by ISS soon after your registration.

If you have any further questions relating to Moodle please contact Rob Parker or Christina Pedder

Annual plan

Although the programme tries to use a set pattern of teaching, this is not always possible. The annual plan is used to track all teaching, meetings, placements, admissions processes, and holidays.

The plan, which is updated throughout the year, is available as an Outlook calendar which is shared with all programme staff and trainees. To view the plan, open your university email account in desktop Outlook, via the Office365 website, or the Outlook app and open the calendar for the account DClinPsy Annual Plan.

In Outlook you would do this by going into the Calendar view, clicking on the Open Calendar button and selecting From Address Book before selecting the DClinPsy Annual Plan user. The process for other email clients (and for different versions of Outlook unfortunately) will vary.

Organising Email and Calendars using Office 365 and Outlook

Peer observation guidelines

The key elements of the DClinPsy peer & stakeholder observation system are outlined below. This should be used in conjunction with the teaching observation feedback sheet.

Ethos

  • The peer & stakeholder observation system is based on the idea that anyone can observe anyone else.
  • The aim of observation is to help develop the process of learning and teaching (use of teaching aids, interactive/didactic style, and achievement of learning outcomes) and is not about advising on the content of the session.
  • The aim of observation is: to help individual teachers develop their skills and sessions; to help us develop a better understanding of teaching across the programme, and to share best practice.
  • Being observed during teaching is intended to be helpful development-focused process rather than something that should be seen as judgemental or anxiety-provoking.

Organisation of the peer observation system

  • Peer observation of teaching will be co-ordinated by the Curriculum Tutor and by the programme assistant for teaching.
  • Every member of the programme team engaged in teaching in a given academic year should be observed. In addition, at least 10% of external teachers should be observed every year.
  • If an external teacher requests to be observed, the course will do their best to facilitate this.
  • External teaching sessions are nominated for observation by strand team leads or others via the Curriculum Tutor. When selected, the teachers of those sessions should be informed with as much notice as possible and sent information about the peer observation process.
  • All programme staff are expected to conduct observations of teaching. The number of observations each staff member will be required to conduct will be calculated according to need, but is anticipated to be in the region of at least three observations per academic year for a full time staff member.
  • Other stakeholders of the programme are also encouraged to become observers, and the programme provides training in conducting observations to those interested. Newly trained observers will be invited to shadow and /or conduct their first observations in tandem with a member of programme staff.
  • Observations should last for a minimum of one hour.

The process of observation & feedback

  1. Prior to the teaching session (on the day or beforehand) the observer and teacher should meet to discuss the observation. The observer should be given a copy of the teaching plan for the session. The pre-observation conversation should include
    • A discussion about which section of the teaching it would be most helpful to observe,
    • The overall context of the teaching and what the teacher is aiming to achieve (including the learning outcomes for the session or observed section), and
    • Some information about what area(s) the teacher would most value feedback in.

    The observer should use the information to complete the first part of the observation feedback sheet.

  2. At the start of the observation, the observer(s) should introduce themselves to the trainees and explain why they are there.
  3. During the observation the observer should not take any active part in the teaching session. They should make notes on the observation feedback sheet.
  4. At the end of the teaching (or at a convenient break after the observation is complete) the teacher and observer(s) must meet so that the feedback on the teaching can be given, and to complete the final page of the feedback sheet.
  5. The observer must then return the feedback sheet to the programme office.

Points to remember when you are debriefing:

  • Focus on behaviour rather than the person.
  • Be specific.
  • Give feedback as soon as possible after the event.
  • Feedback should be confidential unless otherwise agreed.
  • Give positive feedback first.
  • Be aware of the balance between positive and constructive feedback.
  • What is important is how and when you give feedback not just a matter of what you say.
  • Always allow those being debriefed to say something about their session first before you give feedback.
  • Make sure teachers have the opportunity to highlight problems and possible solutions first.
  • Effective feedback should be focused on the amount of information that the receiver can make use of rather than the amount you feel capable of giving.

Peer observation feedback sheet
Peer and stakeholder teaching observation guidelines

Programme vision statement

The Programme

Setting the tone:

  • The programme tries to maintain a friendly, caring and approachable face with its trainees and with all stakeholders who contribute to the training programme. Our vision is to continue in this spirit.

Pursuit of knowledge informing diverse practice:

  • We seek to provide an environment that encourages the pursuit of knowledge that informs clinical practice.
  • The programme is intended to give trainees exposure to a wide variety of therapeutic models and to promote a diverse range of clinical psychology practice.

The changing context of Clinical Psychology:

  • We aim to place emphasis on prevention and community-oriented approaches
  • We wish to give our trainees some idea of the importance of ‘context’ for each client – an awareness that the client operates in relation to their family, work or school colleagues, social group etc.
  • The programme seeks to work beyond NHS policy, to also address health and social care policy, in recognition of the wider role of clinical psychologists in NHS and non-NHS settings. It is understood that graduates are to be exposed to these roles gradually and over time in order to develop the competencies, particularly of leadership and influencing which go with them.
  • In taking on board the relationship between clinical psychology and the wider health / social policy agenda we intend to increase trainee awareness while also making sure that the vision does not outstrip the reality of employment opportunities (i.e., that the changes foreseen within the programme do not move too far ahead of changes in the workplace).

Improving the programme:

  • We have a commitment to promoting equality, inclusivity and social justice and we encourage trainees’ and teachers’ exploration of these issues.
  • We have a commitment to building a genuine partnership between members of the public and those involved with the programme. It is recognised that there are service users and carers in both these groups.
  • We have a commitment to evaluating the quality of training.
  • We seek to highlight the importance of continual review and improvement of the programme and, similarly, to encourage trainees and graduates to continually reflect on and improve their practice.

Relationship Between the Programme and the Trainees

  • The programme needs to model its aspirations and embody the qualities to which we expect trainees and graduates to aspire.

The Trainees: Humanity, Humility and Expertise

Competence:

  • Trainees are expected to become competent and confident reflective scientist practitioners, taking a rigorous approach in both clinical and research contexts.
  • Trainees will have the ability to work across the lifespan, to formulate and to work towards increased sophistication of systemic formulations.

Integrating knowledge into practice:

  • Trainees will have the ability to understand, use and develop the evidence base; and the ability to integrate ideas and practices from various models in a coherent way that fits the needs of the particular client in the particular context.
  • Trainees will be able to manage the inevitable uncertainties of practice while continuing to assimilate new learning.

Excellence and innovation:

  • Trainees are hoped to become qualified clinicians who: challenge traditional ways of working and look for new solutions; continually challenge their own assumptions and those of others; and strive for academic excellence.
  • Trainees will be able to evaluate different approaches in terms of best fit with the evidence, the client, and their own personal style.
  • Trainees will be able to work as reflective and reflexive practitioners, questioning what they are learning and how best to apply this in practice, questioning the effectiveness of their own practice, and constantly improving that practice.

Approach to Clinical Psychology:

  • Flexibility is considered an important aspect of trainees’ approach: flexibility to hear and meet the needs of each client, flexibility in integrating theory into practice, flexibility regarding the use of models and evidence.
  • Trainees are to have a commitment to life-long learning.
  • Trainees are to approach issues of inclusivity and social justice with an appreciation of the particular pressures felt by individuals who find themselves in ‘disadvantaged’ groups (for example: those at socio-economic, or political disadvantage).
  • The approach to clients requires: caring and sensitivity to the ‘personal’ world of each client; non-judgemental attitude to clients’ problems; respect for the person as an individual (this means understanding how the problem came about and separating out the person from the behaviour); a recognition that respect can be conveyed in many different ways such as through tone, language and appearance of self; using the language of the client; working in empowering ways; and working with confidence but without arrogance.

Professional Roles and Relationships:

  • Trainees will be able to consult colleagues appropriately, to be flexible, and to work co-operatively with colleagues in a variety of professions.
  • Trainees will recognise the responsible position they are in, work in a constructive and ethical fashion, and be accountable for their work.
  • Trainees are understood to be becoming ‘key clinical leaders,’ i.e., seeking to take up a role wider than working on one-to-one interventions. Through the gradual development of competencies over time, graduates’ roles may encompass: service development and business planning as well as contribution to policy and strategy
  • Trainees are expected to begin developing and working with knowledge of the wider context of clinical psychology, including relevant governmental and European policies.

Training Review Interview

The training review interview is a voluntary discussion between trainees and their clinical and/or research tutor which aims to do the following: –

  1. Consider the trainees’ development over the final few months of placement
  2. Gather feedback from trainees to use when considering improvements to the course: the working environment, culture, processes and systems, management and development
  3. Information gathering – job on qualification, thesis correction status, publication plans etc
  4. Discuss post qualification life – ideas around CPD, mentoring, possible contributions to clinical psychology training post-qualification etc

An opportunity for the training review interview should be offered as near to the end of completion of training as possible. Notes can be taken by the tutor(s) with regards to trainee feedback about the course (point 2) and post qualification plans (point 3) with the trainee’s consent. Any written notes that the trainee consents to may be used anonymously on the course website.

Training review interview form

Trainee working pattern guidance

Annual leave entitlement

This will depend on your length of continuous service but will be at least 27 days a year, plus bank holidays (April to March). If at the start of or during training you accrue five or ten years’ continuous service within the NHS then your annual leave allowance will rise to 29 or 33 days respectively. Please show the programme office a letter confirming your years of continuous service and they will update your leave record accordingly. Which days count as annual leave? Example: You wish to take five days of annual leave, Monday through to Friday, inclusive. On three days you would usually be on placement, one day would be private study, and one day in for teaching. Each day counts as a day of annual leave. You need to officially ask for five days annual leave, and ideally liaise with your year group such that not too many are away from teaching at any one time. You must inform (in advance of taking leave) the Programme Office of your requested leave days. Please see the Absence from work policy and procedure in the online handbook.

Days on placement

Full time trainees should generally be on placement three days a week. Following thesis submission trainees are expected to spend 4 days a week on placement. Where thesis hand in goes beyond the middle of March there is a grace period of 4 weeks where trainees can retain a study day per week, after that they will be expected to spend 4 days a week on placement. Where there are specific exceptional circumstances which have resulted in a delayed thesis hand-in then more study time may be agreed but this would be in discussion with the Directors. Part-time trainees are typically on placement two days a week with a negotiated increase after thesis hand in.

Teaching days

Generally, there is one teaching day per week. If, for some reason, there is no teaching, you should be on placement. For example, during the majority of August there is no teaching planned, so, if you are not on annual leave go to your placement.

Ill health

Please refer to the Absence from work policy and procedure in the online handbook.

Non-typical leave requirements

Should any trainee require prolonged special leave, for example, maternity leave, reasons relating to illness (in self or family members), extensive compassionate leave, then that is arranged on an individual basis in line with LSCFT’s policies following discussion with the Clinical Director. A trainee requesting such leave would need to discuss with their clinical tutor in the first instance.

Supervisor training

At Lancaster the DClinPsy programme’s vision for trainees is that they become competent, confident, reflective and reflexive practitioners. Clinical practice placements and supervision play an essential role in this process. Placement supervisors are asked to support trainees in the development of their competencies and skills to a level which will enable trainees, upon completion of the programme, to meet the Standards of Proficiency (SOPs) as outlined by the Health and Care Professions Council (HCPC, 2023). Supervisors are also asked to contribute to an evaluation of the trainees’ competencies thus playing an integral part in the programme’s overall assessment process. 

There are various means by which the programme ensures that supervisors have the necessary skills, knowledge and experience to both support and evaluate trainees on placement. The programme confirms that all supervisors have appropriate professional registration through the quality assurance visit process which is carried out by a clinical tutor when a new placement is offered to the programme. The vast majority of supervisors are clinical psychologists and are registered with the HCPC. However, in accordance with guidance from the British Psychological Society (BPS, 2017) supervisors can come from other professional backgrounds as long as they are appropriately qualified and registered. These decisions are made on a case-by-case basis 

The programme also provides a comprehensive supervisor training programme for both new and experienced supervisors. Details of upcoming workshops are circulated to our current and prospective supervisors. Please contact George Silverwood with any queries.

Routes into supervisor training 

New Supervisors: 

All new supervisors must complete the first three days of the four day Introductory Supervisor training prior to offering a placement. The fourth day is then completed at a later date to allow for practical application of the training. Supervisors can complete the training offered by Lancaster or the equivalent training offered by one of the other Clinical Psychology Doctorate programmes in the North West. The Introductory Supervisor Workshops at Lancaster run at least once a year. The training is aimed at supervisors intending to start supervising within 6 months of completion of the training. 

Experienced Supervisors: 

In order to fulfil the programme’s commitment to excellence as the standard, experienced supervisors can attend Advanced Supervisor Workshops to review their learning in relation to their supervisory practice and to enhance their current skills. Some experienced supervisors who have had a break from supervision or who are new to the area may also choose to attend the Introductory Supervisor Workshops as a refresher. In line with the HCPC conditions all experienced supervisors are expected to attend supervisor training at least every five years. Setting up placements, placement visits and end of placement reviews provide the opportunity for programme staff to discuss supervisors’ interests and needs in relation to supervisor training. Invitations to attend specific training can also be made. Advanced workshops are offered regularly and details are circulated around current and prospective supervisors. Additional supervisor workbooks have also been produced to complement this process and facilitate access to ongoing CPD. 

Evaluation and Development of the Supervisor Training Programme 

All training is evaluated by means of questionnaires. Both quantitative and qualitative feedback is requested regarding the content, format and whether the learning outcomes of the session were met. A report is compiled based on this feedback and is used to develop future sessions. Currently the Advanced Supervisor programme relies on attendees’ self-report to check that learning outcomes have been achieved. The Introductory Supervisor programme uses both self-report and feedback from supervisees. There is ongoing work to further develop a robust framework to assess the achievement of these outcomes and the development of associated supervisor and trainee competencies. 

Inclusivity 

The Lancaster DClinPsy programme is committed to inclusivity and as such is open to the development of individual training programmes to enable access by as broad an audience as possible. 

Resources

We aim to make our resources freely available to supervisors to support development of their practice. Our Supervisor Workbook can be found in the appendix below.

Supervisor Workbook
BPS Introductory supervisor training
HCPC Standards of education and training
Supervisor’s guide to the e-portfolio

Psychological contracts

What is a Psychological Contract?

The most common notion is that it is the implicit promises (expectations and inferences) within relationships. It is a 2-way contract “locking you into the dynamic” (Conway & Briner, 2009). Psychological contracts are encouraged to be established on placement between trainees and their supervisor(s).

How is it Established?

As it is based on expectations it can start to be established long before two people meet (i.e. it could be influenced by what has been heard about the other or the place they work etc). It is not a static thing. There is ongoing re-negotiation of the psychological contract.

What Happens when there is a Psychological Contract Breach?

When an implicit contract is broken there is likely to be an emotional response (e.g. feeling let down/threatened). This may well lead to a shift in how the person that feels there has been a breach contributes to the relationship (e.g. withdrawing, discussing breach) which feeds back into the dynamic.

Do we want to stop Psychological Contract Breaches?

No. That is not possible. Broken implicit promises are bound to happen in all relationships. What matters is the repair after the rupture.

So, why do we use written Psychological Contracts?

One way to try and manage a psychological contract is to make the implicit, explicit e.g. by writing down expectations. However, research from organisational psychology has shown that this can lead to a greater sense of broken promises.

So, how can we use Psychological Contracts most effectively during training and should they be mandatory?

The advantage of making psychological contracts mandatory is that it indicates to trainees and supervisors the importance that we place on thinking about the supervisory relationship. The challenge is avoiding it becoming another tick box exercise.

Ideas to keep the Psychological Contract ‘live’

  • Change the Medium – recording a conversation about the psychological contract in supervision at some point between the beginning of placement and MPV.
  • Change the Timing when requested – trainees/supervisor to share with the visiting tutor at MPV so the focus can be looking at how the contract has changed over time (rather than it being a static document)
  • Develop prompt questions that focus on reviewing the psychological contract – e.g. What has worked well in the supervisory relationship? What would we like to be different? When have there been ruptures/misunderstandings/challenges to the relationship? Have we been able to repair these and if so, how? What could we try in future?
  • Change placement contract – have a tick box on the placement contract that says a psychological contract has been produced and review times booked in
  • Change PAF/PALOG – include space for trainee to reflect on psychological contract
  • Using an evaluative tool (e.g. the Leeds Supervisory Alliance Scale) – using this regularly in supervision could help to keep the conversation alive about the relationship/psychological contract

Sample psychological contract

Trainee personal details

If there are any changes to your personal details (e.g. address, contact details, name, next of kin) you must let the programme office know as soon as possible.

For any address changes you will need to inform LSCFT. You can change your details via ESR on an LSCFT Laptop or complete the section attached to your payslip – this should be returned to LSCFT as per the instructions on the form. You should also update your address with the university registry by completing the change of address form on the student portal. Please ensure that you also email Sarah Heard with your new address once you have done this so that the programme are up to date.

If you change your name you will also need to make relevant documentation (e.g. marriage certificate) available to the Post Graduate Studies Office.

Operational Management Group (OMG)

The membership of the Operational Management Group is formed by the chair of each of the development and implementation groups (DIGs), a staff representative from the Anti-Racist Accountability Group, plus the Directors and the Programme Administrator. The Operational Management Group meets every two weeks to consider proposals put forward by the DIGs. After any discussion, the outcomes are fed back to the DIGs with ratified proposals being passed on to the Director’s Meeting as per the programme decision making process. The OMG is chaired by a member of the Operational Management Group. who is elected by the group’s membership.

OMG Terms of Reference

Employment arrangements

The relationship between the University and the NHS

All staff are employed to work on the clinical psychology programme based at Lancaster University. However, some are employed directly by the university, and some are employed by the NHS (Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust (LSCFT)). Irrespective of employer, NHS or University, all programme staff have a base at Lancaster University.

Trainees are employed by the NHS (band 6) and are designated trainee clinical psychologists who have contracts with Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust for a  either a 36 month fixed term period, or a 52 month fixed term period. Trainees are line managed by the Clinical Director. However, at the same time, they are full time postgraduate doctoral students of Lancaster University. The money for the training, including staff and trainees’ salaries, comes from a purchaser of training, in this case NHS England. It is this NHS body that ensures the University has sufficient money to provide training. The formal training contract is currently held between the NHS England and the University.

Crisis management

If trainees are experiencing crises and need extra support outside of the above support systems, they should approach one of their individual tutors in the first instance or, in an emergency, another member of staff who is present within the university.

There are a number of sources of help and various types of provision that can be made. For example, if necessary, you can discuss compassionate leave arrangements with the Clinical Director, or even intercalation periods from the programme. If a trainee is absent for four weeks or more, the university follows an intercalation process which provides a pause in training without affecting a trainee’s registration. This is arranged alongside liaison with the trainee’s employer and includes sickness absences (over four weeks) and maternity leave, as well as other kinds of absence. The university also provides a confidential counseling service; it is usually only a matter of days to obtain an appointment.

Lancaster University counselling service

The employing trust provides assistance in times of crisis and help can be sought from the trust’s human resources department, Well Service Website, and employee assistance programme. In addition, where appropriate, the Clinical Director can refer the trainee to the trust’s occupational health service.

LSCFT Employee Assistance Programme

Health Assured on free phone: 0800 030 5182 or via the On-line Health Portal @ www.healthassuredeap.co.uk Username: Lancashire, Password: Care.

LSCFT Well Service Website

We are pleased to share with all staff the Staff Health and Wellbeing website. The website has been designed in collaboration with the ICS and provides a holistic repository for staff health and wellbeing information, tools and resources.
This website is accessible to staff, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week and can be used to access immediate support or to find out how you can make positive healthy changes to your lifestyle.
Website: www.lscwellservice.co.uk
Username: LSCFTWELL

Occupational Health Employee Assistance Program

If you wish to access our Employee Assistance Programme please call 0800 028 0199. This provides 24/7 telephone support, advice and information to help with your mental health and wellbeing. You can receive independent confidential counselling support.

Fitness to practise

Being fit to practise is a prerequisite for an applied psychologist to deliver a service to the public. The following extract is taken from the Health and Care Professions Council’s brochure entitled “The Fitness to Practise Process”:

What is fitness to practise?
When we say that someone is ‘fit to practise’ we mean that they have the skills, knowledge and character to practise their profession safely and effectively. However, fitness to practise is not just about professional performance. It also includes acts by a registrant which may affect public protection, or confidence in the profession or the regulatory process. This may include matters not directly related to professional practice.

What is the purpose of our fitness to practise process?

Fitness to practise proceedings are about protecting the public. They are not a general complaints-resolution process. They are not designed to deal with disputes between registrants and service users. Our fitness to practise process is not designed to punish registrants for past mistakes. It is designed to protect the public from those who are not fit to practise. If we decide that a registrant’s fitness to practise is ‘impaired’, it means that there are concerns about their ability to practise safely and effectively. This may mean that they should not practice at all. Or that they should be limited in what they are allowed to do. We will take appropriate action to make this happen. Sometimes registrants make mistakes that are unlikely to be repeated. This means that the registrant’s fitness to practise is unlikely to be impaired. People sometimes make mistakes or have a one-off instance of unprofessional conduct or behaviour. We will not pursue every isolated or minor mistake. We are responsible for handling fitness to practise cases. These are known as ‘allegations’ and question whether professionals who are registered with us are fit to practise.”

Whilst students (also known as trainees) of the Doctoral Programme in Clinical Psychology (DClinPsy) at Lancaster University are not registrants of the HCPC, they are involved in providing a service to the public under supervision on their practice placements. It is therefore incumbent on the programme to ensure that students are fit to practise as student / trainee clinical psychologists, to provide the same safeguards to the public as the above HCPC processes do with respect to qualified clinical psychologists. It is also a responsibility of the programme to inform the HCPC of a student’s eligibility to register as an applied psychologist practitioner, so the programme is therefore required to have an assurance process of its own with respect to ensuring that when students are awarded the DClinPsy, they are also fit to practise and therefore eligible to register (it must also be noted that the HCPC make their own assessment of an applicant’s fitness to practise upon application to the register; this will be informed by our assessment but not limited by it, in that the HCPC may seek further information to make any determination). This is why we have instituted the following fitness to practise procedures.

The Trainee Advocate is a qualified clinical psychologist, independent from the Programme, who is available to offer advice and support to any trainee who is in a position where successful completion of the programme is in question, such as being subject to a fitness to practise investigation or having reached the criteria for academic failure. The Trainee Advocate/trainee discussions are confidential with the usual limitations to confidentiality when safeguarding issues arise. The Trainee Advocate is a member of the fitness to practise panel/committee which meets twice a year to review procedures and is therefore familiar with FtP processes and can offer objective guidance. The FtP committee is a separate entity from FtP panels which are convened specifically when individual fitness to practise concerns are raised. The Trainee Advocate is able to offer assistance throughout the FtP process, including appeals and is also able to signpost trainees to other available sources of support.  The Trainee Advocate position is currently vacant and we are actively seeking someone to fill this role. While it remains vacant we are offering support on a bespoke basis.

Procedures to Address Concerns about Fitness to Practise

Beginning Fitness to Practise Procedures

1.0 These procedures should be followed when a report/correspondence is received by a member of staff of the Doctoral Programme in Clinical Psychology relating to the fitness to practise of a student on the programme or a prospective student who has been offered a post of student clinical psychologist on the programme. These procedures will also be followed if a member of staff of the programme considers a verbal report from a practice placement provider or another stakeholder to raise sufficient concerns about the fitness to practise of a student, or encounters behaviour that gives such sufficient concern. The Request for Investigation Form provides a structure for reporting concerns about fitness to practise.

1.1 Assessment of whether the report or correspondence potentially requires a referral to the Fitness to Practise panel will be made by the member of staff receiving the report in discussion with another member of staff (working in the domain where the concerns originated e.g. research / clinical or general behaviour). This assessment will be presented to the Clinical Director and will be based on one or more sources of evidence as follows:

  • Written reports by University academic or clinical staff and/or practice staff from placement areas relating to unsuitable or unprofessional behaviour by a student. These reports can come from any area within the programme (clinical, academic, research etc.).
  • Concerns about fitness to practise raised within written examiner reports or feedback on assignments.
  • Allegations from a member of the public relating to unsuitable or unprofessional behaviour by a student or a prospective student who has been offered a post of trainee clinical psychologist on the programme.
  • Reports from other disciplinary procedures or panels where evidence raising concerns about fitness to practise has come to light.
  • Reports received of criminal convictions, cautions or police allegations/investigations (for example, as a result of mandatory DBS [Disclosure and Barring Service] check as a condition of employment).
  • Information from the Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust Self Declaration Form A, regulated or controlled positions, completed as a condition of employment.
  • On rare occasions someone raising a concern may wish to remain anonymous. On these occasions it is challenging for us to fully and fairly investigate and may prevent us from being able to assess the concern at all. This circumstance limits the ability of the trainee concerned to respond, it limits our ability to offer support to those raising a concern and it limits our ability to keep an open dialogue. If someone expressing a concern wishes to remain anonymous, we prefer an initial contact with a member of the staff team so that ongoing dialogue can be maintained. Where possible, we aim to support those raising a concern to disclose their identity. We will undertake a preliminary assessment, including the motivation for anonymity, which can, rarely, be malicious. This assessment will also include the potential seriousness of the concern (i.e., breach of any of the HCPC standards of proficiency, or standards of conduct, performance, and ethics). This would be conducted by a member of staff who has completed Fitness to Practise training.

This list is indicative, not exhaustive.

The Clinical Director will determine whether this assessment constitutes a prima facie case within 5 working days. As part of this decision-making process, the Clinical Director will identify whether any previous concerns relating to fitness to practise have been documented in the student’s personal file. If a prima facie case is determined the Clinical Director will appoint an Investigating Officer to conduct further investigation, which will potentially result in a referral to the FTP panel. Should a situation arise whereby the Clinical Director has identified a potential FTP issue, then a senior member of the Clinical Psychology Programme team, who has sufficient FTP experience will be appointed by the Chair of the FTP Panel to fulfil this function.

The investigation process must be fair, robust, and timely. Due to the dynamic and unpredictable nature of investigations a time constraint will not be set upon this process. It will be completed as quickly as possible: in most instances this will be within 6 weeks but may be longer. The student will be informed that an investigation has started and may be involved in this process.

Following the completion of the investigation, the Investigating Officer will consult with at least one other FTP trained member of the faculty to determine whether the concerns reach the threshold for referral to the FTP panel. The Investigating Office will then make the referral if necessary, FTP referral form. A referral will be made if a threshold is reached in relation to any of the following criteria:

The Programme will inform the student in writing that he or she has been referred to the panel, identifying the area of concern on which this referral is based, and explaining the process. Should the Investigating Officer determine that none of the above threshold criteria has been reached, then no referral will be made to the Fitness to Practise panel, but those involved will consider any measures necessary to address the concerns raised. This is because, whilst the Fitness to Practise process may not be appropriate, concerns may still mean that disciplinary or capability processes would still be appropriate, or the concern in question may contribute to considerations of placement or assignment failure. Should such measures be necessary, these will follow other established procedures either within the University (e.g. academic issues) or within the employer, Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust (e.g. conduct on placement). The Programme will record all decisions about any concerns made at this stage, whether or not they meet the criteria for a referral to be made to the fitness to practise process. All such records will be maintained and made available to the student.

It should be noted that issues highlighted above could lead to dismissal from employment in Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust as a trainee clinical psychologist. The Programme specification highlights that in these circumstances trainees cannot continue to be registered on the Programme and their studies will be discontinued. Therefore, there would be no need for a fitness to practice investigation to take place. However, because staff dismissed from the Trust have a right of appeal, de-registration from the programme would only occur once the appeal had been resolved. In the meantime, registration on the Programme would be suspended, until resolution of the appeal. In the event of a successful appeal against dismissal, a fitness to practice investigation could be instigated in line with the criteria described above.

1.2 Should a fitness to practise concern requiring referral to the fitness to practise panel be identified, at this stage, those making the referral, in conjunction with the Clinical Director, will decide whether it is necessary for the student to be temporarily withdrawn from their practice placement, have their studies suspended within the University and placed on study leave (within the context of their employment within LSCFT). This is in cases where it is felt to be necessary to protect the public and/ or the student until the alleged case of fitness to practise can be heard and a decision ratified by the examination board.

1.3 As part of the programme’s duty of care to the student, where there are sufficient concerns relating to his/her health, a student will be asked to undertake an occupational health review prior to any formal hearing taking place. A student may refuse to undertake such a review, but will be made aware that if they do so not only would the panel be unable to access any mitigating factors that might be identified by such a review, but also that the panel may be concerned that the student was reluctant to ensure that their health was not impeding their fitness to practise. Depending on the outcome of any occupational health review, a decision will be made by the chair of the FTP panel as to what evidence from the occupational health review should be forwarded to a formal hearing. This decision will be made in full consultation with the HR representative from the employing trust. The student will always receive a full copy of the occupational health report.

1.4 It is possible that the programme is advised against instigating a fitness to practise process in case potential legal proceedings against a student are compromised. This situation could potentially be at odds with the panel’s duty to public safety. In this, or a similar situation, a panel shall be convened in order to consider the dilemma and relative risks, take legal advice if appropriate, and decide whether the fitness to practise process should proceed. This is to ensure the ongoing preservation of public safety.

1.5 All correspondence to the student, witnesses and panel members relating to a Fitness to Practise referral, panel meeting or outcomes of a panel will be sent electronically and in accordance with data protection requirements.

Fitness to Practise Panel: Composition & Process

2.0 The panel membership should comprise of:

  • An appointed chair of the FTP Panel, who will be a practising Consultant Clinical Psychologist appointed for a 2-year term. This term may be renewed for further 2-year terms of office as agreed by the FTP Panel.
  • There will be an appointed Deputy Chair or an appointed Deputy Chair Elect who work actively with the Chair with a view to succeeding as Chair in due course.
  • Chair of the DClinPsy programme Examination Board.
  • Another senior staff member of the DClinPsy.
  • An expert by experience appointed to the panel.
  • A qualified and appropriately registered member of a statutorily registered profession employed as a trainer in that profession within the University.
  • A representative from LSCFT Human Resources Department as employing body.
  • A member of Professional services from Lancaster University will be available to the panel but will not necessarily be present on the panel.
  • A Trainee Advocate, a Clinical Psychologist, independent from the programme.

All the above members or their nominated deputies must be present (in person or virtually) for a panel hearing to be quorate, with the exception of the trainee advocate and a member of professional services. In circumstances where a member of the panel is not present, the hearing will be rearranged. A member of the DClinPsy administrative team will also be present to assist with the administration of the panel. All members will have nominated deputies, to be available in case a member is already involved with the expression of concern in question, or unavailable for the panel. The chair of the FTP panel may also co-opt other members to the panel as necessary to review fully the issues of concern in the specific case (for example, an occupational health practitioner or a practice placement provider).

The student has the right to be accompanied by a person of their choice to support them through the process, and they will be advised of this in their letter inviting them to the hearing. This person will be present to support the student during the hearing and will be able to address the panel or represent the student. The panel may direct questions to all parties.

2.1 Hearings will be arranged on a formal basis. A panel will be convened within 40 working days of a referral being made. To aid scheduling, a provisional panel date will be scoped once the investigation has commenced. The hearing will be scheduled to last for a minimum of one day, but some hearings will require additional days to be scheduled. The student will be given a minimum of 20 working days’ notice of the hearing.

2.2 The evidence available to be presented to the panel will be sent to the student to consider a minimum of 15 working days before the hearing is scheduled to begin. The information sent to the student may need to be restricted in light of information governance requirements (e.g. data protection, confidentiality of NHS service users etc.), in which case amended information (e.g. using pseudonyms) which gives sufficient detail to allow the student to defend themselves without contravening the relevant information governance regulations will be provided. Any further evidence that is gathered for presentation to the Fitness to Practise panel subsequent to this will also be shared with the student as soon as it is administratively possible to do so.  The student is also permitted to provide their own written evidence to the hearing. This must be received by the FTP administrator at least 5 working days before the start date of the hearing. In exceptional circumstances, and on provision of a reason deemed satisfactory by the chair of the FTP panel, a student may request the rearrangement of the panel.

2.3 Prior to the hearing process the panel will consider all the written documentation made available to it regarding the referral and described in section 1 above. The panel will have read the documentation in advance of the hearing. A copy of all evidence available to be presented to the panel will be retained in the student’s personal file.

2.4 Both the chair of the panel and the student can request the attendance of witnesses at the panel hearing. The Chair of the panel may request the attendance of those individuals who have been involved in bringing the concerns to the attention of the programme, with comments invited from them to clarify any of the documentation. All witnesses attending will have submitted written statements to the panel, according to the timelines outlined in 2.1 above. Not all individuals who have submitted written statements will necessarily be asked to attend the panel hearing. Witnesses will be invited to attend at least 3 working days prior to the panel hearing. Failure by a witness to attend is not sufficient grounds for a panel not to reach a conclusion.

2.5 Hearings begin with the presentation of the case by the investigating officer. All panel members, the investigating officer, the student and the student’s representative (if applicable) will be present for this part of the hearing. The panel will have the opportunity to seek clarification and ask questions of the investigating officer. Following this, the student and/or their representative will have the opportunity to seek clarification and ask questions of the investigating officer.

2.6 The second part of the hearing is the presentation of the case of the student, in mitigation or defence of the expressed concern about their fitness to practise.

2.7 Following this, the chair of the panel will invite the individual witnesses to join (in person or virtually) the hearing. The panel will have the opportunity to seek clarification and ask questions of each witness.  The student and/or their representative will have the opportunity to seek clarification and ask questions of each witness. Each witness will only be in attendance for the section of the hearing when they are being specifically questioned.

2.8 The content of the entire hearing is confidential and professional rules will be observed. If the content of the meeting involves discussion of clinical practice, then any service users or third parties will be referred to by pseudonyms to preserve anonymity.

2.9 The student would usually be required to attend a fitness to practise panel hearing, though the chair may consent to them being absent if they judge them to have a reasonable explanation for such absence. Whether or not he/she is in attendance, the student may make written submissions in their defence and/ or in mitigation, according to section 2.2 above. This evidence will be considered at the Fitness to Practise hearing.

2.10 In the event that a student, who has been required to attend a hearing under these regulations, fails to do so at the appointed time without reasonable explanation, then he/she may be subject to disciplinary action under University regulations or in the context of LSCFT regulations. The fact of their non-attendance may also be included in the consideration of their fitness to practise, if it is relevant to the case being made.

2.11 Where a student fails to attend, then the Chair of the panel may decide that the panel will hear the case in the absence of the student. If the panel believes that the evidence is sufficiently clear, a decision and subsequent recommendations to the exam board will be made and notified to the student in the usual way. When the student is notified that they have been referred to the exam board, it will be drawn to their attention that the panel can act in this way if he/she does not appear.

2.12 At the conclusion of the hearing the Panel will determine the outcome and the extent and seriousness of the case and make a recommendation regarding any penalty or course of action to the Examination Board.. The student will normally be advised verbally of the recommendation of the hearing at the conclusion of the panel’s deliberations. They will then be sent a letter detailing the recommendation of the panel, including the rationale for this recommendation, within 15working days of the formal hearing. An audio recording of the hearing can be sent to the student on request. In the letter the student will be advised of their right to make a submission to the Examination Board (see 3.1 below).

2.13 The recommendations possible following a Fitness to Practise hearing are as follows:

  • There are no fitness to practise issues and the student is able to progress on the programme. This outcome does not require ratification by the examination board.
  • The student is able to progress on the programme, although fitness to practise concerns remain and are noted and recorded on the personal file. In any future referrals through the regulations these will be taken into account. An action plan and additional requirements to support the student will be put in place if deemed appropriate. This plan will describe in detail the targets that the student has to meet to provide evidence that the concerns have been addressed and progress has been made. This will be considered within a developmental context, e.g., an action plan may be more demanding for a student close to finishing the programme, in comparison to a student at the start of their training. The programme also has a responsibility to communicate these concerns and the attendant action plan with all practice placement providers contributing to the training of the student in question.
  • The student is not deemed fit to practise at this stage. The student may be required to interrupt their studies and/or be required to repeat/restudy an element of the programme to establish their fitness to practise.
  • The case is proven and the student is deemed unfit to practise. The student cannot redeem the situation and is unable to progress on the programme.

All decisions, with the exception of ‘no action’ need to be ratified by the Exam Board.

After a Fitness to Practise Hearing

3.0 The outcome of the hearing and the recommendation of the fitness to practise panel will be considered at the next appropriate Examination Board (allowing time for submission of information by the student (see 3.1 below). However, if an Examination Board is not scheduled within 11 weeks of the hearing, an extraordinary Examination Board will be convened within that time.

3.1 The student will be given at least 20 working days’ notice of the date of the Examination Board. The student can submit any new, relevant information to be considered by the Board alongside the submission of the Fitness to Practise Panel.  Any such submission must be received a minimum of 5 working days before is the Board is scheduled to meet.

3.2 The Examination Board will consider the recommendation of the Fitness to Practise hearing together with any new/relevant information provided by the student. The role of the Examination Board is to consider and ratify the recommendation made in respect of the student’s progress, including any outcomes for the student. The Board must also confirm, to its satisfaction, that due process has been followed at the hearing and that all relevant information has been fully considered.

3.3 If the Board either fails to ratify the recommendation of the fitness to practise panel or considers there to be additional information available that would potentially impact on the recommendation made by that panel, the Board can request that the original Fitness to Practise hearing is reconvened.

3.4 The student should receive formal notification of the Examination Board’s decision and the rationale of this decision. The examination board will also decide how best to communicate this decision, although it must be communicated promptly and within 5 working days of the Board meeting. A copy of any written correspondence will be retained in the student’s personal file.

3.5 Where the Examination Board ratifies a decision indicating that a student is not fit to practise and cannot redeem the situation, the student will be required to withdraw from the programme and will not be eligible for the full final award nor be eligible to apply for professional registration as a Practitioner Clinical Psychologist.

3.6 This set of procedures is consistent with Lancaster University’s own procedures, as set down in the Manual of Academic Regulations and Procedures (MARP). Please see the link for the postgraduate Examination Board Regulations

3.7 In the case of a student lodging an appeal against the decision of the Examination Board requiring him/her to withdraw from the programme on the grounds of fitness to practise, the appeal will be dealt with under the University’s Assessment Review Regulations (MARP E6.5). If the student appeals on the basis of the consequent termination of their contract of employment with the LSCFT, then this will be dealt with by the relevant procedures within LSCFT.

Summary of FTP procedures
FTP Request for investigation Form
FTP Referral Form
HCPC standards of conduct performance and ethics
HCPC guidance on conduct and ethics for students
The HCPC Standards of Proficiency for practitioner psychologists
BPS Accreditation through partnership handbook
Manual of Academic Regulations and Procedures (MARP)

Concern about trainee behaviour

From time to time staff/service users who come into contact with DClinPsy trainees may have concerns about an individual trainee’s conduct and behaviour. There are already a number of formal DClinPsy, Lancashire & South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust (LSCFT) and Lancaster University policies and procedures which can be applied in the case of serious concerns. The key policies and procedures are available in our programme handbook and are: –

There are also a number of professional standards documents which DClinPsy trainees are expected to adhere to: –

The programme has also developed its own guidelines for professional behaviour.

The Concern Form has been adapted from a similar form developed by the Lancaster University Medical School in order to complement our existing policies and procedures. The aim of the concern form is three-fold: –

  1. To document ‘low level’ concerns in order to guide trainees to the appropriate standards of professional behaviour prior to conduct issues escalating to a more serious level
  2. To document the accumulation of ‘low level’ concerns, where support and guidance has not been sufficient to establish appropriate standards of professional conduct and it has become necessary to issue a formal warning
  3. To standardise documentation with regards to very serious concerns prior to the appropriate route(s) of referral being taken

The process (outlined on the flowchart on the form) is intended to be supportive to students. Our aim is to intervene at an early stage with trainees who are finding it difficult to meet appropriate professional standards, work with the trainees to establish what the obstacles to meeting those standards are and attempt to establish new patterns of conduct.

These forms, once completed, are confidential. The information will only be disclosed to those concerned with the DClinPsy who have a direct need to know. Concern forms for a trainee will be retained on the trainee file and will be kept during their period on the DClinPsy and for six years from the date of graduation / formal withdrawal (this is a university requirement).

The expected standards of appropriate professional behaviour outlined below are from the HCPC guidance on conduct and ethics for students. Any failure to meet one or more of these standards should be registered on a concern form and submitted to the Programme Administrator.

  1. Promote and protect the interests of service users and carers

    • You should treat service users and carers as individuals, respecting their privacy and dignity.
    • You should make sure that you have consent from service users or other appropriate authority before you provide any care, treatment or other services.
    • You should follow your education provider’s or practice placement provider’s policy on consent.
    • You should make sure that before you provide any care, treatment or other services, the service user is aware that you are a student.
    • You should respect a person’s right to have their care, treatment or other services carried out by a professional and not a student.
    • You should treat everyone equally and not discriminate against anyone because of your personal views.
    • You should keep relationships with service users and carers professional.
  2. Communicate appropriately and effectively

    • You should be polite and considerate to service users, other students and staff at your education provider and practice placement provider.
    • You should listen to service users and carers and take account of their needs and wishes when carrying out any care, treatment or other services.
    • You should take all reasonable steps to make sure that you can communicate appropriately and effectively with service users and carers.
    • You should communicate effectively and co-operate with members of staff at your education provider and practice placement provider to benefit service users and carers.
    • If you are experiencing any difficulties or other issues which may affect your learning or ability to successfully participate in your programme, you should tell your education provider and practice placement provider.
    • You should use all forms of communication appropriately and responsibly, including social media and networking websites.
  3. Work within the limits of your knowledge and skills

    • You should make sure that you are appropriately supervised for any task that you are asked to carry out.
    • You should ask for help when you need it.
    • You should be aware of any restrictions which apply to you in carrying out certain tasks and follow any relevant policies of your education provider or practice placement provider.
    • You should recognise that opportunities for carrying out any unsupervised tasks will vary during your programme and may depend on your knowledge, understanding, skills and experience.
    • You should only carry out an unsupervised task if you feel that you have the appropriate knowledge and skills to do so safely and effectively.
    • You should take responsibility for your own learning.
    • You should be aware of and follow any guidance issued by your education provider or practice placement provider for working with service users and carers.
    • You should ask for, listen to, think about and respond proactively to feedback you are given.
  4. Delegate appropriately

    • You should recognise that the opportunities for delegation will vary during your programme depending on your knowledge, understanding, skills and experience.
    • You should discuss the delegation of tasks with an appropriate member of staff at your education provider or practice placement provider before you take any action.
    • You should follow local policies or guidelines on delegation and working with others produced by your education provider or practice placement provider.
    • If you give tasks to another person to carry out on your behalf, you should make sure that they have the knowledge, skills and experience to carry out the tasks safely and effectively. The education provider or practice placement provider should support your decision to delegate.
    • If you give tasks to another person to carry out on your behalf, you should make sure that they have the appropriate information to carry out the tasks safely and effectively.
    • You should explain to service users and carers when you have asked another person to provide any care, treatment or other services.
  5. Respect confidentiality

    • You should keep information about service users and carers confidential, and only use it for the purpose for which it was given.
    • You should follow local policies or guidelines on confidentiality produced by your education provider or practice placement provider.
    • You should remove anything that could be used to identify a service user or carer from information which you use in your assessments or other academic work related to your programme.
    • If any confidential information raises concerns about the safety or wellbeing of someone, you should discuss this promptly with an appropriate member of staff at your education provider or practice placement provider.
  6. Manage risk

    • You should make sure that you take all appropriate steps to limit the risk of harm to service users, carers and others.
    • You should not do anything that you think will put someone in danger or at unacceptable risk.
    • You should follow your education provider’s or practice placement provider’s policy on managing risk.
    • You should be aware that you may put your service users or yourself at risk if your performance or judgement is affected by your physical or mental health.
    • You should ask for appropriate support and adapt your study or stop studying if your performance or judgement is affected by your physical or mental health and could put service users, yourself or others at risk.
    • You should get advice from a doctor or other appropriate professional if you are worried about your physical or mental health.
  7. Report concerns about safety

    • If you are worried about the safety or wellbeing of service users, carers or others, you should speak to an appropriate member of staff at your education provider or practice placement provider promptly.
    • You should put the safety and wellbeing of service users before any personal concerns, for example, about assessments, marks, other work related to your programme, employment prospects or other personal gain.
  8. Be open when things go wrong

    • You should tell an appropriate member of staff at your education provider or practice placement provider if something has gone wrong in any care, treatment or other services you have carried out involving a service user.
    • You should co-operate with members of staff at your education provider and practice placement provider if something has gone wrong in any care, treatment or other services you have carried out involving a service user. You should learn from this experience.
    • You should tell an appropriate member of staff at your education provider or practice placement provider if a service user or carer wants to raise concerns about any care, treatment or other services they have received.
  9. Be honest and trustworthy

    • You should make sure that your conduct and behaviour does not damage public trust and confidence in your profession.
    • You should be aware that your conduct and behaviour outside of your programme may affect whether or not you are allowed to complete your programme or register with us.
    • You should not claim that you have knowledge, skills, qualifications and experience which you do not.
    • You should be honest about your role with service users, carers and others.
    • You should make sure that your personal appearance is appropriate for your practice placement environment.
    • You should follow your education provider’s or practice placement provider’s policy on attendance.
    • You should follow your education provider’s policies on ethics when carrying out research.
    • You should make sure that all attendance, achievement and assessment records are completed accurately and truthfully.
    • You should reference other people’s work appropriately and not pass it off as your own.
    • You should provide constructive feedback on the quality of your teaching and learning experience in both the education and practice placement setting.
    • You should provide, as soon as possible, any important information about your conduct, competence or health to your education provider and practice placement provider.
    • You should tell your education provider, as soon as possible, if you are charged with, convicted of, or accept a caution for, any offence.
    • You should co-operate with any investigation into your conduct or competence.
  10. Keep records of your work with service users and carers

    • You should make sure that the records you keep are clear and accurate.
    • You should help to protect records from being damaged, lost or accessed by someone without permission.
    • You should follow your education provider’s or practice placement provider’s policy on record keeping.

Absence from work policy and annual leave procedure

Absence reporting email address: lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk
(this inbox is managed by a small duty team of clinical tutors who check the inbox at the start and end of the working day)
Annual leave email address: annualleave-nhs@lancaster.ac.uk

Reasons for absence

Absence is recorded in the following four categories:

  • Annual leave
  • Sickness absence
  • Family leave – such as carer/compassionate leave and parental leave
  • Special leave – such as time off for public and civil duties

Attendance at teaching

Trainees are full-time employees and are expected to act as adult learners. As such they are expected to attend almost all teaching, and must never be absent from teaching without taking leave. As the DClinPsy programme includes teaching that spans most of the year, trainees will occasionally need to book annual leave on a teaching day as part of a longer period of leave. There is a cap on the maximum amount of annual leave on teaching days that trainees are permitted to take. The maximum number of days bookable are as follows:

Annual leave on teaching days allowance table:

Time period – full time trainees Maximum amount of annual

leave that can be taken from teaching

Details Notes
1st Sept – 31st March

(year 1 trainees)

FT 4 days 1 day per week after induction No teaching in Wellbeing week or Christmas break
1st April – 31st March

(year 1-2)

FT 6 days 1 day per week
1st April – 31st March

(year 2-3)

FT 6 days 1 day per week
1st April – 31st August (FT

final year trainees)

FT 2 days Teaching one day per week April and May, once per fortnight until July Little teaching scheduled in Aug in final year
TOTAL THAT CAN BE MISSED 18 days    

 

Time period – part time trainees Maximum amount of annual

leave that can be taken from teaching

Details Notes
1st Sept – 31st March

(year 1)

PT 4 days 1 day per week after induction No teaching in Wellbeing week or Christmas break
1st April – 31st March

(year 1-2)

PT 6 days Same teaching load as FT trainees (1 day / week)
1st April – 31st March

(year 2-3)

PT 6 days Same teaching load as FT trainees (1 day / week)
1st April – 31st March

(year 3-4)

PT 2days Teaching one day per week April and May, once per fortnight until July.

Sept – March only in for occasional teaching

1st April – 31st December

(PT final year trainees)

PT 1 day Only in for occasional teaching
TOTAL THAT CAN BE MISSED                               19 days

Special leave, i.e. emergency/domestic leave; carer leave, and compassionate leave, is not included in this allowance due to the often-urgent nature of these requests. To request a teaching day as annual leave, trainees need to follow Annual Leave procedure.  It is not expected that trainees will book a teaching day as annual leave in isolation (i.e. the only day of annual leave in a week). In exceptional circumstances this may be necessary and must be requested from and approved by the Clinical Director. For the purposes of the above, teaching days are considered those sessions in the timetable that are linked to one or more teaching strands. Community engagement project, NHS induction, project block, and selections training days are not counted as teaching days.

In exceptional circumstances, trainees may sometimes be permitted to miss teaching to attend a research ethics committee or a CPD conference. No more than two teaching days can be missed each year for such reasons. In these circumstances, approval to miss teaching will be given by the Clinical Director. Trainees are not permitted to miss teaching for routine placement or research activity.

To avoid poor attendance at teaching sessions the number of trainees permitted to take Annual Leave is restricted. Cohort 2019 and earlier – 5 trainees, Cohort 2020 – 6 trainees and cohort 2021 onwards – 8 trainees per session. Trainees will be allowed to book leave on a ‘first come, first served’ basis. It is therefore important for trainees to apply for leave they wish to take on teaching days as early as possible. In certain circumstances, such as when there is a CPD event scheduled for a teaching day and more than that cohort’s allowance of trainees are interested in attending, teaching may be rescheduled to allow attendance at the event.

It is the trainee’s responsibility to check the teaching timetable when it is published to identify any days which may be problematic with regards to caring responsibilities.

If any teaching days are identified as likely to be problematic to attend, trainees are asked to raise and discuss with their clinical tutors as soon as possible and in advance of the day(s) as to how to best manage them. Options available are as follows:

  • Taking annual leave – Full and Part time trainees can book Annual Leave in half days. Full time trainees are recorded in days, and Part time people are given their allowance in hours. However individual hours are not accepted in a request. Half days (3.75 hrs) are the minimum request possible.
  • Making a request to leave teaching early for a proportionate and reasonable amount of time (for example leaving teaching in time to meet the usual nursery pick up if on a 7.5 hour placement day). This needs to be explicitly agreed in advance with the clinical tutor

It is important that any request is made in advance and explicitly agreed before the teaching day (this is not applicable to typical teaching days). The trainee is responsible for organising any agreements. If a trainee is absent without an agreement being in place then the trainee could be considered to be in breach of their contract as technically they are working for less hours than they are being paid for.

Please note that if unable to attend teaching because of transport issues, the trainee must take the day as annual leave. It is not permissible to leave early or arrive late to teaching for reasons of transport convenience.

It is also important to note that even on teaching days trainees’ salaried work activity begins at 9.00am. Teaching times are flexible therefore trainees are expected to arrive and be ready for start times from 9am onwards. If meetings are requested by tutors between 9-10am on a teaching day, it is expected that trainees will attend. Persistent lateness on teaching days will lead to a concern form being submitted. Where teaching is being provided remotely, i.e. via Microsoft Teams or equivalent, the teaching day will normally start at 9.30am to allow for sufficient breaks throughout the day.

A few teaching sessions are mandatory, and annual leave may not be taken on days when these sessions are scheduled. These are:

  • Teaching sessions which enable trainees to meet the mandatory training requirements of their NHS employer, and
  • Sessions which include required elements that trainees must participate in in order to complete the programme

Such sessions are clearly marked on the teaching timetables. If a trainee misses mandatory teaching due to illness, they will be required upon returning to work to provide a doctor’s note covering the date the session took place, regardless of the length of the sickness absence. They will then be required to take part in the activity missed at a later date.

If a trainee needs to leave teaching (or placement) early because of an urgent need (e.g. child becomes ill) then trainees can request carers leave at short notice. This needs to be made via the absence inbox.

Mandatory attendance at anti-racism and inclusive practice teaching

In line with the programme’s ethos and values, we believe that as individuals and a community of professionals we have a responsibility to be open to learning and development; this is particularly pertinent to issues of racism, discrimination and inclusion. We are all at different stages of our learning and development in relation to these important areas, however it is essential we all engage in opportunities to learn from others and challenge ourselves. To this end, attendance at all teaching on anti-racism and inclusive practice on the Lancaster DClinPsy is mandatory. These sessions will be highlighted as such on teaching timetables. If you think there is a reason why you cannot attend any of these sessions, it will need to be discussed with your clinical tutor. For trainees who experience racism we understand that there may be very valid reasons as to why you do not want to attend teaching on racism or other topics of discrimination. We would encourage you to discuss with your clinical tutor or a staff member of the ARAG, if that feels more appropriate, although there is no expectation to do so. If you are a trainee who experiences racism and do not feel able to attend a session on this topic, your clinical tutor will be able to authorise a study day.  You do not need to book annual leave for this reason.

Study days

For full time trainees, one day each week is designated as study leave. For part time trainees on 0.7wte, half a day is designated each week to study. Study days are still working days, and as such trainees should be contactable and may be asked to meet with programme staff if necessary. To request a study day as annual leave, trainees need follow standard Annual Leave Procedure. Please note that study days cannot be taken in lieu.

Taking annual leave

How to apply for Annual Leave

    1. Subject of email must include AL [Cohort] [Name of requestor] e.g. AL 2021 Jones
    2. The trainee must stipulate what type of day it is on each date,  Placement (PD), Study (SD) or teaching (TD).  This is an example how a week of AL request should look: –
      3/9/21 – SD
      4/9/21 – PD
      5/9/21 – PD
      6/9/21 – TD
      7/9/21 – PD
    3. The Trainee emails their supervisor and research tutors to ask for agreement on AL dates
    4. Replies to be actioned within 1 week of initial email. If no response is received, the trainee can chase for a reply.
    5. The Trainee receives agreement from supervisor and Research tutor, forwards email trail to Clinical tutor for their authorisation.
    6. Clinical tutor replies within a week with authorisation or raises concerns. . If no response comes from tutor, the trainee can chase for a reply. If Trainee receives and out of office before AL date request then forwards request to the Clinical Director.
    7. Trainee receives authorisation from Clinical tutor and forwards email trail, with tutor approved emails, to AL inbox.
    8. Administration checks details, raises any concerns at the point, and proceeds to record dates.
    9. Trainee receives a confirmation email from AL that the request has been successful. This would be usually within 1 week however in peak times/holiday cover it may be longer.

Reclaiming leave lost due to sickness absence

Please follow the absence reporting processes set out in the relevant section below. You will also need to provide a GP fit note for the time period you wish to reclaim the annual leave for – self certification cannot be accepted for this purpose.

Carry over leave

The employing Trust normally expects that the full annual leave entitlement is taken within each year (financial year, April – March) and that no days are carried over. Only in exceptional circumstances and with the approval of the Associate Director for Psychological Professions can annual leave be carried over into the next year. Requests to carry over leave are made by in the month of  February through Annual Leave email. Trainees will be asked to submit the Carry over form, stating the number of days/hours they wish to carry over. The exceptional reasons for this request will be included on this form. A maximum of 5 days basic contracted hours may be carried over to the following year for Full timers,  with Part time trainees being able to request their pro rota equivalent.  Any leave that is to be carried over, must be requested by the employee, in the annual leave year in which it has accrued, and must be taken before the end of June in the new leave year. As trainees start employment on September 1st, they have 7 / 12 worth of leave to take by the end of March. There are, within the annual plan, some weeks with no teaching within each year (e.g. in December/Jan and around Easter and August) and the course anticipates that such weeks will help trainees take leave without compromising their studies.

Email leave requests to: annualleave-nhs@lancaster.ac.uk

Please be aware of the following when submitting your leave requests to this inbox:

  • Leave cannot be taken unless it is approved by the programme regardless of whether it has been approved by your supervisor/tutor
  • Requests will not be processed if the subject header does not contain correct details that include your Cohort and name.

Making a late request i.e. within 3 weeks of AL dates.

  1. Trainee sends an email to the absence inbox lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk to gain approval. The following information MUST be provided in order to process the request:
    • Date(s) being requested
    • Scheduled activities on date(s) requested i.e. teaching (please state if mandatory), placement, study
    • Reason for short notice leave request
    • Cohort year
    • Cc in Clinical Tutor, Research Tutor & Placement Supervisor
  2. The absence duty team will process your request and let you know whether your short notice leave request has been approved. Please be aware that approval is subject to any issues raised by the tutor pair and/or placement supervisor. If any issues are raised the approval will be revisited and could in some circumstances be withdrawn.

Please be aware that the absence inbox is processed at the start of the working day and towards the end of the working day only. To ensure a speedy response, please send any short notice leave requests by 9.30am where possible.

Length of Service

It is the trainees responsibility to update the programme, though the AL email, when they gave reached 5 /10 yrs of service. The increase in AL allowance will commence the following AL year in April.

Bank Holidays

Full time and part time trainees have every Bank Holiday off and these are booked off automatically at the start of every AL year. Part time trainees are given their BH holiday in conjunction with their contracted hours, eg 0.7 contract is given 0.7 of the 7.5 hours of a BH allowance per BH If a BH is a non working day for the trainee then they will not have AL used to cover the day off. If it is a working day then 7.5hrs will be used to give the trainee the full BH off. Trainees can not change their working pattern for a single week to use the BH as a day off.  It is the trainees responsibility to inform AL of their working pattern at the start of each AL to allow for their AL allowance to be calculated. Any changes to their working pattern must be given to AL via email as they could affect their overall AL allowance.

Medical/Non-Medical Absences

As employees of Lancashire and South Cumbria NHS Foundation Trust (LSCFT), all trainees are required to provide information about any time away from work activities during the working day (this includes teaching and study days). If you find yourself needing to be away from active engagement with the scheduled work activity for longer than 30 minutes then please contact lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk to let us know. Your contact will be processed either at the start or the end of the working day when the duty person checks the inbox. Reasons can include a medical appointment/ self care/feeling poorly towards the end of a day/ needing to attend to an urgent domestic issue etc. Please provide a reason for your time away from work – however if you feel unable to share the reason with the duty absence team– state this in your email and your clinical tutor will be asked to follow this up with you.

Time away from work which exceeds two hours will be recorded as a sickness absence episode or special leave depending on the circumstance.

Pre-planned medical appointments – please contact lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk as soon as you know the date and time so this can be logged. If this changes – please remember to let us know so we can log your new appointment time. If relevant you can ask for the appointment to be recorded as ‘disability related absence’ if part of a recognised condition.

Special leave

Special leave requests need to be made via lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk. Please state the kind of special leave you are seeking and a reason. If you do not feel able to share your reason – please state this in your email and your clinical tutor will be asked to follow this up with you or the Clinical Director or their Deputy will be asked to follow up if your clinical tutor is on a non-working day. Please be aware that this may lead to a delay in being able to process your request. The absence duty team have delegated responsibility to process special leave requests not exceeding five days in a 12month rolling time period. Any requests which exceed this have to be approved by the Clinical Director or their Deputy which the duty team will seek on the trainees behalf.

Special leave is designed to be a compassionate, supportive and immediate response to an unexpected situation arising in an employees life. It can include the following (for the full list see the LSCFT staff leave policy at the bottom of this page)

  • Carers leave – where there are unexpected breaks in care for someone you have caring responsibilities for to enable you to make arrangements for ongoing care as needed.
  • Emergency leave – where an incident in your domestic life needs your urgent attention (burst pipe/break in/car breakdown/accident)
  • Compassionate leave – where there is an unexpected event with a loved one; funeral of a family member/close friend

Leave to attend interviews

Trainees may attend interviews for NHS posts in work time (including teaching, placement and study) but must inform lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk special leave. For non-NHS posts trainees must take annual leave to attend (this includes on study days).

Absence reporting procedures – Trust requirements

Any absences or time away from work over 30 minutes need to be reported to lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk so it can be logged appropriately. Exceptions to this are approved annual leave days and any other approved leave arrangements (e.g paternity or maternity leave).

Absences or time away from work up to two hours are logged with the reason given by the trainee (e.g. medical appointment/self care reasons/ sickness episode towards end of the day). Absences or time away from work longer than two hours require formal logging as either a full sickness absence episode or special leave depending on the circumstance.

Disability Related Absence (for a pre-planned appointment related to a recognised condition) or Disability Related Sickness Absence  (for a sickness episode or need to have time away from work due to a recognised condition) can be given as the reason and will be logged as such.

Procedure

Please contact lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk by 9.30am to report an absence.   If you become unwell during the day – please remember to contact lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk. Your email will be processed at the end of the day when the duty person makes their final check on the absence inbox.

When contacting the absence inbox to report an absence please provide the following information:

  • Reason for absence – please include details of symptoms e.g. sickness bug, cold, flu, covid positive, stress, MH related etc. If you do not want to disclose the details of your absence to the duty team due to the sensitive nature of it – please let the duty team know this and who is aware of the details i.e. clinical tutor/clinical director.
  • Confirmation that you have contacted your placement supervisor and cancelled any appointments you have with university based staff, or other appointments you have with other people.
  • A contact telephone number for you in case we need to follow up/check anything with you
  • Your cohort year e.g. 2021

Closing a sickness absence episode

When you are feeling well enough to return to work please contact lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk to say you are back in work. Please do this by 9.30am on the morning of your return. Failure to do this means we cannot close your absence episode and may result in a reduction in pay if the absence is left open.

Please complete a self-certification form (at the bottom of this page) for the first seven calendar days of an absence period and attach to your return to work email.

If you are off for longer than seven days you will also need to submit a GP fit note to cover the time period you are off. Please note you need to do this prospectively not retrospectively (i.e. at the start of the extended absence period and not at the end). If you are having problems getting a fit note from your GP please keep the absence inbox informed of when you expect to receive the fit note. Once received send to lscft-absence-recording@lancaster.ac.uk so it can be logged.

When you have returned to work your clinical tutor will be asked to complete a ‘back to work interview’ with you (if your tutor is not available then the Clinical Director or their nominated deputy will undertake the return to work interview with you). This is an opportunity to check in and see how you are doing following your return. It is also an opportunity to consider any adjustments to your work schedule as you return to ease you back into work if needed and/or whether it might be helpful to explore additional supports such as a referral to Occupational Health or to make you aware of any relevant support services offered by the trust.

Reclaiming annual leave lost to sickness absence

Please follow the absence reporting processes set out above. You will need to provide a GP fit note for the time period you wish to reclaim the annual leave for – self-certification cannot be accepted for this purpose. Neither can a retrospective application. Absence must reported in a timely manner as per the process set out above.

COVID-19

There is no longer a stipulation that you have to test if you have symptoms of covid. However if you do have symptoms of covid you are asked to stay away from work for at least five days. Day one is classed as the first day you experienced symptoms and/or had a positive covid test. If at day 5 you are symptom free (even if you are still returning a positive covid test) you can return to face to face work the following day on day 6.

If you would like more information on this – please see the LSCFT SOP below.

Attendance management

LSCFT operate an active attendance management approach to support colleagues when they are experiencing a series of episodes of absence. More details can be found in the LSCFT policy at the bottom of this page. The duty team will alert your clinical tutor if the number or length of your absences in a 12 month rolling period means the attendance management support processes need to be put into place or equally when you can be stepped down from them.

Other relevant documents

LSCFT staff leave policy
LSCFT flexible working policy and procedure
LSCFT managing attendance policy
Self certification form
Agenda for Change Terms and Conditions of Service Handbook
LSCFT Standard Operating Procedure for COVID-19

© 2024 DClinPsy Handbook

Theme by Anders NorenUp ↑

By continuing to use the site, you agree to the use of cookies. more information

The cookie settings on this website are set to "allow cookies" to give you the best browsing experience possible. If you continue to use this website without changing your cookie settings or you click "Accept" below then you are consenting to this.

Close